IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) V m ^ V v^% :A A u.. 1.0 I.I 1.25 Ilia iM IIU IIIII22 4i£ 1 2.0 1.8 iA II 1.6 -% (^ VI /] ^ N> ;i? U%''^'^ % "^ 4^ A. & CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHM/ICMH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques el bibliographiques The Institute has attempted to obtain the best original copy available for filming. Features of this copy which may be bibliographically unique, which may alter any of the images in the reproduction, or which may significantly change the usual method of filming, are checked below. L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire qu'il lui a 6t6 possible de se procurer. Les details de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une modification dans la m^thode normale de filmage sont indiqu^s ci dessous. n Coloured covers/ Couverture de couleur □ Coloured pages/ Pages de couleur n n Covers damaged/ Couverture endommagee Covers restored and/or laminated/ Couverture restaur^e et/ou pellicul6e Cover title missing/ Le titre de couverture manque Coloured maps/ Cartes geographiques en couleur Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) D D D 7 Pages damaged/ Pages endommag^es Pages restored and/or laminated/ Pages restaur^es et/ou pelliculees Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ Pages d^color^es, tachet^es ou piqu^es Pages detached/ Pages detachees Showthrough/ Transparence D D Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ Planches et/ou illus; ations en couleur Bound with other material/ Relie avec d'autres documents D Quality of print varies/ Qualite inegale de I'impression Includes supplementary material/ Comprend du materiel supplementaire "1 Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion J along interior margin/ La reliure serree peut causer de I'ombre ou de la distortion le long de la marge int^rieure n Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajout^es lors dune restauration apparaissent dans le texte, mais, lorsque cela etait possible, ces pages n'ont pas ete filmees. D D Only edition available/ Seule Edition disponible Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to ensure the best possible image/ Les pages totalement ou partiellement obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, etc., ont 6t6 film6es d nouveau de facon d obtenir la meilleure image possible. n Additional comments:/ Commentaires supplementaires: This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ Ce document est film6 au taux de reduction indiqu6 ci-dessous. 10X 14X 18X 22X 26X 30X >i 12X 16X 20X 24X 28X 32X The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks to the generosity of: National Library of Canada L'exemplaire film6 fut reproduit grdce d la g6n6rositd de: Bibliothdque nationale du Canada The images appearing here are the best quality possible considering the condition and legibility of the original copy and in keeping with the filming contract specifications. Les images suivantes ont 6t6 reproduites avec le plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et de la nettetd de l'exemplaire film6, et en conformity avec les conditions du contrat de filmage. Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed beginning with the front cover and ending on the iast page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All other original copies are filmed beginning on the first page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impression. Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en papier est imprimde sont filmds en commenpant par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la dernidre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par le second plat, selon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires originaux sont film6s en commenpant par la premiere page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par la dernidre page qui comporte une telle empreinte. The last recorded frame on each microfiche shall contain the symbol ^»- (meaning "CON- TINUED "), or the symbol V (meaning 'END"), whichever applies. Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at different reduction ratios. Those too large to be entirely included in one exposure are filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right and top to bottom, as many frames as required. The Tollowing diagrams illustrate the method: Un des symboles suivants appara?tra sur la dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon le cas: le symbole ^^ signifie "A SUIVRE", le symbole V signifie "FIN". Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre film6s d des taux de reduction diff^rents. Lor&que le document est trop grand pour dtre reproduit en un seul cliche, il est filmd i partir de Tangle sup6rieur gauche, de gauche d droite, et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre d'images n^cessaire. Les diagrammes suivants illustrent la mdthode. 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 PU LATIN PROSI: (^OMPOSITION, WITH EXERCISES ON CAESAJi, LIVY, AND CICERO BY J. FLETCHER, m.a. I'ro/essororLnti,,, Quern's University, AND J. HENDERSON, m.a. Principal of St. Catharines Collegiate Institute. T(3RONTO: PUBLISHED BV T..E COPP, CLARK COMPANY, L,M„K„, 1894. f-, Knt.,v.I .......nlin^ to A..t of tl.e I-arlian...,,,, of Cana.l., i„ „.e y.ar o... thou.a„rt cM.^ht iM.n.ln.l a.Ml ,m,H.v-four, l.y THK COIT, CLAKK CC, L,m,tk„, Toronto Ontario, in tlie Odico of the Minislcr of A-ricullure. I'RIirACF.. This book contains two parts. Part I. consists of a concise and simple statement of tlie main })rinciples of Latin syntax, with illus- trations and ixerciscs. Tlic rules of Syntax arc not intended to be learned by heart ; tlu y arc to be studied careful])- in connection with the illu^traiions, many of wlii. h shoidd be connnitted to memory. The exercises ha\ c been made Ioniser than is custtMiiary, in order to afford a wider sco[)c for selection. A knnwledj^e, on the part of the pupil, of the Latin decleniiions and conjugations is presui)posed. The authorities followeil in the treatment of Latin .Syntax arc mainly AL'idvig, Roby, Kennedy, liradley, and Hime. A few sections have been added on Latin Style, for which we are mainly indelv.cd to the works of Lradley, I'otts, I'ostgate, Xixon, Klotz, and Niigelsbach. Part IL consists of exercises in continuous English based on Caesar ( e Pell. Gall, P. l.-vi.), on Livy (P. xxi. and XXII.), and on some of the common orations of Cicero. These exercises are intended to be written, l>ut it is recommended that they 1)0 translated orally as well. In no case should an exercise be attemjited until after a thorough study of the Latin on which th.e ex(Mcise is basecL The exercises do not, of course, exhaust the material of the Latin text, and teachers will tlnd it necessary to give their classes additional exercises of a character similar to those given here, and adapted to the grade of the pupil. Passages taken from English authors and involving a knowiedge of vocabulary similar to that of the exercises, may also be given with advantage to advanced pupils. June joili^ iSg^, J. F. J. H. TABLE OF CONTENTS. TART I. — f -ATTN SYNTAX. SECTION. ' 1 A<.K. — I. — Concord and Apposition I 2. — Accusative with Iiillnitivc 4 .3. — Accusative witli Infinitive ( Coniiinui/ ) 5 4. — Proiu)uii of Tliiid I'erson with Infinitive— Verbs of Ho|)injj an - 5. — The Rdative S 6. — The Relative (Cotitinitcd) 10 ^7. — Final Clauses — Ut witli Subjunctive 12 8.— Consecutive Clauses 14 ^> 9. — Ut-Clauses with Verbs of Asking 16 10. — Verbs of Fearing. Modal Verbs 17 II. — Classification of Tenses. Law of Sequence. ... 19 —Verbs of Doubting and Hindering. Quomlnus. Quin... 22 13. — Subjunctive in Simple Sentences. Utinam 24 14. — Imperative 26 15. — Interrogative Sentences. Use of ne, nonne, num 28 -16. — Indirect Question 30 17. — Use of Indirect Question for an English Noun 32 l8. — May, Can, Alust, Ought — how translated , . 33 19. — Notes on the Tenses. Fore ut for Inf. Fut 34 20. — Idiomatic Uses of Latin Verbs 38 21. — Supine, Gerund, Gerundive 41 -22. — The Gerund and Gerundive (Continued). 45 23. — The Participle 47 24.— The Participle ( Continued ). Ablative Absolute 51 VI n TABLE OP CONTENTS. SHCTION. PACK. 25. — Tlic Participle (Coutimwii). Active Periphrastic Conjuj^alion 53 26. — The lulinilivc. Tenses of Infinitive 55 27. — The Genitive. Possessive (lenitive, Partitive (icnitive 59 28. — Genitive of (,)u:ility, Subjective and Objective Genitive, Gen. of Price, (ien. of Definition, (ion. with Adjectives 62 29. — The Genitive with Verbs. Interest and Refert 65 30. — The I )ative 68 31. — Dative with Verbs 70 32. — The Al)Iative. Cause, Manner, Instrument 73 33. — Ablative of Comparison and Al)lative of Difference. Ablative of Respect and of I'rice 76 34. — Ablative with Verbs and Adjectives of Plenty and Want ...... 80 35. — Relation of Place. Locative. 7'o, frofn, in, with names of places 82 36. — Relation of Time. Time When. Time How Long 85 37. — Personal and Di-monstrative Pronouns 87 38. — Reflexive Pronouns. Use of se 91 39. — On the translation of "Any." Quia, quisquam, quivis 94 40. — Classification of Sentences. iN'oun, Adjectival, and Adverbial Clauses 98 41. — Adverbial Clauses. Local and Temporal Clauses. Postquam, Dum, Priusquam 102 42. — Temporal Clauses ('C^;/////«6y// Syntax of Quum. Substitutes for a Perf Part. Act 106 43. — Final and Consecutive Clauses. Qui final. Qui consecutive . . 109 ^-^^. — Causal and Concessive Clauses 1 13 45. — Comparative Clauses. Idiomatic uses of ut (as) 116 ^6. — Conditional Sentences 1 19 ^ — Classification of Conditionnl Sentences, Exceptions to the Rules 122 48. — Indirect (or Oblique) Narration 127 49.— Summary of Rules for Turning Direct into Oblique Narration . 131 50. — Conditional Sentences in Oblique Narration 134 $1. — Virtual Oblique Narration. Assimilation 137 TAltLK OK CONTENTS. rtRCTION. lAUK. 52. — On Some Special Iilif)iii-; ,»r l.min Syntax. ** Without " i\ui\ ;i Participial Noun 1 39 53. —Notes on the Numerals 143 54. — The Roman Calendar. : 147 55. — Roman Currency 150 56. — Weights and Me.isurcs. Interest 1 53 57. — Latin Idicjm in tli'* use of words. Abstract Noun 156 58. — Other Sul)slilute-< in I-atiiv for the Abstract Noun 160 59. — Abstract Adjectives ami Adverbs 164 60. — DilTerence of Idiom ( Confinin\i) 16S 61. — Eiiuivocal Words, .Metaphor, etc 172 62. — Order and Mmphasis 176 63. — Connection, Rhythm, etc 181 64.— The Laiin Period 186 Appendix 193 Preposition 193 Rules for Gender 198 Verbs followed by ut 201 On Certain Conjunctions, etc 203 Vocabulary , 205 Index to Part I 245 Exercises on Caesar. Exercises on Livy . . . Exerciiies on Ciceru. . PART II. 255 309 334 If PART I. LATIN SYNTAX. II i. LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. § 1. CONCORD AND APPOSITION. 1. If a sentence has two or more subjects, the verb must be plural ; and if the subjects differ in person, the verb will agree with the first person rathtr than with the second and with the second rather than with the third : as, Ego et Boror mea ambulabamus. My sister and I were ivnlkin'^. Et tu et frater tuus ridetis. Bof/i you and your brother are laughing. Here in the first example ambulabamus is plural because there are two subjects, and it is in the first person, because it agrees with ego rather than with soror. Note that in Latin the first person comes before the second. Note also that the personal pronouns ego (/), tu (yoUy sing.), nos (wi')> vos {yoti, pi.) are expressed when emphatic. 2. If a sentence hns two or more subjects all of the third per- son, the verb as a rule agrees with the nearest : as, Cibo potioneque fames et sitis depellitur. Hunger and thirst are removed by food and dr/nk. Mihi principatus et imperium delatum est. Sovereignty and power have been conferred on me. Rex et regia classis profecta est. The king and the royal fleet set out. Neque mores neque fortuna spectari solet. Neither chanicier nor wealtJi is wont to be considered. 2 LATIN PUOSE COMPOSITION. Other forms, however, are coinmon. Thus ; Uxor mea et films mortui sunt. My liufe ami son are dead (verb pkiral, and participle agreeing with niascuHne rather than witii feminine). Nox et praeda hostes remorata sunt. yVVj,'/// and plunder delayed tJie enemy (participle neuter, though both subjects are feminine. This is often the case when the subjects are names of things.) 3. A collective noun may have a plural verb, the verb agreeing with the idea of number expressed by the noun : as, Magna para interfecti sunt. A great part were killed. The singular would, however, bo more usual. Such a construction is called a sei.se construction. 4. The words " men " and "things '' need not be expressed when joined with an adjective, if the meaning is sufficiently shown by the ending of the adjective : as, * Boni, good ine?i ; mala, bad things, evils. But, if ambiguity arises, the noun is expressed : as, Futura (ncut. pi.), t/ie future ; but rerum futurarum, of the future (futurorum might mean of posterity, i.e. men about to be). APPOSITION. 5. An appositive noun agrees in case and, where possible, in gender with the noun to which it refers : as, Ille leg-is inventor fuit. He was the inventor of the law. Athenas, omnis doctrinae inventricem, omitto. / omit Athens the inventor of all learning. 6. The words when, as, for, used before an appositive in English, are omitted in Latin : as, Hoc consul feci. This I did wheji consul. :i 11 CONCORb ANt) APt'OStttOJJ. S I 7. The Latin for The city of Rome is Urbs Roma, and for the island of Cypriia^ insula Cypr^is— Latin using nouns like t/'/y, loiun,, etc., appositively. Note. — The verb usually agrees with tirbs or oppidum used thus appositively : as, Volsinii, Tuscorum oppidum, crematum est. \ 'olsinii, a town of the Tuscans^ was biirneiL 8. Latin avoids the addition of adjectives to proper nouns or names of persons. It prefers to add the adjective to the generic word vir, homo, etc., used appositively : as, Frater tuus, vir fortissimus. Your gallant brother. Athenae, urbs amoenissima. TJie lovely Athens^ or the lovely city of Athens, Note.— This idiom will translate the unemphatic English so added to an adjective : as, Nemo hunc regem, virum stu^ltlssimum, observat. No one respects so foolish a kin^. Exercise I. N.B. — Put the verb at the end of the sentence. f. You and he are well and we are well. 2. Both riches and poverty influence the mind. 3. And a large multitude of men cast the corn into the river. 4. Power and honors were decreed you by the people. 5. Both his father and mother were dead. 6. The city of Athens had been besieged for many days (ace.) 7. He was going to the island of Sicily. 8. Philosophy is the knowledge of things human and divine. 9. Even so wise a man as the magistrate does not know everything. 10. He did the same things when a boy. II. You and all my friends will be killed to-day. 12. The lovely city of Thebes has been stormed. 13. Both you and I will see the games. LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. §2. ACCUSATIVE WITH INFINITIVE. In English we say either / knozu him to be wise or / knew that he is wise ; but Latin has only the former of the two construc- tions. Thus : Scio eum sapere. / know that he is wise. This is one of the commonest of Latin constructions and is called the accusative with infinitive. Rule. — The rule is as follows : Verbs meaning to know^ think, say (or the like), and expressions like /"/ is certain, it is clear, it is true are followed — not as in English by a noun clause introduced by that (ut) — but by the accusative with infinitive. The following examples should be learned by heart : — Dicit Caesarem advenire. I/e says that Caesar is approaching. Puto te errare. / think that you are sarong. Rem ita esse video. / see that the thing is so. Sentimus ignem calere. We perceive that fire is hot. Respondet hostes adesse. He answers that the enemy is near. Negat se id fecisse. He denies that he has done it (i.e., he says that he has not done it ; nego = / say not.) Certum est te amari. // is certain that you are loved. Incredibile est sues volare. // is incredible that pigs should fly. Note I. — The accusative before the infinitive is called the subject of the infinitive. Note 2. — The verb of saying, thinking, etc., is usually put at the beginning instead of at the end of a sentence. Note 3. — A statement depending on a verb of saying^ thinking or the like, is said to be in indirect narration or oratio obliqua. Thus in Dicit Caesarem advenire, Caesarem advenire is in indirect narration as opposed to Caesar advenit, Caesar is approaching., which is said to be in direct narration or oratio r^cta. I <>ft I ACCUSATIVE WITH INFINITIVE. O Exercise II. I. I think that he will attack this city. 2. They say that he has gone away. 3. I believe that we shall defeat them. 4. Many think that books are useless. 5. He says that each man loves his own. 6. He says that we shall see the king. 7. He believes that the gods exist. 8. They will answer that you have offended against the laws. 9. We see that snow is white. 10. I think that he calls Rome the nurse of heroes. 1 1. They say that life is short. 12. It is clear that they are all away. 13. He says that he loves the beautiful citv of Athens. §3. ACCUSATIVE WITH II^FmiTIVE-( Couiiutud), 1. The verb of a /^?/-clause depending on a verb of saying or thinking is changed in English after a past tense. Thus : He says ihat Caesar is approacJiifig becomes He said that Caesar was approaciiing. I think that you are wrong becomes / thought that you were ivrona;. There is no such change in the tense of the infinitive in Latin. Thus : Dixit Caes&rem advenire. He said that Caesar was approaching (direct narration = Caesar adv6nit, Caesar is approaching). Putavi te errare. / thought that you were wrong (direct nar- ration =tu erras, you are wrong). 2. In turning English into Latin, the simple and effective rule for determining the tense of the infinitive in such cases as the above is this : Find first the direct narration (see v^ 2, note 3) ; the tense of the verb in direct narration is the required tense of the infinitive. Thus : He said that they were writing. Dixit eos scribere (direct = ii scribunt, they are writing.) Ml • 6 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. Fic said that the messenger had come. Dixit nuntium advenlsse (direct = nuntius advenit. the messenger has come). He said that the man would die. Dixit hominem moriturum esse (direct = homo morietur. the man will die). Note.— The perfect inf. does duty in indirect narration for the imperfect and pluperfect of direct : as, lyiey said that he used to sleep every day. Dixerunt eum quotidie dormiisse (direct ^dormiebat, he used to sleep). He said that they had Jled before he arrived. Dixit eos fugrisae priusquam advenisset (direct = fug6rant, they had Jled). Exercise III. • I. He knew that the wicked were not happy. 2. He told us that the end of life was near for all. 3. He thought that the many were always wrong. 4. He said that a poet was born and not made. 5. It was clear that they would take up arms against their country, 6. They told him that he could not write Latin. 7. They answered that the place pleased them very much, ^. He thought that the multitude of the stars was great. 9. All expected that he would attack the city. 10. He said that he was a Roman citizen. II. He knew that my brother was brave. 12. He answered that children were always loved by their parents. §4. PRONOUN OF THIRD PERSON WITH INFINITIVE. Verbs of Hoping and Promising. 1, Balbus dicit se id facturum esse and Balbus dicit eum id facturum esse, both mean Balbus says that he will do it. What is the difference between them } A very important one. Balbus dicit se id faetxirum esse means B. says that he (B.) will do it j Balbus dicit eum id facturum esse means B. says that he ^some Qne else than B.) will do it. TKONOUN WITH INFINITIVE. 7 Rule. — The rule, therefore, is this : //<', she, thc)\ referring to the subject of the main verb are translated by se; not referrin^^ to the subject of the main verb, by is, or, if emphatic, ille. Note.— Similarly his, her, its, their, referring to the subject of the main verb are expressed by suus ; not referring to the subject of the main verb, by the genitive of is : as, Balbus domum suam vendit. Halbus sells his house ( ^ his own house). Balbus domum eius vendit. Balbus sells his house ( = the house of some one else). 2. In the use of the ace. with inf., care should be taken to avoid ambiguity that is apt to arise from joining a jiersonal subject and object together. Thus : Aio te Romanes vincere posse may mean / say that you ean co/ii/uer the Romans j or, I say that the Romans can conquer you. To avoid ambiguity say : Aio Romanes a te vinci posse, for I say that you can conquer the Romans (i.e., I say that the Romans can be conquered by you). 3. Verbs meaning to hope, promise, swear and undertake, take a future infinitive and not a present infinitive as in English : as, Sperat se diu victurum. lie hopes to lii'e a lon^- time. Note. — Esse may be omitted from the fut. inf. act. lure me haec factxirum. / S7i>ea,r to do it. Premittit se venturum. He promises to come. Note. — After such verbs as the above, the ace. of the pronoun must be used before the infinitive. 4. The use of a verb of saying or tJiinking parenthetically is Jiot common in Latin. Thus : You were absent, he thought is Putavit'te abesae. Note. — Inquit, he says, is the only exception. It is used to intro- duce the exact words of a speaker : as, " Dicam tibi," inquit, " omnia." " / will tell you,^'' says he, *■'' every- thing. ~ 8 LATIN rUOSK COMPOSITION. Exercise IV. I. You promised to bring everything with you. 2. He undertook to finish the business. 3. I beheve that he killed his slave. 4. We knew that they would waste the land. 5 They will storm the city, he thinks. 6. They called out that he had fallen. 7. He hopes to make war upon them. 8. No one denied that the soul was the better part of us. 9. He swore to destroy their cities. 10. They felt that a great danger was at hand. 11. He said that he was their friend, 12. He swore that he would not do it. §5. THE RELATIVE. 1. The case of a relative pronoun is determined by the verb of its own clause ; its gender, number and person by the antecedent : as, Ego, qui te laudavi, rex sum. /, ivho praised yoti^ am king. Ego, quern tu laudavisti, rex sum. /, ivhom you praised^ am king. Is, cui llbrum dedisti, adest. //i?, to whom you gave the book^ is Jiere. 2. The relative in the objective or accusative case — so often omitted in English— is never omitted in Latin : as, Artem, quam novi, exerceo. I practise the art I know. 3. A relative may agree with the predicate of its own clause instead of with the antecedent: as, Thebae, quod Boeotiae caput est. Thebes^ which is the capital o^ Boeotia. 4. The relative, like the adjective or participle (§1., 2), when referring to one or more nouns of different gender, may always agree with the last : as, Neque homini neque ferae quam consoiciunt parcunt. They spare neither man nor beast they see. THE RELATIVE. 9 Npte. — Other forms of a^accment are common : as, Pater et mater qui mortui sunt. Father and mother ivho ivcre tfiiu/ {\c\ix- tive plural, and agreeing with masculine rather than feminine). Inconstantia et temeritaa quae digna non sunt deo. Fickleness and rashness ivhuh are not worthy of a god {xcVxiwQ ncut. pi., be- cause the antecedents are the names of things). 5. The antecedent of a relative pronoun is often omitted : as, Dividebat aprros qulbus volebat. He distributed lands to those to whom he wished. 6. When the antecedent is emphatic, the relative clause is thrown forward and the main clause introduced by is or idem {same) : as, Qui id fecit, is abiit. The man who did it^ is gone. The antecedent (when a noun) is in that case put in the relative clause : as, Quos campos viridissimos videram, eosdem vastatos vidi. I saw t lie fields desolate, which J had seen very green. 7. A superlative referring to the antecedent is often put in the relative clause : as, Urbem, quam habebant optimam, perdiderunt. They have lost the best city they had. So too emphatic adjectives of number and amount : as, Duces qui pauci supersunt. Leaders few of whom survive. 8. A noun used appositively as an antecedent is attracted into the relative clause : as, Abiit Roma, qua in urbe a puero habitaverat. He departed frou» Rome, a city in which he had lived from boyhood. 9. A relative referring to a whole sentence is expressed by id quod or quae res : as, Invidiam vicisti, id quod difflcillimum est (or quae res diffl- cillima est). You have vanquished envy, which is a most difficult thing to do. 10 LATIN I'KOSK COMPOSITION. 10. ir/i(i/,n^ a relative, is translated by id quod or ea quae (//id/ which, /he /hiiii^x -uibasstu/v is no quia (and not ut nomo) ; that not hi Hi:; is no quid (and not ut nihil) ; Ih.it //^'(adj.) is no uUub (not ut nuUus) ; that never is ne unquam (not ut nunquain) : as, Portam Claude ne quia excedat. Shut the ^i^ate that no one may ffo out. Abll no quid viderem. / ivent a7vay that I niii^ht see noth/ni;. Clamant ne ullum verbum audiatur. VV/ey are shot/tini^'- that no word may be heard. Hoc fAc^fte ne unquam vltupSrent. J^o this that they may never re%>ile. 6. For et ne (following^ ut or a previous ne\ neve (or nou) is iiseii \ as, Hoc dice ut bono animo sit neve perturbetiu*. / .v,m' tliis that lie mav he of i^ond couray;e and may not be disturbed. Abibo no eura videam neve audiam. / "will go aioay that I may not see or hear him. Exr<:RCiSK \'II. Vie ut /of "/^" and "in order to" ex/tressing pur/>ose. I. He went away that he might not see us. 2. Tht-y pretend to be nuui, that tiiey may not l)e banished. 3. I thinlc that prizes are given to boys that they may be more zeahius. 4. He wrote to warn us. 5. He killed himself that he might not see the country overthrown. 6. We teach our children in order that they may be good citizens. 7. They took him from the plough in order to make him consul. 8. I did it that I might displease no one. 9. We do not hve to eat. 10. He sent us away that we might have no hope of safety. 11. Do this that you maybe free. 12. In order to be free we obey the law. 13. In order that no one may lie hid {luted) or escape, he has sent out all the cavalry. H I u tATIN PROSE COMPOSITION^ I ■ i . "^ li li ii §8. CONSECUTIVE CLAUSES. 1. In tlic sentence /A? /h'fs in such a way that he has nothings the clause introduced by that expresses the result or consequence of the action of tlie main verb. Such a clause is called a con- secutive clause and must be carefully distinguislied fioni a final Clause. 2. A consecutive clause is usually introduced by ut {so that\ and requires the subjunctive : as, ita vivit ut nihil habeat. He lives in such a way that he has notJiing. 3. The rule for the sequence of tenses (laid down in § 7, 4) does not apply to consecutive clauses after a past tense. The perfect sul^junctive is used of a single act, the imperfect of a repeated or continuous one : as, Tantus timer omnes occupavit ut rex ipse fug-erit. Such fear seized all, that the ki}ig Jiiniself Jled {p{ a single act). Tanta tempestaa coorta est ut nulla navis cursura tenere posset. So great a storm arose that 7W ship could hold its course (of a con- tinuous act). Note.— The impf. is used of a repeated, continuous, ox habitual wci. 4. If a negative is required in the consecutive clause, ut non is tised and not — as in a final clause — ne: as, Tam caecus fuit ut me non viderit. He xvdts so blind that he did 7iot see me (or as not to see me). So too : That no one is ut nemo, that ju^ thing is ut nihil, that no (adj.) is ut nullus, and that 7iever is ut nunquam : as, Talis erat ut nemo ei crederet. He was of such a character that no one used to believe him. Tam improbus fuit ut nihil eum unquam a scelere revocaverit. He was so wicked that nothing ever recalled him from crime. Ita Insulam vexavit ut ea restitui in antiquum statum nullo modo potuerit. He so harried the island that it could in no way be restored to its ancient condition. CONSKCUTIVK CLAl'SKS. 5 f), and he has 4.) does perfect ipeated h fear posset, a con- ual'ACl. non is he did nemo, / never arader caverit. le. n nullo no %vay jsjote. — So, liniitinj^^ a verl), is ita, sic, or adeo; liiniling an adjec- tive or adverb it is tarn (.^ 6, i. Note). 5. Ut consecutive is used after the following demonstrative words : Talis, jv/t/z.-ekismodi, such (in adisparaginj; sense) ; tantus, so ore at, such ; tot, so many ; totles, so ojten ; sic, ita, tarn, S(>; adeo, to such (I degree. It is also used after the following- impersonal verbs and phrases : accidit, evenit. contingit, lit, it happens ; restat, reliquum est, // re- mains; fieri potest, ' /■/ is possil)le (literally, // may happen) \ nullo modo fieri potest, // is inipossible ; seqviitur, // Jolloics ; tan turn abest, it is so far from; ex.i>edit, it is e.ipedient ; accedit, it is added : as, Qui fit ut nemo contentus vivat? Hew does it happen that no one /i7YS contentedly ? Accidit ut primus id nuntiaverit. // happened that lie was iim Jirst to ixurunince it. Tantum abest ut omnes miremur ut nobis non sutisfaciat ipse Demostl-ienes. So fir are ive from ad)niring all, that Detnosthenes himself does not satisfy us (lit., so far off is it that loe admire all, etc.) Exercise VIU. [/ i. Italy is so covered with trees that it seems an orchard. 2. Their strength was such that we did not dare to take un arms. 3. It was so hard that no one could do it. 4. His ears are so closed to the truth that he will not hear it from a friend. 5, It remains that I should say a few words about g^ood fortune. 6. He was so far from loving, that he even hated her. 7. Such is the power of goodness that we love it even in an enemy. 8. The river was so deep that no one could cross it. 9. I am not so ignorant as not to know that. 10. He was so grieved that he never took anything more deeply to heart. 11. He broke his word so often that no one ever believed him. 12. They took away his sword that he might hurt no one. 13. He said that he had been fighting for (pro^vCQ\^ the country 14. It may happen that he is sometimes wrong". 15- To this was added that he was blind. IF ^^ lill :- IF I 10 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. ll §9. UT-CLAUSB WITH VERBS OP ASKING. 1. Verbs meaning to ask^ command, or advise, are followed by an ut-clause, not — as in English — by the infinitive : as, Rog-o te ut id fa,cias. / ask you to do it. Imperat ut clipeos percutiant. He orders tJie.n to strike their shields. Moneo te ut auruni reddas. / warn you to restore the gold. Note. — lubeo (order), and veto (forbid), t:ike the inf. and not the ut-clause : as, Eos pedem referre iussit (vetuit). lie ordered (forbade) them to 7-etreat. '.' 2. After a past tense, the verb of the ut-clause becomes imperfect (§7, 4. Note) : as, Rogavi ut id faceres. / asked you to do it Imperavit ut clipeos percuterent. their shields. Ife ordered thou to strike 3. When not is required in the ut-clause, ne is used instead of ut non : as, Monui te ne uxorem duceres. J ivarned you not to marry. So too : ne quis is used lor \\t nemo (that no one), ne quid for ut nihil (that nothing), ne ullus for ut nullus (that no), and ne unquam for ut nunquam (that never) : as, Te rogo ne quid facias. / ask you to do nothing. Obsecravit eum ne fidem unquam violaret. I/e entreated him never to break his word. 4. Or, and not, after a verb of asking, is neve: as, Te rogavi ne eum accusares neve multares. / asked you not to accuse and not to punisJi him. Neither . . . . nor would be neve. . . neve. 6. Verbs meaning to effect, decide, or strive are also followed an ut-clause : as. by '^ VERBS OF FEARINO. MODAL VERBS. 17 ISTG. ved by e their old. ind not ordered 1 perfect W strike 5tead of marry. ■uid for and ne Sol efflcit ut omnia floreant. TJic sun makes every t hint:; Jloitr- ish. Decernit ut consule.i delectum habeant. lie deerees t/iat the cons 14 Is shall hold a le^'V- Cura ut hoc faciaa. 7\ihe care to do this. Note.- Statuo, constituo and decerno, resolve, take the infinitive wlicn they are followed by an infinitive in English : as, Statuit redire. He decides to return. 6. \'erbs menning to varn, wlien stating a fact, become verbs of saying (i. 2, i) and reciuire the accusative with infinitive : as, Nos monet hostes adesse. He loarns us that the enemy is at hand. So too: Hoc tibi persuadebo te errare. I %vill persuade you of this, that you are wrong. Exercise IX. i I. I will persuade hini to return. 2. I begged them to help us. 3. He ordered us to supply him with corn. 4. I warned him to set out at once. 5. I warn you that they will set out at once. 6. \Vc implored them not to kill women and children. 7, Take care to understand this. 8. They passed a decree that no one should scourge a Roman citizen. 9. They warned us that as many had been banished as ever. 10. He said that we were asked to assemble in the market-place, i i. I beg of you not to decree anything. 12. I resolved to ask him to go away. 13. Beg them not to come. 14. He was so timid that he was afraid to enter the city. 15. So far were we from reviling, tliat we even admired them (§ f-^ 5). ted him m not to )wed by §10. VERBS OF FEARING. MODAL VERBS. 1. Latin verbs meaning to fear, take a peculiar construction which seems to admit of no explanation. Thus : Vereor ne veniat. / am afraid that he will come. Vereor ut veniat 3 / ani afraid that he loill not come. 18 LATIN fKOSE COMPOSITION. <; i ■1 Note.— The English future after verbs o{ fearing^ is expressed by the subjunctive — the present subjunctive, if after a present or future tense, tlie imperfect if after a past (§7, 4, Note): as, Timeo vit labores sustineas, / mn afraid tliat you loill not endure your labors ; timebam ne ea ev6nirent, / was a/raid that those things would happen, 2. Phrases like periculum est, there is danger ^ take the construc- tion of verbs oi fearing : as, Periculum erat ne te verbis obrueret. There was dan^ . r that he would ovenvhebn you with words. 3. Many verbs (called fnodal verbs) take an infinitive after them to complete their meaning : as, audeo {dare), cogo {compel), conor {endeaz'or), constituo and statue {deter jnifie), cunctor {hesitate), cupio {desire), debeo {ought), desino {cease), disco {learn), dubito {hesitated, incipio {begin), malo {prefer), nescio {not know how), nolo {be uftwilling), obliviscor {forget), pfi,tior {allow), pare {pre- pare), possum {be able), scio {know how), soleo {be accustomed), vereor {fear), volo {be ivilling) : as, Malo mori. I prefer to die. . Debeo id facere. / ou^ht to do it. Desine mirari. Cease to wonder (or cease wondering). Note I. — Of these verbs volo and nolo often take the subjunctive with or without ut : as, Hoc (ut) facias velim. / should like you to do this. Note 2. — Vereor (fear) has the inf. in Latin when it has the inf. in English : as, Veretur redire. He is afraid to return. 4. A noun or adjective with the modal infinitive is in the nomina- tive and not in the accusative : as, Vult esse servus. He wishes to be a slave. CLASSIFICATION OF TENSES. LAW OP SEQUENCE. 19 :e the construc- as dan^^.r that Exercise X. I. I am afraid that you will not bear it. 2. I do rot think that you are afraid to die. 3. There was danger that he would attack tlie camp. 4. We were afraid that all his soldiers would desert liim. 5. I fear I can not grant you that. 6. I am afraid that you do not love me. 7. I begin to think that the man is mad. 8. I wish to sj)eak but I do not dare. 9. He said that he knew how to coneiuer the country's enemies. lo. They thought tliat he was afraid lest he should be captured by brigands. Ii. Stop talking. 12. He said that they were accustomed to walk everyday. 13. I warn you that your ships are lost. 14. No one is so good as never to sin (? 8, 4). 15, He said that he could not respect so foolish a king (use nego, say ?u)f). 16. They have warned us never to enter the city. 17. Persuade him not to restore the gold. 18. I forgot to say that lie has gone to see the king. 19. He seemed to be the first man in the state. in the nomina- '11. CLASSIFICATION OP TENSES. LAW OP^ SEQUENCE. 1. The followmg classification of Latin tenses should be carefully mastered. Latin tenses are divided into two classes, Primary and Secon- dary (or Historical). Thus : Primary. {Present, amat, he loves Perfect (pres. perf ), amavlt, he has loved. Future, amabit, he will love. Future-perfect, amaverit, he will have loved. [Imperfect, amabat, he was loving. Historical I ^^^^" ^^^^^ indef.), amavit, he loved. I Pluperfect, amavei*at, he had loved. r' I * 20 LATIN PROSG COMPOSITION. ■1 ,*;»'• Note. — The only difficulty in this classification lies in the per- fect, which has a double force. Thus: amavit means either he has loved ox he loved. In the former case, it is called \\\^ present perfect (or perfect with liai'e') ; in the latter the past indefinite (or aorist perfect). 2. This classification is important in view of the fact that the tense of the subjunctive in a subordinate clause is prim,\ry when the tense of the verb of the main clause is primary, and secondary when the tense of the verb of the main clause is secondary. This law, known as the Law of sequence of tenses has been referred to already. It may be stated thus : LAW OF SEQUENCE OF TENSES. A primary tense in the principal clause^ is followed by a primary tense in the dependent clause ; a secondary tense in the principal clause^ is followed by a secondary tense in the dependent clause. Thus: Rogat Rogabit Ro^avit Rograverit Rograbat Rogavib Rogaverat te ut venias te ut venires He asks He will ask He has asked He will have asked He was asking He asked He had asked ■you to come. you to come.. EXAMPLES OF PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SEQUENCE. Laudant ut laudentur : They praise that they may be praised (primary sequence in final clause ; p. 12, i). Laudabant ut laudarentur. They praised that they might be praised (secondary sequence in final clause). Obsecrat eum ne fratrem occidat. He implores him not to kill his brother (primary sequence). Obsecravit eum ne fratrem oecideret. He implored him not to kill his brother (secondary sequence). CLASSIFICATION OF TENSES. LAW OF SEQUENCE. 21 n the per- her lie has ent perfect ? (or aorist ct that the n.^ry when secondary lary. This referred to a primary ? principal 'ent clause. ou to come. rou to come^ V.RY be praised might be not to kill Timeo ne peccaveiis. / am afraid that you have done wrong (primary sequence). Timebam ne pecavisses. / was afraid that you had done wrong (^eccondary sequence). Video causas esse multas quae eum impellant. I see that there ate many causes which urge him on (primary sequence). Vidi causas esse multas quae eum Impellerent. / saw that the causes were many which urged him on (secondary sequence). Eum monui ne hoc faciat. / hai>e warned him not to do this (primary sequence). Eum monui ne hoc faceret- I warned him not to do ////j (second- ary sequence). Note. — Occasionally the secondary sequence is found even with the present-perfect (perfect with ha^'e) : as, Haec non ut vos excit- arem locutus sum. / have not said this to rouse you. Exercise XI. I. He will easily persuade you not to come. 2. They have asked him to stand for the consulship. 3. We asked him to help us. 4. I was afraid that he would not return. 5. A law is short in order that it may be more easily understood (teneo). 6. I will ask him not to do anything against his will. 7. I was afraid that he would ruin the country. 8. He strove to teach them wisdom in war. 9. He said t'hat he would obey all the laws that were passed. 10. There was danger that he would not do it (§ 10, 2). 11. I was afraid that he would die. 12. He was so timid that he did not dare to enter the camp. 13. He used to say that the life, which had been given us, was short. 14. He said that he hoped to finish the business shortly (p. 7, 3). 15. He was the last of all to promise to obey. 16. He wrote us to tell him what we had heard (p. 9, 9). 17. He broke his word so often that no one believed him. 18. They said that they had come to learn. 19. He was so angry that he answered nothing. 20. He used to say that many lived to eat. him not to f I 22 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. § 12. VERBS OF DOUBTING AND HINDERING. 1. Verbs meaning /o doubt^ when used with a negative, are fol- lowed in Latin by the subjunctive with quin ( = qui, ^^w, and ne, not^ old form of non) : as, Non dubito quin me mirere. I do not doubt that you wonder at me Nemo dubitat quin hoc turpe sit. No one doubts that this is base. 2. Verbs meaning to hinder^ prevent^ and the like, are followed in Latin by the subjunctive with quominus { = by winch the less —in order that fiot) : as, Senectus non imp^it quominus literia utamur. Old ai^e does 7iot prevent us from enjoying literature. Per me stetit quominus ad te scrlberet. // was oiviiig to me that he did not write to you (impf of secondary sequence: § i r, 2). Note. — Of verbs of preventing^ prohibeo is more usually followed by the infinitive ; as, Prohibent eum exire. They prevent him from going out. 3. Verbs of hindering when used with a negative, or with a virtual negative (like vix, hardly\ may be followed by the subjunc- tive with quin : as, Vixinhiberi potuit quin saxa iacSret. He could hardly be pre- vented from throwing stones. 4. The following verbs and phrases, of much the same nature as the above, are also followed by quin {but ///^Z) with the subjunctive; Nemo est (quin). There is none but (p. 11,4). Quid causae est (quin)? What reason is there against? Fieri non potest (qxiin). // can not be but that. Temperare mihi non poss\un (quin). / can not refrain from. Minimum (haud multum) abesse (quin). Be very near, Facere non possvma (quin). / can not help. Thus : Facere non potuit quin bellum inferret. He could not help making war. m VERBS OF DOUBTING AND HINDERING. 23 Nihil praetermiait quin nobis persuadSret. He left nothing un- done to persuade us. Minimum abfuit quin omnea interflcerentur. All were within a little of being killed. Quid cauaae eat quin id velit? What reason is there against his wishing it ' (lit., what of cause is there). Fieri non potest quin exclamem. // is impossible for me not to cry out. Note. — Quin is used with the indicative In the sense of (a) why not^(b) nay: as, Quin conscendimus equoa? Why don't we mount our horses f (Quin = qui ne, how not?) Quin, uno verbo die. Nay^ say it in one word. Exercise XII. I. Nothing prevented us from building a city. 2. Nothing shall deter me from speaking the truth. 3. No one can doubt that he has returned. 4. He could hardly be prevented from laughing. 5. No one doubted that he had killed his friend. 6. They never saw him but (quin) they called him thief 7. The storm will pre- vent them from coming. 8. We can not object to others dissenting (use quin). 9. No one is so wise that he can not learn. 10. He has left nothing undone to finish this business. 11. It was owing to you that the wedding did not take place. 12. Nothing ever deterred him from praising what deserved praise. 13. I was afraid that they could not be prevented from making war. 14. I do not % hesitate to say that he has gone away to see the king. 15. No one Jl was so powerful thdt he could do everything. 16. He could not "^ hfelp sending a letter every day. > •- >ik 24 LATIN PROSK COMTOSITION. 'I 1 :i . I §13. SUBJUNCTIVE IN SIMPLE SENTENCES. 1. 'I'lie Subjunctive is used in simple sentences: (d) In Wishes: as, Moriar. May I die! Felix sis. May you be forttinate ! The ne<^ativc is ne: as, Ne vivam si solo. May I not live if I know! (h) In ConiDuvuis or Exiior/ations: as, Abeat. Let him i^o away. Hoc faciamus. Let us do this. The negative is ne : as, Ne abeat. L.et him not f[o away. Hoc ne faciamus. L^et us noi do this. Note. — Of commands in tlie second jierson, the imperative is used when the command is affirmative; ne witli the perfect sub- junctive, when the command is negative: as, Admev6ni. Come to me. Ne id feceris. Do not do it, (e) To soften an assertion : as, [wr. Velim mihi ig-noscas (ut omitted). / should like you to pardon Mallem te videre. / should prefer to see you. Crederes. You would Jiave believed. Hoc dixerim. TJiis I would have said. (d) In questions that imply deliberation : as. Quid faciam ? What am / to say f ( What shall 1 say ?) Quid facerem ? What was I to have said? This is called the deliberative subjunctive. It is often introduced by an : as, An eg-o non venirem ? Ought I not to have come f (e) To express duty ox possibility (see § it!) : as, Hoc non fecisses. You ought not to have done it. Aurum reddidisses. You should have restored the gold. This is called Xh^ potential subjunctive. It is of rare occurrence. SUUJUNCTIVK IN SIMI'LK SENTENCES. 25 Ct US IWi SYNTAX OF UTINAM. 2. \\'hon the subjunctive is used in w/j/rf.f, utinam (O ! tluity would that!) is usually added. It is used as follows ;■- When the fulfilment of the wish is possible, utinam is joined with the present or perfect subjunctive ; as, Utinam adsit. O .' that he may be there (in the future). Utinam adfuerit. O ! that he may have been there (just now). When the wish can no longer be realised, the imperfect or pluper- fect sul)junctive is used, the imperfect when the wi^h is referred to the present, the pluperfect when it is referred to the past : as, Utinam adesset. O ! that he were here (now). Utinam adfuisset. O I that he had been here (in the past). The negative is ne (rarely non) : as, Utinam ne hoc ifi mentem incidisset. Would that it had not occurred to my mind! Exercise XIII. I. Let us not lose this opportunity. 2. I should be unwilling to doit. 3. Let us remember that wc owe this to our parents. 4. Do not think that we shall often have such a fleet. 5. Do not ask him to remain. 6. O ! that you had never been born. 7. Would he were alive ! 8. Would that they had sent me the bravest men they had ! 9. May all traitors perish ! 10. O ! that I could find him. ii. I was afraid that he would not be safe. 12. Let us remember that life is short. 13. I should like you to come to this city. 14. O ! that he may listen to you. 15. Let us always be the same. 16. O ! that we had been living then. 17. What should I have said.'* 18. I should advise you to be silent. 19. You would suppose she was a goddess. 20. Why should I enumerate the multitude of their ships ? r |m:| 26 LATIN PUOSK COMPOSITION. , c I 1 § 14. THE IMPERATIVE. 1. The second person of the imperative is used (in both singular and plural) when the command is affirmative : as, Vive valeque. Live and farewell. Audite hoc. Hear this. 2. A command in the third person is usually expressed by the present subjunctive : as, Aut bibat aut abeat. Lei Aim either drink or go away. 3. When the command is negative, ne is used with the perfect subjunctive for the 2nd person of che imperative, and with the present subjunctive for the 3rd person of the miperative: as, Ne transieria flumen. Do not cross the river. Ne cantet. Let him not sing. 4. The present subjunctive may be used for the 2nd person of the negative imperative when the prohibition is of a general character: as, Ne multa dlscas sed multum. Do not learn many things but much. 5. In prohibitions, instead of ne and the perfect subjunctive, noli (pi. nolite) with the infinitive, or cave (pi. cavete) with ne and the subjunctive, is freq-'.ently found: as, Noli abire. Do not go away. Cavete ne illud faciatis. Take care not to do iha>\ Do not do that. Note. — The ne is often omitted after cave, cavete. 6. Or, or and not, in negative imperative sentences is neve or neu: as, Illud ne feceris neve dizeris. Do not do or say that. Sequ§re neve retrospexeris. Follow and do not look bcick» TlIK IMTKUATIVE. 27 but 7. The imperative; of faclo {do) is used also iis ji paraphrase for a mild command : as, Fac ut sclam. Take care that I know (let me know). Fac ut sciat. Let him know, 8. The imperative in-to (-tote) — often called the future imperative —is usually found in wills and laws, though it is sometimes used merely for emphasis : as, Mortuum In urbe ne sepelito. Thou shalt not bury a dead man in the city. Servus meua liber esto- Let my slave be free. Exercise XIV. I. Go away ; depart from this city. 2. Let him not lose such n opportunity. 3. Do not believe that I am afraid that you w desert. 4. Preserve this town, Jupiter, and the citizens who dwell in it. 5. Thou shalt not kill (use ne). 6. Do not be moved by pity. 7. Do not be troublesome. 8. Do not praise the wicked. 9. Let them not believe that they will live long. 10. Take care that you write me soon. 11. Do not think that this will prevent him from coming. 12. Let no one deter you from praising what deserves praise. 13. Let us advance that we may hear more easily. 14 Let us start now in order to arrive earlier. 15. Let him leave Athens, a city in which no one is safe. 16. I believe that he was buried in the same tomb in which his distinguished father lies. 17. He has ordered them to attack the camp. 18. It often happened that the best men were rejected. 19. So far was he from wishing to have the province, that they could not persuade himto leave the city. 20, He was so ill that he could not write. !f*^ 28 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. § 15. INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. NE, NONNE, NUM. 1. Interrogative sentences in Latin (when not headed by an inter- rogative pronoun or adverb) are usually distinguished by one of the interrogative particles, -n6, nonn3, nvun. The order of words does not, as in English, mark an interrogative sentence. 2. The particle -ne (which is written after the first word in the sentence), asks for information: as, Amatne? Docs he love? The answer will be either, amat, he loves (i.e., Yes)^ or nonamat, he does not love (i.e., No). The particle -ne is generally appended to the emphatic word (which is then put first) : as, Filiuane amat? Does the son lovef (i.e. = Is it the son that loves?) Note. — Yes or No, in answer to questions, has no single equivalent in common use. They are usually expressed by repeat- ing the verb, as seen above. 3. Nonne expects the answer Yes: as, Nonne puer amat ? Does not the boy love? The answer expected is, amat, he loves (I.e., Yes) Nonne is generally the first word in the sentence. 4. Num expects the answer No: as, Num puer amat? Does the boy love? or the boy does not love, does he? T he answer expected is, non amat, he does ?iot love, (i.e., No). Num is generally the first word in the sentence. 5. The following are the and adverbs : Quia or quisnam, who? Uter, which of the two? Quantus, ho7V great? Quotus, which in the series j Q^iot, how many? Qualis, what kind? Ubi, where? Unde, whence? C\ir, I Quare, !- why? Quamobrem, I more common interrogative pronouns Quo, whither? Qiiando, when? (quum is never interrogative.) Qui, how? Quam, (with adjs., or adverbs) h^iV? Quemadmodum, ? • » ^ » "^ J- tn what way? or quomodo, \ -^ Quoties, how often? Quamdiu, how long? Quousque, how far? INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 29 Tiuis: Quis es? I Vho are you ? Quota hora est ? What d clock is it ? Cur id rogas ? Why do yoit ask that ? Quae tandem causa te impellit? What motive^ p^^^y-, ifftpdls you? Note. — Tandem, in an interrogative sentence, ineans pray. Quisnam hoc fecit? Who in the world has done this? Note. — Nam joined to quis, adds the idea of impatience. Quod facinus admisit? What crime has he committed? Note. — Quod is the adjectival form of quid, ivhat? If quid were used, it would take the genitive :.as, Quid facinoris admisit? 6. Whether ... .or in a double question, is utrum an; whether. . . .or not., utium. . . .an non: as, Utrum Pallas hoc fecit an luno ? Whether has Pallas done this or Juno ? Utrvma haec vera sunt an non ? Whether is this true or not ? Note. -Utrum is sometimes omitted, sometimes replaced by the appended -m: as. Hoc an illud fecisti? Whether did you do this or that ? Nostine me an ignoras ? Do you know me or dorCt you know me ? 7. A rhetorical question is often introduced by an; as, An sfarvi esse wUtis ? Can it be that you want to be slaves f Exercise XV. I. Do you think that he will come .? 2. Who said that he re- fused to obey? 3. Whet'icr is it water or wine? 4. Is theiy one ^^ world only, or more? 5. Are those your words or not ? 6. Is the number of the stars odd or even ? 7. Do you think that death is an eternal sleep jr the beginning of another life ? 8. Does he know the glory of virtue ? Yes. 9. Why do you not ask him to follow it itice? io. Has he not sent an ambassador to persuade us? II. Hov, do ou know allth's? (plur.) \2. Where are you coming from ' '. 3. Whither are you going ? 1 4. Are you asking f p 30 LATIK PROSE coMPoamofit* him to betray his country? 15. You don't hear mc, do you i^ l<5i Can it be that they are taking up arms against their country ? 17. Why does he pretend that he is teaching his brother? 18 Don't you hope that he will find what you have lost? 19. How did it happen that there was no one present ? 20. When did you hear the orator ? 21. Why do you give nothing to the poor? 22. How could he pretend that he was unwilling ? §16. INDIRECT QUESTION. 1. A question dependent upon a verb o{ u vu'ig^, I'nowing^ telling^, or the like, has its verb in the subjunctive : as, Unde venia? Where are you coming from. But : Scio unde venias. / know where you are coming from. Here unde venias is called an indirect (or dependent) question 2. Whether, or if, in an indirect question, is num : as, Die mihi num venerit. 7!?// fne whether (if) he has come. Whether . ... or is utrum an ; but or not is necne and^ not annon (as in the direct question) : as,. Quaeritur utrum interfectus sit necne. The question i "'hei-Her he has been put to death or not. 3- The law of sequence of tenses (§11, 2) is to be strictly observed in the indirect question. Thus : Primary. Secondary. Rogo Roj?abo Rogavi / ask I shall ask I have asked ragas. Rogabam ^ rageres. quid \ eg6ris. Rogavl I quid \ agisses. [acturus sis. Rogaveram j j^acturus esses 'you are doing. I was asking\ (yoif-^.'oing. \ you have done I asked \ \ you h%d ante, what { (or did). )■ -uihat \ I you are going I ho'^. asked | } yov. were going to do, ) \ to do. Indirect question. 31 strictly tosses o>ng. 1 antt. going Note I.— The future subjunctive active is formed from the future participle with sim, which becomes easem after a secondary tense : as, Rogo quid acturus sis. / ask what you will do. Rogravi quid acturus esses. I asked what yoti wotild do. Note 2.'^Froiii reluotance to join an impf subjun. with a primary tense, Latin says Rogo quid turn egeris (not ageres) for / ask you what you were doing then. 4. After nescio or haudsciof/ don't kno%v), dubito (/ doubt)., incertum est (// is uncertain)— implying an affirmative — whether \s an : as, Constantiam dico? Nescio an melius patientiana possim dicere. Consistency, do I say ? I dont know whether I can not better say long- suff'ering. Note I. — In cases like the above, nescio an has the force oi I al- 7nost think {i.e., is used affirmatively). Note 2. — Nescio quis hoc dixit is Some one or other has said it. Nescio qjais hoc dixerit is /don't know who has said it. In the former nescio quis is an indefinite pronoun, Some one or other., I don^t know who. 5. In sentences like You know the skill with which he speaks, Latin prefers the indirect question and puts the noun in the depen- dent clause : as, Scis quanta arte loquatur. You know the skill with which he speaks. Exercise XVI. I. Don't you know whether you have conquered or not.? 2. I should like to know whether these are your words or not. 3. Ask him what 1 e thinks about the matter. 4. Tell me if your friend has returned. 5. We all know how daring you are. 6. You will never believe how often I have advised them. 7. Take care to inform me when you will set out. 8. Why don't you ask him where he has been? 9. I almost think that he is not happy. 10. I did not know whether he was a wise man or a fool. 11. I saw what you would do. 12, I asked them where they had laid my book. 13. Did you know by whom the city was founded.-* 14. Tell me how many letters you wrote yesterday. 15. Have you heard how many they are? 16. I will ask the road by which he will return. iii Ill 32 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. §17. USB OF THE INDIRECT QUESTION FOR AN ENGLISH NOUN. 1 Latin often uses the indirect question where EngHsh uses an abstract or verbal noun : as, Rogavit quot hostes essent. //e aaked the number of the enemy. Scio cur redierls. I know the reason of yotir return. Dicam tibi quo eamus. / Ttv// tell you our destination. Qiiid de ea re sentiat exponet. He ivill explain his view of the matter. f^ldet'. quale periculum sit. Vou see the nature of the danger. % The indirect question must be distinj^uished from the relative clause. Thus : Scio quid quaeras. / k?t07U your question. But, Scio quod quaeris. / know the answer to your question. Dico quae sentiam. I state fny opinion. But, Dico quae sentio. / say what I mean. Exercise XVII. • Use the indirect question /or italicised nouns. I. I see the suddejiness of the danger (use quam). 2. Can you tell the source of that rumor. 3. I have heard the origifi of the custom. 4. You see the character of the man. 5. Let us ask him the date of his departure. 6. Shall we ever know the mantier of his death .? 7. I did not know the size of the city. 8. Let us wait that we may see the issue of the matter (use evado, tu7'n oitt). 9 No one foresaw the extent of t'he danger. 10. They knew the n'«i"^« for his action. 11. The motive of his act was plain to all. 12. Tell me his opinion of the whole affair. 13. ^'ou know now the manner of his life from boyhood. 14. Have they discovered the QnGvay^s position? 15. You know the agents in this crime. 16. What prevented them from attacking us ? 17. The plan was such that I could not praise it. 18. How does it happen that you did not allow them to return? 19. Why were you afraid that I would not speak the truth .'' 20. It happened that no one opened the gate of the city. i 1 MAY, CAN% MUST, OllCHT. 33 ^ If FOR uses an e enemy. view of nger. relative !io quod ,e sentio. uan you n of the ask him inner of us wait out'). 9 new the n to all. now the red the He. 16. as such you did I would he gate §18. MAY, CAN, MUST, OUGHT. 1. JA/j, in a principal slmUcucc, is expressed Ijy licet with the .niinilivc: as, Mihi ire licet. / i/uiy go. 2. G^;/ is possum: as, Id facere possum. / can do if. Note. — Licet expresses perniissio/i, possum poiver; but Fieri potest ut is, // nun' happen that {it is possible that): as, Fieri potest ut opus confectum sit. // is possible that the loork has been finished. 3. Ought or should^ expressing duty., is debeo or oportet: as, Venire debes. You ougJit to eonie. Hoc me facere oportet. / oug/it to do it. Note. -Ought or should is usually expressed, however, by the gerundive in -dus with the verb to be: as. Id faciendum est. 7Viis ought to be done (p. 45, 2). 4. A/ust is expressed by necesse est and the inlinitivc, or (oi persons) the suljjunctive, witli or without ut: as, Tibi mori necesse est (or Tibi moriare necesse est), Vou must die. Note 1. — Afust, implying obligation, is usually exj^ressed by the gerundive in -dus and the verb to be.- as. Hi audiendi sunt. These men must be listened to. Note 2. — Must., expressing strong probability, is Hand (or non) fieri potuit quin, // eould 7iot have been but that : as, Haud (or non) fieri potuit quin eam videret. He must have seen her. 5. The English perfect infiniti\'e used after mighty could, ought, is expressed in Latin 1))- the present intinitivc : as, Hoc mihi facere licuit. / might Jtavc done it. Hoc facere potui. / could Junie done it. Hoc facere debuisti. You ouirht to Jui7'e done it. 6. An adjective joined to an infinitive with licet or necesse est, is in the dative, if the pronoun is expressed ; if not, in tlie accusa- tive : as, Licet vobis esse ig-navis. 1 'oic may be cowards. Ikit, Licet esse ignavos. We may be eo-a'ards (lit., it is allowable to be cowards). ■ i < l it ' ! ! u LA.Tt.V PKOsK ('OMPOSlTlOjf. Exi:rcisk XVIII. I. You slioiikl have warned him to consult the judge. 2. They should tell us their names. 3. It may be that he advised them to surrender. 4. They could not have killed women and children. 5. Do not ask them whether they could have done it or not. 6. Will you ask how many prisoners have been taken ? 7. You might have left the city immediately. J-. O I that he would not do it. 9. She was so Mind as not to see him. 10. He must have forgotten his friend {gen.). 1 1. You can allow none to go away. 12. I ought to have asked him to set out at once. 13. I should like to know how many cities were taken. 14. O ! that Ave had warned him not to come. 15. She was the first to ask when we would do it. i6* Were you afraid that I would not speak the truth .'^ 17. Who can hope to persuade him? 18. He said that he did not speak 1 atin. 19. They be^^^an to write at once in order that they might go out. 20. He promised that he would remain there. 21. May I go into the garden to pluck a flower ? <*. U9. NOTES ON THE TENSES. 1. Latin has only one form for the three forms of the English present. Thus ; Scribe is / avrife (indefinite), / am writing (progressive) and / do write (emphatic). 2. The present is used, for vividness, of past time : as, Continue milites in ca^tra raittit- Forthwith he sends the soldiers i)ito the camp. This is called the historic present. 3. The present is used with adverbs of past time, for the English perfect : as, Hec iamdudum (or iampridem) facie. / have been doing this for a long time. So too : lertium iam annum hie sumus. We have been here now three years. Tres iam menses te videre cupio. / have been longing to see you for three months. L ;|l lii ■m NOTES ON TUK TKNSES. 35 Ish 't:s vre ten Note. — The imperfect will of course be used for the English pluperfect : as, lUud iamdudum faciebam. / /iaif been doitii^ that for a long time. 4. The imperfect represents an action in past time as incomplete^ repented^ continuous^ or habitual : as, Saxa in eos devolvebant. They were rolling down stones on tJicm. ' Hunc saepe audiebant. They often heard of him. Hie ara vetus stabat. Here an old altar used to stand. Consilium mutavit ; videbat euim nihil confici posse. He changed his pi (in; for he saw that nothing could be done (imperfect of con- tinuous action.) Note. — The impf. will often translate the English began, tried., attempted, etc.: as, Ad proelium sese expediebant. 'They began to prepare themselves for battle. Urbem servabam. / was try- ing to save the city, 5. The Latin perfect represents both the English present perfect (perfect with have^ and the English past indefinite (or aorist per- fect) : as, Scripsi. / wrote, or / have written. 6. The Latin perfect indicative with postquam, quum pri- mum, ut primum. ut, simul ac (or, before a vowel, atque) is used for the English pluperfect with when, after {that), as soon as: as, Postquam haec audivit, abiit. After he had heard this, he went away. 7- The pluperfect represents an action as finished in past time : as, Scripseram, I had written. After qui or quum it is used idiomatically, in a frequentative sense (i.e. to express frequency or repetition), for the English perfect : as, Qui id dixerat, poenam dabat. \ Vhoever said that, was punished. 36 LATIN PROSE COMPOSIT.ON. fi: e an intervieio ivitJi a person. So too : Circumvenire {cheat), ag^redi (attack), oppugnare (rit- tack a place), obsidere (besiege), inire consiiitim {form a plan), coire societatem (form a partnership'), obire mortem (die). Note. — Peto, I ask, and postulo, / demand, take the accusative of the thing and the ablative of the person wi-th a (or &h),from: as, Pacem ab Romanis petiverunt, they asked the J^omans for peace y = tJiey asked peace front the Romiyns:) ; libmm ab amico postula- vit, he demanded a book from h: f'end. Quaere, to ask, seek, takes the accusative of the thing and the alilative of the person with a (or ab), e (or ex), or de : as, Causam e viro quaesivit, he asked a reason from the man (or, he asked the 7nan for a reason). 8. Many intransitive verbs (especially those expressing motion) when compounded with the preposition ad (to), circum (around), per (through), praeter (past), trans (across), or super (above), take un accusative after them governed by the preposition : as, ■:1 40 LATIN 1'UO.SIO CU.MF08ITI0N. I 1 ll Cato rostra advolat. C ^ ov for advising. monendum, adi'ising. monendo, with, by, from or in advising. Fourth Conjugation. audiendi, 0/ hearing. audiendo, to or for hearing. audiendum, Iwaring. audiendo, with, by, from or i)i IieariniT. 6. The gerund has partly the nature of a noun and jjartly that of a verb. As a noun, it may be governed by another noun, or by an fidjectivc, or b\- a preposition. It resembles a verb in governing a case and in 1)c'ug limited by an adverb : as, lus vocandi senatum. The right of summoning the senate. (Merc tlie gerund is governed in the genitive by ius, and governs senatum in the accusative, because vocare governs that case.) Docendo discimus. We learn by teaching. Natus ad regendum, porn for ruling. iih ec arl a{ he\ M i^H... SUPINE, GERTND, GERUNDIVE. 43 njy Parcendo inimicis gloriam paro.vlt. //e 7uon disiinciion by spar- jfiiT his enemies. 'A Note Res diflaciiiii ad tolerandum -The ^orund has often the force of a passive as, Dedit A matter hard to be bo '■>!>' eos ad trucidandiim. lie gives them up to be butchered. Note 2. — The nominative and (except after a p'^eposition) the accusative of the gerund is supphed by the infinitive : as, Ambulare iu:3unduni est, walking is de/ightful ; odit servire, he hates being a s/aTe. GERUNDIVE. 7' Instead of the gerund with an accusative, Latin idiom uses a [peculiar construction of its own. Thus : Born for ruling men is [not often expressed by Natus ad vires regendum, l)ut by Natua id viro.^ regendos, where regendos agrees with vires in gender, Bnuml)cr, and case, and is called \\\g. gerundii'c . So too : In episto- lis scribendis (in writing letters) is used for In scribendo epistelaa ; and Consilium urbis capiendae (the plan for taking the city) for ,^ Consilium capiendi urbem. Note. The gerundive seems to have a passive meaning. Thus : In epistelis scribendis = /;/ letters to be written = />/ writing letters. Consilium urbis capiendae = The plan of the city to be taken = of taking the city. 8. The rule for turning the gerund into the gerundi\e is easily deduced from the above examples. The direct object of the ger'.id is attracted into the case of the gerund^ and the gerund {then called the gerundive) nuide to agree with the object in gender.^ number and case. 9. The genitive of the g^erund, and of the gerundive, is often used, to express purpose, with causa, on account of^ for the sake of which is written after its case : as, Hue qnerendi causa venerunt. They ha7>e come here for the purpose of complaining. Vestis est frigoris depellendi causa. Dress is intended for keep- ing oj/'cold{\h.^ is- for the sake of, etc.). 44 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. Note. — It has been seen that the English infinitive of purpose may be turned into Latin in several ways. Thus: They send ambassadors to sue for peace. (a) Legates mittunt ut pacem petant (Final clause; p Note 2). (b) Legates mittunt pacem petitum (Supine; p. 41, 2). (c) Leg-atos mittunt ad pacem petendam (Gerundive). (d) Legates mittunt pacis petendae causa. EXERCIS.. XXI. I. He sent his boys to hear the orator Cicero. 2. We are now ready for reading a book. 3. They have formed the plan of cross- ing the river to attack the enemy. 4. There is no doubt that he is the most suitable man for carrying on the war. 5. Have they come here for the sake of refitting their ship.? 6. Tell me when they will have an opportunity of finishing the work. 7. He used to say that we learned by seeing and hearing. 8. What prevented him from becoming skilful in conducting the government? 9. He has gone to ask them when they will sail. 10. He used to say that a short life was long enough for living well, i r. I went to walk; he, to sleep. 12. I told him how much gold was given for restoring the temple. 13. They said that they would not go there to be slaves. 14. He gained great glory by burning their villages. 15. Horrible to say, they butchered both women and children. 16: I believe that they came to the camp to complain of their wrongs. 1 7. He was the only one who ever saved the country by delaying. iS, He used to say that ruling a state was easier than resisting pleasure. 19. They thought that seeing was not always believing. 20. Spring is the time for sowing seed. 21. Can you tell whence this corojs ? -4 i THE GERUNt) AND GERUNDIVE. 46 f purpose p. 12, I, e are now I of cress- et that he ^ave they me when e used to arevented ? 9. He ) say that to walk ; restoring ;re to be ges. 15. n. 16: I >ngs. 17. ing. 1 8. pleasure. >. Spring coma's ? §22. THE GERUND AMD QBRTmDIVB.-( Con/inuec^. ) 1. The gerund — and no^ the gerundwe — is to be used : — (a) In the case of verbs that do not govern an accusative : as, Parcendo inimicis. By sparing e?temies (not parcendis inimicis). (I)) Where euphony would be violated : as, Amices videndi causa. For the sake of seeing friends (not amicorum videndorum causa). (c) Where ambiguity results : as, Aliquid docendi causa. For the sake of teaching something (not alicuius, which would mean some one). PASSIVE PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. 2- The gerundive is often used to express obligation : as, Hostis timendug. A)i enemy that ought to be (or must be) feared. From this use of the gerundive, a whole conjugation — called the Passive Periphrastic Conjugation— is formed from the gerundive and the verb svum, / am. Thus : — Present • { amandus sum, I am to be loved. amandus es, thou art to be loved^ etc. . fp f r amandus eram, / was to be lotted. ^ ' \ amandus eras, thou ivast to be loved., etc. Future, And so on. { amandus ero, / shall have to be loved. amandus eria, thou wilt have to be loved, etc. 3. The agent is expressed in the passive periphrastic conjugation by the dative : as, Parentes nobis amandi s\mt. Our parents should be loved by us. 4. The passive periphrastic conjugation is generally used to trans- late the English should, ou^ht, must (expressing obligation) ; as, Ex civitate pellendi sunt. They must be banished. 46 LATIN PkOSE composition. f't t: H When the veil) in English is active, the object becomes the sub- ject in Latin, and the subject becomes the dative of the agent : as. Aqua mihi bibenda est. / must drink water { — water must be drunk by me). 5. Intransitive verbs and verbs that govern the genitive, the dative, or the ablative, must be used impersonally in the passive periphrastic conjugation : as, Nobis eundum' est. We must go ( = it must be gone by us). Omnibus moriendum est. All must die. Civibus a te consulendum est. You should consult the interests of the citizens. Inimicis a nobis parcendum est. We must spare our enemies. Utendum est iudicio a te. You must use your judgment. Dixit tibi credendum esse. He said that you should be believed (lit., that it must be believed to you). Note. — When a verb does not govern the accusative, the agent (to avoid ambiguity) is expressed in the passive periphrastic con- jugation by a (or ab) with the ablative. This appears from the above examples. 6. With do (give), trade (hand over\ euro (take care of)^ loco (let out a contract)., conduce (take a contract)^ the gerundive is used for the English infinitive : as, Terram habitandam dat. He gives them the land to diuell it?, Pontem faciendum ciu-at. He has (or gets) a bridge built. Exercise XXII. T Translate ^* should " ** ought" and ^^ must" by the Gerundive. I. You ought to have advanced your friends to offices. 2. He did not know what ought to be done. 3. Do you think that he should sell his house? 4. We must spare those who resist us. 5. He has come in order to help his friends. 6. He has promised to ' Tliis idiom is also explaiiieLK. 47 es the siib- : agent : as, ter must be enitive, the the passive by us). 'he interests • enefutes. nent. be be/ieved hand over this bridge to us to guard. 7. You should consult the interests of the state. 8. The citizen mr.st obey the magistrate. 9. He said that it was both hard to do and liard to tell. 10. The army marched to the river for the purpose of fighting the Gauls, ti. Am I to answer them or not.'' 12. He said that he must find the book that he had lost. 13. Tell us when you formed the plan of selling the house. 14. They say that the baggage ought to be left in tlie camp. 15. They have come here for the sake of learn- ing something about the city. 16. He won glory by aiding the poor and sparing the vanquished. 17. He oUght to have been loved on account of his goodness. 18. We must go to the harbor to see the ships. 19. Don't you think we ought to obey the law? 20. He used to say that the art of conducting the government was a diffi- cult (one). the agent rastic con- ffom the ? of)^ loco rundive is loell iff. lilt. 2. He k that he st us. 5. )mised to Eundiun §23. THE PARTICIPLE. 1. The participle has partly the nature of a verb and partly that of an adjective. Hence the name (pars and capio). Like a verb, it has voice, tense, and number, and governs the same case as the verli from which it is formed ; like an adjective it has declension and gender, and agrees with nouns. 2. Apart from the geriuidive (explained p. 43), transitive verbs have in Latin three participles: {(X) \ present participle active: as, zxa'axis,, loving. {b) k Jut me participle active : as, amaturus, (/(^^j/// A^ Avrr. {c) k perfect participle passive: as, amatus, ^t'^v/, having been loved. 3. The Latin participle is used to express an English clause in- troduced by Tt'/zf, zuhen, lohile., as, if, though, because: as, Non parcimus resistentibus. ll'^e do not spare those who resist us. Epistola ad me scribentem venit. The letter came to me when (while, as) I was writing. I' ]\- III ■f M H ^ 1 i 1 \: i 1 ■U 48 LATIN PROSR COMPOSITION. Eis vel morientibus non ignoscet- Ne ivill not forgive /hem, even though (if) they are dying. Caesar, haec veritus, suos eduxit. Caesar, because he 7vaing beeii heard : as, Hac re audita, abiit. TJiis fact Jun'ing I>een heard, he departed. The use of the perfect participle passive as a perfect participle active is a common elementary mistake. SUI5STITUTE FOR PERFECT PARIICII'EE ACIIVE. 9. How then shall we translate Hai'ing iakoi the city} \\y the perfect participle passive in the ablative absolute' : as, Urbe capta, rediit. Hai'ifig taken the city, he returned. Note. — The absence of a perfect partici])le actixo accounts for the frequent use in Latin of the ablative absolute. 10. The ]iresent participle active, when used — as it is so cojii- nion/y in Jing/ish — for the past participle, must be translated by the pel f. part, of a deponent or by one of the substitutes for the perf part. act. Thus : Leaving home, he came to Athens. Domo profectus, Athenas venit. , ■- Having Jieard this, Jic departed. Quo audi to, abiit. JfS'^' Proflciscens would mean ivhiie leaving; audiens, 7vhile hear- ing. In fact it is a good rule never to use a present participle in the nominative in Latin, unless you can put I'.'Iii/e before the participle in English. 11. A demonstrative pronoun can not be joined, as in English, to the participle. Thus : Those doing this, wi/l be punished, is Qui hoc facient, poenas dabvint (not il facientes). See paragraph 5 above. ' Other substitutes will be mentioned fut tlier on. Thus : Quum Urb6m Cepisset, and postquaUi urbem cepit, are both common forms for iiaving taken the city. n no LATIN I'UOSK (;OMPOSITION. ' lli 12. The a^^eiU with tlic pcrf. part. pass, is frequently exprcssee long 1 noun) is noun : as, \e disaster •ity. words to over the hole line. to Africa. though * It he will g heard wn into II. Let Receiv- feated * ly*. 15. |my com- 17. The 11 attack mined to § 24. VKSiTlOWlSSi.— (Continued), The Ablative Absolute. 1. The case absolute in Latin — as has been said — is the ablative ; and the ri/Vrz/m' absolute with a participle is one of the commonest of Latin idioms. The ablative absolute is used — as we have seen — as a substitute for the perfect participle active (which is wanting) and also for trans- lating the English present participle active when used — as it fre- (juently is — for the perfect participle active. Thus : Having heard t/iis^ he suddenly returned to the camp. Hoc audito, ad castra subito rediit (abl. abs. used for perf. part. act. of avidio). Taking the citadel, Caesar entered the city, Caesar, arce capta, urbem intravit (abl. abs. for the English present part. act. used as a perf. part. act.). 2. The ablative absolute is also constantly used to express an English main clause 'or a clause (or phrase) of time^ cause^ condi- tion, concession, or attendant circumstance: as, TJiey charged and defeated them. Impetu facto, eos vicerunt (abl. abs. for main clause). Caesar, ivhcn he had learned tins, returned to the senate-house. Caesar, hoc cognito, ad curiam rediit (time). Though everything is lost, courage remains. Perditis omnibus rebus, virtus manet (concession). 6S tAtm proSe composition. i As the general had been killed^ they fled. Imperatore interfecto, dilTugerunt (caubc). Note. — The ablative absolute is always placed at or near the be- ginning of the sentence. It should not inchide more than a noun and participle, or a noun, participle and object : as, Me haec verba dicente, abilt. As {while) I ^vas saying these 7vords, he went away. 3. The ablative absolute must introduce a new subject. Thus : The enemy, as they were retreating, laid waste the land. Hostes, se recipientes, agros vastabant (not hostibus se recipientibus). ManliuSy having killed a Gaul, spoiled him. Manlius Galium caesum spoliavit (not caeso Gallo, eum spoliavit). The abl. abs. would here be wrong because the nouns (hostes and Galium), which would naturally be in the abl. abs., are required in the sentence, one in the nom. and the other in the ace. 4. As the verb sum has no present participle, a noun in the ablative absolute is often joined predicatively to an adjective or an- other noun : as, Vivis fratribus. /;/ his brother^ life-time (i.e., his brothers being alive). Salvia legibus. Without violatioti of the laws (i.e., the laws safe). Te duce. U?ider your command (you being leader). Te invito. Against your will (you being unwilling). Re infecta. Without success (the thing being undone). Duce non exspectato. Without waiting for a guide. 5. The following uses of the ablative absolute should be noticed : Brute consule. /;/ the cofisulship of Brutus. Suadente Gaio. By the advice of Gaius. Adiuvantibus Gallia. With the assistance of the Gauls. Te non adiuvante. Without your assistance. Caesare necato. After the killing of Caesar. Te repugnante. In spite of your opposition. 6. It will be seen, then, that the Latin ablative absolute repre- sents in English (a) a principal verb, (b) a perfect participle active, 1 ei i se ■ ■ * s\ ^ hi ■i.i THE PARTICIPLE. 53 terfecto, r the be- 1 a noun ec verba /// away. Thus : Hostes, ibus). i Galium ►stes and juired in n in the ve or au- rs being \ws safe). (c) a present participle active when used for the perfect participle active, (tt) a clause be^innin^^ with when^ 7i>/tile, though, if etc., {e) adverbial phrases of manner or attendant circumstance. Care should be taken in translating Latin, to turn the ablative absolute idiomatically (i.e., into the proper English equivalent) \ this will soon make the student familiar with its main uses. EXKRCISK XXIV. The asterisk * shcnvs where the al>lative absolute should used. I. After* wasting the land, they returned. 2. On '''■ the receipt of the letter, he left the city. 3. The money was paid in * my pres- ence. 4. They came to Italy, I believe, during * the reign of Romulus. 5. Will he go away without '^ consulting any one.'' 6. The enemy were "*'■ disturbed by our arrival and we immediately attacked the camp. 7. On * the defeat of their army, the city sur- rendered. 8. When "''■ he had spoken thus, the ambassadors with- drew. 9. He promised not to fight against * my will. 10. When* the war is ended, we shall restore our prisoners. / 11. He was un- willing, in the absence of* the first legion, to join battle 12. This victory he gained with * very few wounded. 13. He called * his friends together and killed himself. 14. A gate * was opened and they sallied forth. 15. He called the merchants together and consulted them. 16. They set out when * the winter was not yet ended. 17. On * the approach of summer they begin to sail the sea. 18. He ought to have told us when he would return. 19, I should have restored you the money. 20. I am afraid that many have been persuaded. loticed : repre- active, § 25. VK£C^IQ1'^'IS^~( Continued). Active Periphrastic Conjugation. 1. The future pariieifle active is used to express futurity or intention: as, Plura locuturos dimisit. When they were about to say more., he dismissed them. Venio agros vlsurvis / come to see the fields. 54 LATIN PROSE COMrOHITION. ■ill !!-■ I II! 2. From the fiit. part. act. and the verb sum, is formed a whole conjiij^ation called the active periphrastic conjugration. 'riuis : Amaturus sum. / dfii about io loi'e for / intend to loi'e). Amaturua eram (ful). / ivas about to love {ox I intended to love). And so on. Note. — This conjugation— as has been seen— supplies the j)la(:e of the future subjunctive active, which is wanting : as, Rogo quid facturus sis. I ask ivhat you will do. (Primary sequence). Rog-avi quid facturus esses. / asked what you would do. (Secondary setjuence ; §11,2). Exercise XXV. I. They will tell you when they intend to come. 2. They asked him why he was going to betray the country. 3. He said that it was easy to do. 4. Ask them what they are going to do al)out it. 5. I intended to ask him what kind of people they were. 6. 1 doubted whether he would ever drink it. 7. Shall we ask them what o'clock it is.-* 8. He said he would come with me to find the rest. 9. Do not forget why you have come here. 10. He used to say that the ox had been given us for the sake of ploughing the fiekls. 11. I be- lieve that they took the city and set it on fire (use part.). 12. Shall we ask him whether he is ready or not? 13. He used to say that judges should favor nobody. 14. When you have done your \vox\^{abl. abs.), you must help me. 15. Do not forget that I warned you not to come. 16. He said that, in his judgment, it was not suit- able weather for sailing. 17. The river wi' . '"ep that no one could cross. 18. To my (piestion whet'ter bis father had returned, he answered No. 19. You should ave delayc there so long agamst the will of your father. 20. er tho capture of the city, he put all the magistrates to the sword. TIIK INFINITIVK. 65 a whole liiis : to love). le place (g-o quid ■)• uld do. y asked I lliat it bout it. tloubted t o'clock 9. Do hat the I . I be- 12. to say le your warned ot suit- no one urned, so long le city, §26. THE INFINITIVE. 1. The infinitive is properly a neuter noun and is often therefore used as the subject or object of a verb : as, Humanuni eHt errare. To err is /iuphoh. MultiH cliHplicet totum hoc philosophari. Al/ this f^hiloscphis- inj^' (/ispli'iiSL's PhiNV. Meum est parere. // is mine to obey. Invidere morbum appellat. lie udls efn'yint:^ f. ind.., the perf. (both present and indefinite ; § 11, i), and the pluperfect. Thus: are afraid. used to sleep every day. ivill die. Juive arri'^'ed. arrived yesterday. had fie d before he came. timere (for timent : actual words used). quotidie dormiisse (for dormiebant). morituros esse (or fore) (for morientur, they wik. die). advenisse (for advenerunt, they Iiave come). heri advenisse (for heri advenerunt, tJuy came yes- terday). fugisse priusquam venerit (for fugerant, they had fled). 7- The tense of the infinitive alter a verl) of saving or thin/a'm^ in the past tense, causes more difficulty (see § 3); but the rule is the same as the above : 77ie tense of the infnitive is present, past, or future, accordimr as t/ie tense used in the actual loords is present, past, or future. Thus : He said that snoia was White. Dixit nivem esse albam (actual words : nix alba est.) He said that he was a young man once. Dixit se dim adoles- centem fuisse (actual words: olim adolescens eram, 1 7oas a young fnan once). Dicit eos THE INFINITIVE. 67 with in- ing must on (p. 4, rf. (both hey wtic ). ■inie ycs- 'hey had adoies- yoiing He said that they nvotdd not forgive. Dixit eo3 non ignotxiros (actual words : non ignoscent, they will not forgive. They said that lie bequeathed the kingdom to his :on. Dixerunt eum Alio regnvun legavisse (actual wo'-ds : Alio reguum legavit.) He knew that the city had been fortified. Scivit urbem munitam esse (actual words : urbs munita est, the city has been fortified:) He said that they had fled before the Romans arrived. Dixit eos fugisse priusquam Romani advenissent (actual words : fugerant priusquom Romani advenerunt, they had fled before the Romans arrived.) 8. An infinitive to correspond to the future-perject active is formed from futurum esse (or fore) and ut with the perfect sub- junctive : as, Dicit fore tit ceciderit. He says that he shall have falle7i (actual word: ceddero). Dixit fore ut cecidisset. He said that he should have fallen (§11,2.) 9. An infinitive corresponding to the pluperfect indicative pas- sive is formed from the perfect participle passive and fuisse: as, He says tit at the city had bee?i attacked before the king arrived. Dicit urbem oppugnatam fuisse priusquam rex advenerit (actual words : urbs oppugnata erat, the city had been attacked). 10. An infinitive corresponding to the future-perfect of de. ponent or passive verbs is formed ft-om Ihe perfect participle and fore: as, He said that the war %vould soon be finished. Dixit debellatum mox fore (actual words : debellatum mox erit, the war will soon be finished. ) !!■ When a verb has no supine„fo»'e (or futurum esse) ut with the subjunctive is used as the infinitive for the future, active or passive (see p. ;-56, 9) : as, / hope that it 7Vtll happen to us. Spero fore ut contingat id nobis. / hoped that it would happen to us. Speravi fore ut contingeret id nobis. He says that this will be demanded, Dicit fore ut hoc poscatur. n 68 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. ^:|^H 5 Sj ■ * - 1 ■ ! 1 Ne said that that would be demanded. Dixit fore ut illud pos- ceretur. 12. Memini, I remember^ is used with the present infinitive (and not the perfect) of a past event within the knowledge of the per- son referred to : as, Memini te hoc dicere. / remember that you said this (direct : dicebas). Meministis Tiberim corporibus compleri. You remember thai Tiber was filled with bodies. 13. For verbs followed by an infinitive in English ahd an ut- clause in Latin, see § 9. 14. For the infinite of purpose^ see p. 43, 9, note. 15. The accusative with infinitive is used to express indignation or surprise. It is called the infinitive of exclamation. The inter- rogative -ne is frequently added to the first word, as if the sentence were interrogative in form : as, Mene abiisse, nullo salutato. To think that 1 should have gone away., without saying farewell to anyone! Note. — The accusative alone is often used in the same way. It is called the accusative of exclamation: as, Me miserum. Wretch that I am! OI contiimeliosum honorem. What an insulting hottor! Exercise XXVI. I. He believes that the city will have been captured. 2. He said that in this way I would have gained the crown. 3. To think that I should have been so unlucky ! 4. He determined to compel us to fight. 5. He used to say that it was base to deceive. 6. Ho thought that it was sweet to die for one's country. 7. When he had encouraged the soldiers (p. 47, 3), he ordered them to advance. 8. To live honorably is to live happily. 9. Ought I not to send a messen- ger to warn the consul ? 10. To think that I should be here and you in Italy! 11. I was not so foolish as to tell him everything (p. 14, 4). 12. I believe that he will gladly learn it. 13. I remem- ber hearing that he died in his own house. 14. I hoped that he would recover (convalesce). 15. He used to say that it vva.'j THE GENITIVE. ^ , 59 better to give than to receive. i6. It is said that he was the wisest of all who lived at that time, 17. He had long been anxious to know the truth. 18. 1 should like to know your reason fordoing this. 19. He asked me to get the field ploughed (p. 46, 6). 20. He thought (that) the city had been taken before that time. Note. — T/tat, after an English verb of saymg or thinking, is sometimes omitted. M §27. THE GENITIVE. 1. One noun in the genitive is added to another to express pos- session or cause : as, Romanorum naves. The ships of the Romans. Iniuriae Gallorum. 77/1? wrongs done by the Cauls. Note I. — This genitive usually stands before the noun it governs and, if there is an adjective with the noun, the genitive stands be- tween the two, in order to give compactness to the phrase : as, Pulchra regis fllia. The beautiful daughter of the king. Note 2. — The genitive of possession may often be used for an English adjective: as, Corporis TO\i\xx^ bodily strength : regis exer- citus, the royal army. Note 3. — In phrases like ad Vestae {to the temple of Vesta); ad Apollinis {to the temple of Apollo\ the possessive genitive is used with the governing noun templxun or aedem understood. 2. The possessive genitive is usad with sum, / am^ in the sense of to belong to*: as, Hie versus Pfauti non est. This verse is 7Wt Plautus's. Summae est dementiae. // is the height of madness. This genitive may often be translated by a noun like part^ mark, characteristic^ duty, etc. : as, Stulti est In errore perseverare. // is the mark of a fool to persist in error. Imperare Caesaris est. // is Caesar's business to command. 60 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. I I !; 1 ; ■4! 1 1 ^ Note. — The possessive pronoun is used, however, instead of the genitive of the personal : as, Tuum est parere. // t's yoifr business to obey {not tul est). PARTITIVE GENITIVE. 3. The genitive, as in English, denotes the whole of which a part is taken : as. Magna exercitus pars. A great part of the army. Gallorum fortissimi sunt Belgae. The Belgae are the bravest of the Gauls. This is called the partitive genitive. The governing word usually expresses number or amount : as, Multi vestrum. Many of you. Quid novi? What ?te'wsf (lit., ivhat of new?) This genitive is coramon after eatis (enough)^ nimis (too much)., pd.runi (too little), nihil (none), aliquid (some), tantum {so much), quantum {hoiu much) : as. Satis eloquentiae, sapientiae parum. Enough eloquence, too little wisdom. It is also found after adverbs of place : as, Ubi gentivun? Where iti the world? Eg stultitiae venit. He has reached such a pitch of folly (lit., come thither of folly). Note. — Nostrum and vestrum (not nostri and vestri) are used with partitives for of us and of you: as, Uterque nostrum. Each of us two. But Memor nostri fuit, he was mindful of us. 4. The partitive 'genitive must not be used in the following cases : {a) To express the English of, where there is no partition implied: as, Nos omnes, all of us ; tota. Asia., the 7i>hole of Asia ; nos trecenti venimus. three hundred of us have come. (b) With an adjective of the 3rd decl. : as, Nihil turpe, nothing base (not turpis). I J i THE GENITIVE. •1 (c) After a preposition : as, Ad multam noctem, /o a late hour of the jiight (not ad multum). {d) If the governing word is in any case but the nominative or accusative: as, Tanta pecunia, at so much money (not tanto pecuniae.) {e) After words like top^ bottom^ tfiiddle, etc., which are expressed by adjectives in agreement : as, E summo monte, from the top of the hill; medio in foro, in the middle of the forum : ad imam quercum, to the foot of the oak; reliquae copiae, the rest of the forces ; primum ver, the beginning of spring ; in extreme Mbro, at the end of the book. m i'M Exercise XXVI I. I. He was the only one who escaped of all the Greeks. 2. They said that you could see stars from the bottom of a well. 3. Let us ask him whether he got this much (tantum) profit out of it. 4. I know which of you two is favored. 5. Hon't you see how much glory you have lost ? 6. He used to say that no one ever thought that he had too much money. 7. He used to say that everybody thought he had wisdom enough. 8. Don't you think that it is the part of a judge to obey the laws "i 9. Ask him if this house belonged to his excellent father. 10. They said that all of the cities belonged to their empire, ir. Is it not the duty of children to obey their parents.? 12. To love riches is the mark of a small mind. 13. They have gone away to receive the beautiful gifts of the queen. 14. I believe that there is much good and nothing mean in the man. 15. You do not know how much pleasure you will receive. 16. I believe that his friends — of whom he has Tery many — saved him. 17. They were so grateful that they built an altar in the middle of the city. 18. Let us come to the living, two of whom are left. 19. Tell me which of you two came first. 20. May we never reach such a pitch of misery J I : 62 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 28. GENITIVE OF QUALITY. 1. A noun in the genitive is added to another to express a quality; as, Vir summi ingenii, a man of iJw hi i!;hcsf ability. The ablative is used to express a quahty in much the same way, except perhaps that the genitive denotes rather permanent qualities, the ablative external and accidental ones: as, Vir Icngris crviribus, a matt with long legs (or a long-legged man). Note. — Quantify and amount are expressed by this genitive: as, Agger viginti pedvim, a numnd of twenty feet high; puer decern annorum, a boy of te?t years. 2. Neither the genitive nor the ablative of quality can be used without an adjective. Thus: A jnan of courage, vir fortis (or vir summae fortitudinis ; not vir fortitudinis.) Note. — When the corresponding adjective is wanting, praeditus {endo7ved with) is used with the simple ablative : as, Vir virtute praeditus. A mafi of valor. SUBJECTIVE AND OBJECTIVE GENITIVE. 3. A genitive is used, with nouns derived from verbs, to denote the subject of the verb implied in the governing noun : as Morsus canis. The bite of a dog. Here canis repiesents the subject of the verb mordeo (bite) implied in morsus. (See p. 59, i). A genitive is also used, with nouns derived from verbs, to denote the object of a verb implied in a governing noun : as, Timor mortis. The fear of death. Here mortis represents the object of timeo (1 fear), implied in timor. Thus, propter mortis timorem=quod timeo mortem (be- cause I fear death). This is called the objective genitive. The objective genitive may represent even a dative case or the object of a preposition : as, THE GENITIVE. 63 Literarum studiura. Zeal for I Herat lire — (where the jj^en. rep- resents the object of studeo, am zealous for). Aditus laudis, an avenue to honor (from adire ad laudem). So too : Fiducia virium, confidence in strength. Consenaio omnium rerum, agreement in everything. Dissensio reipublicae, disagree' nient on politics. Contentio honorum, a struggle for office, GENITIVE OF PRICE. 4. The price at which a thin^^ is bouglit or sold is expressed by the genitive, when the price is stated indclinitely : as Magni, at a great price. Parvi, at a small price. Tanti, at so great a price. Quanti, at how great a price. Pluris, at a greater price. Minoris, at a less price. Maximi or plurimi, at the greatest price. Minimi, at the least price. Quanti id vendit? At what price doe's he sell it? Minoris decumae venierunt. The tithes sold at a lower figure [veneo, to be sold, from venum, to sale (adverbial acc.)4-eo, to go\ Note. — When the price is definitely stated, it is expressed by the ablative : as, Emit domum duobus talentia et pluris, /le bought a house at two talents and more. GENITIVE OF DEFINITION. 5. A genitive is often added to a noun, to limit or define it: as, Virtus iustitiae. The virtue of justice. Haec vox voluptatis. This word ''^pleasure." Nomen insaniae. The word ^''madness". This is called the genitive of definition. GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES. 6. Adjectives are followed by a genitive when they express ^/f;//)/ and want or contain a verbal notion: as, 1 : fc I i 64 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION, Plenus avium. Full of birds, Bationis expers. DcsUtutc of reason. Patlens laboris. Capable of {enduring) labor. Consciua recti. Conscious of rectilude. Impotens sui. Powerless over onc''s self. Tenax propositi. Tenacious of purpose. Cupidus contentionis. Longing for contention. luris peritus. Skilled in law. Spei egenus. Destitute of hope. Imperii capax. Capable of comnicmd. Note I. — A present part'ciple, when it loses all idea of time and simply expresses a fixed quality, governs the genitive : as, Amans patriae, dcToted to /lis country ; nppetens g-loriae, desirous of glory j patiens laboris, capable of enduring labor (as opposed to patiens laborem, while enduring labor). It is, in that case, compared like an ordinary adjective. Note 2. — Similis (//i^"^), dissimilis {unlike\ andproprius {peculiar to), are followed by the genitive and (more rarely) the dative : as, Similis sui, like one's self; virorum proprium, peculiar to men. Similis and dissimilis seem to be used with the genitive of internal likeness (character etc.) ; with the dative, of external likeness (form etc.) Exercise XXVIII. I. I am afraid he thinks that life is full of care. 2. He used to say that this city was eager for revolution. 3. Tell me whether this fault is peculiar to old men. 4. Do you think that we shall have gained an escape from labor? 5. 1 believe that this hunger for gold has been the cause of many evils. 6. Do not ask them to sell at a lower price. 7. He should have had some gratitude for kindness. 8. I o not forget that he has the strongest love for his friends. 9. I was afraid that he valued the safety of the country less (say at less) than his own. 10. O ! that he had been more like you. 1 1. I have never known a man of such ability as he is. 12. Where shall we find a man of greater sense "^ 13. Nothing prevented him from becoming a leader of experience. 14. He used to say that men of authority were rare. 15. So great was the rejoicing that a ttlE GENITIVE WITH VKKM. 65 thanksgiving of fifteen clays was decreed. i6. I believe that snakes of vast size are found in the island of Cyprus. 17. Cato used to say thai a useless thing was dear at a penny. iS. Do not buy at so high a price a useless thing. 19. I forgot to say that he sold the house for five talents. 20. Tell us at how great a pi ice this ship will be sold. §29. THE GENITIVE WITH VERBS. 1. Verbs meaning to accuse, condemn^ and aajuit, take the ac- cusative of the person and the genitive of the thing : as, Accusat me furti. He accuses Die of theft. Repetundarum damnatus est- He was condemned for extortion (lit., things that should be recovered; supply rerum), Sacrilegii absoluta est. She loas acquitted of sacrilege. Note. — The punishment, after such verbs as the above, is ex- pressed in the genitive or (nioie commonly) the ablative : as, Morte damnatus est. He was condemned to dciith. Capitis (or capite) damnatus est. He was capita fly comfenined (caput, a man's poli- tical rights.) 2. Verbs nicaning to roni/id, >rmember, forget, ov pity, take the genitive : as, Me beneflcii sui admonebat. He reminded me of his kindness. Note. — Admoneo may also take the ace. of a ii^,.cer pronoun: as, Hoc nos admc let. He reminds us of this. Huis diei semper meminero. / shall always remember this day. OfiQcii ne obliviscaris. Do not forget your duty. Miserere nostri. Pity us. Note I. — Instead of memini, / remember, the phrase Mihi in mentem venit (// comes into my mind), may be used with the gen- itive : as, Mihi in mentem venit eius diei, / recollect that day, 6 m M LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. Note 2. — Miser-eor, -eri, tus (or -Itus) sum is I pity; but miseroP, •ari, -atus sum, / deplore^ bewail: as, Casum nostrum miseratur, he bewails our misjortunc. 3. The five following impersonal verbs, expressing emotions, take the accusative of the person feeling, and the genitive of the source of the emotion : Miseret, piget, poenitet, pudet, taedet : as, Miseret me tui. I pity you (lit., it fills mc "a'ith pity for you). Me non solum poenitet stultitlae sed etiam pudet. 1 am not only sorry for my folly but even ashamed of it. Notice the phrase Non solum sed etiam, not only — but also. Me fratris et piget et taedet. / am annoyed at and disgusted with my brother. Credo eos huius belli poenitere. I belieiie that they are sorry fortius war (lit., that it repents them for). Note. — These five verbs respectively express to fill with^//j/, an- noyance.^ sorrow^ shanie^ or disgust. They are all transitive. Thus : Eum facti nee poenitet nee pudet, he feels neither remorse nor shame for his act. INTEREST AND REFERT. 4. Interest and refert, it is of importance (or consequence) to., it concerns^ take a peculiar construction. If the person to whom it is of importance is expressed by a noun, the genitive of the noun is used ; if by a personal pronoun, the ablative sing, feminitie of the corresponding possessive adjective : as, Regis interest. // is of iinportance to the king. But Mea, tua, sua, nostra, vestra. interest. // concertis me^ you (sing.), Jum, us, you (pi.) [einB- hitn her., not referring to the sub- ject of a sentence ; p. 7, i]. The degree of importance is expressed by a neuter adjective, an adverb, or a genitive of price : as, Multum (or magni) eius interest. // is of great importance., it makes a great difference, to him. Nihil eorum interest. // is of no importance to them. Plus Interest. // is of more importance. THE OKNITIVE WITH VEKBS. 67 rh an 5. Interest and refert may have as a subject an infinitive, an ut- clause, a ijronoun, or an indirect question : as, Omnium interest bene vivere. // t's for tlw interest of all to live ivell. Multum interest ut copiae nostrae conveniant. // is oj inuch importance that our forces should assemble. Non possum dicere quantum intersit. / can not say how impor- tant it is. Nihil interest quot sitis. It makes no difference how many you are. Exercise XXIX. I. Do not forget the poor. 2. Is it not the proof of a good man to remember the poor? 3. He was withm a little of being con- demned to exile. 4. Everybody accuses the general of rashness and is tired of this war. 5. It makes a great difference to us whether they are innocent or not. 6. O ! that they had not accused him of impiety. 7. They are sorry for their fault. 8. Others feel neither shame nor sorrow for their folly. 9. He is said to have pitied his brother. 10. It is the mark of a mean mind to love wealth. 11. I am ashamed that you should say that it is not your part to obey. 12. It is of the utmost importance to a country that the men of the highest ability should take part in politics. 13. I forgot to say that they are sorry for their conduct. 14. Do not say that it makes no difference whether you learn or not. 15. I will ask him whether he thinks that it concerns our safety. 16. Is it a mark of folly to be sorry for one's sins? 17. Let us ask him when the captives will be pardoned. 18. It is for both your interest and mine that they should do this. 19. When the war was ended, all the soldiers were dismissed. 20. He said that it was of great importance not only to us but to you. 21. And so it happened that I was not present. 22. I remember allowing him to do it. 23. I am afraid this will remind them of death. \Vi '/ft \\\ T^ m Latin thosk compositiov. ij 30. THE DATIVE. 1. The dative is ck'iived from dare {j^nr\ because it often follows verbs oi gii'Uig : as, Da mlhl aliquid. GtTr uic soiiir/ZiiNi^. {Me here is for to ;;/<•, and is called the indirect ol)ject). So : Suadere alicui, gnic aih'icc to some opie^ and aiixiliari alicul gk'C aid to sonic one, 2. The dative, as a rule, may be used for the English to or for: as, Modum pone irae. Set a limit to anger. Non mihi sed meis. Not for myself but for my friends. 3. The dative is used with sum, / nm^ in the sense of to belong to., to /i(n>e : as, Est tibi liber. } ^oii have a book. Est tibi nomen Marcus. Your name is Marcus. Note. — Instead of the nominative, in the last example, the dative (Marco) or the genitive (Marci) may be used. 4. Ttie dative is used for the English from., after verbs meaning to take aioay : as, Earn morti eripuit. He sfuxtched her front death. 5. The dative of a personal pronoun is used idiomatically of a person remotely interested in a statement : as, At tibi subito Racilius venit. Z.'///, / tell you., suddenly came Racilius. An ille mihi liber, cui mulier imperat? Shall I call him free whom a woman commands? (lit., to nw^ in my opinion). This is called the ethic dative. 6. The dative is also used idiomatically where we should expect and use a genitive : as, Pompeio ad pedes se proiecere. They threw themselves at Pompeys feet. TIIK DATIVK. 60 7. Instead of the usual a (or ab) with the ablative, the dative is use I of the agent after a passive verb, in the foUowin^^ cases : {a) With the_i,'V77///r/m' (p. 45, 3). {!)) With the prr/nf pariiciftlc passim' (p. 50, r 2). 8. A dative is added to certain verbs (especially sum, do. habeo. venlo, mitto) to express the purpose or design i)f the action t)f the verl) ■ as, Cul bono est? To a'lioin is it useful .' (lit., for a goo(f). Hoc mihi culpae d6clit. //<' s,t t/ii\' (foic/i to iiie as a fault. Nobis Huxilio venient. Tiiey loill cotne to our aid (lit., for an aid to us). This is called the datitw (f purpose. 9. Adjectives and adverbs expressinj,^ usefulness^ ease, nearness, li/ceness or the opposite (usually followed by to or for in Knglish), are usually followed by the diitive in Latin : as, Utilis reipiiblicae. Useful to the country. Tibi facilia, nobis difflcilis. Easy for you., difficult for us, Patri similis. /.//•,■ Iiis fatJicr {i.e., in appearance). Note. — Similis takes the genitive when it expresses likeness of character (p. 64, note 2). Locus urbi propinquus. A place near the city. Convenienter naturae vivit. J/e lives agreeably to nature. Note I. Propior (nearer), and proximus (nearest), often take the ace. ; prope, propius, proxime, always : as, Prope te sedet, he is sitting near you. Note 2. — Adjectives expressing /"///rj-j- are followed by ad (with ace.) rather than by a dative: as. Ad bellum grerendum aptus, fit for carry i)ig on ivar. So too, natus {born), paratus {ready) and rudis {inexperienced). Note 3. — Many adjectives are followed by in, erg-a, or adversus, toiuards^ to: as, Acer in hostem, benignus erga amicos, fierce to the (,nemy, kind to friends. ,'.V. I Ft?W^ 70 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. Cornet usage in this, as in other respects, can only be learned frciTi a study of the Latin writers. Exercise XXX. I. He shall pay me the penalty. 2. I will tell h:m that all should hare done it. 3. I must make provision for the safety of the country. 4. I was afraid that they would become unfriendly to us. 5. Don't you think that he is unlike himself .f* 6. Ask him why he is so disagreeable to us. 7. I am ashamed that he is not better fitted for the work. 8. O ! that they had a cottage near the sea. 9. Nothing can prevent him from being hostile to the multitude. 10. They were so savage (acer) at him that he dared not visit the city. I r. Let us ask him whether he will show us the way or not. 12. It is of the utmost importance to our safety that you should be friendly to the country. 13. He used to say that it was the lot of all to err (p. 59, 2). 14. Did they not think that he was a mean-minded man.? (p. 62, i). J 5 O ! that this had never occurred to his mind. 16. I believe that he pscd to be very kind to us. 17. He used to say that the sea was destruction (p. 69, 8) to sailors. 18. Ask them to stay in order to be a protection to the city. 19. He said that their ship was now a hindrance to them. 20. A man of honor will never be persuaded to betiay the country. f. \h §31. DATIVE WITH VERBS. 1. Sum, / c?;//, and its compounds (except possum, / n/ji able) are followed by th.e dative : as. Est mihi liber. / Jiave a book. Amici non tibi desunt. Friend's are not lackim^ to you. Proelio interfuit. He took part in tJie battle. 2. Mosl impersonal verl36 are followed by the dative : as, Mihi lic3t et expedit. // is alloived me and expedient for inc. So too : libet (it pleases), accidit and contingit (it happens\ liquet (it is clear )^ convenit (it is agreed upon). DATIVE WITH VERBS. 71 3. Verbs compounded with bene, male, satis, are followed by a dative : as, Optimo viro maledixit,. He reviled a most cxccllenf man. Mihi nunquam satisfecit. He never satisfied me. 4. Transiti\e verbs compounded with the prepositions ad, ante con (for cum), in, inter, ob (on^ against), post, prae (before), sub (under), or super {above), often govern an accusative of the direct and a dative of tho indirect object : as, Populus Roman as bellum Gallis intulit. The Roman people made war on the Gauls. Note.^In the passive the direct object of the active becomes the subject, while the indirect object is still retained : as, Bellum Gallis a populo Romano illatum est. II 'ar was made on the Gauls by the Roman people. 5. Intransitixe verbs compounded with tho above-mentioned prepositions, often govern the dative : as, Caesar exercitui praefuit, Caesar commanded the army. Consiliis consulis obstat. He opposes the plans of the consul. 6. The following is a useful list of verbs (other than those men- tioned) that govern a dative : trust (of a person). "TedOk believe. fides confldo. faveo, Javor. pareo, obey. nubo, wed (of a woman). studeo, a)n zealous. vaco, have leisure. obsto, stand in the way. impero, command. suadeo, recommend. persuadeo, persuade. irascor, am angry. tempero, set bounds to, refrain, subvenio, aid. ig-nosco, pardon. servio, serine, in video, e/ivy. indulgeo, indulge. placeo, plea.se. displiceo, displease. repugno, oppose. hnmlneo, threaten. occurro, j)ieet. resisto, resist. noceo, hurt. medeor, heal. Ml h '■If m it'll J, 41 m BSPti^"'\ 72 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. j ■ ■ ii, I I t- 7. 'Hie following verbs differ in meaning according as they govern the dative oi- accusative : Consulere aliquem. Consult a person. Consulere alicui. Consult a pej'son^s interest. Prospicere aliqiiid. Foresee something. Prospicere alicui. Proi'ide for some one. Cavere (aliqviem). Be on one's guord against, Cavere (alicui). Consult interest of. Moderari (aliqiiem). Govern {some one). Modei-ari (alicui rei). Set limits to {some tiling). 8. The verbs Aono{gi7>e) and circumdo (surround) have a double construction. 'I hus : He surrounds the city with a wall. Urbera muro (abl.) circum dat, or Urbi mururr. circumdat. 77iey give him a. erown. Eum corona (abl.) don* i.t , ijr Ei (d-it.) coronani donant. 9. The following idiomatic uses of the dative with verbs should be noticed : Mortem alicui minari. To threaten a perum ivith death. Pecuniaui alicui imperare. To demand money from a person. Aliquid alicui probare. Justify a- thing to a person. Aliquid alicui suppeditare. To supply one loith something. Hunc tibi antepono. I pj'efer this man to you. Hunc tibi posthabeo. / prefer you to this man (lit., / reckon this nuxn ajter you). 10. \'erbs that govern a dati\e can not be used personally in the passive ; tlie\- are still joined with a dative, but must be used im- personally : as, Nemini a te invidetur. No one is envied hy you. Dicit divitibus invideri. Jfe says that the rich are envied {\\i., that it is envied to the rich.) Ne illi quidem nocetur. A7^/ e7'e/i he is injured. Note. — Obser\-e the Latin for not e'X'en and that the emphatic ■word is placed between ne and quidem. "W....- .-, THE ABLATIVK. 73 'U ' Exercise XXXI. T, You do what pleases you. 2. It was a<;rced upon between (dat.) Balbus and me. 3. He said that what pleased me, pleased him. 4. He could not persuade me that he helped tlu; poor. 15. Will they not set so excellent a general as this at the head of the arniy.^ (p. 3, ^). 6. Ask them how it happened that no one was spared. 7. It is not the part of a good man to consult his own interest. iore sweetly than the nigJitingale. 4. Plus and amplius (jnore) and minus {less^, when joined with numerals, are indeclinable and do not affect the case of the word to which they are joined : as, Plus quing-enti capti sunt. More than fii'c hundred tvere taken. Minus septingentos occiderunt, TJiey killed less tJian seven hundred. Plus tertia parte interfecta, se receperunt. Afo^r thati a third part being slain^ they retreated. Plus annum tecum vixit. He lived with you more than a year. Here the case following the comparative is tlie same as if no com- parison were instituted. 5. Comparati\es are often joined with spe, opinione, exspecta- tione, iusto or aequo {right), solito (usual) : as, Serius spe omnium. Later tha?i all hoped. Celerius opinione venit. He canie sooner tJian was expected. Plus aequo. More than right. 6. An ablative is added to comparatives and superlatives to define the degree of difference : as, Multo me senior. Much older tJian /flit., by much), Paulo acrius. A little more sharply. So too : paulo ante, a little before j paulo post, a little later* 78 LATiNf IMtOSK (!()M POSITION. i Note. — The English tlic . . . . the with two comparatives (Anglo Saxon instrumental <:\\i>{irrzhy that . . . .hy that) is expressed by qtianto ....tanto {hy ho'-iO iniuh . . . Jyso iiiui/i)oY quo. .eo (/lyivhat . . . .hy that), with two comparatives: as, Quo quis melior est, eo beatior, the better one is, the happier Jte is. 7. To express phrases like //'//// more courage tlian success^ Latm uses two comparatives : as, Bellum fortius quam felicius gerit. He carries on war u>itli more courage iJian success. Magis eloquens quam sapiens est. He has more eloquence than wisdom. Note. — Pltis and amplius express amount, are used with a verb, and correspond to the comparative of inucJi ; magis expresses degree, is used with an adjective or adverb, and corresponds to the comparative of truly, iiiglily : as, Hoc magis idoneum est quam illud, tills is more suitable than that ; ilium plus amo quam te, / love him jnore thafi 1 do you. 8. Quam pro, with a comparative, is used to express dispro- portion : as, Proelium atrocius quam pro numero pugnantium. A battle more severe than might Juroe been expected from the number of combatants. 9. The Latin comparative has often the force of too, rather ; the superlative, the force of very : as, Liberius vivit. He lii'es too freely. Maximas copias armat. //(- equips very large forces. Note. — Quam is often added in this latter case to the superlative with or without possum, to express the highest possible degree : as, Exercitum quam proximo hostem (possum) habeo, / hai'e the army very near the enemy ; quam maximam vastitatem efficit, lie spreads the voidest possible devastation. 10. Phrases like Too great for may be expressed by the compara- tive and the ablative ; phrases like Too great to by the comparative and quam ut with the subjunctive : as, ABLATIVK OF COMPAKISON AND DIFFKIIKNCE. 70 tive as. Ampliores humano genere honores consectitus eat. He obtained ho)iors too ^reat for the human race. Maior fuit quam ut servus esset. He was too great to be a slave. ABLATIVE OF RESPECT. 11. An ablative is used to express that in respect to lohich a statement is true of the subject : as, Enniua arte rudis erat. /// respect to art, I\nniiis loas rude. Non tu tota I'e sed temporibus errasti. You were not wrong with respect to the whole mattery but i)i the dates. ABLATIVE OF PRICE. 12. The price at which a thinj^ is bought or sold is, when stated definitely, expressed by the ablative : as, Unam orationem vlginti talentis vendidit. He sold one oration for twenty talents. So too : Religionem pecunia mutavit. He changed his religion for money. For the genitive of price, see p. 63, 4. 13. For the ablative absolute ., see p. 51, i. Exercise XXXI 1 1. I. He is more spirited than you. 2. That speech was fitter for a public meeting than for a court. 3. The more one has, the better. 4. He helped no one more than me. 5. He has a larger house than I (have). 6. They say that he has been long lame in one arm. 7. I believe that in appearance the city is free. 8. Don't you think that a shameful flight is worse than death.'' 9. Do you think that he is wiser than we.'' 10. Do not grieve more than is just. II. He used to say that nothing was sweeter than the light of truth. 12. Is not necessity more powerful than art? 13. He is an old man in body; he will never be an old man in mind. 14. Do you think that life contains more joy (gen.) than sorrow. 15. I be- lieve that he might have been much happier than he was. 16. Shall we sell our native land for gold? 17. That victory cost them much blood. 18. On what terms does he teach? At a very small I nit V ' ili ill i 80 Latin vnn^K composition'. fee. U). Shall uc ^Mve liim less than them? 20. Is he not more like )()U than me.-' 21. 1 am atVaid that 1 c has become veiy unlike himself. 22. I heard that our men, al'tri- atiac kuij^ the place in vain, retreated to their ships. 23. It is so easy to do, th.at even 1 could luivc doni' it. 24. Advnneinj^ to the ji\cr as cpiiekl)' as jjos- sihle {(/i/(f/j/ + si//>ir/.), they attac ked us theie. 25. In the absence of the j^cneral, \er)' main' of the men deserted. 26. I believe that more th m a thousand men fell. 27. He h,id more kindness than wisdom. 28. He spoke with more spirit than sense. 29. The enemy are so many that we do not dare to j^o forth from the camp. 30. Where are the friends I had in the consulshi)) of I'lancus? 31. Who can tell us at what price the slave was sold.^ 32. It is of great consecpience to all that the house should be sold at the highest possible price (use qiKini). 33. I believe that they excel all other tribes in courage. 3J. He was too good to be put to death. 35. The figure was too large to be human. I a d §34. ABLATIVE WITH VERBS AND ADJECTIVES, 1. The verbs utor {iise)^ fruor {enjoy), fung-or {/)rr/ort/i\ potior {i^d/u), vescor {/i'i'(/ oji), dignor {iicc))i ivortJiy)^ and their com- pounds, are followed by the ablative : as, . Fungar vice cotis. / ivill perform tJic office of a whetstone. Viribus male utuntur. They make a bad use of /he/r streni^th. Note. — This ablati\e is really instrumental : thus utor = / busy myself with ; fruor = / enjoy myself with^ etc. 2. Verbs meaning to fill ivith (compleo) or aboiind in (abundo aflauo), are followed by an ablative without a preposition : as, Mundura hominibus complevit. lie iuis filled the world with me)i. AflQuit divitiis. He aboutuis in wealth. 3. Verbs meaning to be without, or to need, govern an abla- tive -.as, ai // al n ir 7t 01 AULATIVK WITH VKUHS AND AIUKOTIVES. 81 SeuMvi cai-ot. lie is dci'oid of fcclin^i^. Pane egot. ile is in need of /ireud. Note- Effeo and indigeo {fiiYi/), '^o\Q\n also a j^cnitisc : as Pecuniae indiget, /le is in need of nioney. 4. Opua est and \xsiis est {tJtere is need), take a (lati\(> of the person to whom and tlio ablative of the tliini^-. as, Quid tibi opus est verbis? // Jhtt need Iki-xh' you of loords? So : Opus est consulto, properato. 77iere is )ieed oi delihe)aiion^ haste. Note. — Opus may, however, take the accusative of a neuter i)ro- noun : as, Quod non opus est, asse carum est, iK>lint yon do not needy is dear at a penny. 5. The following verbs are also followed ])y an ablative : fido and confldo (re/y on), of a thinj^-, (see p. 71, 6); glorior (/>(>ast (>/'), doleo {/eel grief at), gaudeo {de/ig/it tn) : as, Natura loci confldit. He relies on tiie nature of the ground. Casu meo dolent. TJtey feel pain at my disaster. Note I. — These verbs may also take a neuter {)ronoun in the accusative: as, Hoc gloriatur, he niaJces this boast j id doleo, 1 feel this pain (see p. 38, 5). Note 2. — Fido and confldo take the dat. of the person, but the ablative of the thing: as, non tibi sed exercitu meo confldo, / do not trust in you but in my army. 6. The ablative is used after the adjectives dignus {worth v of), indignus {unworthy of), fretus {relying on), praeditus 'endowed with), f ontentus {content with) and plenus (full of) : as, Poena dignus. Worthy of punishnwnt. Pretus praesidio tuo. Relying on your protection. Virtute praeditus. Eiuiowed with courage. Plenus ira (or irae). Full of a?iger (sec p. 74 , 4). Exercise XXXIV. 1. Tell me why you performed this idle ofiTice. 2. Have you need of my protection? 3. I saw that the hill was destitute of men. 4. IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 I.I - IIIIM ilM 2.2 ^ m .t 14° IIIIIZO 1.8 1.25 1.4 1.6 ^ 6" ► i P /a ^ ^. /}. 01 ^ ^. * / /^ '^ 7 Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, NY. 14580 (716) 872-4503 iV iV ■1>' :\ \ ^ \ o^ .<'"'^ I; This docs not need skill so much as labor. 5. Do ikH put loo iiuicli reliance (use verb) in your general. 6. I believe that he performed the duties of his office with fidelity and courage. 7. What could have been more fortunate than this? 8. A man endowed with the highest ability, he was considered (/la/u-o) unworthy by his country- men of even the lowest office. 9. He used to boast that he had a mind that was without care. 10. Departing from Rome, he en- joyed his good fortune as a private person in Africa. 1 1. He made a good use of victory, a very difficult thing to do. 12. He wished to know on what herbs they fed. 13. He said that he would be con- tent witli the smaller part. 14. I was considered more like him than you arc. 15. Tell me at what price he bought the horse. 16. He said that you could not procure {piirn) friends with gold. 17. I believe that we shall get possession of the town. 18. We must ask them to come and lielp us (p. 69, 8). 19. In their father's life-time they abounded in gold; nf)w they are in need of bread. 20. I beg- ged them to show themselves worthy of the lilxMty they enjoyed (use AdTt'). 21. We must order the rest of the fore es to start before the beginning of spring. 22. I have heard that they fortified a camp on the top of the hill with the utmost speed (use guam + super/.). 23. Nothing is more uncertain than life. 24. He was so in need of money that he sold a liousc for two talents. 25. These facts he ascertained through the instrumentality of scouts. 26. How vain the hojje ! 27. 'J'hat done, I liad no fear that the city would be taken. 28. What is more excellent than virtue.'* 29. Do not tell me that a merchant will sell for less than he buys at. 30. I believe that they buy at the lowest price and sell at the highest. 31. I prefer writing to speaking. §35. RELATION OB' PLACE. LOCATIVE. 1. A/ (I place (place where) was originally expressed by a separ- ate case in -i (|)1., -is). This case is called the locative ; it is seen in domi {itt Jiome)^ ruri (/// tJie count yy).^ humi (^on the gyouncV,. % To express at or ;>/ a. p/(ur, when the noun is the /uuue of a iotvn or small island^ the locative takes the following forms : If the UKt.ATIOV OF PLACE. LOCATIVE. d3 noun is of tlio 1st or 2ncl clecl. sing., the genitive is ustd ; if not, the abhitive : as, Romae {at Rome)^ Rhodi {at Rhodes\ Tibure {at Tihur\ Athenls {at Athens). 3. To express at or in a place, when the noun is not the name of a town or small island, in with the ablative is used : as, In xirbe. In the city. In Italia. In Italy. Rut if there is an adjective with tlie noun, the preposition may be omitted : as, Media urbe. /;/ the middle of the city. Tota Italia. In the whole of Italy. 4. Motiojt to a place, when the noun is the name of a town or small island, is expressed by the accusative without a preposition ; motion from a place., by the ablative without a preiiosition : as, Romam rediit. lie returned to Rome. Corintho fug-it. /fe fled from Corinth. Note. — Ad Romam would mean in the neighborhood, or in the direction, of Rome. With other nouns a preposition is required : as, Abiit ad forum. He went off to the forum. In Africam venit. lie came to Africa. Ex Asia decedens. While departing from Asia. 5. In expressing the relation of place, rus (country) and domus (home) take the same construction as the names of towns and small islands : as, ruri, in the country ; domi, at home ; rus, to the country ; domum, home; dome, from home. 6. For phrases like To his father at Rhodes, Latin says To his father to Rhodes : as, Rhodum ad patrem venit. He came to his father at Rhodes. So too : Ab Italia dome iit. He came from his home in Italy. For phrases like In the city of Rome, to the city of Rome (p. 3, 7), the preposition is required : as. Ad urbem Romam legati miv?si sunt. Ambassadors loete sent to the city of Rome. i,i 1 84 LATIN PIIOSK COMPOSITION. I! .* ^ In urbe Athenis diu doinicilium habebat. Jlc lived I on}:; in the city of' Athens. Note. — ihc preposition is reliiined here even if an adjective is added; but the proper noun is then placed first in the case re- c|viired by paragraph 2 or 4 above : as, Antiochiae, in urbe opu- lentissima, moratus est, he delayedin the 7Kas t7t'o miles off. r s It EXKRCISE XXXV. I. Do you know when they will bring the corn from Rhodes to Karthage ? 2. I believe that their cainp was pitched in a suitable place. 3. He was considered the most eloquent speaker in the whole of Greece. 4. Nothing prevented liim from sailing from Corinth to Athens. 5. What place in the whole sea was safe.-* 6. It was said that he came to Italy in the reign of Tarquinius. 7. He says that he has studied in the learned city of Athens. 8. Ask him how long he stayed at Utica. 9. He said that he intended to cross to Brundisium in Italy. 10. They went to see the king at Capua. 1 1. Tell me when the army will set out for its winter quarters in Gaul. 12. Has he not come here from the camp at Aricia? 13. He must go to my house at Tibur. 14. I believe that they have come here V RELATIO.V OF TIMK. TIMK WUKN. TIMK lloW LONG. So from a very populous {tch'lh'r) city. 15. He has collected a very larye tlect from Tyre and Sidon to intercept their ships. 16. I had an interview at Daiae with men fresh from Rome. 17. They were defeated by the Romans both by sea and land. 18. It was said that an ox had fallen from heaven. 19. They seldom come from the country into the city. 20. They escaped from the city by the Colline (li'te. 21. He came, a little before, from ICphesus to Italy. 22. Their camp was about thirteen miles from the sea. 23. He was the only one who ever reached the top of the mountain. 24. Many men in ancient Rome did not know how to read. 25. They must send an aiiny to Scipio in Spain. 26. Have you ever staged in the poi)ulous city of London "^ 27. I believe that they enjoy their leisure better than we. 28. The beautiful city of Antioch was only a few miles from the sea. 29. I could not sell my house in Capua at the price I l)ou<,dit it at. 30. To our enquiry whether the Gauls had conquered, he answered Yes. 31. Do not forget that you are sprung from an honorable family. §36. RELATION OF TIME. TIME WHEN. TIME HOW LONG. 1. Time at ivIiicJi (time when), and time within ivJiich^ are ex- pressed by the ablative without a preposition : as, Hora aexta. At the sixth hour. Vere et aestate. /// sprini^ and sionmer. Paucis diebus. Within a few days (Inter or intra paucos dies, is also used). Note I. — The preposition in (with the abl.) is used of time to express emphasis: as, In tempore, at the right moment \ in aetate provecta, /'// spite of advaneed age. Note 2. — Words that do not strictly denote time, when used to mark a period of time, require a jireposition : as, In bello, /// tlie war. But when an adjective is added, the j)reposition is omitted ; as, Bello Punico, /// the Punic war. % 86 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 2. Puni/ioH of time (time how lon^) is cxprcsst-d by tlic accusa- tive without a preposition : as, Ager multos annos quievit. llie field lay falloa' f/uiny years. Note. — Per is used to express (hiration when greater precision i!> reel ui red. 3. Ai^o is abhinc, followed by the words expressing time, in the accusative or ablative : as, Abhinc decern dies (or diebus) Romam prefect us est. He se/ out for Koine ten days aji^o. Note. — Abhinc precedes the expression of time. 4. The following phrases will be useful : Decern annos post. Ten years after (post is an adverb). Decern annos ante. Ten years before. Nonaginta annos natus. Ninety years old. Minor decern annos natus. Less tlian ten years old, Maior decern annos natus. More than ten years old. Priore anno quam e vita excessit. The year before he died. Pridie quam pervenit. Tiic day before he arriiicd. Postridie quam. . . . The day after . . . . In posterum diem, l-'or the followini^ day. Solvet ad Kalendas. J/e will pay by the first of the month. Exercise XXXVI. I. I asked him why the nights were so long in winter. 2. Do not tell me that you knew this four years ago. 3. There is nothing to prevent him from doing it within three hours. 4. It is said that he died at Tarentum when scarcely thirty years of age. 5. It was to the interest of the country that he should be shut up in prison during {per) the rest of his life. 6. At dawn he will move his camp to the foot of the hill. 7. Six months ago, he might have acted otherwise. 8. He knew better than you that we could not cross a ditch twenty feet deep. 9. Are not the swallows absent in the winter months.^ 10. O ! that I had seen him the day before he PERSONAL AND DLIMONSTHATIVI': I'ltONOUNS. 87 (lied. II. Ask tlicm to do it within the next ten days. 12. Tell me how many moiuh^ you intend to be away. 13. 1 believe that they will btay in the beautiful city of London for a few years. 14. Will they remain in this city the whole summer ? 1 5. ( )n the fourth day they will sail to the island of Rhodes. 16. Un the same day the Romans had a bridge built across the stream. 17. Tell me at what o'clock they intend to be here. 18. We shoulil ha\e sent them flowers in summer. 19, In three months these two legions will be sent into camp. 20. Are not our haibors closed all winter by ic(' ? 21. I set out from home in the morning and returned home in the evening. 22. After delaying in Rhodes for three months, they were unwilling to return. 23. He ordered the fleet to follow within ten days. 24. I regret that I should have been deceived by this man for three wliolc months. 25. Wretch that I am I I promised to pay him to-morrow. 2O. The same day I asked him how much the ship had cost. 27. They attacked the place with more daring than tliscretion. 28. Don't you think that he is more than thirty years of age .'' 2g. I believe that in this battle more than five hundred men fell. 30. The art of writing was invented many years ago. §37. PERSONAL AND DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 1. The pronouns of the first and second persons are rarely ex- pressed, except for emphasis or contrast : as, Ego laudo sed tu vituperaa. / praise, hut you blame (pronouns expressed because in antithesis, t.e.^ opposed to each other). Bgo lllud dicam. For my part I will say this (pronoun expressed because emphatic). Note, — The genitives nostrum and vestrum arc always used partitively : as, Unas nostrum, one of us. Otherwise no3tri and vestri are used : as, Memor nostri, iniiuijul of us, 2. The personal pronouns of the third person are wanting, but are supplied by the demonstratives is, hie, or ille, ilUs^ that. ■' I i ! I ! 88 LATIN ruO^iK COMrosITIOS. 1 i- ' -'I ii ■n 4 Tlu" ( oiniiioii words for //<•, s//i\ //, when tlicy are expressed in l.;itin. are is, ea, id. Is is used to refer to some person or thing ah'eiu!) mentioned : as, Apud Helvetios lonsr^ noblllrfairaua et ditisainius fiiit Org^torix ! la coniurationem nobilitatirf fecit. .liiioHj^- tlw Jii/iutidiis, '^'.V<'- fori.v "iiuts by /,ir //ir nohlcsf olc. So too : Haec patria, tiiis land of ours ; haec vita, titis present life ; his sex diebus, "a'ithin the last sir days. 4. Iste, th(rt of yours, is the demonstrative of the 2n(l person. It refers to the j^erson addressed : as, Iste liber, thtrt booh near you ,• ista opinio, that opinion you hold; iste amicus, thirt friend ot yours. It often has the idea of contempt, and is therefore often found in tlie sense of an op])onent in a law- suit, just as hie means my friend /lere, my client here {i.e., the one near me). ' ; 5. lUe. that yo/ider, is tlie demonstrative of the 3rd person. It refers to a person or thing other than those present. It may ex- press, therefore : — (a) The remote in time, as opposed to the present (which is expressed bj' hie) : as, Ilia antiquitas, tiiat far-off past ; illis diebus /// iJu^se by-gone days. (b) That well known, the celebrated: as, Ilia Medea, the far- famed iMedea J ille Caes&r, the reno7('ned Caesar. 6. Hie ami ille arc often contrasted. They are then used:— - (a) Of two persons already mentioned. In this case hie relates to the nearer, the latter; ille, to the more remote, the former; as, Romulum Numa excepit; hie pace, ille bello meiior fuit. 7'o Romulus Numa succeeded j the latter excelled in peace^ the former in war. I'KU.SONAI. AND KKMoNsTKATI VK I'llONOUNS. 89 (h) For the one .md tlw othrr; as, Neque hoc neque lllud, Hiillwr the one nor the other; et hie et llle. hoth the one and the other (et . . . . et both ... and). (l') For sonte aiul others: as, HI pacem, 1111 bellum cuplunt. some 7i'tsh /feaee^ others 7i'ar. 7. lUe i.s joined to quiclem (indeed), with a eoneessht speak nut eh or often ^ hut in s/teahini^ Latin he loas equiil to e not in- deed abandoned^ hut you hoTC at all e7>ents preferred philosophy to them. Note 2. — Carte, at ali events ; certo, /or certain. 8. Ille often begins a sentence to refer to a noun-clause coming after : as, lllud vereor ne fames in urbe sit. 7his is ivluit (the Jolloioing is what) I am afraid of., that there will be famine in the city. Seitum eat illud Catonis. The following sayint; of Cato is good. 9. In j)hrases hke My house and that of my friend., Latin omits the demonstrative : as, Domus mea et amiei veniit. My house and that of my friend have been sold (p. 63, 4). Oblivionis artem quam memoriae malo. / prefer the art of for- getting to that of memory (malo, being- compounded of magis, more, and volo, / 7vish, is naturally followed by quam). Note. — If a change of case is required, the noun must be repeated : as, Liberi nostri cariores sunt amieorum liberis, our childre?i are dearer than those of our friends (liberis, abl, after comparative ; p. 76, 2). 10. In phrases like 7'his is life, the demonstrative agrees in Latin with the predicate noun : as, ' ll 00 LATIN I'UOSE COMI'OISITION'. 1 i' I'-t I i i Haec eHt vita. '/V//\ /,v ///l: Ea domum oat vera leJicita?^. ////.v (f///r/ ////j- r>///;'j is tnw /i/h'N(\ss. 11. And tli(tt too is et is (or iBque): as Bum cogruovi optlmla studiis deditum, idqiie a puero. / Jki'.'c known him to he dcvotiul lo s<>iiiiii hiUtiini^ ii/id tluit too from ii hoy. 12. Idem, stimc., is often uscil lo express our aLu\ at the same timcy at once: as, Cicero orator erat idemque philoaophua. Ciiero was iin orator and, at the same time, a />hiios(>/>/ier. 13. Ipse. seij\ may bo added for emphasis to a noun, a j)r()n()im, or a numeral : as, Caesar ipse Imperavit. Caesar himselfeommanded. Tu ipse hoc fecistl. Yok yourse/f diif /his. Se Ipaum interfeclt. lie killed himself. Ipse navem aedificavit. lie built the ship by himself. Triginta ipsi dies. J'lxactly thirty days. Adventu ipso hostes terruit. By his mere {'!'ery) arrival., he frightened the enemy. Ipse hoc vidi. I saw this with my own eyes. Ipse is also added in the genitive, singular or plural, to a posses- sive pronoun to express the English o^i'n : as, Mea ipsius culpa. Afy own fault. Sua ipsius domus. His own house. Vestra ipsorum amicitia. Your own friendship. This gen. is in apposition with the gen. implied in the possessive (mea--mei, of me, gen. of ego). a sa 7- CO Oi lat do Exercise XXXVII. I. He thought that the town would be stormed on the same night. 2. Tell me when that friend of yours intends to set out for Rhodes. 3. I believe that he sailed in seven days from Athens to Italy. 4. Ask him how long this legion will remain in camp. 5. You have ^ KKFLKXIVK IMIONOUNS. 01 a .small town, no doiiht (p. iisi' niy.stif. Not) noH iHudamuH. ll'r ftntis,' nHPsrh't's. Tu te lauduH. ]'i>n />f a rcllcNivr for I'liipliaiiis : as, An teniet contemniH? I)o you i/t's/'tsr vourscif? USK OK SK. 2. The forms sul, slbl, He {/iinisilj\ /irrsi-//^ itself., tliemsch'es OHi'si'lf ; or //////, lit't\ ftc), usually refer to the subject of the main verl.) : as, BrutuH 86 interfecit. lUtitus fcillcd Iiimsiif. Cicero ettecerat ut Curius consilla Catllinae slbi proderet. Ciaro Zioil uhimii^cd tliiit Cur/us slum Id hchiiy Colilincs pldiis to him (Cicero). 3. When used as the subject of an intinitive, ae refers to the sub- ject of the verb on which the inliniti\e depends : as, Scio eum dixisse se id feclsse. / kiio'j Iw said that he had done it (Here se refers to eum). 4. Se may refer to the object of a sentence, if it may do so with- out ambiguity : as, Reliquos se convertere cogit. lie compels the rest to turn. 5. in certain phrases, se is used for selj\ without any reference to the subject of the sentence : as, Haec per se expetenda sunt. These things are to be sought in themselves (/>., for tiieir own sake). So too : Sui compos, master of one's self ; sui flducia, self-con- fidence, 6. When //////, her., etc., refer to the subject of a subordinate clause, ipse is (generally used : as, Rogavit ut eos dederent qui ipsos prodidissent. He asked them to surrender those who had betrayed them (se would refer to the subject of rogavit). kKFLKXiVE FRONofNS. 93 with- ncnce rjit in f-con- linate them to the *7. The rult's f-ir tlic use of huu>< arc the same as for the use of Be. Thus : {({) Suus usually refers to the subject of the main verb : as, Eos ffladlo 8UO Interfeclt. He killed thein with his sword, {h) Suua may be used of the object, if no aml)iyuity arises : as, lusslt eo8 ad sua quemque sigiia redlre. He ordered titem to return each to his own standard. Note. Quisque, eacli^ is often joined in this way with suus. (t) Suua is use/s(', he was. Note 2. — Of the two neuter singular forms, qxiid is a pronoun, quod, an adjective : as, Vereor ne quid subsit doli, / am afraid //•>/ any gui/e may lurk beneath ; num quod offlcium aliud maivis est ? Is any other duty i^^reater ? 2. Any, in the sense of any you please^ every, is qiaivis (from quis, any., and vis, you lois/i) : as, Non cuiusvis est adire Corinthum. // is not every one who can visit Corinth (p. 59, 2). Instead of quivis. quilibet may be used : as, Periculum quodlibet adire paratus. Ready to face any danger you please. 3. After a negative, any is quisquam, or — if used as an adjective — ullus : as, Nee quisquam hoc dicet. Nor will anyone say this. Negat quemquam id velle. I/e denies that anyone wishes this. Nee ulla res unquam atrocior fuit. Nor was anything ever more atrocious. In all these cases the pronoun, taken in conjunction with the nega- tive, has the force of none or no one. Note. — Instead of And no one at the head of a sentence, Latin prefers Nor anyone ; nee quisquam, therefore, often begins a Latin sentence. So too, for et nullus use nee tillus (as above), and for et nunquam, nee unquam. 4. Quisquam and ullus are also 1.;) be used for any after what is called a virtual negative., i.e., aXvord or construction that im- plies a negative. Such words are vix {scarcely), sine {7vithout\ comparatives, and interrogatives that expect the answer No : as. Vix qu'squam reperiri potuit. Scarcely anyone could be found. Hoc sine ullo auxilio feci. / have done this without any help. Fortior f-iit quam quisquam amicorum. He was braver than m vf 1 1 96 LATIN PROSK COMPOSlTlOJJ. ■ r- i'l ■W if ; i any of his friends (a virtual negative, because virtually = ;/^«^ of his friends 7vas so brave'). Num tu me existimas ab iillo malle mefi, legl quam a te ? Do you think that I zvould prefer my works to he read by anyone rather than by you ? 5. Any^ where it means some (i.e., not none) is aliquis or, rarely, quispiam : as Si ad aliquam spem com modi Portuna nos reservavit, bene est. If Iu)rtune has reseri'ed us for any hope of advantage^ it is well. Nenao est sine aliqua virtu te. No one exists without some virtue. Note. — Aliquis has usually the force (^{ some one: as, Vult aliquis videri, he wishes to seem some one. 6. Other compounds of the indefinite quis should be noticed. Thus : {a) Quidam, some one, a certain one, a, is used of a person or thing known to the speaker but not fully described : as, Tempore quodam quidam homo Aesopo lapidem impegit. Once upon a time a certain man threw a stone at Aesop. Note I. — Quidam is frequently used to apologise for the use of a bold or figurative expression : as, In vigilia quadam mansi. I kept (as it were) upon the watcJi. In that case, in translating into Eng- lish, quidam may usually be omitted. Note 2. — Quidem (indeed), so commonly joined to pronouns, should be carefully distinguished from quidam. See p. 89, 7. (/') Nescio quis, some or other, is used as a single word : as, Nescio qius prope me loquitur. Somebody or other is speaking near me. Hoc nescio quo pacto contigit. TJiis, in some strange 7vay, has happened (p. 31, 4, note 2). {c) Quisque is the English each, every ; it never begins a sent- ence : as. Quod cviique obtingit, id quisque teneat. What falls to each, let each person keep (notice the relative clause, as usual thrown forward). Ifl: TRANSLATION OF "ANY." QUISQUAM AND QUIVIS. Quisque is fre([uenlly joined to the reflexive suus, in whicli case it is written after, never Ijefore, suus : as. Suae quemque fortunae maxime poenitet. J'.vcry one is greatly dissaiisfied "a'tth /lis ()7i'/i fortune. Quisque is frequently found w ith a superlative : as, Ex philosophia optimus quisque confltetur multa se ignorare. All the best of t/ie philosopJiers admit t/iat t/iey are ignorant oj many things. {d) Instead of num quis, ecquis is often used to express im- patience ; as, Ecquis hoc ostium aperiet? Will anyone open tJiis door? (f) Quisnam, -wJio^ p^'t^y-, is also frequently used for quis in questions, to express impatience : as, Quidnam tibi negotii fuit in meis aedibvis ? WJiat business haa you, pray, in my Jiousef (p. 60, 3). '■• \\ ^§ : as. sent- 7/, let rown Exercise XXXIX. I. No one will attempt anything without assistance. 2. Scarcely anyone knew the magnitude of the disaster. 3. Do not be angry with anyone. 4. Such a thing m;iy happen to anyone. 5. Nature can do anything, and ir.deed without any trouble. 6. When he hears anything of that kind, he always says that the story is in- vented. 7. Let each one keep his own. 8. Do you think that justice ever injured anyone? 9. He knew ])etter than anyone that some of the soldiers had been killed. 10. If anyone will dare to defend him, he shall live. 11. What may happen to anyone, may happen to you. 12. Don't you think that the cleverer a person is, the more hated he is ? 13. Once upon a time a certain man set out to find .Atlantis. 14. Is it my fault, if some persons are afraid of me? 15. He thought that he w;is something in oratory (L;erund of dice). 16. He begged that some part of his work might be reduced (minuo). 17. If anyone bore the hardships of life bravely, it was he. 18. I believe that he was more learned than any of us. 19. Was it of importance to anyone that this man should be spared ? 20. I will hardly say this, that all good men are sorry for him. 21. It is clear to anyone that the farmer must plough hi«: : ( : \ 98 Latin prose compositio!^. fields in sprin^r. 22. I believe that scarcely anyone intended to come to Rome that day. 23. I am afraid that some disaster is threatening. 24. Scarcely any letters can reach us. 25. Do not hesitate to say whether you need any help. 26. It seemed that all loyal men were estranged from us. 27. Does anyone know the purpose of his coming? (p. 32, i). 28. It happened that I was in the city on that day. 29. It remains that I should show that eveiy- thing has been made for the sake of man. 30. Will anyone believe that he is ashamed of his mistake ? 31. Whom does this concern pray .? §40. CLASSIFICATION OP SENTENCES. 1. Sentences are either simple^ compound, or complex, A simple sentence contains only a single statement : as, Civitas pacem amat. T/ie slate loves peace. A compound sentence contains two or more statements, usually connected by a conjunction or a relative : as, Pratrem tuum vidi et eum (or quem) brevi consulem fore spero. / saiu your brother and I hope thai he will soon be consul. Each statement in a compound sentence is called a clause, and the olauses are said to be co-ordinate, i.e., of equal grammatical value. Note. — The relative is often used in Latin to connect co-ordinate clauses. 2. A complex sentence contains two or more clauses, one of which (the main clause) contains the principal assertion, while the others (the sid)ordinate clauses) stand in a subordinate or depend- ent relation to it. 3. Dependent or subordinate clauses are called noun-clauses, ad^ jectival clauses, or adverbial clauses, according as they perform the function of a noun, adjective, or adverb. Thus, in I know who he is, the clause Who he is is a noun-clause, object of know; in I saw the man ivliom you seek, the clause Whom you seek is an adjectival CLASSIFICATION OP SEKTENCES. 90 Ithe /te Xaiv val cl.iusc, qualifying man ; in //i' oimi' that he mti:^ht see the to7vn^ the clause That he might see the town is an adverbial clause of purpose, modifying came. NOUN-CLAUSES. 4. As shown in ^9, a noun-clause introduced by ut follows verbs meaning to ask^ command^ or advise : as, Peto ut aurum reddatur. / ask that the gold be restored ( - the restoration of the gold). 5. As shown in § 16, a noun-clause indirect question) is found depending on verbs of asking, knowing, etc : as, Scio quis sit. / know who he is. 6. Quod meaning because, the fact that, with the indicative, often introduces a noun-clause in Latin : as, Magnum eat hoc, quod victor victis pepercit. This is an im- portant matter., the fact that when victorious he spared the van- quished. Quod, with the indicative, is often found in this sense after verbs and phrases of emotion like graudeo, laetor (rejoice), queror (com- plain), glorior (boast), iuvat (it de/ights), dolet (it grieves), gratum est (it is pleasant), mirum est (it is wonderful) : as, Vehementer laetor quod scripsisti. I am very glad that you have written. Mihi gratum est quod venisti. Your coming is very welcome to me. So too : Peropportune accidit quod id rogasti. Your asking that was a lucky accident. This quod will often be useful in translating English verbal or abstract nouns : as. His saving the country is a wonderful thing. Mirum est quod patriam servavit. I pass over his betrayal of the king. Quod regem prodldit, omitto. 7. A noun-clause, introduced by ut with subjunctive, or by quod with iudic, is used after accedlt, in the sense of it is added: as, :\\ \ II n !; t;| 100 LATIN PIIOSK COMPOSITION. Hue accessit ut caecus esset. To tJiis ivas added the Jact iluit he a'lis blind. Accedit quod patrem tuum amo. There is added the fact that I love your father. 8. A noun-clause, introduced Ijy ut with the subjunctive, is used to define a previous noun (usually the subject of svim, / atn) : as, Commune vitium est in liberis civitatibus ut invidia gloriae comes sit. // is a common vice in free states that envy is the at- tendant of glory. Ciiltus deorum est optimus ut eos pura mente veneremur. The best worship of the gods is to adore them zvith a pure heart. ADJECTIVAL CLAUSES. 9. All clauses introduced by the relative qui, quae, quod, are adjectival when they can be changed into an attributive adjec- tive : as, Beges, qui boni sunt, amantur (=boni reges). Kings, luho are good^ are loved. Virum video quem quaeritis. / see the man whom you seek. ADVERBIAL CLAUSES. 10. Adverbial clauses modify verbs and adjectives, and are in troduced by a conjunction or a relative adverb. They are divided into eight classes as follows : 1. Local (those that denote place), introduced by ubi (where)^ und© (whence)^ and quo (whither). 2. Temporal (those that denote time), introduced by quum (when\ dum {while), postquam {after that), priusquam (before that), etc. 3. Fitial (those that denote an end or purpose) ; see § 7. 4. Consecutive (♦^hose that denote a consequence or result) ; see ? 8. 5. Giw^rt/ (those that denote a cause or reason), iatroduced by •^nod or quia (ber'iuse)^ quum or quouiam (since). CLASSIFICATION OF SENTENCES. 101 6. Cimccasri'c (those that denote a concession) introduced by etsi, quamquam, quamvis, etiamsi {alt hough), 7. Com/^ivative (those that denote comparison or proportion), introduced by ut (., is used to express a purpose) : as, Dixit se, quo vellet, vagari. He said that he strolled where he wished (direct=;-quo vo!o vagor. / stroll where I wish). Massiliam abiit ubi exulet. He has gone off to Massilia to live in exile there. (Here the adverbial clause expresses both pla'.'i and purpose; i.e.^ ubi=ut ibi, that there). TEMPORAL CLAUSES.— POSTQUAM. DUM. PRIUSQUAM. 3. Temporal adverbial clauses define the time of the action of the main verb : as, Haec feci, dum potui. I did this while T could. Here the clause dum potui is temporal, limiting the main verb feci. POSTQUAM. '^. Temporal conjunctions meaning after that, as soon as, like pcstquam, simul, simul ac (or, before a vowel, atque), ubi, ut (primum), quum primum, are followed by the indicative: as, Simul atque haec audivit, abiit. After he had heard this, he went away., or No sooner had he heard this, than, dr'c. Note. -The perfect is used after these conjunctions for the Enghsh pluperfect. TEMPORAL CLAUSES. DUM. 103 Postqviam id aniraadvertit, copias suas Caesar in proximura col- lem subducit. Ajttr Iw had noticed tliis^ Caesar icitluira'a's Ins for u's to the nearest hill. Ubi se paratos esse arbitratl sunt, oppida incendunt. When they thoui^ht they were ready^ they set /ire to the towns. Ea res ut Helvetiis nuntiata est, eum causam dicere coegerunt. When this fact was reported to the Ilelvetii, they compelled hi>n to plead his cause. Nostri, simul in arido constiterunt, impetum fecerunt. Our mm, as soon as they had set foot on dry land, made an attack. Note. — Postquam with the perfect indie, may he sometimes used to supply the place of tlie j)crfcct part. act. which is wanting in Latin (p. 49, 8) : as, Seeing (i.e., having seen) thiSj he groaned. Postquam haec vldit, ingemuit. UUM. 6. Temporal conjunctions meaning ivhile or tmtil, like dum, donee, quoad, take the indicative when they mean ivhih\ as long as : as, Dum ea Romani parant, iam oppidum oppugnabatur. While the Romans were making these pi eparations^ the town was already being besieged. Dum hie ero, te amabo. 7 shall love you, while I am here. Note I. — When the time expressed by the dum-clause includes the time of the action of the main verb, the present tense is used in Latin instead of the English past. Note 2.— When the tmie of the temporal clause is really future the future tense is used in Latin for the English present. 6. Dum, donee, quoad, meaning until, take the indicative when used to express time alone : as, Dum rediit Marcellus, silentium fult. There was silence until ii^i.rcellus returned. Milo in senatu fuit eo die, quoad senatus dimissus est. Mile was in the senate on that day, until the senate was dismissed. Non veniet dum scripsero. He will n?t coim tUl I write. ! i" s i I i m 104 LATIN PKOSE COMPOSITION. : ! Note. — Dum {initiC) is followed by the fut.-pf. for the Flnglish pies., when the action cxpicssed by the verb of the temporal clause is to be over before that of tiic main verb begins. iUit when dum, iJvic., express some further idea o{ purpose or I'xpi'ctnlion (i.e., are y?"/^^/ as well as temporal), they require the subjunctive : as, Dum naves convenirent, exspectavit. lie ivaitcd iill the ships should assoiihlc {y.^i.y in order that tJicy might nsseu/h/ey purpose). See p. 20, 2. Ditl'erant dum ira defervescat. Let them put off till their anger cools (i.e., /// (>ider that their onger may cool). Impetum hostiura svxatinuit quoad ceteri pontera interrumperent. lie withstood the attaek of the efieuiy till the rest should break down the bridge (i.e., that they inight break down the bridge). Note. — Dum for dummodo, provided that, is joined with the sul)jimclive : as, Oderint dum metuant. Let them hate^ provided that they fear. PRIUSQUAM. 7. Temporal conjunctions meaning before that, like priusquam and antequam, take the indicative when they mark simple priority in time : as, Priusquam lucet, adsunt. They are Jiere before it is light. Filios convocavit, antequam mortuus est. IJe called to 1% h'ii Ills (tniiv into i/irir icnitofy (tinal ;-/// otiicr tJuit ihcy Priusquam pugnaretur, uox intervwilt. 2\ii^//f canw on Ih'Jorc the bottle -u'os J'ou^/if I icsult picxrntt'd). See p. 38, 2. Note. — Anteqiiam ;in(l priusquam aic often wriiti'ii in two words : as, Ante rorat quam pluit, // tfro/)s /leforr if roi'/is. Written thus, they are often used for the Kiv^H^h not ... .until : as, Non prius re.spondebo quam tacuei'ia, / sliall^ not ansiver until you arc silent. 9. In indiieci narration, the \erb of a temporal adverbial chiuse is in the sul)juncti\e : as, Dixit eos, ut primum luceret, adesse. He said that they locre there^ as soon as it was lii^ht. EXKKCISK XLI. I. As soon as he hears this, lie will go away. 2. No sooner had they departed, than a second army was seen approaching. 3. I should like you to be in a country where you are known. 4. He will wait until the rest of the ships assemble there. 5. They will not come here until we write them. 6. ]jefore I answer him with regard to the other matters, I will answer him with regard to my- self. 7. They kept gradually advancing until they came to the camp. 8. I believe that they had already crossed the Alps into Italy, two hundred years before they captured Rome. 9. He did not leave the city before he had an interview with me. 10. He told me, that before he set out he would have an interview with me. II. Wait until he comes. 12. I will not tell him why I sent for you, until I return to Rome. 13. He did not take part in the battle until his father was killed. 14. He falls into Scylla while he desires to avoid Charybdis. 15. He used to say that, while there was life {ani?na)y there was hope. 16. He was detained until the consul was consulted. 17. While he was fortifying the hill, the enemy stormed the camp. 18. They did not cease to fly until they reached the river. 19. Before he had any pleasure in life, death took him away. 20. They were sent back to the place {eo) from which they came. 21. Wait until you are obeyed. 22. He decided !vi| II 100 LATIN PROHK COMPOSITION. to consult the senate before he set out. 23. T tliouj^Oit that he was in the senate that day until it was (li>,niissi:(l. 24. Do you believe that it always drops before it rains? 25. lie sustained the attack until the bridge was broken. 26. AH tliis was ih>uc before I left Italy. 27. You can do nothing" more pleasin^^ to me than this. 28. I can make him as gentle as a lamb. 29. lie used to say that nothing dried more quickly than a tear. 2^. Nothing is more worthy of a good man than compassion. 31. Tell me where they are who say that he did not know (ireek. 32. They did not take up arms until the truce had expired (twro). ;^^. It is his part to say whether he thinks that this concerns liim or not. 34. Provided that you have the zeal, you will always have the ability. §42. TEMPORAL CLAUSES. SYNTAX OF QUUM. 1. Quum (cum) ivhen^ simply expressing contemporaneous time (called quum icniporal) takes tlie indicative : as, Quum Caesar in Galliam venit, alterius factionls principes erant Aedui. When Caesar came into Gaul, the Aedui were the leaders of the one party. Quum verba faclunt, maiores extollunt. When they speak, they extol their ancestors. Nondum profectua erat quum haec gesta sunt. He had not yet departed when these things took place. Te videbo quum potero, / sJiall see yon when I can. Quum rure rediero, tu Romae eris. When I return from the country, you will be in Rome. In these sentences, qvium is a relative adverb and corresponds to a suppressed correlative turn (then) in the main clause. Note.— Quum when it refers to the future, takes the fut. tense for the English pres., and the fut.-perf. when the action of the verb of the temporal clause is over before that of the main verb begins. 2. Quum meaning since (called quum causal), requires the sub- junctive: as. TIlMPOItAL f'LAITSKS. SVSTAX OF <;IM M. 107 Quae quum Ita »lnt, CatiUna. pergre. y^v litis is so, Catiline.^ i:;o on. 3. lUit ulu-n usi'd with the iinj)frfr< t or phi perfect tense, quum usually takes the subjunctive, even when no iilea of cause is iniphi«l : as, Decesslt AgesUaus quum In portum venlaset. Aa^esilaus died wlicn Jic liad entered the harbor. m SUIiSTITUTKS FOR PERFKCT rARTICirLK ACT. 4. Quum with the imperfect or phiperfect subjunctive, is a com- mon substitute f ; the perf. part, active, which is wanting in Latin : as, Quum haec dlxisset, abiit. Iltn'ini; spoken these ivords, he de- parted. There are, therefore, four substitutes for the perf. part, active: — (a) Quum + imperf. or phiperf. (b) Postquam + perf. indie, suljj. (c) The ablative absokite. (d) The perf. part, of a synony- mous deponent. Thus : Hai'ing spoken these words^ is : — (a) Quum haec dixisset. (b) Postquam haec dixit. (e) His dictis ( = these things (d) Haec locutus. said). 5. Quum with the indicative (called quum frequentative) is often used for quoties, as often as, whenever. In this sense, the perfect is used for the English present, and the pluperfect for the English past : as, Quum rosam vidi, tum ver esse arbitror. Whenever T see the rose, then I judge that it is spring. Quum impetum fecerant, hostes cedere cogebantur. Whenever they made a charge^ the enemy were Joreed to retire. After quum, however, in this sense, the subjunctive is used by Livy and Tacitus : as, 108 LATIN PHOSE COMPOSITIOM 1 !■ ,^|! Cum hoc vidissent, convolabant. IV/iencjcr they saw this^ they Jlocki'd ioi!;cthcr. 6. Quum witli the subjunctive, sometimes has a concessive force xwQ.-Avixw'g although : 'A'i^ Pylades quum sis, dices te esse Orestem. Though you art Py lades ^ you lutll say you arc Orcs/es. Note. — This meaning of quum ukin- Ije used to translate the English /;w/tv;<'/ry or 7iv7//^w/, witii a verbal noun: as, Quum dicere deberet, tacuit. Instead of speakings he held his peace (literally, when he ought to Jiave spoken). ■ • Quum hostes persequi deberet, ad urbem rediit. Instead oj (or without') following up the enemy, he returned to the city. 7. Quum with the impf subjunctive, is often joined with audivi : as, Saepe evim audivi quum diceret. / hai'e often heard him saying (dicere or dicentem might also be used). 8. Quum is never used interrogatively. Thus: When do you intoui to speak / Quando (never quum) dicturus cs? 9. Cum — tum are often found in the sense On the one hand. . . . on the other, botJi . . . .and: as, Hie cum ab ceteris tum a Xenophonte laudatus est. He was praised botJi by the otJiers and by XenopJion. . _ EXF.RCISK XLIL 1. When this bridge is destroyed (fut.-pf), who will contract to build another.? 2. When he had conquered Carthage, he returned to Rome. 3.' When I hear him speak, I shall know whether he is the man or not. 4. When the ships were approaching Britain, a violent storm arose. 5. Being persuaded myself that we needed his help, I wrote \o him to come. 6. When you have finished your work, you may go. 7. Wlien they had reached the top of the hill, they saw a broad ])l.'iin l^elow them. 8. Phocion always remained poor, though he n->ight (possum; p. y^, 5) have been rich. 9. When \ was at Athene, I used to hear Zeno. 10. Instead of going to 1(1 H rt I CI wl gJ eil thi ar 21 ^'■n FINAL AND CONSECUTIVE CLAUSES. 109 itiiens, you remained at Rome. 1 1. When I see him, i shall go on k) Arpinuin. 12. \\ hen jou read this, I shall perhaps have had an iriterview with him,, 13. IJeing discontented {use ^oem'/e/) with his lot, he left the country. 14. Who can tell me when he intends to return ? 15. The more they have, the more they ask for. 16. When I saw that he spoke with judgment, I applauded. 17. Caesar told Cato that his (Cato's) words dipleased him. 18. He did not show what he thought himself. 19. The battle was not ended until the general was killed. 20. Me used to say that a storm always threat- ened before it rose. 21. Though they could not have done much, still they might have spoken (p. 33, 5). 22. It never seemed to me that anyone could be happy when he was in misfortune (pi. of malum). 23. Having conquered the greater part of the island, he died at Citium. 24. Whenever he came to a town, he demanded hostages. 25. Observing this, he marched against them at once. 26. Nature wished one {(.ilter)xi\ii.\\ to stand in need of another {alter) ; for what one has, another lacks. 27. He said that we must return the money to-morrow. 28. When you had finished your work, you should have helped your friend, 29. By disbanding the army, he declared that the war was ended. 30. I did not know how many men there were. 31. You must pay when the day of payment (gerund) comes. 32. It is many years since you have been doing this (cum -f- pres. ind. : p. 34, 3). 33. Do you think that anything is harder than ttone ? §43. FINAL AND CONSECUTIVE CLAUSES. QUI FINAL. QUI CONSECUTIVE. 1. P'or the syntax of ordinary final clauses, see § 7. 2. The relative qui (called qui Ji?ial) is often used with the sub- junctive to express a ■purpose : as Misit legates qui pacem peterent. He sent ambassadors to sue for peace (qm=ut el, that they). Note. — Relative ad^'erbs, like ubi {where) and undo {•r^'hence), are used, like the relative pronoun, to express a purpose : as, t' '^^^^^n m \ I^HU Wk I'i t 1 M 110 LATIM fROSE COMPOSITION. Domum iibi habitaret legit, //c chose a house where he might dwell (ubi=ut ibi, that /here)\ Cupit habere unde solvat. He wants to have means to pay (unde^ut inde, that thence). 3. In English, the infinitive is often used to denote ^purposey but in Latin it is never so used in good prose. Such an infinitive may be expressed in Latin, as shown already, in various ways. Thus : He sent ambassadors to sue for peace may be expressed as follows : — Legates misit ut pacem peterent {yX final). Legates misit qui pacem peterent (qui fin(d). Legates misit ad pacem petendam (gerundive ace. with ad). Legates misit pacis petendae causa (gerundive genitive with causa). Legates misit ad pacem petendum (gerund ace. with ad). Legates misit pacem petendi causa (gerund genitive with causa). Legates misit pacem petitum (supine after verb of motion). Legates misit pacem petitures (future part, active, expressing a purpose). 4. For the syntax of ordinary consecutive clauses, sec § 8. QUI CONSECUTIVE. 6. The relative qui (called qui consecufk'c) is often used with the subjunctive to introduce a consecutive clause : as, Nen is sum qui hec faciam. I am not the one to do it (qui=ut ego, that I). Here is qui has the force of such as to, of such a kind as to. 6. Qui consecutive is used in the following constructions : — {a) With certain indefinite expressions, like sunt qui iJJicre are some ivho\ habee qui, (/ have who), reperiuntur qui {there are found who), neme est qui {there is no one who), quis est qui? {who is there wJio ?), nihil est quod {there is nothing that), est cur inhere is reason why), quotusquisque est qui {how few there are who) : as, Sunt qui putent nihil sibi litteris opus esse. There are some who think that they have no need of literature. ^Ut FINAL AND QUI CONSECUTIVE. Ill Ire are \'c are qui? 3t CUT ^e are some Nihil est quod dicere velim. There is nothing that T wish to say. Nihil est cur irascare There is no reason why you should be angry. Nil habet quo se defendat. He has nothing to defend himself with. {b) After dignus {worthy\ indignus {unworthy), and idoneus or aptus {Jit) : as, Dfgnus est qui ametur. He is worthy to be loved {—he is worthy that he should be loved, he deserves to be). (c) After quam {than) with a comparative : as, Maior est quam cui resisti possit. //e is too great to be resisted { -greater than to whom it can be resisted). Note. — Possum, 1 can, is used impersonally, only when joined with a passive infinitive. {d) In negative and interrogative sentences, after tam, sic, adeo (so), or tantus {so great); as, Nemo tarn (or quis tam) ferreusest qui haec faciat. No one is (or who is) so iron-hearted as to do this. 7. Instead of qui non, quin with the subjunctive is often used : as. Nemo est quin sciat. There is no one who docs not know. So, too, after dubito {doubt), negro {deny), ignoro (be ignorant)y when joined with a negative or virtual negative,* that is expressed by quin (=qul ne, how not) : as, Negari non potest quin turpe sit fldem fallere. // cannot be de- nied that it is dishonorable to break onc^s word. Non dubitat quin animus sit immortalis. He does not doubt that the soul is i)nmortal. Num quis ignorat quin haec vera sint? Is anyone ignorant that this is the truth ? Note— Quis means any after si (ij), nisi {unless), ne, num. quo and quanto. * Words like vix, nc^'rcehj, and questions that expect the answer A'o. m k'A I 'tl 112 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. II i Hi- 8. Qui, with the subjun., is also used in a restrictive sense : as, Nemo, qui quidem paulo prudentior sit, hoc dubitat. No oue, luJio at least is a man of some se//se, doubts t/i/s (p. 78, 9). So too : Nemo quod sciam. No one as far as I know. 9. Qui with the indie, refers only to the antecedent ; qui with the subjun., involves also the idea of a class: as, Is sum qui id feci. / am the one ivho did it. P>ut : Is sum qui id faciam. / am the one to do it (i.e. , of siieh a. kind as to do it). Exercise XLIII. I. Nothing is so obscure that it can not be found out by inquiry, (gerund). 2. Men were sent to pick out a i)lace suitable to en- camp on. 3. Is he not worthy to rule.'^ 4. They have nothing to talk about {rel.), 5. He is not the man to m.ike a bad use of his oppor- tunities. 6. Is he the man to say one thing (alter) and think another (alter) ? 7. He is a fit person to be trusted. 8. Is he not too wise to be here? 9. This book is too difficult to understand. 10, There are some who are too faithful to sell their country for gold. II. He has committed a crime too great to be forgiven. 12. I do not doubt that you have spoken the truth. 13. He had nothing to say. 14. I sent a man to tell you the truth. 15. Aelius used to write speeches for others to deliver (use qui). 16. They are always asking mc what I am doing. 17. Men are found who take from some (alius) that {relativi^ they may give to others. 18. Is anyone so foolish that he can understand nothing? 19. He was unworthy to have that honor conferred upon him. 20. He sent forward five legions to attack the camp, 21. How few there are who are like him ! 22. They were too ]noud to ask for money. 23. There is nothing that can prevent him from doing it. 24. He is asking for a pen to write with. 25. Who is there who would wish this? 26. It happened that he was the first to announce it at Rome. 27. He. left a legate to fmish the business (n-/,) 28, We need a consul to influence (flecto) the populace. 29. This 1 had to say {rel.) on friendship. 30. There was nothing new to ask you (/r/.) 31. He wishes to have a j^lace (quo) to go to. 32. No one — if at least he is a man (use rel.) — will be absent CAUSAL AM) CONCESSIVE CLAUSES. 113 It He Ito on He he §44. CAUSAL AND CONCESSIVE CLATj SES. / Because and Although. 1. Causal adverbial clauses state the caust^ or reason for the fact mentioned in the main clause. In English they are usually in- troduced by because : as, Tac. quia perictUum metuunt. Tlicy are silent because ihey fear danger. 2. Causal clauses are usually introduced by quod, quia ^because) or qvioniam (^quum iam, since noiK<\ seeing;; that. They are followed by the indicative when the reason they intro- duce is given on the speaker's own authority ; they are followed by the subjunctive when the reason they introduce is given on the authority of another : as, Patria expulsus est quia iustus erat. lie teas ban is /led because he loas just {ox for being just). Here esset would mean that this was the reason usually given, for the truth of which, however, the speaker would not vouch. Socrates accusatus est quod corrumperet iuventvitem. Socrates ivas accused because (as 7uas alleged) he was corrupting the young ine?i (corrumpebat would mean that the speaker vouched for the truth of the charge). Note. — This quod is common after queror {complain), laudo {praise\ gaudeo {be glad), doleo {be sorry). See p. 99, 6. 3. Quum (cum), in the sense of since, is often used to introduce a causal clause (p. 106,2): as, Haec quum ita sint, abibo. As this is so, I shall go a^vay, 4. The relative qui (called qui causal) is often used with the sub- junctive to introduce a causal clause : as, Pec&sse videor qui a te discesserim. Jt seems I haTC done lorong, inasmuch as I have parted from you (peccfi,sse - peccavisse). Note. — In this spnse, qui is often strengthened by the addition of qulppe or utpoie, indeed, as being: as, Multa de me questus est 9 i i ! M 1 1 1:1 5 il i 114 LATIN PIIOSK COMPOSITION^. m •^^i' •■}iy quippe qui in me incensus esset. I/c complained at length of me inasmuch as lie Jiad been exasperated against me 6. Qui causal is \ery commonly found after exclamations : as, Me miserura, qui haec fecerim. Wretch that I am for doing this! Note — The accusative case is often used in exclamations. It is called the accusative of exclamation. 6. Non quod or non quo, with the subjunctive, is often used to introduce a rejected reason : as, Hoc lauclo non quod honestum sit, sed quod utile est. I praise this, not because it is Jwnorable but because it is expedient. De consilio meo non scripsi, non quo celandum esset sed quia, &c. / did not write you about niy pian^ not because it required to be concealed but because^ (Sec. So too : Non quin, not but that /as, Non quin me ames sed quod abirecupio. Not but that you love me., but because I am anxious to go. CONCESSIVE CLAUSES. 7- Co7icessi7ie adverbial clauses arc those that make some con- cession, in spite of which the statement of the main clause is true. They are usually introduced in English by a/though : as, Romani, quamquam proelio fessi erant, tamen procedunt. The Jvomans, altJiough they were weary with fighting., nevertheless ad- vance. 8. Concessive clauses, when they state a fact, take the indica- tive ; when they state a supposition, the subjunctive : as, Caesar, quamquam nondum eorum consilia cognoverat, tamen suspicabatur. Though Caesar had not as yet discovered their f'.;-s, fie nevertheless was suspicious. H' iii talso in suspicionem venisses, tamen mihi ignoscete de- ova •! Although you had been falsely suspected {\\\\\c\\ you were not : a supposition), still you should have pardoned me [li? suspicio- nem venire=the passive of suspicor, / suspect]. 9. The following are the commor. concessive conjunctions, and ^ CAUSAL AND CONCESSIVE CLAUSES. 115 tlic moods with which they are used : Quamquam {i/iflugh\ and utut {Ji(nvcvcr\ with indicative ; licet, qtiaravis (lit., as you wis/i), ut, quum (all meaning althougli)^ with subjunctive; etsi, etiamai, tametsi {altJiough^ ci'cn if) -all compounds of si (//"), and following the same rules for mood (p. 1 19). Note, — Quamvis is also used with single words as an adverb and without influence on the verb of the clause : as, Ille, quamvis facetiis, odio est. He however "wifty, t's haled (or ivJiatever his "ivit [Odio esse, to be for an object of hate^ is the passive of odi, / hafe\ 10. The relative qui, with the subjunctive, is often used conces- sively. It is called qui concessive : as, Caesar, qui haec videret, tamen aciem instruxit. Though Caesar sa^a this, still he cireiv up his line (qui -quamvis). 11. Latin concessive conjunctions may be used to express Eng- lish phrases Hke In spite of, notwithstanding, whatever : as, I>t spite of his being a good man, he was condemned. Is quarn- quam vir bonus erat, condemnatus est. However guilty he may be {wJiatcver his guilt), he will he ac- quitted. Is, quamvis nocentissmus sit, absclvetur. 12. Quamquam is often used co-ordinately, in the sense of and yet: as, Quamquam ego putabam id non posse. And yet I for my part thought it was impossible. Exercise XLIV. '■ I. Although they are brave, still they may be defeated. 2. See- ing that you had promised, you should have kept your word. 3. As they were not able to withstand our attack, they retreated to their camp. 4- They were glad because they had recovered their ship. 5. Unhappy man ! in that (since) you have been banished from your country. 6. He was accused of corrupting the young men (use because). 7. He was thrown into prison because he had killed his friend. 8. That being the case, take up your arms. 9. He was angry with me for preferring gain to friendship (as he said). 10. Was he not banished because he was just? 11. You are praising 1 ii l''v '■■ m Ml r 116 LATIJJ PROSIi COMPOSITION. I:. ■ liim for doing what I am sure he did not do. 12. There are som6 who deny that it is true. 13. He was desj)ised by thcni for they knew him(r^/) 14. He is not a proper person to be received. 15. They are too brave to be conquered. 16. This hfe is too short to l)c the whole life of man (re/.) 17. I pity you who have not slept for tiiree whole nights. 18. How few there are who believe him ! 19. He sent two sons there, that they might be taught literature. 20. There are some who think that mind and body perish together. 21. Hand me a sword to kill with. 22. You have reason to rejoice. 23. He wished to hinder me from coming. 24. There was no one but thought him mad. 25. The general, who saw that he could not prevent it, ordered the men to advance. 26. Who is there of you who is worthy of his country who will not pray for this.-* 27. He was too merciful to punish them. 28. Though he is worthy of punishment, I pity him. 29. To think that you should be unable to hear it ! 30. You will hardly find anyone to believe it. 31. Give me a stick with which I may drive away the birds. 32. Of all men — of those at least I know (re/.) — he has the best ability. §45. COMPx\RATIVB CLAUSES. 1. A comparative adverbial clause expresses agreement (or the opposite) with the statement of the main clause : as, Ut sementem feceris, ita metes. Yoit shall reap according as you do (lit., shall have done) your seeding. Here the clause introduced by ut is an adverbial comparative clause. / The following words, used to introduce a comparative clause, are followed by ac (or, before a vowel, atque) for ///«;/, as, from, &c. : Alius {ofhcr\ aliter or secus {otherwise), similis {li/ce), dissimilis {iinlike\ par {equal), pariter or aeque {equally), perinde or pro- inde or iuxta (just as), contrarius {opposite), pro eo {in propor- tion) : as, COMPARATIVE CLAUSES. 117 Se g-erit lonpe aliter ac tu. He behaves very differently from you. Simili fortuna atque antea utimur. IVe are havin^s^ the same fortune as before. Amicoa aeque ac semet diligere oportet. IVe should love our friends as nuuh as ourselves (lit., one should, &c. ; p. 55, 2). Contra (^opposite) takes quam : as, Contra quam pollicitus es, fecisti. You have acted in violation of your promise. Nihil aliud {nothini^ else) is followed by quam or nisi : as, Bellum suscipitur ut nihil aliud quam (or nisi) pax quaesita videatur. IV^ar is undertaken in such a way that nothing but peace seems sought for. 2. Comparative clauses introduced by quam may take the construction of the main clause, or the subjunctive with or without ut : as, Nee ultra saeviit quam satis erat. Nor did he show any need- less cruelty Clit., nor was he cruel further than was enough). Perpessus est omnia potius quam (ut) indicaret. He endured everything rather than inform. Eum aggrediamur potius quam propulsemus. Let us attack rather than repel him. Note. — In the same way, quam connects two infinitives : as, Dixit se quidvis potius perpesstirum quam exiturum. He said that he would enditre anything rather than go forth. 3. Comparative clauses fall into two classes : — {a) Where the comparison is stated as Si fact '. as, Omnia, sicut acta sunt, memoravit. He has narrated every- thing, just as it was done. (b) Where the comparison is stated as a mere supposition : as, Honoi'es petunt quasi honeste vixerint. They seek office^ as if they had lived honorably ( while they luwe ?iot). The first class take the indicative ; the second, the subjunctive. ^'1 i \ ..•->>i-:'« « • 118 LATIN PKOSE COMPOSITION. 4. The following arc tlu: common comparat.ve conjunctions that are usually joined with the subjunctive : Tanquam, or tanquam si, quasi, velut, or velut si, as if', as, Tanquam hoc difficile sit. As if this ivor liard. Velut si Asia sit clausa, sic nihil perfertur ad nos. Just as if Asia were closed^ no ncivs rcacJics us [p. 123, II. (b)\ 5. The English i/ic the with two comparatives, is expressed in Latin in two ways : — ■ {a) By quo....eo (or quanto — tanto) with two comparatives : as Quo (or quanto) quis est melior, eo (or tanto) difflcilius suspicatur. 77ic better a uuin is, the more diffuulty ne has in suspecting (p. 78, 6). {b) By Ut quisque,...ita, with two superlatives: as, Ut quisque vir optimus est, ita difflcillime suspicatur. The better a man is, Sec. Note. — This might also be translated : /// proportion to a man^s goodness, &c., or, In proportion as a jnan is good, &:c. IDIOMATIC USES OF UT, AS. i't; 1 if 6, The following idiomatic uses of ut, as, should be noticed : — (a) Ut fortasse vere, sic parum utiliter respondit. Though his answer was true, yet it was not very expedient (concessive and restrictive). (b) Valde frugi erat, ut servus. //e was very thrifty for a slave. {c) Multum, ut illis temporibus, valuit. He had great influence for that time. (d) Multae etiam, ut in homine Romano, litterae. A good know- ledge of literature, too, for a Roman. {e) Pauca, ut semper taciturnus erat, respondit. IVith his usual reticence, he made a brief reply. (/■) Magnus pavor, ut in re improvisa, fuit. The panic was great, as was natural in so unexpected an occurrence. '11 CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 119 u EXERCISK XLV. 1. He shall be punished as he deserves. 2. I will be.ir it as I can. 3. They acted as if the enemy were already at the gates. 4. Tiiouyh he is al)sent, I w ill cmne to ymir aid. 5. We will fii;ht as you direct. 6. You speak as if he were here. 7. He praised us for having behaved so well (p. 1 13, 2). 8. He spoke as if no one were dissatisfied with his lot. 9. He shut the gate to keep out the enemy. 10. He talks as if he thought that it was all o\er with him. II. He was too proud to accept UKjney. 12. He acts as if I were a fool. 13. 71ie more a man reads, the moie he knows. 14. Though I am angry with you, you may say what jou wish. 15. As if 1 cared for that ! 16. Even Varius docs not hesitate to lead out his troops (/(T.sv.' ne-quidem). 17. However you have behaved towards me, still I will praise you. 18. They tell a very different story from you (say : icil otJwr things tJuui). 19. They placed the image in the opposite direction to what it had been {iise contra quam). 20. You are acting otherwise tha« I wished. 21. They have not been praised as much as they deserve. 22. She gave him a sword to kill himself with (p. 1 1 1, 6). 23. I wish he would come {use utinam). 24. I spoke just as I felt. 25. Philosophy is not praised as much as it deserves. 26. They move backwards with an opposite motion to that of the sky. 27. He will be punished in proportion as he deserves. 28. She has as much sense as beauty {use par). 29. He asked me whether I was in good health, and I answered Yes. 30. A boy should know more than he says. 31. After dismissing the army, he returned to Rome. 32. He said that he would perish sooner than that I should be harmed. 33. Let them fight rather than be slaves. 34. Though they had rest from battle, still they did not cease from labor. 11 § 46. CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 1. A conditional sentence contains (a) a main clause, (b) an ad- verbial clause stating the condition on which the statement of the main clause is, or would be, true : as, // he says this, he is ivrofig. The clause containing the condition is called the ^y-clause. ir 120 LATIN rnoSR COMrOSITION. It ' i 2. The conunon types of the conditional sentence are as follows : — CONDITIONAL SENTENCKS. o C i/i > J2 o VC rt o — c U 3 3 C/2 Ik-Ci,ausk. f 1. SI quia haec elicit, // (U/j'iij/i; siiys //i/s, SI quid haoc dixit, //' (ii/\'(>iii' sdiii t/iis, 2. Si quis haec dlcet (ordlxerit), //' aiiyoiii' sitys (literally, s/iii// saj' or /idT'i.' said) (his, f 3. Si quia haec dicat, y/ iinyoiid were to (or should) say ( Ill's, 4. Si quia haec diceret, Main Clause. errat. Jic is 7vro)ig. erravit. /le 7iu/s 7i '^'ling of annals. r^m E po, Bi non optima, at aliqua tamen vivere. To live with some '• ';.Y if n.t the highest. Note. — At tamen should always be joined to single words, never used to introduce a sentence. Exercise XLVII. '^ I. If they make an attack upon this town, they will capture it very easily. 2. Had he listened to my warning (p. 48,6), this would never have happened. 3. If you do not return, you will injure all or :'s. .;. If you had been consul that year, you would have shown the same courage as he did (p. 54, 2). 5. If I had gone there, I should have had to put up with his insults (p. 45, 2). 6 If the rest were killed, would you be likely to escape } (p. 54, 2) 7. If you had I? ilii ■I ••*, n\ ' m 126 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. m m .■■!( wished lo capture this city, you should have collected more troops, 8. Even if he had been a stranger, you should have helped him* 9. Had he been a good man, I might have influenced him. 10. Pro- vided you ward off this danger, we shall consider you a friend. 11. If he had remained in Rome, he might have been destroyed. 12. If your country were to speak thus to you, she ought to obtain her request. 13. Provided I can collect an army, I will join you immediately. 14. Though you are away, we shall never forget you (^^j-^ ut....ita). 15. Whether you will trust it to him or not, I do not know. 16. Whether you are willing or unwilling, I shall always be grateful. 17. Whether u were present or not, concerns your- self alone. 18. He promifvi* ' i' he would never return to Rome unless victorious. 19. Unlesi ' ,f>od you fancy it was the old man who was applauded (p. 1 2 r, 7). 20. r.vcn if your father had punished you, you should have remembered that he was your father. 21. If you had acted otherwise, the same result would have occurred (say : M^ sa;ne thing was about to happen). 22. He wanted to prevent me from speaking. 23. O ! that the king were here himself. 24. Hav- ing answered thus, he departed without saying good-bye to anyone (p. 52, 4). 25. He ought to have done what he promised. 20. You are not the one to consider poxerty a disgrace. 27. What does it matter to us that the city has been captured 1 28. Even if you had been falsely suspected, you ought to have pardoned me. 29. If he had not manumitted them, they must have been given up to torture. 30. If they had delayed a single day, all must have died. 3 r . They were thrown into prison until they paid the fine. 32. He was too cautious to admit that he preferred you to us. 33. Hardly any one doubted that the consul would be obeyed. I J( INDIRECT NARRATtOK. 127 f ! » K §48. INDIRECT (OR OBLIQUE^) NARRATION. 1. A statement depending' iin a verb of sayings thinkings per- ceiving, kno7vingi or the like, is said to be in indirect or oblique narration. Thus, in Dixit se civem Romanum esse, he said that he was a Roman citizen^ the words se civem Romaniun esse are in indirect narra- tion. The actual words used were Civis Romanus sum, / am a Romati citizen; these arc said to be in direct tmrration. 2. The main verb of direct narration becomes infinitive in indirect narration, and the subject of direct narration becomes accusative before the infinitive (p. 4). The tense of the infinitive will be present, perfect, or future, according as the tense of the actual words was present, perfect, or future. Thus : — Direct. Civis Romanus sum. I a»i a Roman citizen. Civis Romanus ero. / shall be a Roman Citizen. Civis Romanus eram {or fui). Indirect. Dixit se civem Romanum esse, He said that he was a Roman citizen. Dixit se civem Romanum fu- turum esse (or fore.) lie said that he should be a Roman citize7i. Dixit se civem Romanum fuisse. / was (or have been) a Roman citizen. He said that he was (or had been) a Roman citizen. Note. — After verbs meaning to hope or promise., the future infini- tive is used instead of the English present infinitive : as, Promisit se ventvirum esse. He promised to come (p. 7, 3). 3. To determine the tense of the infinitive in indirect narration, it is best to find the tense of the main verb in direct narration ; the tense of the main verb in direct narration is the tense of the infinitive in indirect nan-ation. Thus, in Caesar said that he had 'The term oblique imrration is sometimes limited so aj to apply only to reported speeches. It is more cotivenient to use it in the wider sense. 111 i Jrili < ■ ^ I. :i '■•1 H .'ill ,!lt; 128 LATm PROSE COMPOSITION. Ml written^ the direct narration is I have lorittcti^ scrips!; the indirect, therefore, is Caesar dixit se scripsisse ; Jic said that he was an orator^ is dixit se oratorem esse (direct^^orator sura). Note. — Pronouns of the ist or 2rd person become pronouns of the 3rd person, in reporting speeches in indirect narration. 4. All adjectival and adverbial clauses in indirect narration must have the subjunctive : as, Dixit se eos, quos cepisset, domum misisse. He said f hat he had sent home those lohoni he had taken (direct=:eos quos cepi domum misi, / have sent home those u>Jio)n I have ta/cen). Dixit se, quoties potuisset, rediisse. He said that he had re- turned as often as he coi/ti* , iirect=redii quoties potui, ./ have re- turned as often as I could). Note 1. — In accordance 'th Jie rule for the sequence of tenses (p. 20, 2), the verb of the dependent adjectival or adverbial clause will be in the impf. or plupf. subjunctive in indirect narration after a secondary tense. Note 2. — A subordinate clause, when inserted in a passage in indirect narration on the authority of the writer or reporter, takes the indicative : as, Oertior facttis est Xerxes id agi ut pons, quem ille in Hellesponto fecerat, dissolveretur. Xerxes was informed that this was intended^ i.e., to break down the bridge which he {Xerxes) had bidlt over the Hellespont, Here the clause quem.... fecerat has the indicative, because the writer vouches for the truth of the statement himself. 5. The imperative of direct narration is put in the subjunctive in indirect narration (after a secondary tense, in the impf. sub- junctive, in accordance with the law of sequence ; § 11) : as, Ne cunctarentur. Let them not delay {he said) (direct=ne cuncta mini, do not delay). Ne illud faceret. Let him not do that (dir. =ne feceris ; p. 26^3). 6. Questions that expect an answer are put in the subjunctive in indirect narration ; rhetorical questions (exclamations and appeals), in the infinitive: as, indire(;t narration. 129 he in ih- in (Rcr'ppit) quid de praeda faciendtini esse censerent? (//<• "uiroic) ivluit did tiicy fliink sit<>i/'d lie done loith regard to the /'ooty/ (direct -quid — censetis? -uduit ao you t/u'nk?). Quid esse turpius? cur eos dubitare ? JlVidt tcos more di's- hono)-(ibIe / 'jc/iy did tJicy /h'sitate / (direct "Quid est turpius? cur dubitatis? ichat z's more dishonorable ? why do yon hesi/,ite ?) 7- A fut.-perf. indicative in a dependent clause of direct narration, l)cconus, in indirect, ])erf. subjun. after a primary tense and plupcrf. suljjun. after a secondary : as, Dicit eiim qui id fecerit, poenas datiirum esse. lie says that the one who does this^ shall be punisJied. Dixit evim qui id fecisset, poenas datvirum esse. He said that the one who did that, should be punished (direct = qui id fecerit, poenas dabit, lie who shall have done that shall be punishea). 8. Oblique narration is often suddenly introduced into the narrative by the historians, without the governing- verb of saying being expressed : as, Regulus reddi captives negavit esse utile : illos enim bones duces e.^se. Regulus denied that it 7vas expedient that the eaptives should be ?rstored: that they were good leaders. 9. I sav. . . .not in T.atin is nego, which, owing to the tendency in Latin to put the negative forward in the sentence, is usually put first : as, Negabat se praemium ullum accepturum. He said that he would not aeccpt a?iy reward. (Note. — Esse with a participle is often dropped in indirect narration). Exercise XLVIII. {N.B. — Indirect narration is to be used all through the exercise). I. What (they asked) was niore base than to adopt a policy at the suggestion of the enemy.'' 2. Let them remember (he said) what he had told them. Let them not forget the kindness they had received. 3. Lie said that he had not sold his house. 4. They said that he used to groan as often as he saw his son (p. 107, 5}, 10 ! 4. 130 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 5. ITc did not douljt (he said) that all were weary of the war. 6. They voted (censeo) that they should march by ni^dit : (saying) that they could easily reach the defile. 7. lie promised that he would not be wanting to his friends. S. Why (he asked) did they obey a few centurions.? When would they dare to demand redress? {rlwiorical (jticst.) 9. He called out (clamo) that, as far as he was able, he would follow their footsteps. 10. He used to say that the soul was immortal, ii. What was he to do (he asked)? They were calling out that it was all over with us. 12. Me said that he was ready to die for the country. Must not all die some day? (he asked). 13. Did they intend to destroy the city? (he asked). 14. Don't you think that they should have fought with men, and that women and children should have been spared? 15. Do not ask him whether he did all this at the instigation of your brother or not. 16. He maintained that the assassination of the father would not jirofit them until they banished the son. 17. He answered that he blushed (pudet) for the country that could banish a man of such ability. 18. They said that they were ready to sacri- fice (posthabeo) their liberty to that of the nation. 19. For myself, even in-lhe-face-of (in) this great danger, I could not believe that it was all over with the army. 20. He was easily persuaded that men are valued in proportion to their public usefulness {say : in propor- tion as iJtey have deserved well of tlie coicntry ; p. 116, i). 21. He thought that we ought to attack them before they could recover their presence of mind. 22. 'Whenever he heard anything of the kind, he said that the story was a fiction {use flng-o). 23. The law (he said) forbade anything to belong to anyone who refused to obey the magistrates. Let them, therefore, take away all his property from him. 24. He said that no one who was worthy of his country held such a view. Let them lay aside their fear. Would they ever have such a golden opportunity? 25. He used to say that the more hidden a danger was, the more difficulty there was in avoiding it. btRECT INTO ORLIQUE? NARRATION. 131 m §49. SUMMARY OP RULES FOR TURNING DI- RECT INTO OBLIQUE NARRATION. 1. The following is a summary of the rules already given for turtiing direct into oblique mirration : — (i) The main verb of direct narration becomes infinitive in indirect narration. (2) All adjectival and adverbial clauses take the subjunctive in indirect narration. (3) Pronouns of the ist and 2nd person usually become pronouns of the 3rd person. E.g.: — ego, nos become se meus, noster " suus tu, vos " ille, illi tuus, vester " illius, illorum ■ hie, iste " ille, is (4) Adverbs of present time become (after a secondary tense) adverbs oi past time. E.g. : — nunc becomes iara, tunc heri (yesterday) " pridie (the day before) hodie (to-day) " illo die (that day) eras (to-morrow) " postridie (next day) So : — Hie (here) becomes ibi (there). (5) Imperatives become subjunctives (usually imperf. subjunc- tives). (6) Rhetorical questions are expressed by the accusative and infinitive ; questions that expect an answer, Ijy the subjunctive. (7) A future-perfect used in a dependent clause for the English present, becomes perfect subjunctive after a primary tense, and pluperfect subjunctive after a secondary. 2. The following examples of oblique narration should be care- fully studied : — H 132 LATIN PROSK COMPOSITION. (a) Art'slotlc S(i\s 1hr(uiiicrtl ivJiicli //TV (I simple day. {/)) As io Jtis ItdTini^ unex- pectedly fallen on one canton, ivlien those who Juul crossed the river lucre not able io beer help io their comrades, he sliould not ('i.e., let Jiini not) on that account presume exceedingly on his 7>alor or loolc doii^n on them ; that t/uy Juui learned t ins from their fathers a/ui ancestors, \.q., to fight with valor. {c) What would happen (he asked), if he carried the law? {d) IV/iy were they living {they as iced)? W/iy were theyrecJconed as citizens ? (e) They said that, while he was delaying, the city Juui been ta/cen. (/) He said that he ate to live. (g) Let them go {he said) where they wis/u'd. (h) Let me die {he said), if I am not glad. (z) He said he would do wJiat they wished. Aristoteles alt bostia.s quas- cUun nascl qnao iirium diem vi- vant. Quod improviso unum pagum adortua es.set, quum ii, qui flu- men tninsii.ssent, suis avixilium ferro non pcs.sent, ne ob earn rem aut suae magnopore virtuti tribueret aut ipsos de.spiceret; SB ita a patribus maioribusque suiri didicisye, ut virtute con- tenderent. Quid fle- et si leg-em pertulis- set? (direct =quid flat .si leg-em pertulei'o ? Tlie cU'Iibcrativc sul)jun. [24, [d)\ is uurlianycd m indirect narration, unless in accordance with p. 20, 2). Quid se vivere? quid cives censeri? (dircct^^quid vivimus? quid cives censemur?) Dixerunt ixrbem, dum ille moraretur, captam fuisse. Dixit se, ut viveret. edere. Abirent quo valient. Se velle mori nisi g-auderet (direct=moriar nisi gaudeo, let me die, &:c.). Dixit se, quod vellent, factu- rum[direct=faciam quod volent, J will do what t/iey {shall) wisH\. OBLIQUK NAKUATIOX. 133 ille sA]. KxEKcisrc XLIX. (A/./>. — i'si' imiirrcf narrdtion (ill throui^Ji the exercise.) I. "("lo," lie said, " create consuls.'* 2. \Vc had all to die some d.'iy (lie said). What was the use, by tlec:lininj^ the contest and defcninj,^ the day of death, of eaininj^ the coward's reputation ? 3. He told us that we ouj^ht not to w ait till w c ascertained w hether they intended to liyht or not. 4. 1 le sent a horseman to the army to say that our hope of vi( loiy was in ])roportion to the speed with which we could ad\an(e (p. 1 iiS, 5). 5. He said that it was t)f the utmost consequence to the country what they did ; let tliein remember the ancestors from whom they were sprung. 6. He said that one's difficulty in suspecting others w.is proportionate to one's own good- ness. The man w ho had made such an assertion was impious him- self. They ought to wait until they saw what the result would be. 7. Could an} one ha\e sui)posed that so able a general would not have sent out scouts to ascertain the number of the enemy.? 8. Let them advance (he said) and resolve that they must either con- quer or die. 9. He said that he did not blush to own that he owed all his training to the literature of Greece. lo. I believe that, in pardoning enemies and aiding friends, he will out-do all of us. 1 1. He said that he required more men to prevent our lands from being laid waste by the enemy. 12. Consider (he said) the greatness of your debt to your ancestors. 1 3. What ought he to have done? (he asked). Should he have obe)td so unworthy a man as the magis- trate.'* 14. They answered that nothing would prevent them from being put to the sw(;rd. 15. He said that he was ashamed to think that they did not see what ought to be done. 16. Do not believe that I will lose such an opportunity of seeing you. 17. 1 '., you think that he will ever forget how much you ha\e injured him .'' 18. He answered that he had not as yet learned to sacrifice the safety of the country to his own. 19. I believe that twenty years ago he gained some credit at Athens. 20. I know that all the wise are convinced of this, that a man's obstinacy is in proportion to his folly. 21. He said that their children were dead. Let them follow him and avenge them. 22. How few there are who would venture to say that he is hated by all ! 23. It is said that he led the army through our territory till he reached the foot of the hill. 24. He mi m 134 LATIN 1'1U).SI': COAiroSlTlON. said tlial lluy liad to carry on war w itli an enemy who despised treaties. I.tt thcni, tlierefore, refuse to believe him or trust to his promises. 25. lie denieil that anyone had asked how long he had stayed at X'cii. r L ;i' I !l S 50. CONDITIONAL SENTENCE IN OBLIQUE NARRATION. 1. The al)o\e rules may now be a])j)lied to turnini,^ the common types of the ( onditional sentence into oblique narration. The \erb of the main clause Ijecomes acc\ ivith inf.^ and the verb of the ?/-clause subjuncti'i>L\ as follows : — DiKKcr. Ohliquk. 1. Pecuniam si habet, dat. Ijccoincs Dicit se, si pecuniam ha- beat, dare. He says iJiat if he has money, he gives it, ' Dicit se, si pecuniam habu- erit, dedisse. He says that if he had money, he gave it, ' Dicit se, si pecuniam ha- beat (<•!• habuerit), datu- rum esse. He says that if he has money, he will give it. ■ " Dicit se, si pecuniam ha- beat, daturum esse. He says that if he should have money, he would give it. Dicit se, si pecuniam ha- beret, daturum fuisse. He says that if he had money {no7v), he ivoiild give it. '* Dicit se, si pecuniam habu- isset, daturum fuisse. He s.iys that if he had had money, he would have given If he has money, he gives it, Pecuniam si habuit, dedlt (..!• dabat). Jf he had moiuy, he i;ave it. 2. (d) Pecuniam si habeblt (or ha- buerit), dabit. If he has money, he unll give it. (/>) Pecuniam si habeat, det. Jf he should have money, he. li'oitld gii'c it. 3. ifii) Pecuniam si haberet, daret. If he had money {now), he would gi:'L' it. (p) Pecuniam si habuisset. de- disset. If he had had /i/oncy, he would have given it. ^ (;UNI)ITI()N.\L SKNTKN( i: IN' (MlM^rK NAKKATION. i:j5 ha- had iven Note I. TIk! future (hubeblt) in the //-clause of direct narration, l)ecoines pii-sciit subjunctive (haboat) in the indirect, iifter a priniaiy tense. Note 2. —The present suhjunctise (det), in tlic main clause, becomes future inlinitive (daturum esae) in indirect nariation. Note 3. — The imperfect and phiperfect subjunctive in the mam clause (i.e., daret and dodirfeet), are expressed in indirect narration by the future participle with fuisae (i c, datuinim fidriae, lo have been about to give). 2. After a secondary tense, the verb of the //-clause is chan^^ed in accordance with the rule for the sequence of tenses (p. 20). Thus:— DiKECT. 1. Pecuniam si habet, dat. Pecuniam Bi habuit, dedit (or dabat). 2. («j) Pecuniam si habebit (or habuerit), dabit. {b) Pecuniam si babeat, det. 3. («) Pecuniam daret. si haberet, Ohlique. becomes Dixit se, si pecuniam haberet, dare. " Dixit se, si pecuniam habuisset, dedisso. ** Dixit se, si pecuniam haberet (ur habuis- set;, daturum esse. " Dixit se, si pecuniam haberet, daturum esse. " Dixit se, si pecuniam haberet, daturum. fuisse. " Dixit se, si pecuniam habuisset, daturum fuisse. Note I. — The future-perfect in the //"-clause of direct narration, becomes pluperfect subjunctive in oblique. Note 2. — For 2 (/;), the form Dixit fore \xt, si pecuniam haberet, daret, is often found (p. j6, g). Exercise L. {a) I. Do you think that if anyone had suggested such a course at Rome, he would have been opposed by anyone.? 2. Do not think that, if this general had been more unlucky than any of his contemporaries, he could have won such a glorious victory as this ? (p) Pecuniam si habuisset, dedisset. 1: u Hiil I 13G LATIN PUOSE COMPOSITION. 3. He said that, had they been (/>., if they had) in office, they would have encountered the same storms as we had.^ 4. He said that, if the enemy once reached the top of the hill, it made no difference to anyone whether we stood our ground or fled. 5. He answered that, if we had known the extent of the danger, we would never have asserted tliat our army was too brave to be routed. 6. I believe that if the announcement of this victory had been made, you would hear the wliole city ringing with shouts of joy and triumph. 7. Do you think that, if you had ordered the soldiers to desist from butcher- ing tlie vancjuished, you would have been obeyed.'^ 8. He said that, if they had obeyed the general, they would have conquered. 9. He told them that, if they wished to have peace, he must be consulted. 10. 'I liey answered that it was of no importance to them whether they stayed or went. 1 1. Don't you think that, if he were here, all would be well ? 12, He said that, if he were here, he would give no quarter {ksc parco). 13. He said that, if the harvest was large, the country would Ije rich. 14. They thought tliat, if we had not de- tained them, they would have arrived sooner. 15. If they had not put as experienced a general as yourself (p. 3, 8) at the head of the army, I believe we should have had no ho])e of safety. 16. I thought that, if anyone else had said this, he would not have been believed by anyone. 17. I am persuaded that, if he showed remorse for his conduct, he would be acquitted. 18. He answered that, if we knew the extent of the danger, we Wv)uld not go out. 19. I always thought th.vt, if you used your own judgment, you would do better than anyone. 20. He wrote that, if he had received the letter, he would have hastened as quickly as possible to Rome. (/;) Turn into oblique narration after dixit, the sentences in Exer- cise 47. . 'Apply, all through, the important rule of p. 127, 3. 1 VIRTUAL OBLIQl'E NAHKATION. ASSIMILATION. 137 -^» §51. VIRTUAL OBLIQUE NARRATION. ASSIMILATION. 1. A suljjiinctive is frequently used in a Latin suljordinate clause to express that ihc statement of the clause depends on some verb of saying- understood : as, Laudat Panaetiiis Africantim quod fuerit abstinens. Pamtctiits praises Ajricanus because {as he says) he was absteinious. This elegant use of the principle of oblicpie narration is called I'irtiial oh! i que narration. It is often foinul in a causal clause (p. 113, 2): as, Socrates accusatus est quod corrumperet iuventutem. Socrates Uh accused because (as was alleged) he was corrupiijig the young men. Here the subjunctive implies oblique narration. 2. Virtual oblique narration is used when a speaker quotes il;e word or words of some one else : as, Frumentum, Aedui quod polliciti assent, flagitabat. }[e de- manded from the Aedui the corn which they had f>?-omised (\\c\c the verb of the rel. clause is quoted in virtual oblique narration from the original words of the Aedui ; hence the subjun). Socrates exsecrari earn solebat qui primus utilitatem a itire- seiunxissot. Socrates used to execrate the nuin who first had separ- ated expediency from right (here the fact referred to in the rel. clause is not vouched for ; it is given on the authority of Socrates). 3. The verb of a subordinate clause, when depending upon a verb in the subjunctive, is itself often put m the subjunc'tive. This is called assimilation : as, Concedit ut absim cum aliquid ag-atur. I/e allozvs me to be away when so)nething is going on (agatur is assimilated to the mood of absim). Erat in eo memoria tanta ut, quae commentatus esset, verbis eisdem redderet quibus cogitavisset. TJierc was in hint suck power if memory that ideas he had excoi^itatedy he reproduced in the same words in which he had thougJit them out (the verbs of the two rel. clauses arc assimilated to the mood of redderet). ' w i \ 1 IP i 138 LATIN PROSE COMTOSITION. fc* I '!! 4. Verbs of sayinf^ and tlu'nkini^ are not inserted parenthetically into a sentence in Latin. Thus : Yott were, he said, mistaken. Dixit te errare. He has, you think, j^one azuay. Putas eum abiisse. Note. — Phrases like ut aiunt {as they say), ut opinor {as 2 think), v.t puto {(IS I fancy), are, however, found. 5. Inqtiit, he says or said, is the only \'erb of saying that is never used to introckice obHque narration. It is always used in quoting- the exact words of another and it is placed after the first tv ,r three words of the quotation : as, At Caesar: "Minime vero," inquit, "hoc probe." But Cassar said : ''*' I by no means approve of thisJ^ 6. Credo, I believe, is sometimes used parenthetically, but always in an ironical sense : as, Credo, etiam tabulae proferentur. The account-books, I suppose, will even be produced. I 1 Exercise LI. I. They accused him of havintj (as they alleged) betrayed the king {use quod). 2. lie used to walk at night because (as was said) he could not sleep. 3. He gave me all the books which (as he said) his father had left him. 4. He demands that you should remove this scruple which (as he says) is goading him day and night (pi-) S' When he had reached the top of the hill, he pointed out streams which (he said) flowed towards Italy. 6. Cato used to wonder that a soothsayer did not laugh whenever he saw a sooth- sayer. 7. He sent them another king since the one that had been given them was useless. 8. You complain that we do not hold the same views. 9, He passed a law concerning the murder which (as he said) had been committed (facie). 10 Avail yourself of this bless- ing while you have it (subjun.). 11. The person who saw it (sub- jun.) would wonder. 12. He begged them, since they had not helped him in his life-time, not to leave his death unavenged. 13. This man— so they tell me — was born rich. 14. He said that, if the Romans made peace with him, he would remain where they SPECIAL IDIOMS OF LATIN SYNTAX. 139 (as 1 orciered him to remain. 15. When I do it, I shall return to Rome. 16. He, I belic\e, will quickly recover. 17. 'I'hcreupon the other (ille) said : "All this 1 will dth" iS. Ask him whether he expects ever to be rich by sacrificing his own interests to those of his friends. 19. At your suggestion they were persuaded to set out to the attack upon our camp, without waiting for a guide. 20. If he did this, I would show my gratitude ; if not, it woidd be of small consequence to me. 21. It is not easy to say whether this man should be sj^ared by us or thrown into prison. 2:. To my com- plaint that he had broken his word, he rc[)lied that he had done nothing of the kind. 25. At your suggestion, they attacked and stormed the camp. 24. lY'aring for the safety of his father, he fled to me in Italy. 25. The announcement of this victory filled the city with shouting and singing. 26. It is difficult to see how he could have gained the battle by withdrawing his troops. 27. Don't you think that he felt shame and remorse for esteeming so highly such a wicked man as Catiline ? 28. If they had defeated our army and captured this city, not a soul would be alive to-day. 29. When the soldiers had reached the summit of the mountain, they congratulated the general upon the con([uest of Italy (use quod+7'(^.) 30. I believe that, if he had made the same mistake as you, he would long ago have repented of it. 31. After saluting the general of the enemy, he rode rapidly away without waiting for anyone. 5fe- §52. ON SOME SPECIAL IDIOMS OP LATIN SYNTAX. (( Without" and a Participial Noun. 1. The ablative of the gerund can not be joined with sine, the usual preposition for ivitJioiif. Phrases, therefore, like Wlthoitt in- jurifij:^ /limsc/f, without your pcyccnnHij; //, «.^'c., must be paraphrased into some synonymous form of wortls, and this tiu"ned into Latin. Thus : rf 140 LATIN rUOSE COMPOSITION. JIc aids others wilhout injuring Jiiniself, Allis subvenit, non sibi nocena. / did it wit/iout your perceiinng it. TJuy condemn Jiiin u>it/iout hearing' him. Hoc feci, te non sentiente. Eum damnant inau- ditum. lie cries without feeling grief. Flet nee dolet. He never led out his army "iUithouf examining the position of the ground. Nunquaiu exercituna eduxit nisi explorato locorum situ. He speaks ivitliout persuading anyone. Dicit nee cuiquam per- siiadet. ]Ve returned without accomplishing anything. Re infecta rediimus. Those camiot fill without these filling with than. Cadere ilia non possunt ut haec non concidant. To think of my going away without saying good-bye to anyone ! Mene abiisse, nullo salutato ! See p. 58, 15. 2. It has been seen {p. j/, j ; note 1) that the fut. subjun. act. is formed from the fut. participle with sim, whicli becomes essem after a secondary tense. Therefore : They are so terrified that they will not fight is Adeo territi sunt ut non pugnaturi sint. They were so terrified that they wou/d not fight. Adeo territi erant ut non pugnaturi assent {would^ here, is simply the histori- cal tense of ?(. 7'//.) "WOULD HAVE" IN A DEPENDENT CLAUSE. 3. Would have (of the main clause of a conditional sentence) when inserted in a dependent clause that already requires the sub- junctive, is not to be turned by the pluperf. subjun., but by the periphrastic conjugation. Thus : / did not doubt that he would have taken the city. Non dubitavi quin urbem capturus fuerit. (consecutive sequence ; p. 14, 3). / ash you what you would have done. Rogo te quid facturus fueris. .SV' great was the slaughter that you would not have survived. Tanta caedes fuit ut non superfuturus fueris. gPlEClAL IDIOMS OP LATIN SYNTAX. 141 And so ill the passive : TJiercfflKt' it happen:^ iJiat^ if I had given the order ^ a disaster ivfluld hai'e been sustained. Eo fit ut, hoc si lussissem, clades accipienda fuerit (or accipi potuerit). Note. — These examples show the Roman fondness for strict adherence to rule. They chose a form which would express {a) that the clause was conditional ; {l>) that it was consecutive, or an indirect question, etc. {i.e. a double dependence). 4, Would have been (in the main clause of an ordinary condi- tional scntcMice) requires in oblique narration the periphrasis fjiturtun fuisse ut {to have been about to be) : as, He said that, if life could have been longer, it wotild have been adorned with many arts. Dixit, si vita longinqulor esse potuisset, futurum fuisse ut multis artibus ornaretur (dir. ^=^ ornata esset). This periphrasis is also used {a) in the active, when a verb has no supine ; {b) for the sake of variety, when there is no necessity for it : as, (a) I had hoped that this would have happened, Speraveram futurum fuisse ut id contingeret. (b) I know that we should have taken the city, if he had not been there. Scio futiu-iim fuisse ut xirbera caperemiis nisi ille ad« fuisset. 5. Certain idiomatic uses of the si-clause deserve notice. Thus : {a) Exspectabat si hostem elicere posset. He was waiting in the hope that he could draw out the enemy (here the si-clause is in virtual oblique n'i\x\7i\!\o\\ = determined that, if he could draw the enemy out, he would fight them). (b) Mortem mihi denuntiavit si pugnavissem. He threatened me with death in case I fought (here the main clause of the condi- tional sentence is contained in mortem==-si pugnaveris, moriere). (c) Nuntium ad te misi si forte non audiisses. I sent a messenger to you, in case you had not heard {here the si-clause expresses pur- pose and therefore has the suhjun, ;= that you might hear). ^ IK 'A. 142 LATIN PROSK COMPOSITION. Mi 6. Coepl means both / begin and / began. The active form is used when an active infinitive follows : as, Urbem aediflcare coepit. He began fo build the city. The passive form, coeptus sum, is used when a passive infinitive follows : as, Urbs aediflcari coepta est. The city began to be built. 7- Other common ways of turnin^^ although, beside those men- tioned, may be yiven. Thus : Though he is a good nian^ he sometimes sins (a) Ita est vir optimvis ut interdiim peccet (i.e., on this condi- tion he is a good man, that, etc.; restrictive use). •• (b) Vir sane optimus est, sed tanien peccat (usual concessive force of Bane, no doubt, if j'ou 7L'ill). (c) Licet vir optimus sit, tamen peccat (licet, it is gra?ited, though). 8. For the present participle pass, (if required), a relative clause may usually be employed : as, The accused is rich. Is, qui accusatur, vir dives est. 9- For the future participle passive, a periphrasis must be found : as, Caesar, ivhen about to be killed, etc. Caesar, quum in eo esset ut periret (or iam periturus) &c. Exercise LI I. I. They poured round in the hope of finding some means of approach, 2. I believe that, if this had been said, it would have been heard. 3. N ou will find out, when you come. 4. Had he done so, there is no doubt that he would have done it to the public disadvantage {abl.) 5. He tried in the hope of helping us. 6. Why was he exempted from the law, in case he should be absent from the city ? 7. The enemy were waiting, in the hope that we would cross. 8. There is no doubt that, if I had ordered it, you would have done it. 9. There was no doubt that, if he had not been there, the city would have been taken. 10. If it had been NOTES ON THE NUMERALS!. 143 be s of ave he blic 6. sent we you not een right, you were the one (talis) who would have clone it. ii. Nothing shall happen without my giving you notice. 12. He went away without consulting anyone. 13. I never visit you without coming away more learned. 14. All this he did without your approval. 15. He never saw him without flinging a stone at him. 16. He couid not have condeiTi»ned him without hearing him (say unheard). 17. He returned to Rome without waiting for the army. 18. I believe that if they had delayed a day, the city would have been destroyed. 19 The storm was so great that the fleet would not set sail. 20. You showed on that clay how you would have behaved, if you had been there. 21. It came (p. 38, 2) to this (eo, thitJicr') that, if they had had a high-spirited enemy, they would have been defeated. 22, There is no doubt that, if enough daylight (dies) had remained, they would have been stripped of their camp. 23. Ask them what they would have done, if the enemy had come to the city. 24. He was so able that he would have been chosen, if he had been in a private station (privatus). 25. You showed what kind of magistrate you would have been. 26. There is no doubt that the enemy would have turned their backs. 27. They rushed from the temple with such speed that they would have filled the city with tumult. 28. He said that he had received the thanks of parliament because he had not despaired of the country. 29. Whether it is constitutional or not may be questioned ; but whether it is or not, it is approved of by all patriots. 30. I shall advise him to go from Rome to Athens and to remain there three months. 31. He told us that the man would have recovered, if the doctor had not arrived too late. 32. The besieged (p. 142, 8) were not altogether without water. §53. NOTES ON THE NUMERALS. 1. Cardinal numerals are indeclinable except (i) linus, one; diao, two; tres, three; (2) the hundreds, beginning with ducenti, two hundred; (3) the plural of mille, a thousand. 2. Mille, a thousand^ is indeclinable in the singular, but in the plural it is declined. I- * ■■'» ■[' \'^l f 144 Latin prose compo.sitiojj Note. Mille, in tlio singular, may hv. cither an adjective or a noun with the word dcpenchng on it in the genitive : as, Mille homines or mille hominum, n ihousand Dim. In the plural it is always a noun ; as, Decem millia hominum, ten thouscvid men ( = ten thousand of men). 3. Compound numbers like 21, 22, &c., when between 20 and 100, are written unus et viginti, duo et viginti. or viginti unua, viginti duo, &c. Above one hundred., the greater number precedes (with or with- out et) : as, Ducenti unus, or dticenti et unus, two hutidred and one. Et is rarely expressed : as, Caesar Gallorum duo millia quingentos sex cepit. Caesar cap- tured 2.^06 Gauls. 4. First^ second, third, in enumerations, is unus, alter, tertius: as, Bquibus generibus, unum est ex lis qui — , alterum ex iis, &o. Oj these classes t lie first consists of tJiose who . . the second of those^ etc. 5. The ordinals are used in expressing dates : as, Anno post urbem conditam septingentesimo quinquagesimo quarto natus est Christus. Christ was born "/^^ years after the foundation of the city. A.D. milleaimo octingentesimo octogesimo tQrt\o—A,D. 1 883. Anno urbis conditae quinquagesimo quarto. /;/ the ^4th year of the building of the city {i.e. the beginning of the Roman era ; subtract from 754 for year B.C.). Quota hora est? Hora, prima, secunda, tertia, &c. IVhat hour is it? Sei'en^ ^ight, nine o'clock, etc. {i.e., reckoning from sun-rise at six o'clock ; time was measured by a sun-dial). 6. The distributive numerals are used : — {a) To express our so many at a time, so many each, with a car- dinal numeral : as, Piieris binos libros donavit. He gave the boys two books apiece. (b) To express multiplication : as, Bis bina quattuor sunt. Twice two are four. i! 4 I '■! 1 r883. \hour Ise at NOTES ON THE M MERALS. 145 {c) With substantives tliat have no singular or a different mean- ing in the singuhir and plural, respec lively : as, Bina custra, two camps. Castrum is a fort; duo caatra, would mean tu-o forts. Note I. — In that case the phiral of tmus is used for singuli: as, Ex unis diiaa mihi conflciea nuptias. 1 'on ivill make for me tivo ived(ii)ii^s out of one. Note 2. — When the distributives are used with a numeral adverb, they have the force of cardinals : as, Tei* deni, tJirice ten; viciea centena, i-^'o tliousaud. 7. Wi\\Q ?iW^ ^Q%Q.QnW {six hundred) are used to expre^:s an in- definitely large number : as, Nonne milliea mori satius est? h it not better to die a titousand titnes f (i.e., deaths.) Sescentas epistolas uno tempore accepL / received a thou- sand tetters at one time. 8. Fractions with i for the numerator are expressed by an ordinal with pars: as, Tertia pars, \ ; centesinaa pars, ^J^ (=i per cent.) ; milleslma pars, xoW- Dimidium, however, is ^. 9. Where the numerator is one less than the denominator, the cardinals with partes are used : as, Duae partes, ^ ; tres partes, |. Tres quintae is f ; quattuor septimae, | ; decumae {tenths\ tithes. Dimidio plures, half as many ae^ain ( = jnore by Jtalf) ; duple plures, doubt e as many ; alterum tantum, ha//' as much, agaiti. 10. In the first pi ace ^ in the second place^ in the 7iext place^ lastly is prime, deinde, tum, postremo. Ili ' 1 i, i 1 r ■ i. II car- \boys xwice Exercise LI 1 1. 1. One camp seemed now made out of two. i. His wine was guarded with a hundred keys. 3. The Lacedaemonians have now been living seven hundred years with one set-of-customs (mores). O- ' ^eard that he had a thousand horsemen in that place. 5. Have i \) It' i 146 LATIN PROSE COMPOSlTIOlJ. you board that he arrived at three o'clock ? 6. If he had given that order, I believe that 1200 good inea would have been lost. 7. So great was the slaughter the 12,422 of our men were slain. 8. The towers were carried up to 120 feet each. 9. He was bom in the year 1889. 10. Let us ask him what he would have done with only 220 horsemen, il. Speaking thus, he sent forward more than 1000 men (/. y/, 4). 12. I believe that he has surrounded the city with five camps. 13. Out of 100,000 citizens, no one came to his aid. 14. 1 almost think that as many are missing as have been killed. 15. So reasonable was your request (say : such just things you asked) that it would have been spontaneously (ultro) granted. 16. Seeing that the forces of the enemy were too numerous to be routed in a single engagement, he resolved to prepare for a pro- tracted war. 17. If we had remained for more than six months at Rome, we should not have been able to see anyone when we re- turned to Athens. 18. It was most fortunate for me, fighting in spite of your opposition (abl. abs.)^ that I gained the victory with- out the loss of a single soldier. 19. Your friends were persuaded to condemn these men to death. By pardoning them now, you will show that you blush {use pudet) for such cruelty. 20. Do not be angiy with anyone without some cause. 21. We must admit that he gained much credit by amassing wealth and aiding the poor. 22. Whenever summer began, he used to go to Athens. 23. Are you not ashamed and penitent for the desertion of your friend .'* 24. In proportion to a man's apparent meanness, will be his severity in pronouncing judgment. 25. Can we doubt that the universe is administered by divine wisdom 1 26. He said that we would make our style (oratio) more copious (planus) by reading his books. 27. Is anything good which does not make its possessor {rel) goodi'i 25. Thereupon, af'er saluting the general, he rode away, without anyone answering him. 29. Throwing themselves at the king's feet, they begged him not to destroy them. 30. Nor should we listen to those who tell us that we ought to be angry with children. 31. Let us ask him how he lived both at Veii and at Rome, and when he set out from Utica for Carthage. 32. He said that it was of the utmost importance what steps they took. Let them wake up (expergiscor) at last and follow him. n,' h; Id ini t«E ROMAN CALKNDAR. 147 HI Ji54. THE ROMAN CALENDAR. 1. The clays of the month at Koine were reckoned bacKwards from three points of tlie month called respectively Kalendae, Nonae, and Id-US (-uiirn). 2. The word Kalendae is derived from the old Latin calo, / call. It was the day on which the new moon was jjroclaimed, i.e., the Jirst of the month. Idus (from root vld, to divide) was the name mdven to the 13th of eight of the months, and to the 15th of the other four ; In March, July, October, May, The Ides were on the fifteenth day. The Nones (or ninihs) was the name given to the 5th of eight of the months, and to the 7th of the other four : In March, July, October, May, The Nones were on the seventh day. The word Nonae or Nones is derived from nonus {7iinth\ being according to the inclusive Roman method of counting, " the ninth day before the Ides." The Romans, in counting the days before a particular date, counted in both the day from which they reckoned and the day to which they reckoned. Thus the Ides of March were on the 15th and, therefore, the Nones (/.6'., the 9th day before the Ides) fell on the 7th, counting in both the 15th and the 7th. 3. The names of the twelve Roman months are as follows : lanuarius, Februarius, Martius, Aprilis, Maius, lunius, Ivilius (or Quiatilis), Augustus (or Sextilis), September, October, November, December. These names are all adjectival and are used in agreement with the names (given above) of the divisions of the month. Each month had the same number of days as at present. 4. On the third day before the Ides of March., would naturally be Tertio die ante Idus Martias (p. 85, 1). This form, however, is not found, but, instead of it, the strange corruption Ante diem tertium Idus Martias (the preposition being regarded, apparently, as govern- ing diem instead of Idus). •1 iiii i' j ,.^' ^ b: If" m 148 LATIN IMIOSK (JOMI'OSITIOM. Thus ; (^// the fhixi ihu' before the Idex of Mareh. Ante diem ter- tium IduB Martian, oi, as usually written, A. d. ill Id. Mart. Note. — Instead of the aljove, the form ill Id. Mart, is also found. 5. To translate : — „ //■-• shidl expect you on JMarch nth. Find how many days before the Ides (or 15th) the nth fills, and add i, in accordance with the imlusixe method of the Romans. Thus 15-11=4; and a(hUn!4 i, the i itii of March is the ^th day before the hies of March. (The days, accordi:i<^ to Roman ideas, were tiiese ; the 15th, 14th, I3ti), 12th, iitli, i.<'., y7T'(). Therefore: ]\'e shall expeit yoti o/i March I itJi is A. d. v. Id. Mart, te exspectabimiLS. For convenience, it is better to add the i before subtractin},^ thus : 15+1-11=5- I was presevf on Aiti^usf jrd. A. d. iii. Non. Aug. adful (date of Nones of Au;4ust = tlic 5lh ; 5 + 1-3 = .3). He 7vas born Sept. 2jrd. Natus est a. d. ix. Kal. Oct. (32 - 23 = 9 ; 30 days in Sept. + i in Oct. + i , for ilie Roman method). He died on the 3rd of June. A. d. iii. Non. lun. mortuus est (Nones on 5th ; C - 3 3). / spoke in the Senate on October 21st. A. d. xii. Kal. Nov. in Senatu dixi (31+2-21 = 12). 6. The day immediately before the Kalends, Nones, or Ides is called pridie: as, On the J 4th March. Pridie Id. Mart, {(xcc.) \ Dec. Jist, prid. Kal. Ian. 7. The phrase ante diem came to be regarded as an indeclinable noun, and was joinetl with a preposition : as. He in'7'ited me to dinner for A'071. j6th. In a. d. xvi Kal. De ae in coenam invitavit. _ ^' 8. In leap-year the Romans intercalated a day between the 25th and the 26th of February : i.e.., between a. d. vi. Kal. Mart, and a. d. vii. Kal. Mart. The day inserted was called bissextus (i.e., the 6th tivice) because the 6th day l)efore the Kalends was reckoned twice. Leap-year was called annus bisextilis. Thus : A. d. bisextum Kal. Mart, pugnatum est. The battle was fought on the intercalary day in February. t^^U Tllli llOMAX CAM'-XDAU. 149 les IS jc 25th It. and (i.e., pkoned \le was « , Exercise LIV. I. I believe that the man dit'd on the 7th of June. 2. Tlie city , bej^'an tobt- blockadi-d (p. 142, 6) on the .Sili of May. 3. lie remained i at Rome from the 3i(l (if Au;_;nst till .September 8th. 4. Did you hear that he left for home on ihe 20th of March? 5. Shall you be here on April 1 3th.'* 6. I he .Senate was ( ailed toj^ether for the 21st of November. 7. lie promised that ho would pay on the (ireek Ka- le uls. 8. if he hail arrived by (ud) the 2iSth of June, he would have been safe. 9. Don't you think thai, if he had been killed on the 2nd of June, we should ha\e heard of it by this."* lo. On the 5th of May, at sunrise, he led out the 5th and 7th legions to (qui) attack the enemy in the rear. 11. O ! that he had been in Rome on the 5th of J^ecember. 12, I belie\e that he did not start for Rome till the loth of April— a circumsianci' thai he regretted to the last day of his life. 13. 1 believe that he went to Rome that winter on April 22nd, and remained there twenty days. 14. I heard that he stayed at I.ucca from March 3rd until April 2[st, and that then he crossed from Lucca to Athens. 15. I understood that he had denied again and again having promised to pay you' at Tibur on May 17th, 1894. 16. We have been expecting you since April loth. 17. 1 belie\e that he would have set out on July 14th. 18. They have ordained a thanksgiving from the iith to the 20th of October. 19. \ ou jiromised to stay with mo on May 21st. 20. Instead of joining his father at Rome on the last day of August, he preferred to linger a whole month in the beaiUiful city of Athens. 21. In the battle of Cannae {C^d. (i cent). 4 asses = i sestertius = 2d (4 cents). 4 sestertii ( 1 6 asses) — i denarivis=8d ( 1 6 cents). 25 denarii (100 sestertii or 400 asses)=i aureus^=i7s (over $4). The as was a copper coin; the sesterce and denarius, silver; and the aureus, gold. 2. The following table of approximate values is useful, and easily remembered : — 1,000 sestertiirir: /^8 los (over $40). 10,000 " --= £Ss 100,000 " == £S^c 1,000,000 " =^8,500 3. The sesterce* was the common unit for expressing sums of money at Rome. It was used ns follows : — (rt) Up to 2,000, the ordinary numeral adjectives were used with sestertius : as, Centum sestertii a himdrcd sesterces j undeni sestertii, eleven sesterces each. ili) Above 2,000 and up to a million, the neut. plur. sestertia was used for the thousands : as, Triginta quinque sestertia. Thirty-fi^ie thousand sesterces, Sestertia triaet quadringenti ootog'inta sestertii =j',^fS't>J<:'^/^rr^^5'. Sestertia vmuni et triginta et quingenti sexaginta sestertii= ^i^§6o sesterces. * Sestertius is derive. % i8i isi % ■ \ U ir. 5 ' 152 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION, him a miser who was willing to throw away (perdo) twenty millibtrt of sesterces? 7. He restored gold and silver to the amount of ten millions. 8. He ordered 640,000 to be carried to* your house; 1 believe he draws from his e.-.tatcs 600,000 sesterces. 9. He hired a house for six thousand sesterces {(i/>/.). 10. He left less than two hundred thousand sesterces, ii. He promised to pay me $65,000 at Rome on March 21st. 12. I believe he still owed them 1,800,000 sesterces on January 3rd. 13. If you had been tliere, you would have received 1,036,696 sesterces. 14. If six or seven thousand sesterces are v\anting (desunt) to make up (ad) the four hundred thousand, you shall be a plebeian. 15. If he had been a rich man, the $50,000 would have been paid. 16. Do you think he will gi\ e a hundred millions of sesterces for this villa? 17. Tell me how he can buy it for less than twenty thousand sesterces. iS. I have bought an estate at forty millions. 19. On the 14th of March he will pay you 110,000 sesterces. 20. Give them sixty sesterces each. 21. How few there are who would venture to say that he wished to be hated by all ! 22. And no one knew why he was envied. 23. He asked where the seven hundred millions was which was in the account- books. 24. It is difficult to see how he could have gained the battle by withdrawing his troops. 25. Fearing for his safety, he fled to me at Rome. 26. At your suggestion, they attacked and stormed the camp. 27. He said that, if had not received your letter, it would have been all over with him. 28. If he had not con- sulted the interest of the country, he would never have been forgiven. 29. Let us advance rather than retreat. 30. It was of the utmost consequence to us that a general of such high ability as this should be at the head of the army. 31. He is more generous than well- born. 32. Whatever his poverty, he will give you something. WEIGHTS AND MEASURES. INTEREST. 153 §56. WEIGHTS AND MEASURES. INTEREST. 1. The word As (Greek fl';) was used to express any unit, and it was divided into twelve parts (unciae) to express twelfths of the unit. The names of these divisions should be noted. DIVISIONS OF THE AS. As (the unit). Deunx, gen. -uncis (de-uncia-^rv/r ^v^;/aw^) = |^. Dextans, -antis (de-sextans a sixth off) — \% or f. Dodrans, -antis (de quadrans- r^y"^;//;//; <>^) = ^"tj or |. Bes, bessis (bis— as ?) = j^ --- \. Septunx, -uncis (septera iincia)= /j. Semis or semissis, grn. semissis (semi-as, a half &.^ = ^,^ or \. Quincunx, -uncis (quinque uncia) = ^^2. Triens, -entis (tres) ^- i'.^ oi- ?,. Quadrans, -antis (qiiattuor)=j'V or ^-. Sextans, -antis (sex)= ^v or \. Uncia^ '- \-i Note I. — Of the above divisions, semis, triens, quadrans, and sextans were used as coins. Note 2. — Both inch and ounce are derived from uncia. 2. These divisions were used for dividing into twelfths any unit like iugerum {(in turc), pes {d J'< >(>/), libra {,i fHnaui^ : as, Arare semissem iugeri. V'o plough hdl/ a/i ac7-c. Obeliscvis centum viginti quinque pedum et dodrantis. An obelisk J 2j\ feet high. Tres librae cum semisse. 3^2 pounds. 3. They were commonly used also in bequests : as, Heres ex asse. Heir io iJie whole i-state. Heres ex semisse. llcir i(> Juilf tJie estate, Herea ex uncia. lleir to one-twelfth. I ; 'in if • 111 154 LATIN PROSK COMPOSITION. lisfi i KIS 4. They were used to express not only fractions whose denomi- nator was 12, Ijut many mixed numbers : as, Quartus quadrans, j} (i.e., ///^ fourth number a fourtJi). Semis tertius, 2\. Semis sextas, ^\. Lignum bessem alterum ('or bessem alterum latum). Jl log 20 inches in diaineter {i.e., the second |= if). 5. The same divisions were used for reckoning interest (xisiirae, fenus), wliich was due monthly. Thus : Asses usurae (un//s interest^ i c. , one a month for the use of a hundred), twelve per cent, per annum. It \\as also called centesimae visurae (ie. , tJie hundredth interest), because in one hundred months a sum equal to the principal (sors) would have been paid. The following table gives the L.^tin for interest from r to 12% : Asses Deunces Dextantes Dodrantea Besses Septunces Semisses Quincunces Trientes Qviadrantes Sextantes Unciae 'T usurae % per annum. 12 1 1 {i.e., \\ per month). 10 9 8 * 7 6 5 4 3 2 w ■ So too : Binae centesimae, 24% per annum ; ternae centesimae, 36% per annum, etc. Thus : Pecuniam assibus usuris collocavit. He invested money at 12%. Dodrantibus usuris grandem pecuniam apud eum collocavit. He placed a large sum of money in his hands at p%. m^ i.Vi3 WEIGHTS AND M HAS U RES. INTEREST. 155 V .. Exercise LVI. I. His height was five feet nine. 2. He made him heir to three- fourths of his estate. 3. ^■oLl could have been heir to seven-twelfths of his estate. 4. He lias left me fifteen million sesterces, which is nearly two-thirds of his estate. 5. I have been waiting for him half an hour. 6. If he had begun then, one-third of an acre would have been ploughed now. 7. It is said that he jumped twelve feet and a quarter. 8. 'J'he hill, I bclie\c, was 252 feet 3 inches high. 9. Two acres and a half (p/.) have been assigned to each. 10. The will assigns to each three acres and seven-twelfths, n. I shall borrow $40,000 from him on the ist at 5 %. 12. I hear the boy's height is 3 ft. 10 in. 13. I understand that the interest will be reduced (redigo) from 1 1 to 5 %. 14. He has lost five-sixths of his money. 15. He paid them $10,000 on May 21st. 16. He gave one man three hundred sesterces, another three thousand. 17. Can anyone plough an acre and a third a day? 18. He left a small sum with me at 4 %. 19. I believe the tree was five and a half feet high. 20. Could anyone have been willing to pay interest at 48 % per annum.'* 2r. They will tell us that, having saluted the general of the enemy, he rode back to the camp to finish the work. 22". Even if anyone had ordered them to remain until our sailors came up to their aid, they would have left immediately. 23. No doubt he was most deserving of death, but he ought to have been spared when he asked for pardon. 24. Did you think that he would gain much glory by killing women and children? 25. Vou should have answered that you intended to hand over the bridge to them to guard. 26. On receipt of the letter, he dismissed the messenger ; then, seizing a spear, he prepared to defend himself. 27. He used to say that many evils happened to all of us. 28. I knew that our Iiouse would not sell at as high a figure as we bought it at. 29. To my complaint that he had injured his country, he answered that, if he had done so, he w-ould pay the penalty. 30. Fearing this, Caesar led out his men and, in spite of my opposition, attacked the enemy's camp. 31. He used to say that, if he could do such a thing at Rome, he would have done it at Athens also. 32. On the 27th of September he told me that he was tired of war ; that he had won glory enough by destroying armies and capturing cities. Ill ■.,:S^aosmfmma 156 LATIN PHOSK COMPOSITION. ' -i §57. LATIN IDIOM IN THE USE OP WORDS. 1. Ilitlicrto, attention has been drawn almost altogether to the difference between Enj,dish and Latin in point of grammatical con- struction ; the words used to illustrate the rules of syntax have been, as far as possiljje, such as occur in both languages. None but the simplest English, however, can be turned word for word into Latin, and care and thought will always be necessary, apart alto- gether from a knowledge of syntax rules, in order to obtain the proper form (z.e' , the right words) in which to express in Latin even ordinary English ideas. 2. Dictionaries. — And here it may be remarked that, though the study and verification in the Latin Lexicon of the use of words is of the greatest value, the use of the English-Latin Dictionary should be discouraged ; it should be restricted, as far as possible, to turning up the names of things not commonly mentioned in the authors read. Compared to I'nglish, Latin has a small vocabu- lary, and many words of common occurrence in English have no corresponding "d'onfs in Latin, The idea must be caught from the English and expressed in the Latin form. For example : I be- licvc in iJie cxisiciicc of God, is not to be expressed b)' Credo In Dei existentia ; there is no such word in classical Latin as existentia. Knowing that Latin axoids abstract nouns, and changing the noun into a verb, we get Credo Deum esse, which is shorter, simj)ler, and more forcible than the English, and could not be got out of the English-Latin Dictionary. It can not, in fact, be too often repeated, that it is the English /n of Oirsar scciucd io viain' a n'oy y^lorious dtcd. Regnatum est Romae a condita urbe ad liberatam annos ducen- tos quadraginta quattuor. Kin^s rci^ncd at Rome two hundred LATIN IDIOM IN THE USE OF WORDS. 157 and fortv-fiuir ycars^ (hiti)ig frow tht fcinu/ii/i'on of the a'/y to its lihtrtili(>n. Infelicissime pugnatum est. A most disastrous battle lias been foi(i;;ht. Rem prope prolapsani restituit. He restored ivhat ivas almost a lost cause. And so on. Such practice extends the student's knowledge of Latin \ ocabu lary and cultivates close observation, without which no intimate ac(iuaintance with Latin idiom can be acquired. It is only from the circful study of the Latin authors that such acquaint- ance is gained. The THE ABSTRACT NOUN. 4. Certain differences in English and Latin idiom in the use of language have been already pointed out, and may here-stated here : (cc) Latin often uses the indirect ([uestion where English uses an abstract or \erbal noun : as, Illud quaeritur vxnde hoc periculum ortum sit. The question is luhat is the source t>f the danger. Read ? 17 again, and observe generally that Latin uses few abstract or verbal nouns. {h) Latin often uses an impersonal verb (especially of motion) to express an English noun and verb : as, Pugnatum est, a battle ivas fougJit ; clamatum est, a shout was raised ; ad arma conctirritur, there is a rush to arms (see p. 38, 2). So too : Hnius rei eum poenituit. This thing filed him "with remorse ([). 66, 3). (t) An English verbal noun may often be turned by c:lianging it into a verb : as, Tecum pvignat, he is in cofijlict ivith you ; hoc respondet, he nuikes this reply; haec praecepit, these ivere his maxims : hoc fremebat vulgus, such 7i>as the popular cry; multa cogitat, his thoughts are many; quid mentitus est? lohat falsehood has he toldf occurrebat ei, the thought occurred to him (see p. 38, 5). ^ §1 ii Jl ( ■w 158 tATIlSf PUOSK COMPOSITION. {d) The present participle is often used for an English abstract noun ; as, Mihi querent!, fo my co)nplai)it j te repugnante, in spite of your opposition J indignantium voces, expressions of indignation (see p. 48, 6). {c) The perfect participle passive is often used in Latin for an English abstract or verbal noun : as, Propter classem amissam condemnatus est. He luas condemned for t/ie loss of the fleet. Post expulsura fllium. After t/ie expulsion of the son (see p. SO, 14, and p. 52, 4, 5-) if) A noun-clause introduced by quod will often take the place of an English noun : as, Mihi gratum est quod venisti. The fact of your coming is plewiing to me. Idcirco adfui quod ei subvenire volui. The reason of my presence was my wish to aid him. Quod ei subveni mihi iucundum est. TJie reflection that I aided him is delightfid to me (see p. 99, 6, 7). {g) The comparative adverbial clause will often take the place of an English noun and preposition : as, Feci perinde ac debui. / Jiave acted in accordance with my duty. Poenas persolvit, perinde ac meritus est. He was purished in accordance with his deserts (sec p. 1 1 6). (//) The genitive is used to express the English task, duty, custom, characteristic, mark,, token : as, ludicis est sequi verum, it is the duty of a judge to follow the truth (literally : to follow the truth is of i.e , belongs to a judge)-, hoc est praeceptoris, this is the biisi- tiess of an instructor ; sapientis est res adversas aequo animo ferre, it is the characteristic of a wise man to bear adversity with resignation (literally : with an even mind). See p. 59, 2. Note. — With possessive pronouns, this genitive is not used, but the neuter of the corresponding possessive adjective : as, Tuura (not tul est) videre, it is your duty to see. To these may be added the following : 1 ' , but 'UU23 i LATIN IDIOM IN THE USE OP WORDS. 159 (/) The Latin infinitive will often supply the place of an abstract noun : as, Humanum est errare. Error is human. Liberiua dicere mihi non licuit Greater freedom of speech 7uas not alhnvcd me. So too: Beate vivere, //^i'/;5/'//r (use facio) was criticised. 19. '1 heir sudden transformation is marvellous (use muto). 20. The murder of I'onijjey was a j^reat misfortune. 21. He seemed born for the protecticjn of the people. 22. In proportion to his readiness (use promptus, fi-ady)^ cacli man was adv.mccd to offiee [p. 118, 5, {l>)\ 23. Eveiy evil seems liarmlcss at its birth (use part.). 24. I feel distress that you lia\e r(Mei\(d no information from him. 25. I believe he feels regret (p. 66, 3) for liis conduct. 26. IJy the removal of the tyrant (rr.r), the safety of the city has been secured. 27. This, he said, was the earnest wish of his h( ait. 28. The general, after a brief exhortation, induced them to remain. 29. Fancy how g^reat was the joy I felt (say Ihy-o viiiiJi do you tliiiik 1 rrjoictd ?). 30. Shall we })raise him for being a jiaintcr 'i {use quia). 31. Let us assume a case (aliquid) of Sf)mc\vhat Avide api^lication (/csr patet late, //^.r- toids ici'dt'ly). 32. ] le hurried away to announce Caesar's presence with all his forces. 33. The resistance ceased after midnight. 34. It is C|uite within the range of possibilit) that his i)olitical opinions are identical with your own. 35. This city has always been loved by her subjects {use praesum). 36. C)n reaching the gate, they imme- diately demanded admittance. 37. He asked that an investiga- ti(m be made (//.sr quaere) into the loss of the fleet. 38. I have never lost my belief in tlie existence of God. 39. He believes in the nothingness of all this (//.sv nullus esse). 40. Lovers are always foolish. 41. He has taken his daughter to bear him company (una esse, /c? be iogeilwr). § 58. OTHER SUBSTITUTES IN LATIN FOR THE ABSTRACT NOUN. 1. The neuter (sing, or ])l.)()f an adjective may often be used to express an English abstract noun : as, Aliud est honestum, utile aliud. Honor (or duty) t's one thing; expediency, aiioiluy. Vera et falsa disiungunt. TJiey distinguish truth and fahehooc*^ RUnSTITUTMS FOR TIIK ABSTRACT NOUN. IGI In fact, the neuter adjective or pronoun \vill often be used in Latin to express an l-^n^dish noun for which the word iJiing mij^ht W used, but a more pretentious noun is preferred. Thus . Haec sequebatur. ha j}in surd iJwsc objects ; magna ausua est, he ventured on grcnt enterprises ; hoc unum nie consolatur, tin's one consideration (or rejlection) affords nie eonsolotion. So too : Amissa erant per quae htimiis excidltur. The tools for dii^j^int^ the ear til Joui been lost. Hoc audeo dicere. J I'cntiae to moke this assertion. Hoc mihi molestum est me non esse-bonum civem. litis tJiou<>ht is pidiifiil to nu\ t/hft ] (ini not a pot riot. Summa gloria constat ex ti'ibus his : si diJigit eum multitiido, si fldem habet, si honore dignum putat. 77te hii^i/est i;iorv depends upon the follo'U'ing three conditions : if the multitude loves him, puts trust in him, thinks him ivortliy of Junior. Si niodo haec stabunt. // only the present condition of the count? y coidinues. Ea domi conflata esse constat. Jt ■fs certain that these plans "juere formed at home (lit., kindled). In translating,'- into Enghsh, the context in every case determines the appropriate noun to use for the neuter adjective or j)ronoun. 2. Many EngHsli alistract nouns may l^e expressed by tlie word res, whlcli is of viry frcciuent occurrence, and is Tas has been well said) a blank cheque, as it were, to be filled up from the con- text. Thus : Ut res docuit. As the fact showed. Res Graeciae constituit. He has arrani^ed the a/Zoirs of C, recce. Multae res in philosophia non satis adhuc explicatae sunt. There are many problems in philosophy which iiave received as yet no adequate solution. Bonis tuis rebus meas malas res ludis. In your prosperity., you are mocking my misfortune. Compare too : Ees secundae (or prosperae), prosperity; res adversae. adver- It P Hi m ..(...:[ 'Ml sikm il \}\ ^ '■ 162 Latin prose composition. sityj res tranqiilllae, irauqttillity ; res cbccisae, impaired /orfunti] res novae, a revolu/ion ; res pixbllca, the anniiion ivtul (i.e., the fid/ioji, ///<'^'('7Y77/W£7//, ///<• pul'lic i)itcrcxt^ politi,:s^ etc.). 3. An Kiij^lish abstract noun may frequently be expressed by makinj,^ it concrete, i.c,^ referring it to an imlividual : as, Plurimum interest intor doctum et rudem. T/iertJ is i/ie j^rcaffst d/J/hr/ice belwi't'n Iraniing and iji^nofcuice (lit., between a learned man and an ignorant )Uivi). Ingenioai non sunt quales esse nobis videntxir. Genius is dif- fe rent front "ioJuit ive suppose it to be. Nullum poetam legerat, nullum oratorem noverat. lie had read no p(h'try (Uid 7^.) where we refer to a person by some impersonal circumlocution (as, ^.^if., in Parliament): as, Tempora Niimae minus apta. A ti))ic little suited for Numa {i.e., irreligious). De hac re iam Servium, virum amplisslmum, audistis. With regard to this proposal, you have heard the honorable member who has just sat down. Compare, also, the Latin love of accuracy in naming nations : as, Romani cum Carthaginiensibus bellum iam dixx gemznt. Rome has lofig been making war upon Carthage. 5. It should be noted that the abstract noun must be used : (<'^) When speaking of a quality itself and (often) in ascribing a quality to an individual : as. Virtus in recte agendo posita est. Virtue consists in right action. In his artibus praestabant illi : probitate, industria, temperantia. In these qualities they were pre-eminent : uprightness^ energy^ and self-control. SUBSTITUTKS FOR THR AllSTUACT NOUN. 163 H i/it.i', :d by cutest iirncd s dif- d read substi- , use of nguish ^ some Numa With )cr who Ins : as, Rome fibing a right jrantia. ^, and {J)) Where, thoiii^li an adjective is used in I'.nglish, it really ex- presses an eniphalic ((ualily, or tlie main idea : as, Neque occasionls tarditas exapoctabltur. Nor i^'ill men wait for slow-footed opport unity. Adde hue montlum altitudinea immensltatesquo camporvim. Add to all this ilte lofty )nountnins and the hotDidless plains (the iilcas cnipliasised h(.'re are the heij^lit of mountains .'ind the bound- less expanse of plains ; Latin, therefore, witli its love of directness, uses the abstract noun in each case). 6. When an abstract noun lefcrs to a plural noun or pronoun, it is often itself put in the plural, and thus becomes concrete : as, Vitae omnium in periculo erant. 'JVie ii ,: 164 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 'lellghts in trifles. 22. I deferred (obsequor) to your desire. 23. (Mjedicnce to the law began with (ab) tlie reign of TuHiis (say : it began to be obeyed to the /cra>s). 24. I behove tliat there has been a disastrous battle. 25. Many promises have been made. 26. Falseliooc. is dangerous. 27. 'J'heir judgment with regard to him is perfectly accurate {use vere). 28. Tliey fled away in con- fusion {use turbo) and despair {use spem abieere). 29. Cries of mourning were heard. 2>'^. Tlicre was a mutual disarmament (say; if ivds departed from ar)ns by cacli party). 31. Is anytliing good that docs not make its possessor good 1 32. This proposal did not displease him. 33. Tlie government came back to Camillus. 34,. The experiment was made, to see if (si) tlie city could be taken. 35. An envious clic ue may be despised (say : tJie emy of a few, etc.; p. 16^, b). 36. He denied the possibility of making war on Rome. 37. It would not be in keeping with his good sense to arm a reckless (p. 163, /5) mob with public autbf^rity. 38. He crossed the river when the cold was almost unbearable. 1 §6i^. ABSTRACT ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 1. Latm, in its love of the simple and direct, avoids personifica- tion. Hence comljinatit)ns of a noun and an adjective like mcfiial strength^ anxious fear., and the like, arc not common in Latin. In- stead of them are used : — (a) A noun governing rmother in the genitive : as, Corporis et mentis vires, /-rv/Z/y and mental strength; scientiae cognitio, scientific investigation ; praecepta morvun, ni'n II1 •Oi ■"i 1' ^ I in 1G6 LATIN rUOSK COMPOSITION. Ratione et via docete. Teach by method ami systetti. Hoc memoria et litteris proditun'' est. TJiis has been handed down orally (uul in ivriiing. So loo : Arte factvis, (xrtistically made ; vitio creatus, injoj'iiially elected ; natura tardier, naturally ratJier sloiu. Amicitiam nee usu nee ratione cog-nitam habent. TJiey have k)iou>n friendship neither practieally nor theoretically. Ea, quae ex me audistis, re probare possitis. May you be able to verify experimentally the principles you have heard from me ! Plura verbo quam scriptura mandata, dedimus. ll^e have fjven more cominissio/is verbally tha?i i>i "turiting. (c) A verb : as, I solemnly entreat you. Te ore obsecroque. / loudly protest that it is false. Clamo et testor hoc falsum esse. / manaoed successfully to effect my object. Egi atque perfect ut quid vellem facerem. {d) A change of construction : as, Abiisse videtur. He is gone apparently. Dubitari non potest quin mortuus sit. Undoubtedly he is dead. Peropportune accidit ut dives sit. ]'ery fortunately he is rich. Hoc quotidie faeere soleo. / usually do it every day. Manifestum est te errare. You are manifestly ivrong. 3. The foUowing list of equivalent phrases will repay study: — Accomplice^ scelerum soeius. Aristocracy., nobiles. Assessment, quod cuique tributum est. Atheist.^ qvii deos esse neg-at. Ci^'ilisation, exculta hominum vita. Communism, aequatio bonorura. C(>nservati7'e, qui reipublicae statum conservat. Dcnuigogues, turbulenti cives or populi turbatores. Enthusiasm, ardor animi. t 111 ABSTRACT AOJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 167 ided uilly have able '.e\ 'iven esse, ci ut dead, rich. Exports, res quae exportantur. Historian, rerum scriptor. Inspiration, divinus quidam afflatus. Lawgiver, qui leg-es ponit. ^foral philosopJiy, quae de moribus et offlciis praecepta sunt. Patriotism, studium reipublicae. Politician., qui in republica versattir. So : Ent^r political life, ad remp. accedere ; ad)ninister iJic government, remp. gubernare. Prejudices, falsae atque invetei-atae opiniones. Prose, oratio soluta. Rhetoric, rhetorum praecepta. Statesmanship, reip. leg-enrlae et constituendae peritia. Tyranny, unius dominatus. Exercise LIX. I. Natural shanir; might have prevented him from being- present. 2. They will always have a lively recollection of all his services to the country. 3. They have neglected the systematic study of literature. 4. We feel ourselves impelled towards our philosophical writers, 5. All other philosophical systems he despised. 6. All these things were made by human handiwork {hend.). 7. They always differed in party policy. 8, An abundant variety of food has been secured (inveulo). 9. These terrible threats of prosecu- tion you should never have taken into account. 10. The beaten army withdrew to Canusiuin. ir. I had a thorough knowledge of his political views. 12. Fear and anxiety are inconsistent with such a disposition (p. 162, 3}. 13. The introduction of the games did not relieve them from superstition or disease. 14. Unfortu- nately they were gone. 15. Towards them, as Christians {use quum), great cruelty was shown {use saevio). 16. The shouts of congratulation were o\erpowering. 17. In a charge of this nature inquiry should be made as to date, place, means, and agents. 18. The historians tell us that human society was a late development, 19. There is no doubt that he would liave returned safely. 20. \ i t ' } \ ''. 'lifi m\ ■14, 11 '.]M ■ill 168 LATIN rilOSE COMPOSITION. If After his death, apparently, he has become very friendly towards us. 2 1. You will never know how zealously and intelligently he has managed this matter. 22. We are all attracted by the love of scientific incjuiry. 23. This phenomenon is of most constant occurrence in the winter season. 24. Error and ignorance are con- sidered positive evils {supcrl^ 25. Many subjects are difficult and obscure and at the same time {use idem) unnecessary. 26. Let us not lend a blind assent to these theories. 27. Will you never regard measures rather than the men who [)roposc them.'' (auctor). 28. \\ ere not these people always fond oi novelty 't 2'-). If they had not oljeyed at once, an ignominious disaster \\()uld have been sustained 30. 'J'he struggle will be for empire {use decerto). 31. Providentially, he has made his escape. 32. He is behaving with the greatest folly {cuh'.). 33. He made inquiries as to the health of the gentle Tullia. 34. They have come, I believe, with all speed. 35. He wished to consult the interest of France. 36. The majority of mankind arc convinced that j^hilosophy has no utility. 37. Many are of opinion that it is positively an injur)- {use 7'/k). 38. It is a mark of folly to be scared by empty shadows. 39. They professed they had a declaration to make. 40. 1 >" the government had ascertained the strength of the enemy, this defeat would never have been sustained. 41. This bond closely unites states together (p. 166, e). §60. DIFFERENCE OP IBIOM—i Com inued). 1. Latin may be said v^ prefer, as a general thing, the active (because of its gieatei directness) to the passive. Thus : YVie Ti '/:.■(' ■remark of iJu: Jaf/ier 7C'as -i'erijied by tlie rasJmess of the son. Patris dictum sapiens filii temeritas probavit. See, how- ever, p. 38, 2. 2. The name of a mere i?istriimc)it (as opposed to an agoif) can- not be made the subject of an active verb : as, This bribe iiuiueed Jiiiii /o open the gate. Hac mercede adductxis ©St lit poi'tam aperiret. ') can- DIFFP]RENCB OF IDIOM. 169 Note. — An exception to this is seen in the personification of emotions^ so common in Livy : as, Pavor tribunes invaaerat. Fear had seized the tribunes. Hinc spes, hino desperatio animos irritat. On one side hope^ on the other, despair is an incentive {y\\..yineites ; see 6.). So, too, witli habeo, excipio (folloiv)^ teneo, c^c: as, Insequens annus tribunes habiiit. TJie foil oic ink!; year had tribunes. Tristem hiemem gravis aestas excepit. A sieldy summer Jol- loived a gIoo)ny ivinter. Hoc miraculum eos stupefactos tenuit. This nuirvel held the ui spell-bound. 3. An English adjectival phrase, which might — if literally turned — modify the verb, must be joined to its own noun by a i)articiplc or a relative clause : as, A 7'oice from the teniple recalled titem. Vox e temple missa (or quae e temple mittebatur) eos revecavit. Vex e temple ees revocavit would mean A 7'oice recalled them front the temple. Note. — Such an adjectival phrase may, however, be turned liter- ally, if it can without ambiguity be joined adverbially to tli(! verb : as, His frii'olity in great matters "u'eis noticed. Levis eius animus in magnis rebus spectabatur. 4. An luiglish adjective often expresses a reason or makes some distinct predication which must be brought out explicitly by a sep- arate clause or participle in Latin : as, This })ianamvre did not escape our I'cteran leader. Haec res im- peraterem nostrum, qui belli esset peritissimus, non fefellit. 5. Where the emphatic verb in English is put in a relative clause, Latin demands that it should be m.idc the main verb : as, A fresh bloii) came '^>at crushed the city. Clades nova urbem afflixit. This is especially common with Jt is, it icas, etc. : as, If is you that I "want. Te volo. U>.% i:ii i r f, . m^ : ii jH i ' 1 I 1 i ^1 :y II M t 170 LATIN I'lKJSK (JOMPOSITION. til 6. Latin, in its love ot the concrete, defines an act much more closely than English : as, T/uy refrcsJi iJicnisclvcs with food. Corpora cibo curant. These proeeedinji^s relieved the)ii from their fear. Haec animos pavore levabant. 7- From the Latin love of the direct and concrete, arises the con- stant use of the 2nd pers. sing., and the ist and 3rd pers. pi., for the English passive or the indefinite subject (c^;7^,/'tv?//t', etc.) : as, TJie irntJi of this 10 ill be found, if the p(iij;es of history are turned over. Hoc verum esse, si veils temporum memorlam replicare, reperies. People are horn with i^e?tius, hut are juade learned. Nascimiir Ingeniosi, flmus eruditi (-^ Learning is a product, genius a gift). 8. The verb sum will often lake the place of a more emphatic or picturesque verb in English : as. Immense indignation 7'eigned in the camp. Per castra Indlgnatio ingens erat. Froin tins a false opinion results. Ex hoc est falsa opinio. 9. Two adjectives qualifying one noun in Latin must be con- nected by and : as, He had large bright eyes. Oculos magnos et nitidos habebat. 10. Several consecutive nouns in Latin in the same construction are written down one after the other without conjunctions : as, Ilia arma centuriones cohortes non nobis periculum denuntiant. Those arms.^ officers and battalions do not threaten us with danger. This is called asyndeton ( a 7iot + "^^'r, together +i^f:i-^-, hind.). Note. — So too, clauses : as, Redit iuvenis, rem narrat, implorat opem. The youth returns, tells his s'ory^ and begs for aid. Exercise LX. I. This dagger stabloed the celebrated Pompey. 2. All the soldiers in the city were sent to Baiae. 3. A sense of shame suddenly changed them. 4. The little gold they had was taken from the wretches. 5. As Christians, they were treated very cruelly. 6. He was very popular, for a banker, with all classes. 7. I never lose ^' Din'KRKNCH <»F IDIOM. 171 orat the denly L the . He - lose sight of him (use deicio oculoa). 8. A nuisicnl (;ar ditccts (sentio) the slii^htcst discord. 9. I have lost all the vigor of youth. 10. The nicu in the ship dcuiandod our destination. 11, The battle at Cannae {ff/.) cut off many thousands. 12. Word was brought of the sack of the city. 13, 'I'hey have perfect confidence in men of goodness of character (p. 165, 1,/^). 14. It was IJalbus who built the liouse. 15. In pursuit of some cherished object, they will undergo any hardship (//.sr perpetior). 16. The men descending from the mountain attacked us. 17. I-'irnmess and dignity arc con- sistent with true courage (p. 162, 3). j8. lie stationed the cavalry that they might make a display (//jr utor ad speciem). 19. This statue will ser\e you for a god. 20. Orators always have been few (p. 163, /^). 21. This, as a general thing, is believed. 22. He might be thought a madman. 23. He endured the pain without difficulty. 24. \\\ this time there was in Aogue (p. 170,8) a better fashion (consuetude). 25. Not far away our army was encamped (p. [70,8). 26. In both cases he acted w ith dignity {itsc graviter). 27. He attempted to conclude his sj)eech aniidst the loudly-expressed detestation {/wnd.) of the House. 28. When the jjleasant spring (p. 163, b) is past, then comes summer. 29. The frequent repetition of these remarks {use saepe) terrified all. 30. Open flattery {part.) all men hate. 31. The disappointed {\>. 169, 4) soldi^ --s began to murmur. 32. This they did, without compulsion from anyone. 33. He announced that the measure was both practicable and expedient {use verbs). 34. There is no doubt that there were poets before Homer. 35. There was not one of all the soldiers who was not wounded. 36. Ha\e you heard liow bravely they fought.'' ^J. You know how (ut) they surrounded us. 38. We do not know how he escaped. 39. They were of the oi)inion that unless news of this battle had been brought, the city would have been lost. 40. I have bought an estate at a million of sesterces. 41. This proceed- ing jiroved (p. 170, 8) their salvation. 42. From these pursuits arises facility in speaking (p. 165, i, d). )\i 111 ■■[ 1 i II m •"T" 172 LATIN IMIOSE COMPOSITION. II ■ §61. EQUIVOCAL WORDS. WORDS OP THE SAME FORM IN LATIN AND ENGLISH. METAPHOR. 1. Many P2n<,dish words arc cc|uivo(:iil (/.<-., have two or more meanings), and rcc|iiirc care in translating into Latin. 'I'hus : lie is ii iihin (>/ honor. Vir est siimma flcle. lie is ail honor to his country. Ille eat patriae decori (i.e., ornament). lie is worthy of the hij^/irst honor in the i^ift of the people. Dignus est summis populi Roniani honoribus ('i.e., office., political distinction). They pay him Jionor. Laudem ei tribuunt. lie thirs^ts for honor. Sitit famam (gloriam or laudem). So, too : People go into the country. Rus homines eunt {i.e.., as opposed to tlie city). // is S'-v(adipiscor, consequor), act(Xa.c\o), at^niG^tQmyxa), \ P'^UI VOCAL WORDS. METAPIIOH. \::\ ht' (isiouisJiCii (mlror\ iitliiin to (pervenio ad), /'loi'uri'us (cnidolltf). Ct'i^sr (desiuo or deslsto), i/dss (genus), i<>i)iuit>>t/v (saepe), oiiiic fscelixs), crown (i.e., kingdom, reg-num), i/rs/ri' (ovipio), drstincd (in fatis esse), cxpi^se i<> (obicio), faiitoiis (praeclarus), J',iliil (perni- ciosus), J'dtiwrs (maiores), Jury (ira), /i<noxious (odio esse), p)-ovol:L' (animiim irrito), ruin (pernicies, interitus), scene (Xocw^ ox ubi, p. 32), secure (tutus), triuinp/iiymco), urj^e (ag-ere cum ut), Tile (turpis), world (omnes, or horaineH ; mundus— universe)^ study (cog-nitio). LATIN MHTAI'lIOR. 3. Metaphor (or lani^aiage used in a 'transferred' or fiL^urative sense;) is connnon in I'Lnglisli and rare iu Latin ; and in translating into Latin, the metaplior may, as a usual thin;^-, be droppctl : as. He ascended tJic tJiro)ic of his fathers. Regnum a maioribus traditum excepit. TJwre is a wide gulf bct^uccn learning and ignorance. Inter doctum at rudem plurimnm interest. He soon showed himself in his true colors. Brevi sui similis fuit. He has (• }^i\cn here. 'I'lius : Rempublicara gaibemat. llr /lolds tJw Jicliii of stiifc (/.'•., ad- ministers the ^()\einnu'nl). Partes (or personam) lenitatis ag-ite. Tiikr ///<• )ulc of leniency. In tanto reipnblicae incendio sisti non potest. In /lie midst of such pnhlic co/ifusion, il cns (f Rome (lit., marrow and flesh). Nostrae res litterarum monumenti^ inveterascent. My acJiieve- ments will live to old Ui^e in the pages of literature. Compare also : Tumere (be bo>}ibastic), frigei-e (be spiritless^ fervere {J)e passionate)^ used of style. are EQUIVOCAL WOUDS. METAPHOR. EXKRCISK l.XI. 175 I. Indicate a motive for this tletestable crime. 2. I teiuleiccl him the homn<;c ot" my suijport in tlie House. 3. Me was over- whelmed ])y the tide (jf l)usiness (sas' : iU()U<). 4. Does )h id th( rid .? 5. W )t the world not the moon r by design? 6. If he had consulted the interests of the country, he would have been dear to the ctnmtry. 7. Rome was mistress of the whole world. 8. By teaching these doctrines, he did the world much harm. 9. I am afraid I shall ne\er see him again in this world. 10. After the death of the father, the son demanded the crown. II. lie attained to the highest otTiccs in his native countr\-. 12. All this district he Avon with the sword. 13. The lo\e of money is the root of all evil. 14. He has held the sceptre for more than thirty years. 15. The fact of the existence of (]od is engraved (insculpo) on the heart of man. 16. I never licaid him without ad- miration. 17. The v(jice of warning was drowned in the shouts of admiration. 18. He says that the administration should be in his control. 19. Interest rose {i(se flo) on August 8th from 4% to 8 (abl.). 20. He drew a broad line between honor and self-interest. 21. The State must not encroach upon the property of the indivi- dual. 22. That older world stood nearer to the dawn and saw truth with clearer eyes. 23. The enemy was reduced to submission without difficulty. 24. They were admitted to an audience. 25^ Their exasperation will be proportionate to the good nature with which they now proceed. 26. Disaster now stared them in the face. 27. The cold was of such intensity as to be almost unendurable. 28. This reverse damped their triumph. 29. His first attempt met with poor success. 30. If he had had more, he would have given more. 31. He said on April 5th that he would never set foot in my province. 32. By the foreign voyages of our ships all the neces- saries of life are supplied. 33. He has glutted (pasco) his ad- herents with political incendiarism. 34. The forum would have been the stage of his genius. 35. The House assigned me this role and I sustained the character to the best of my ability. 36. A strong and really {use quidam) astonishing feeling of good-will was beginning to glow in my breast. 37. From friendship blossom many advantages. 38. This spark of genius cannot be concealed ?«: .^1 :v? i -i^^Vj^ji^m! IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) V i.\r of tJie name of Antony (subjci t ni.'ide einpluitic by being put last instead of tiisl). So, too, tlio veil) is emphasised by being put not last but lirst : as, Irridet Clodius Senatum. Clodiiis is iciually ntoikin^'' the Senate. Conij)aie : Senatum Clodius irridet. // is the Senate tJiat C/odius is nioeking. Pecunia a patre exacta est crudellter. The vioney ivas extorted from his fatlter 1^'ith every circumstance of cruelty (adverb at the end for enijjhasis). In miseriam nascimur sempitemam. \Ve are born to misery everlastinL^(.ii\jccU\c last, for emphasis). Profluens quiddam habuit Carbo et eanorum. Carbo had the gift not only of a llo-xcing but of a musical style (adj. last and separated from the word with which it would naturally go). Note.— The use of the emphatic position renders many words, that are common in English, unnecessary in Latin. Thus : / should not mention that affair at all. Illius rei ncn mentionem faciam. That I shall not beliere till I actually hear the em>ovs. Hoc non prius credam quam audiero legatos. ^■ gave away lodifies J do SPECIAL RULES OK ORDER. 5. The followin:^ special rules of order should be studied and the examples (which are chiefly taken from Potts' Hints Towards I^atin Prose) carefully C(jmmitted to memory. (a) Everything logically connected with the subject should be placed close to it : as. Two Nunudiafis locre sent to Hannibal ivith a letter. Duo Numidae cum litteris ad Hannibalem missi sunt (here the letter belongs to the Numidians). Dcmocritus could not distinguish black from nuhite after he had lost his sight. Democritus, luminibus amissis, alba et atra dis- cernere non poterat. {h) A sentence should not, as a usual thing, have more verbs at the end than two : as, 11 * u 1- • 178 Lati!* prose composition. Verres so harried Sicily that it could not possibly be restored to its former condition. Verres Slciliam ita vexavlt ut restitui In anti- quum statum nuUo modo potuerit (the main verb of a final or consecutive sentence is not put at the end). He said he saw that this was the aim^ i.e. that the man might be compelled to say something false. Dixit se intellegrere id agl ut aliquid falsi dicere cofiferetur (the verb introducing oblique narration put, as usual, first). So, too : They say that he had an incredible memory. Ferunt eum incredibili memoria fuisse. See, also, p. 129, 9. (c) The verb of an explanatory clause introduced by enim or autem, stands first : as. What such achievement has ever been performed f For I may boast before you. Quae res unquam gresta est tanta? Licet enim mihi apud te gloriari. (d) A colorless verb (like esse, solere, posse, coepissa, &c.) stands usually in the i^iiddle of the sentence : as, He is usually either bombastic or spiritless. Aut tumere ( swell) solet aut frigrere {be cold). Sum, however, comes first in the sentence (i) when it means to exists (2) to prevent the separation of closely connected words : as, Est igitur haec lex. This law^ therefore^ exists. Erat nemo quicum essem libentius. There was none with wiiom I would more gladly be. (e) Words of opposite meaning, words of the same sound or derivation, and different cases of the same word, are usually written together for the sake of the contrast and the assonance : as, /;/ his single hand he controlled everything at Rome. Omnia unus Romae poterat. / do not think that immortality should be despised by a mortal Mortali immortalitatem non arbitror contemnendam. You should not ask any question but which of the two waylaid the other. Nihil aliud quaerere debetis nisi uter utri insidias fecerit. I ; r s i. ORt)ER AND KMPIIASIS. 179 i^ (f) Two words in antithesis arc often found, oiv at the be<;inning, the other at the end : as, Errare malo cxun Platone, quam cum iatis vera sentire. / pre- fer rather to be wrong with Plato than to be right with those gentry (p. 88, 4). (g) When pairs of words are contrasted, the order of tlie words in the second pair is reversed : as, You would have heard the shrieking of women and the shouting of men. Audires CilCilatus femlnarum, virorum clamores. This arrangement is called chiasmus (from the Greek letter r///, x). I hus : ululatus feminarum, X virorum clamores. m is to . as, with >mnia [ortal lylaid ksidias (h) Adjectives and attributive genitives (except those of posses- sion, number and amount) usually follow their nouns : as, / am a Roman citizen. Civis Romanus svim. The leader of the Senate. Prlnceps Senatus. See p. 59, i. Two nouns belonging to the genitive, are not separated, unless for emphasis : as, It is more difficult to find the beginning of this speech than the end. Huius orationis difflcilius est exitxim quam principium invenire. (i) The negative should come as near the head of the sentence as possible : as, Even the Lacedaemotiians were unable. Neque ipsi Lacedae- monii poterant. Do not disturb me. Noli me turbare. You will find it better not to have uttered a sound. Non erit melius vocem misisse (inf. when used as a noun, usually at the end). See p. 95, 3, note. 180 LATIN rUOSK COMPOSITION. KxKKt:isF. LXn. I. Tlu.' Acdiii sent .'nnbassadors to him. 2. When lie was living there with great dignity owing to his many virtues, the Spartans sent ambassadors to Athens. 3. Tliey deny that any one should see the light who acknowledges himself guilty of homicide. 4. It is a matter of history that he rejected this argument 'disputatio). 5. He felt that he was being taken to task even by IJrulus. C. With what feelings do you think a man like Alexander lived ? (p. 176, 4). 7, Till to-day you have followed another general ; now follow Caesar. 8. On this charge he was condemned, a charge of the most frivo- lous character. 9. As long as he lived, he lived in grief (p. ^70,^). 10. Do not sacrifice the safety of your country to the safety of your father. 1 1. As far as learning goes, you can do that as long as you please (p. 176, 4). 12. I was unable to visit him, for he lives in a remote part of the city. 13. Prosperity cannot be secured (eflQcio) without men's zealous aid (p. 165, i,^). 14. He was a man undoubt- edly worthy of all honor. 1 5. To think that men should eat human flesh Cp. 58, 15) ! 16. It is glorious to die for one's country. 17. He used to say that silver was cheaper than gold, gold than virtues (p. 179, jif). 18. Danger comes to one from one quarter, to another from another (use aliunde). 19. After the removal of the tyrant (rex), I see the tyrant's ])ower still remains. 20. And yet these things are not closely connected (p. 166, <:). 21. My thoughts are at present employed in guessing the reason of your absence. 22. I am dis- tressed at not receiving any information from you by letter. 23. Truth needs no adornment (use fucus, 'ersative). 2. The most common of all Latin connectives is the relative pronoun, and its use deserves c.uelul attention. Thus : lloratius ivos marching in adinince, I lis sister met him bejore the gate. Princeps Horatiup >bat ; cui soror obvia ante portam fuit (cui et ei, and him). Two and tieo are four. If this is granted, &^c. Bis bina quattuor flunt ; quod si conoessum erit, &c. Note. — The relative is often used for and with a demonstrative ; hence the frequent use in Latin of quamobrem, quare, quam ob causam {and on account of this things ^c). 3. The relative — unless referring to an emphatic is or idem- stands near the antecedent, and an adjec tive or an appositive noun is put in the relative cl.uise : as, He sent the most faithful slave Ji^ had. Senrum, quem habuit I 182 LATIN PUOSE COMPOSITION. \ j M i i //(• rtdiin'tf the I'o/sri, a nation nvhich is situated not far from this city. Volscos, quae grena non lon^re ab hac urbo est, subegit lUit : Most f)cof)lo arc scn'ile to a man from whom they expect some- thin i^. Plerique a quo aliquid sperant, el (or eldem) inserviunt. Sec J). 9, 6. 4. The subject of the main verb is often to be supplied in Latin from the relative clause : as, ]Vhcn this luord ivas hrout^ht him^ he arose. Cui quum id esset nuntiatiim, surrexlt. So too : TJierc are books ivith ivhich^ when we read them^ we are delighted. Libri sunt, quoa quum legimus, delecta.mur. Note. — If the connection is not expressly shown by a particle, the sentence begins with some emphatic word which serves the same purpose : as, W^e began the war with Saguntum. We must wage it against Rome. Susceptum cum Saguntinia bellum ; habendum cum Romania est. }Ie was killed in the engagement ; and Fulvius left him dead on the field. Occisus est in acie ; iacentem Fulviua reliqult. 5. For the sake of clearness and emphasis, a word is often repeated at the head of each clause of a sentence : as, TJie panic and confusion were as great as if an enemy 7C'ere besieging the city. Tantus pavor, tanta trepidatio fuit, quanta si hoetea urbem obsiderent. /A' promised but with dijfieulty., with frowns., and grudgingly. Promiait sed diflBculter, sed subductia superclliis, sed mAlignis {^niggard) verbis. This is called anaphora. 6. The subject of a Latin sentence should be kept — as far as possible — unchanged all through the sentence : as, The nuitter was quickly dispatcluni and the legions returned. Qua re confecta, legiones redierunt. When his friends asked him his opinion., he replied as follows. Die, sententiam ab amicis rogatus, ita respondit. NOTES ON TUB LATIN SENTENCE. 183 'crc Note 1. — The subject should be taken out of a subordinate clause and put at the head of the sentence : as, When Caesar heard tliis^ he set out. Caesar, quum hoc audilsset, profectxis est. Note 2, — If the subject is changed, it should be expressed by the pronoun is or hlc, when tlie new subject has been already mentioned in the previous sentence : as, They came to the kini^ at Pergamiim. He receh'ed them kindly. Pergamum ad regem venerunt. Is eos comiter excepit. 7. The same noun or pronoun should — as far as possible — be kept in the same case all through the sentence : as, When Midas was a boy^ some ants piled grains of corn upon his lips^ when he was asleep. Midae dormienti cum puer esset, formicae in os trltici erana congresserunt. Note. — This will often involve the use of a subordinate clause (or a participial phrase ; see p. 47, 3) for an English main clause : as, Hannibal ordered him to leaiie the camp^ but he soon returned. Qui, cvun Hannibalis iussu castris exiisset, paulo post rediit. This he persistently repeated and his whole discourse was spent in eulogizing virtue. Qiiibus constanter dictis, omnis eius oratio in virtute laudanda consumebatur. 8. A noun, when the object both of the main and of the subor- dinate clause, is put at the head of the sentence : as, // / cannot crush my annoyance^ I will conceal it. Dolorem, si non potero frangere, occviltabo. And, generally speaking, the important word is to be taken and put at the head of the Latin sentence, in order that the subject of discourse may be emphatically and clearly indicated in advance : as. When they saw that he had escaped the flames., they hurled darts at him and killed him. Quern, ut incendium efifugisse viderunt, tells emissis, interfecerunt. Note. — This will often involve a change of voice (as in the last example) or the use of a pronoun in the subordinate clause : as, ISl LATIN I'KOSK CoM I'd.SITlON. I H ly/ii-^/ JIannibal'-uuis lii>ing in I'xile at the court of h'tni( /'rus/tis, athi "a'. IS of the opiniDH th,if the 'a'nr shoiitii ht' fotn^ht out to the end, tih' kiiii^ rr/usit/. Rox PruHlarf. qiuim Hannlball apud eum exulantl depugnari placeret, id facere iioluit. 9. r.csiclcs insisting on Clearness and Eniplia.iis, the Latin wrileis paid |)arti(:ular attention also to Kliythni (or the due alter- nation of short and lon;4" syllables). A knowleilj^e of the correct rlutlnn t^f the Latin sentence can only be obtainetl by connnittinj,' to memory sentences from the great masters of Lal'n j)n)se style sut h as Li\y and Cicero. The following model examples are given by I'ostgate {Scrfuo Latinus) : {ii) Ad miHeriam nascimur semplternam. We are Iwrn to misery that is iiniiidiiii^. {/>) Quid autein agatur cum aperuoro, facile erit statuere quani sententiam dicatis. llVh/i J sliou> you hoxo iiiitJi is at stake^ it loill be easy to deeiiie loliat opinion to express (p. 24, d). (t) Magna eloquentia, sicut flamma, motu excitatiir, materie alitur et urendo clarescit (which was translated by the younger Pitt, as follows :) // may be said of eloquenee, as of flanu\ that it requires tnotion to excite it, fuel to feed it, and that it brightens us it bur/is. Cicero himself quotes as a model the following period of his own : Est igitur haec, indices, non scripta sed nata lex, quam non didicimus, accepimus, legimus, verum ex natura ipsa adripviimus, hausimus, expressimus, ad quam non docti sed facti, non instituti sed imbuti sumus, ut si vita nostra in aliquas insidias, si in vim et in tela avit latronum ant inimicorum incidisset, omnis honesta ratio esset expediendae salutis. latere is, gentlemen of the fury, a law — not a luritten law but a natural one — which we have not arrived at from study, tradition, or books, but derived, imbibed, and drawn from mother Nature herself; which was not tauglit us, but was inborn ; which we reached not by training but by instinct. The law is this : If our lives are exposed to the secret attacks, the 7>iolence, or the weapons of bandits or of enemies^ any means of securing our safety is fustic fiable. NOTES ON Tllfc: LATIN HKNTKNCK. 1«:) 10. A stMitcnce should ni)t close with the end of ,i verse (<'.i,'., eHSo vldetur, or platniidHe Catoiil . The favorit«: ending's are two trochees, or ii tribrach and a trochee {i'-^''-, c6116cuvit or essfi vidfiatilr). KXI.KtISK LXiil. I. For several days storms followed and they kept us within our camp. 2. Which wealth- if it fell to our lot— wc wouUl be dis- satislied with. 3. 1 )csires which arise naturall)', are satisfied with- out dilhcully. 4. When Hannibal had reviewed (recenseo) his troops, he set out for (lades. 5. After Alexander had killed his friend, lie almost committed suicide. 6. Do you 1)elieve that the mind is strenj^thened by pleasure .'md weakened by abstinence ? 7. There is no doubt that force would have been repelled by force. 8. The matter was universally approved of, and it w.is entiusted to the geneial. 9. When the Cretans sent ambassadors to him, he did not take away all hope from them. 10. If the occasion (say /i/jif) bo fa\ orable for the change, we shall effect it with more ease. 1 1. The auj^ur T i res ias (/>/// ///c' appositivc second) is described (use flng'o)by the poets as a philoso|)lu'r, and he is never represented as bewailing his blindness. 12. Iiy the common consent of the com- petitors, he won the prize for valor, but resigned it to Alcibiades, whom lie devotedly loved. 13. Had Croesus ever been a hapi)y man, he would liave prolonged his happiness to the end. 14. Tatius cor- rupted thfs n»an's daughter with gold. She had hafjpened to go outside of t!ie ramparts to seek water. 15. This was obseixed and they altered their plan. 16. He had taken tlie city and the troops were marched home. 17. Such was my view and, if the Senate had supported me, the country would be safe. 18. Heaven will retpiite you in accordance with your deserts. 19. He was tired of his journey and so his slave killed him. 20. Do not imagine there is any necessity for haste. 21. This is a kindness which, if you confer it upon me, I shall not forget. 23. They felt more sorrow for the loss of their countrymen than joy at the rout of the enemy. 23. They roamed through the city without meeting any resistance. 24. To think that you should have fallen into such misery 1 25. He moved his camp nearer the enemy, to see if he could draw them 186 LATIM PIIOSE (;<)MI'oSITI<)S. to an cnga>,'cincnt. 26. As soon as the enemy saw us, they made a charge ; and we were c|ui( kly thrown into confusion. 27. Surely this is a greater nnracle, the fact of his si)aring the van([uishL'd. 28. Was not this the reason why Aristides was hanishcd, t.c. because he was just ? 29. They were not disturhrd by these disasters because (as they thou^^ht) the consuls were managing well (p. 137, i). 30. I pity you for making so inthiential (tantua) a person your enemy (p. 1 1 3, 4). 31. He is too great a genius to be compared to me. 32. As if I cared for tliat. 33. It was reported that an attack had been made on my house. 34. There was no doubt that he wouUl have called (cite) witnesses. 35. I am afraid I shall not be able to recover the million of sesterces he borrowed. ! , i §'64. THE LATIN PERIOD. 1. The Latin writers — and especially the historians— uere fond (as already intimated) of seizing and putting forward some promi- nent idea and grouping into one organic and harmonious whole (called apcriod) all connected and subordinate ideas. This period the Latin writers used with great skill and developed to a high degree of perfection. It is eminently characterized by melody, vigor, clearness, and dignity, and justly regarded as one of the most perfect linguistic forms ever produced for the expression of thought. Modern English style has taken quite a different direction. Every sentence contains, as a usual thing, a single idea with which the subordinate clauses (always very few and simple) are intimately connected. Compare, for example, the following passages in which the successful attack upon the usurper Amulius by his brother Numitor is described : THE DEATH OF AMULIUS. . At the beginning of the tumult^ Numitor gai'c out that the public enemy had attached the city and had actually assaulted the palace/ andy under color of this pretext, the wily prince had managed to withdraw the fighting men of the place from the scene of action THK LATIV PKRIOn. 187 (intl hud uh/ui i(f tlit'in to OdNpy their litaticl with anciinr to com^ttituliite their grand- father upon his' sueeess. The trinnifhst no time in call- ini:; a nuetini^ of the peop/e and in represent ini^ to them the unnatural conduct of his i> rot her towards himself //<• explained the extraction of his iirand-childreny and the mode of their birth and education I and he pclated the wonderful manner in 7vhich they had been disco7>ered Final 'y^ he disclosed the secret of the tyranfs deaths avowiui^ himself the auth/)r of the act. Numltor Inter pri»\ ira tumultum hostes invaslase urbem atque adortod regium dictlt; .s, quuni pvibem Albanam In arcora prae- sidio armisque obtireiidara avocasset : posteaquam luvened per- petrata caede pp • ere :id se e- lAilantea vldet., oxtempio advooato concilio, t^celca in ae frati\d, origlnem nepotum, ut (how) g-enitl, ut ediicatl, ut cognlt; essent, caedem delncepa tyrannl, seque eius auctoreni ostoiidii,. The inipoilant ami central idea here, is the announcement made by Numilor; the suhject of tlie l.atin period, tliercfore (and put, as usual, first), is Niimitor, and the main verb (put, as usu.d, hist\ oatendit; all the steps leading up to the climax are described by subordinate clauses, participles, or adverbial phrases C€ vditi). It may Ijc rcinaikcd here witli re^^ard to the renderin<^ of modern proper names, for whicli there is no Latin word, that there are three courses open : 1. Omit the word aIto;4cther and substitute a jironoun. 2. Substitute a real Latin name, e.g.^ as aljove, Tarquinius for J(VIICS. 3. Latinise the word : e.g., (he people of Canada, Canadenses; the J'lnglish, Angli ; Pcrii^ Penivia. 3. The Latin writers of course employed short sentences in the detached style, interspersed, for variety and rhetorical effect, with their lony^ sonorous periods. Whether ww English sentence is to be incorporated in a period in Latin or kept separate and detached, is a question for judgment to decide ; but the following rules may be given. The detached style is employed : {(i) To wind up a nanative. See any page of Livy : as, Palatinuni rauniit; sacra diis aliis facit. lie J'ortijied ilic Palii- tifiCy and instituted rites in Jionor of the other gods. {/>) In graphic narrative and in a detailed sumniary of facts which are not easily subordinated to one central idea : as, Bellum ab altero consule prospere gestum ; Suessa in deditionem venit, Teanum vi expugnatum. 'Jlie niilitary operations of t lie ot/icr consul loere successful ; Suessa surrendered and Teanum was taken by storm. Duo exercitus erant ; scuta alterius auro, alterius argento cael- averunt. Forma erat scuti, etc. There were two armies j the shields of the one luere embossed -.uithgoldj those of the other^ with siTi'er. The shape of the shield, etc. In rapid and graphic descriptions of this kind, asyndtlon is common. ■'}'' •f'l THE LATIN PERIOD. 189 ng of I, that (l) In ( oinersc'ition <»r arL;unu'nt : as, At enim Cii. Pompeius et de re et de causa iudicavit ; tulit enim de caede quae in Appia via facta esset. Quid ergo tulit ? Nempe ut quaereretur. Quid porro quaerendum est? Facturanesit? At constat. A quo? At paret. A'///, j'o// Tiv"// stff, Ponipey pro- jwiiticed upon bolJi tJie question of fact and tJic question of law ; he proposed a measure dealing luith i/ie lioniicide iLu a rejleclion that brought me no snuill consolation. .Is I was returning from Asia and sailing from Aegina to7vards Megara^ I began to look out upon the sur- roundim^ countries. Behind me lay Aegina; before me., Megara; '>u the right., Piraeus j on the left., Corinth : all of which were once llourishing towns, but now they are lying in utter ruin before our eyes. I bes;an to reflect as follows: '"'■ Dear me! are we poor ^nortals indignant if any one of our number perishesy ivhen in one •■I 190 LATIN I'ROSK COMPOSITION. spot the ruins of so many cifics arc lyin(!^ spread out before us f Will you not restrain yourself^ Srr7'ius, and reniendfer that you zvere born a jnan ? " Believe me, I loas not a little strengthened by the reflection. 4. It may be remarked in conclusion that : {a) Translation into Latin is really (as has been well said) a pro- cess of simplification. The Enj^lish is thouglit into some simple equivalent mould which can be expressed in Latin. If a Latin version does not, when re-translatcd, read like what is called "a lit- eral translation," the chances are that it is not Latin. {b) Unusual expressions and constructions should be avoided. Nothing better can be given on this point than the words of Caesar: Hoc habe in memoria atque pectore ut, tamquam scopulum {rock\ sic fugias inauditum atque insolens {unusual) verbum. {c) Latin must be rhetorical. Its fondness for antithesis (or con- trast) and for assonance, has been referred to ; and the frecpient use of interrogatives (quid? but again; quid quaeris? in short, etc.), and of the superlative where English is satisfied with the positive {e.g., optimus quisque, ior all good men), is an illustration of the same striving after rhetorical effect, which is so characteristic of Latin style. Exercise LXIV. Turn into a single period and translate : {a) The defeat and rout of the allied forces increased the panic of the French, and they saw disaster staring them in the face. A large body of men who had been completely surrounded by the English troops and were fighting in a ring, seeing no hope of succor which would enal)le them to maintain their position, broke through the enemy's line and escaped. But they were prevented by a blinding storm of sleet from seeing where they were going, and rushing pell-mell into the river, they were carried away by the current and drowned. {b) One of the hostages given to the king was a noble maiden of the name of Cloelia. This young lady, eluding the sentries, escaped from the royal camp — which was pitch'jd at no great distance from the river — and, at the head of a band of hostages, swam across the tttE LATIN t»EtttOD. 191 stream. Ambassadors were at once sent to demand her surrender and to say that the kin;^ would rej^ard a refusal as a virtual violation of the peace. The hostage was accordingly restored ; but the king filled with admiration for the exploit, sent her back in safety to her friends. (f) An officer, who happened to be stationed with a handful of men on the bridge, had witnessed the capture of the fort by the invading" host, and now saw them descending the hill at full speed. Knowing' that, if he deserted his post, they would immediately cross the river, he solemnly implored his countrymen to destroy the bridge with fire and steel. Thereupon he advanced to meet the enemy and maintained his position with his handful of men until warned by the shouts of those who were toiling in his rear that they had accomplished their object. r, and APPENDIX, I. THE PREPOSITION. 1. Latin prepositions govern either the accusative or the ablative ; but In, sub {l)clo7o\ super {al>(r<>t'), and subter {be' neatli\ govern both. Note — Gratia and causa (for tJie sake of) govern the genitive ; but they are really nouns used as prepositions. 2. In, sub, super, and subter {bcncaiJi) govern the ablath'C when they express rest^ and the accusative when they express //!o/wn: as, In urbe, z'/i the city; in urbem, into the city ; sub rauro, under the wall ; sub murum, /// tender the laall ; sviper eo pendet, // han^S^s over hinij super eum volat, it Jlies oi'er hnn. WITH ABLATI\'E. 3. The following nine prepositions govern the ablative : A (or ab), Jro/n, by ; coram. /// presence of; cum, icith; de, fro in ^ con- cernini^; e (ex), out of; prae, in front of in consequence of; pro, in front cf^ on behalf of; sine, without ; tenus, up to (written after its case ; also with gen.). WITH ACCUSATIVE. 4. All other prepositions govern the accusative. A list is given for reference : Ad, towards ; adversus, against ; ante, before ; apud, beside; circum (or circa), round; cis(()r citra), o/i this side of; contra, against; erga, to7vards ; extra, outside of; inter, among; infra, below; intra, within ; iuxta, near ; ob, on account of; penes, in the poiver of; per, through ; post, behind; praeter, past; prope, near to; propter, close to, on account of; secundum, along^ after; trans, across ; versus, towards (written after its case); ultra, beyond. PREPOSITION WITH NOUNS IN -INC. 5. The prepositions ad, ob, in, inter and (rarely) de, may be ioined with the gerund or gerundive, to express an English prepo- sition with a noun in -ing : as, 193 n 194 LATIN PUOSE COMPOSITIOI?. Ad pacem petendam hue missi sumus. We were sent here Jot the purpose of aski)ig peace. Tvirpe est pecuniam accipere ob rem iudicandam. // is a shame to take money for giving a verdict. Inter aediflcandos muros. During the building of the walls. Quae in hac rogatlone suadenda dixerunt. They made these remarks in recommending the bill. With other prepositions, a periphrasis— as often seen already — is needed. See p. 139, 1. Other examples may be given. Thus : {(i) I am in favor of returning. Redeundum esse censeo. (/;) Hoping is different from believing. Aliud est credere, aliud sperare (lit., // is one thing to believe^ another to hofe). (t) In blaming them^ you praise me. Quum culpas eos, me laudas. (d) I am surprised at your going away. Mirer quod abis (p. 99,6). (e) I will not object to your going away. Non recusabo quin abeas. See also p. 22, 2, 3. (f) I am tired of hearing this. Me taedet hoc audire. (^r) He urged them to the undertaking of the war. Monuit ut bellum susciperetur. (//) You have no reason for being angry. Non habes cur irascaris. (i) Since setting out^ I have written twice. Ex quo tempore profeet\as sum, bis seripsi. (j)' Before setting out., I wrote tzuice. Priusquam profectus sum, bis seripsi. {k) He was late in coming. Serus venit. (/) He was foremost in asserting. Primus (or prineeps) dixit. (;«) What do you mean by thanking me? Qxiid tibi vis quod mihi gratias agis ? («) By breaking down the bridge, he cut off supplies. Ponte rescissOi commeatus interclusit. I>REPOSITIOJf. 196 (o) Instead of lo^'ini:^^ you hate vtc. Odisti me quum amare debeas (p. io8, 6). See also p. 15, 5. (p) What will you do on going there f Quid facies quum eo iveris? {q) He was accused of killing them. Accusatus est quod eos occidisset (p. 99, 6, and 137, 2). He 7uas praised for saving the city. I^audatus est quod urbem servaverat. (;■) They were very near assaulting him. Minimum abfuit quin eum Tiolarent. is) He is in the habit of lying. Mentiri solet, if) As to pardoning, I will do no such thing. Quod rogas ut ignoscam, nihil eiusmodi faciam. (//) I have fio doubt about his going. Non dubito quin iturus sit. (?') Besides speaking Latin, he also speaks Greek. Non solum Latine sed etiam Graece loquitur. ( w) By doing this, I shall reach home in time. Qucd si fecero, domum temperi perveniam. (jf) / shall not punish him for doing it. Quod hoc fecerit, non eum puniam. (y) He was condemned without being present. Absens con- demnatus est. 6. The prepositions are widely used with nouns to form idiom- atic adverbial phrases of place, time, and manner. Such prepo- sitional phrases should be committed to memory as they are met with. A list is added for reference : — . A or ab (from, by). A fronte, /// front (so, a latere, in flank; a tergo, in rear); a senatu stat, he stands on the Senate's side ; a re frumentaria laborare, to be in distress with regard to supplies; confestim a proelio. immediately after the battle. Ad {to). A.d ludos pecunia decemitur, money is voted for the games; BfC; fortunam felix, fortunate in point of fortune; ad Cannas, in ^VM % 1 ill 196 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. |i i f ! i s ) 11 I : ! //le ncii^Jiborhflod of Cannae ; ad Sicillam, off Sicily; ad aliorum arbitrlum, at the beck of others ; omnes ad unum, all to a man, Apud {beside). Apud forum, near the forunt ; apud me, in my house; apud me plus vaiet, he has more injk'cnce loith me; apud Terentium, in the writings of Terence. Cum {with). Cum g-ladio, sword in hand or wearinj^ a sword; magna cum cura quaerit, he sce/cs with greelly\ carbftsus (Jinen ; pi., carb&sa, sails)^ colus {distaff), humus {the ground)^ vannus {a winnowing shovel), are feminine. Peiagus {the sea; pi., pelage, nom. and ace; Greek), vulgus, (rarely masc. ; crowd), virus {poison)^ are neuter. (The two last are used only in sing.) THIRD DECLENSION. MASCULINE TERMINATIONS. Most nouns of the third declension ending in -er, -or, -os, -es, (increasing in the genitive), -o (except -do, -go, -io), are masculine: as, Career Romanus, a Roman prison ; honor magnus, a great honor j flos albus, (I "a'hite flower J paries altus, a high wallj sermo Latinus, the Latin language. EXCEPTIONS. (i) -er : cadaver {dead body), iter {road), papaver (poppy\ tuber (swelling), uber {udder), ver {spring\ verber {lash\ are neuter. RULKS FOR GENDER. 199 (2) -or: arbor {free)^ is feminine ; aequor {scti)y marmor {}tuirhU\ cor {^hcart\ arc neuter. (3) OS : cos {•n'/ie/s/ofi(')y dos {do7ury\ are feminine ; os (ossis, a bone\ OS (oris, >nout/i), arc neuter. (4) -es : corapes (Jeficr), merces {merchandise)^ merges {a shc(if\ quies, rdqules {rcst\ sfiges {d crop\ tSgres {a coi'eyin^)^ are femi- nine ; and aes {copf)cr\ is neuter. (5) o: caro (camis, y/t'^7/) and echo {an echo)^ are feminine. FEMININE TERMINATIONS. Most nouns of the third declension which end in -do, -go, -lo, -as, -is, -aus, -x, -es (not increasing in the genitive), -s (preceded by a consonant), -us (in words of more than one syllable), are femi- nine : as, Multltudo magna, a great multitude; imago cer§a, aiva.ximaf!;e; oratio longa, a ion<^ speech; aestas calHda, a iK'arin summer; rara avis, a rare bird ; laus parva, small praise ; vox magna, a loud voice ; clades nostra, our defeat ; plebs Romana, the Roman populaces virtus divina, heroic valor. EXCEPTIONS. (i) -otordo {an order\ cardo {hinge^, ligo {'nattock\ margo {margin of a river), are masculine. (2) -as : as (assis, rt^;;w//^^/;/), elephas(elephantls, an elephant) aremasc. ; vas (vasis, vessel), te^a {right ),n6feiB [wrong], arc neuter, (3) -is : amnis {river), coUis {hill), cinis {cinder, ashes), crinis {hair), ensis {sword), fascis {bundle), finis {an end), follis {bellows), funis {rope), ignis (fire), lapis {stone), mensis {month), orbis {circle) panis {bread), piscis (fish), postis {post), pulvis {dust), sanguis {blood), torris {fire-brand), unguis {nail), vectis {croxubar), vermis {worm), are masculine. (4) X : cd.lix (a cup), codex (a book), cortex (bark of a tree), grex (afiock)y poUex (a thumb), silex (flint), vertex (top), are masculine. (5) -es: acin&ces [scimitar), is masculine. i: m i i'JS :l ir >:\ 200 LATIN l'UO«K COMPOSITION. (6) -8 prececlcd by a consonant : mens [mountain), dens {tooth\ fons [loiiniain), pons {brid\:;c)^ bidens {mattock\ rudens (ropc\ arc niabciilinc. 1 ^ \ [ •\ I m lis ' NEUTER TERMINATIONS. Most nouns of tlu: third declension which end in -c, -a, -t, -e, -1, •n, -ar, -ur, -us (short in gon. i, -us (in words of one syUable), arc neuter : as, Lac album, 7.'///A' milk ; poema longum, ti lon}!^ poem ; caput auum, his (>u'fi Jiead ; milre magnum, d great sea ; Animal ferum, a iinld aiiiiiial ; limeu tiltum, a high threshold; calcar acutum, a sharp spur ; fulgrur clarum, a bright Jlashj tempiis antiquum, ancient time; iua magnum, a great right. EXCKI'TIONS. (i) -1: sal (sa/t\ sol (sun), are masculine. (2) -n : lien {spleen), ren, {kidney), splen {spleen), pecten {eonib), are masculine. (3) -ur: fur {thief), furfur {bran)^ turtur {turtle-dove)^ vultur {vulture), are masculine. (4) -us : pecus (pScildis, a single hecui of cattle), is feminine ; lepus (leporis, a hare) is masculine. (5) us : grus (gruis, crane), sus (suis, pig), mus (moiris, mouse) are masculine. FOURTH DECLENSION. Nouns of the fourtli declension that end in -us, are masculine ; those in -u, are neuter. EXCEPTIONS. JLcus {a needle), colus {distaff; also of the 2nd), domus, a house; manus {hand), portions {portico), tribus {a tribe), Idus (iduum, the Ides of the month), Quinquatrus {^}^\., feast of Minerva), penus {store), are feminine. FIFTH DECLENSION. Nouns of the fifth delension end in -es, and are feminine. AI'PKNDIX. 201 EXCEPTIONS. Dies (J V n I l\ '. {I VOCABULxVRY. N.n. — r. 1- regular of 1st conjutjation A. a, usually not expressed ; (a certain), quidain ; a city which ea iirbs (juae. . . , abdicate, I, me mayistratu abflico, (•are, -avi, -atuni). ability or abilities, ingenlum; to the best of my a., use quam possum. able, poten-s, -tis ; peritus. able, I ara, possum, posse, p6tnT. abound, I, af-fluo, -flacre, -fluxi (p. 80, 2). about {of place), circum (prep, with ace); (=concerninj^), de(prep. wilhabl.). about ( = nearly), fCre or fermo, adv. (chiefly with numeral ailjeclives or words expressing- amount ; usually placed after the words limited); paene (used with verbs) ; ( = in the neijjfhborhood of), circa (prep, with ace). abroad, peregre. absence (in my), me absente (p. 51, 1). absent, I am, ab-sum, -esse, -frti. abstain from, I, abs-tlnCo, -tlnfre, -tinui, -tentum (with alil., p. 74, 3); ab- sisto, -sistCrc, -stiti (with abl.). abstinence, abstinentia. abundant variety, say plenty (co pia) and variety. accept, I, ao-clpio, -cipere, -cOpi -ccptum. acceptable to, prat-us, a, -umCwith dat., p. 69, 9). accident, cas-us, us; oruseaccido accomplish, I, ef-flcio, ficCre, feci, -fcctum. accordingrly itaque. ; r. /, = regular of /,th conjugation. account of, on, propter (prep, with aoc); causfi with jreiiitivo (usually i)laced after the e\j)ression governed by it). account, I take into, (or take a. of) rationem h,'ib-eo, -Ore, -fii, -Itum (with genitive). account-book, tabula, ae. accuse, I, accuso, -are, -avI, -atum (i>. (ir>, 1). accused, re-us, -i. accustomed, I am, stnieo, -ere, sfil- Itu9 sum (j). 18, 3). acknowledge. Bee admit. acquire, I, fid-lpiscor, -lpis(!i, -eptus. acquit, I, ab-solvo, -solvere, -solvl, -sulutum (p. G"), 1). acre, iftgurum, -i, n. (sing, declined in the second declension ; pi. in third; for division of, see p. 153, 2). across, trans (prej). with ace). act, fact-um, -i. act, I, Xg-o, -ere, Cgl, actum. action, use vb.; by a., agendo. activity, iise strenuus. added, to this is, hue accodib (p. 15, 5). . adherent, use st/tfs. ad ninister, I, gubern-o(r. 1). administration, respublica. admiration, use miror ; without a. use quin with vb. admire, I, admlr-or, -ari, -atus stun. admit, I, con-fitCor, -fitCri, -fessus sum ; (let in), adnutto. admittance, use admitto. adopt, a policy, conailium cajiere^ I if • 1' -i Mi J 206 206 VOCABULARY. adopt, I, fitor, fifi, fisus sum (with al.l., 1). SO, 1). advance (go forward), I, in''>- cCdo, -ccdi'i'O, -ccssT, -(■cssiuii ; ])ri)-;;ru- (llor, -{,^riili, -grossus sum ; I advance my friends to office, aiiiicod meos ad hoiiores proiiioveo. advantage, is of, prosum. adversity, res advcrsae. advice, coMsili-um, -i, n. advise, I, mun-C'O, -ore, -in, -Itiim. Aedui, Aedri-T, -6rum, M. (pi.). Aelius, Aell-us, -I, ^r. Aesop, Aes(3p-us, -I, yi afarj i)n')cul (adv.). affair, res, rCi, f.; affairs, ros, or res gestae. afraid, I am, tim-Co, -ere, -ni ; mf'tn-o, -Ore, -i; vi5reor, verori, veritus sum (p. 17, 1). AfHca, Africa, -ae, f. after, post (prep, with acc.^; postcfi (ailv.); pos((iiiain (cniij. with purf. ind'u'., p. :02,4);jo, ab- hinc decern annos (or annis.) agreeably, couvenienter (with dat., p. 69, S).j agreed, it is, con-stat, -stare, -stuit; convOnit, -vOnire, -vcnit ; all are agreed, inter oiunes constat. agreement, consensl-o, -r.nis, V. aid, auxili-uni, -i, N. aid, I, anxlll-o sum (svitii dat., p. GO, S); sulf-vi'uiu, -venire, -\eni, -\entnm (with dat., p. 71, G); ifiv-o, -are, iuvi, irmnn (with aco.); / cmne to your aid, til)i subvenio. , Alexander, Alexantl-er, -ri. alike, pariler. alive, viv-us; be a., vivo. all, omn-Ts, -e (;idj.) allege, I, dic^ito, -rue, -avi, -riium. allied, soeius. allow, (let) I, sino, -ore, sivi, situm. allowed, I am, niihi licet, -ere, lieuit(p. 7(1, 2) ; it i.i allowed by all, inter onnies constat. ally, s6cl-us, -i, M. almost, fere, i)acm', pmpe (of place); see SLbont-ncaiiij ; p. :}:!, 4. alone, snl-us, -a, -um, un-us, -a, -am ; T toil alone in. d.iing this; hoc sola., (o. ntuis) facie (i). II, 2). Alps, Alp-es, -lum, F. already, iam. also, (luoque, idem (p. OD, VI). altar, ar-a, -ae, F alter, nuito. altogether, onmino. always, semper (adv.). amass, I, compar-o, -are, -avi, -atum. ambassador, logfit-us, -i, JI. among, inter (prep, with ace); in (prep, with al)l.). ancestors, maior-es, -um. ancient, (beloiiiji ng to old time) pris- cus, pristlnus, -a, -um, antlqu-us,-a, -um; (full of years), vCtust-us, -a, -um. and, et, -que (written after), atque (ac, before consonants only.) anger, ira, -ae, F. ; Iracundl-a, -ae, F. angry, U-at-us, -a, •uni(adj.). h dat., p. Mi, -vuntiini -fire, iflvi, ( yuiir aid, -ri. 1, -IltlllU. sivi, situm. licet, -oru, ; hu oW, inter )e (of place); i. i-us, -a, -iiin ; , 1-^). :, -avi, -atuni. 1, M. ith iicc); in ini. old time) pris- iuns,-a, -uiu; -urn. after), atque ) iindl-a, -ae, F. adj.). VOCABULARY. 207 angry with, I am, iraa-cor, -ci, iraliis sum (wiili dat., j). 71, (5). animal, rmim-ul, -alls, N. announce, nuntio (r. i). announcement, expressed by the perf. part. : the annovincement of the defeat, cladea nuntiata. annoyed, I am, me piget (p. 66, 3). another, alt-er, -era, -Oriim (of two) ; alius, -a, -ud (of more lliau two). answer, responsum, -i, N. answer, I, respond-en, -ore, -i, re- sponsum; I make the same answer, idem respondto ; he makes no an- swer, nihil respondet. Antonius, Antonl-us, -I, M. anxiety, sollicitud-o, -inis, F. anxious, sollT<;it-us, -a, -um. anxious, I am, cftp-io, -ore, -ivt -(ii), itum. any,quis;(iti affirmative clauses)(iuivis, (luilihet; (in negative) (iuis(|uam or iillns, (p. 95, 3, 4) ; ectiuis (p. 07, (/). any longer, ultra (adv.) ; diutius. anything, (after a ne^'.), quid(|uam ; (you please), quidvis, quidlibet (p. 95, 2). Apollo, Apoll-o, -Inis, M. apparent, it is, manifcstum est; appfir-et, -ere, -uit ; tise vidcor for adj.: = (IS each shall seem viost mean, &c. (p. 118,5). apparently, use seem. appear, I, vldeor, -ori, visus sum appearance, spCcl-es, -ei, F. applaud, I, plaud-o, -ere, plausi, l)lausum. application, stfldi-um, -i ; appli- cation to literat\ire, studinm lit- terarum. approach, advent-us, -us, M. approach, I, ad-venio, -vCnire, -venf, •vcutum. approval, use vh. approve, priiho (r. i.). April, April-is, -e. ( idj). argument, txrgb. use dico. Aricia, Aricia, -ae, F. arise, I, eon-snr;.jo, -sur),'ere, -surrexl, •snrreetum ; see rise, arm, humerus; vh., anno ^r. i.). arms, arm-a, -unnn, X. (i>l.). army, exereit-us, -us, M. Arpinum, Arpin-um, -i, N. arrest, I, ar-ripio, -rij)Lre, -rlpfd, -ri'iitum ; cor-ripio, -ripGre, -riju'd, -rep- tum. arrival, advent-us, -us, M. arrive, I, per-venio, -vfnlre, -venl, -ventum ; I arrive at the city, ad urhem ]>ervenio. arrogance, use arroj^ans. arrow, sa;,'itt-a, -ae, F. art, ar-s, -tis, F. as (correlative of same), . 10, 1); eorr. of mich, ((ualis ; of great, ((uantus (p. 10, 1). as not, in consecutive clause, ut-non (p. 14, 4). as soon as, p. 102, 4. ascertain, I, cojjf-nosoo, -noscCre, -nuvi, -nitum; certior factus sum. ashamed, I am, me pudet (ere, iniduit); / a)ti ashamed of you, tui me l)udet (p. GG, 3). ask (or ask for) I, ri-Jg-o, -are, -avi, -atuin ; posco, -ere, pOposci ; peto, -ere petivi, pCtitum. assassination, expressed by perf. jKirt. pass.; after Caesar's assassination, post Caesarem interfecrtum. assault, use immitto (send against). assemble, I, (trans.), conv6c-o, -are, -avi, -atum ; (intr.), conven-io, -Ire, -venl, •ventum. i4:^il m h Hi 1 ( if i mi . , ■Kw H^jf u Wt I 1 Jj 1^ i4 208 VOCABULAllV. assent, lend a blind, tfnncre as- seiiLior, assert, I, dico, -ure, dixi, dictum. assertion, make, dlco. assign, I, trib-uo, -ftCre, -til, -I'ltiim ; divide. assist, assistance. See aid. assume, sumo, astonishing, admirabilis. at, ad. See p. 82. at once, statim. Athens, Athon-ae, -aimn, F. (pi.). Atlantis, Atlant-is, -Tdis, F attack, impct-ua, -lis, M. attack, I, ag-grudtor, -grCdl, -gressus sum (with ac(!.); impetum fa'-io in (with aoc); I make an attack on (a place), oi)-iiugno, -are, -avi, -fitum (with ace). attain, attinCre (ad). attempt, couat-us, -us. attempt) I, con-or, -ar:, -atus sum. attention, auimadversi-o, -onis, F. attract, traho. audience, use audio ; p. 106, c. August, Aujfust-us, -a, -tun. authority, pOtest-as, -atis, F. ; auc- torlt-as, -atis, F. avail, oneself of, utor. avenge, I, ulcisc-or, -i, ultus sum. avenue, iidit-us, -us, M. avoid, I, vlt-o, -are, -avI, -atum. away, I am, ab-sum, -esse, -f til. away, I go, a,b-uo, -ire, -!vT(-ii), -Ttum. bad, mfil-us, -a, -um (adj.). back, terg-um, -I, N. baggage, impedimenta, -orum. Baiae, Bai-ae, -arum, F. (pi.). Balbus, Balb-us, -T, M. banish, I, ex civitate pello (i)ellC!re, p£pilli, pulsum). banished, cxtorr-is (ex, tena), with al.l. (p. 74. 4). banishment, oxiil-um, -i, N.; I am in banishment, exul-o, -are, -fivi, -.Hum. banker, arj^^entarius. bark, I, lutr-o, -are, -avI, -atum. base, turp-is, -o (adj.). battle, i>Ufjn-a, -ae, F. ; prooli-imi, -T, N. ; in battle, in acie ; there has been a disastrous b., infeliciter pugnatum est. bear, I, fCro, ferre, tfilT, latum ; t6lero, -arc, -fivI, -atum. beast, fCra, -ao, F. ; beltia, ae. beat, use vinco. beautiful, pulch-rr, -ra, -rum ; (of places), amoen-us,- a, -um. beauty, pulchritfid-o, -Inis, F. because, quod, qtiia, quonfam (p. 113, ■>). become, I, fio, fieri, factus sum. before, anteri, antChfic ante (adv.); ten years before, decem annos ante (p. 86, 4), before, ante (prep). before, antequam, priusciuam (p. 104. 7). beg, I, or-o, -are, -avi, atum ; I beg yovi not, te oro ne (with subj. ; p. 12, 2). begin, I, inclpio, -cipcre, cGpf, -cep- tum ; coepi, -isse (p. 142, 6) ; at the be- ginning of spring, prime vore ; at the beginning of night, prima iiocte. beginning, Inltl-um, -I, N. (see above). behave, I, me gero (jrCrCre,' gessi, gestum). belief, use vb. believe, I, crc-do, -dCre, -did!, -dltum; I am beUeved, mihi creditur (p. 72, 10). believing, by, orodondo di 42, C); seeing is believing, videro est credere (p. 43, note 2). VOCAnULAlJY. 1>09 (p. 104, \e above). [e,- gessi, p, -dttum; Ip. 72,10). \ 42, C); L credere belong" to, J). '.!>. 2; sec hiirr. below, infrfi. benefit, coniinod-uiu, -1, N. benefit, I, pro-sun', -dessf, -ffii (with dat. ; p. 7(1, 1). bereft, oib-ug, -a, -uni (with ahl., j). 74, 4). beseech, or-o, -are, -avl, -atfiin ; obiLcr-or (r. 1). besiege, I (blockade), oh-stdco, •sidOre, -sGdl, -aessuin ; (by actual at- tack), oppu},'no, -are, -avi, fitimi. besieged, the, use rcl. clause. betray, I, prA-do, -d'Cre, -didi, -dittun. better, mclior, comi]>. of bornw; it would be better, melius est ; satius est (i). 124, 2). between, inter (prep, with ace.) bewail, deploro (r. 1). bind, iunfro. bird, avis, ■is(F.) birth, of noble, nobili loco natus (p. 74, 4). bite, mors-us, -iis, M. blame, culp-a, ae, F. blame, I, vitQpCr-o, -are, -avi, -atuni. blessing, bonum. blind, cacc-us, -a, -uni. ; blinding, omit, as beiiij^ imi)lied. blindness, caec'it-as, -atis. blockade, obsldeo, -ore, -sedi, -sessum blood (in veins), saTiguia, sanguinis, M. ; (when shed), cru-or, -oris, M. blossom, effloresco. blush to do it, I, n.e pudet hoc face re. boast, I, glori-or, -arl, -atus sum ; I make the same boast, Mem glorior. boat, navigium. body, corpus, corpSris, N. ; a great body of men, magna vis hominum bold, aud-ax, -acis (adj.). boldly, audacter or audaciter. bond, use neut. pron. book, llb-er. -ri, .M. borders, fin-cs, -mm, M. (jii.). born, I am, nascor, nasci, niitussum. born to rule, namsad r. y^endtnu. born of a noble family', nobili gente natus (j). 74, 4). borrow money, pocuniam mutuam accijiere or suniere. both, uterque, utraque, utrumque; aniho, -ae, -o. both. . . and,et.. .et; -<|U('. . . -que; vel ..vel. bottom, fundus, -f, M.:ihimh. a, -um : at the bottom of the mountain, ill iiionte imo (p. 61 (e)). boxer, pug-il, -ills, M. boy, pn-er, -fri, M. ; from a boy (from boyhood), a pnero, or, when used of more than one, a ))Uf'ris. boyhood, pflCritla, -ae, K. (see above). brave, fort-is, -c (adj.). bravely, fortlter (adv.). bread, panis, -is, .M. break, I, frang-o, -ore, fnlgi, fractum; I break a law, Ic^em vi(>lo(-;ire, -avi, -atum) ; I break my word, fidem fallo (-Ore, fSfelll, falsum). break a bridge, I, pontein inter- runipo(-rumpere, -rupi, -ruptum); jiontem iiiler-scindo (-scindere, -scidi, -scissum), breast, pectus, -oris X. bridge, pon-s, -tis, M. ; I btiild a bridge over a river, pontem in tlu- mine facio. brief, brCv-is, -e. brigand, latr-o, onis, M. bring, I, fOro.ferro.tnli, latum ; duco, -Ore, duxi, ductuni ; I bl'ing this to you, hoc tibi afTero ; I bring help to yovi, operam (or auxilium) tibi fero; tibi auxilio venio (dat. ; p. GO, 8) Britain, Britannia, -ae, F. broad, lat-us, -a, -um. brother, frfit-er. -ris, M. Bruuaisium, «runais^-um x N. I^!; T m 210 Vocabulary. build, I, atilific-o, -firi', -fivi, -alum; I build a bridge, |)oiii,fin facio; I build a mound, a«-gcrein extruo (-Cro exlruxi, oxtriKituiii). burden, un-us, -Oris, N. burn, I, crOin-o, -are, -avi, -atuni ; iiro, -on;, ussi, tistum ; in-cendo, -condfre -cendi, -ceiisum. bury, sepc'lio, -ire, iVi, ultum. business, res, negutl-um; p. 60, 2, nolo. but, Hed, vernm (emphatic). butcher, I, tmcld-o, -are, -fivI, -atum. buy, I, i;in o, -Cre, eml, emptum. by (of agent), a, before a consonant ; ab, before a vowel or h ; abs, before te ; (of secondary a;,'ent) i)er, with ace. ; by land and sea, terra mari(|ue. by-stander, use adsto. C. call (summon), I, v6c-o, -are, -avi, -atum call (name), I, appell-o, -are, -avT, -atum. call down, I, devOc-o, -are, -avi, -atum (from = de-f abl.). call out, e\6v.o ; (exclaim), I, oxulfun-o, -are,-avT, -iitum. call together, cojjfo ; convoco. camp, castr-a, -drum, N. (pi.). can (am able), I, possum, posse, pOtfii. candidate for, I am, peto, -ere, pttivi (iH'Mi), potitmii; I am a candi- date for the consulship, consul- atum peto. Cannae, Cann-ae, -arum, F. (pi.); the battle at Cannae, pugna Can- nensis or puj;iia apud Cannas. Canusium, Caimsium. capable of command, imperii capa-x, i.ci.. (p. i)4y. Captive, captiv-us, 1, M. capture, capio; on the capture of the city, urbc cai>ta(p. .'il). Capua, Ca|)ua, -ae, F. care, cQr-a, -ae, F, ; care for, euro . (r. 1). care, take, cave ut (p. 2G, r.) ; take care that not, cave ne (p. 20, 5). care, without, secfir-us, -t>, -urn. carry, I, port-o, -are, -avi, -fitum ; fOro, ferre, tfili, latum. carry away and drown, absumo. carry on war, I, beUum gero, (-f re, gi-'ssi, g-ostum); I carry on war against the enemy, bellum contra hostes gero ; bellum liostibud infero. carry up, edfico. Carthage, Carlhag-o, -Inis, F. Carthaginian, Carthaghilens-is, -e. case, in our, in nobis ; in case, si (p. 141, r>, I)). case that, it is the, fit ut (p. 15, 5) ; p. lOG, 2. cast, I, iJlcIo, i.lcere, iecl, iactum ; conici(5, -IcOre, -iOcT, -iectum. cast (of a spear), iaet-us, us. Catiline, Catilin-a, -ae, M. CatO, Cat-o, -onis, M cause, causa, -ae, F. ; vb. , facio. cause (loss), I, in-fOro, -ferre, -tfili, illatum. cause a panic, I, pavorem inicio, -TcCre, -ieci, -iectum. cautious, caut-us, -a, -um. cavalry, Cqultat-us, us, M. ; eqrtites. cease, I, de-sino, -slnCre, -sivi, -sl*um; de-sisto, -sistere, -stiti.-stitum. celebrated, ille ; praeclarus. centre, mcdius, -a, -um ; in the centre of the city, media urbe; the centre of the line, media acies. centurion, centurl-o, -Onis, M. certain (sure), cert-us, -a, -um ; it is certain, certum est ; certain vie- VOCABULARY. 'ill 2, -tali, inicto, n the urbe; ia acies. A. um ; it in vic- tory, victoria explorata ; as certain, pro cerlo. certain (some), ali(iuis, alii|ii;ii', aliciuid or alitiuocl (p. 00, ;">) ; a C. , (luidiim. chance, sors; fortun-a, -.lo, F ; cas-iis, -lis, M. ; by chance, forte, orisu. change, I, mut-o, -are, -avi, -atum ; a change, roa. character, (natural), im;CnI-uni, •!, N. ; often exi)resse(l bv a l2 VOCABULAHV. ;' t It ;■:< i concerna me it, unii intercut (y. G(i, 4); ml iiii! portinjt (Ore, -I'lit). conclude, a speech, Hay iwafcc a/i <'?i(i «/ sjtt'ukliii). condemn, I, con-denmo, -are, -avi, •&tum. condemnation, escape, say nor wan hi: 7ii>f. condemned. condition, stfit-ua, -us, M. conduct (a g-overnment), I, Kiiiicni-o (rciiip.) ; conduct myself well, I, me Jioiie g-ero. conduct, fact-a, -Oruiii ; or uhc verl>. confer, I, dsfero ; don-o, arc, -avi, -atum. confidence, fiducl-a, -ae, F. ; or usi' corifido or fidem halieo (dat.). confusion, throw Into, use turbo. congratulation, use gratulor ()>. 48, 6). conquer, I, vinc-o, -ere, vlci, victuiu ; sQpOr-o, -are, -avi, -afuni. conscious, conscitis, a, uni ; con- scious of right, coiisoius recti. consent, consensus, -us, M. consequence, event-us, -us, M. ; a matter of the greatest conse- quence, res ^-ravissiiiKi ; it is of great consequence to me, mea nmltuiu interest (p. G6, 4). consider, I, spect-o, -are, -avi, -atum ; acstini-o, -are, -avi, -atum ; hah-Co, -Ore, -ili, -itum. consistent with, etc., say the man who in very brave we ivinh to he, etc. conspire (make a conspiracy), I, coniurationem facio (facOre, foci, factum). constant occvirrence, of, say happens more oj'ten. constitutional, e rcpublica ; legltl- mus, -a, -um. consul consftl, -is, M. COxiSulship, eons\dat-us, -us; I stand, am a candidate for tlie consulship, coMHtdatum peto; in th© consulship of, use licae, F. ; (territory), tines ; (as opjtosed to the town), rus, ruris, N. ; in the country, ruri. country-house, villa, ae, F. countrymen, civ-es, -lum, M. (pi.), courage, virt-us, -iitis, F, ; constan- ti-a, -ae, F. ; fortltud-o, -Inis, F. course, res, or use neut. pron. ; hold (a C), facio. VOCABULAUV 213 ■atum. pitrl-a, itis, V. ; rritory), ,n), i"S, run. M. (pl.). constan- ; hold court, ifuUcliim, -l, N. COVOr, I, tC^'f), -I'lv, ti'Xl, liftum. coward, cowardly, i;;ri;i\ us. Orassus, Crassus, -i, .M. ; the gal- lant Crassus, Cmssus, vir fortissinnis. create, itoo (r. i). credit, Iuuh, -dis, V ; fUl-08, -01, F. Cretan, Cretcnsis, -e. crime, fadn-us, -(•)ns, N. ; HcehiH, Oris. criticise, reprehi'n-do, -Ore, -di, -sum. crooked (bent), curvus, u, uiu ; (of counsels), imivus, a, uni. cross, I, trans-Co, -Ire, -Ivi (li), -ituin. crown (a circlet), corOu-a, -ae, V. ; often translated by ri);nun», -i, N. cruel, crfidCl-is, -e; saov-\i8, -a, um. cruelty, orudcllt-as, -atis, F. current, tiumen. custom, mos, nioris, JI ; cousuOtfid-o, •Inis, F. cut oflf, say kill, Cyprus, Cyprus, -t, F. dagg'er, sica, -ae, F.; pu^Mo, -onis, M. daily, (luotidio (of daily repeti- tion) ; (with w^ords expressing' increase or decrease), in dies. damp, say m cuiist' ; declaro (r. 1). decline, detrecto (r. 1). declining, 48, 3, note. decree, I, de-cerno, -cemCre, -crCvI, -cretum, (p. 17, note.) decree, a, decrCt-mn, -I, N. deed, fact-mn, -T, N. deep, alt-us, -a, um; deep gnbt, dolor gravis. ;: ^1 4 N iWil p i i1 1 i '■ : i^, £1* 11 ■I J; 214 Vor'Ani'LAUY. I i* • 111 .) ir I V If If f! defeat, . (M); ("•;,'r'iiiis, -a, -UIII (with ^'fii.; p. (Jl); iiudus, a, -um (with al)l.; p. 81, (()• destroy, I, dt'l-f-o, -Orf, -ivi, -otiiiii ; I destroy a bridge, see bridge. destruction, pernl(;l-os, -oi, V.; oxltl- uiii, -I, .\. (p. (i'.», H). detain, I, rC-tlm'o, -tiiiun-, •tiiiill, -tciiluiii. detect, scntio, -ire, seiisi, seiiauin. deter, T, dctcrreo ; pro hlixo, -lilbOre, -hiiini, -hiiiitiiiii; nothing deters me from going, nihil me prohibet quom- inus eani (p. 22, 2). determine, I. See decide. detest, odi. detestable, atrox. detestation, loudly-expressed, say hate (pi.) and tiliiiut.s; p. 105, b. devastate, I, vast-o, -are, -avi, -atum; l)(5pal-or, -arl, atus sum. development, late, say springs up late aiiuiiKj men. devotedly, say very much. die, I, niOrlor, niilrl, niortQus sum; mortem obeo, -Ire, -Ivi (-11), -Itum ; vita f xci'do, -cedfjre, -cessi, -cessum. differ, differo. difference to us, it makes no, nihil nostra interest (p. 60, 4). difficult, difflcll-is, -e. difficulty, use adj.; without diflQ- culty, facile. dignity, dignitas -atia ; or use gravis. vnrAnrr.AiiY. 2in direct, I, iul«ii ; iMliMliilHlr-", -ilri', •dvl, -Atiim. direction, ofti?i tnmslulid liy (I ilcp. qucHMon: I know tli«> diroctlon the «nemy have taken, H.i.i i(mo ii(».iis ivtrint (p. .TJ). disadvantage, iiicoMiiiind-iim, i, n. disagreeable, iti>,'r;it -iis.-n, uni ; iim h'stws. disagreement, ilissciiHi-o, -oniH, V. disappoint, ciudo, -crc.i'irisi.cirisuiii. disaster, olful ch, -ix, i". ; the dis- aster at Cannae, cliwk'a (.'miiunsis, or cladeH apud Caiuias. disband, I, dimitto, -nnttrre, -inlsi, -misMuin. discontented, non content hr, a, »-uin (with al)l.). discord, use dissi'inuH, -a, -uin. discover, I (fln,'noHco; (with effort), rPpcr-Io, -Tre, -l, -tnm; (without effort), in-vcnio, .vcnlro, -vOnT, -vet) turn. discretion, prudentia ; or use adj. disease, morb-us, -I. M. disgrace, dodCc-us -firis, N. ; tiirj)!- tfid-o, iiiis, r. ; it Is a disgrace to you, til)i dcdecori est (p. (59, 8). disgusted, I am, mc pndet ; I am disgusted with you, mc tui imdct (p. CO, 8). dismiss, I, di-mitto, -mitttre, -mTsi, -niissuni. displease, I, dis-plIcCo, -i)llcore, -plIcGI(p. 71, C). displeasure, use vb. ; oiTensT-o, -onis dissatisfied with, I am, mo taedct ; I am dissatisfied with you, me tui tacdet (p. CG, 3). dissent, dissentio (vb.). distinguished, diir-us, -a, -um; insigti-is, -e ; his distinguished father, pater suus, vir clarissimus. dlstreHB, diijiir, "iiN M,; (,r use nu- pitf«'t. dlHtrlbute, I, duido, -fic, diviHi, di\ isinn. district, nut'f. a^'fi M. dlatruHt, mi, -1, \. doubt, I( lam In doubt ),dii)iito, -'iri', -;ivi, -afmu ; there is no doubt that, non dubium e.st quin (with Hubj., p. •-i:i, 1). draw (-^drag), I, trnho, -rrc, fraxi, tractiuu; elicio ; I draw up a law, Ittfcin Hcriixi ; I draw up soldiers, milites instruo. dream, somni-utn, -i, X. dream, I, somuio (r. i); I dream a dream, wonuiium somuio (p. a^, 4). dress, vest-is, -is, K. drink, I, bn)-o, -f^re, -i, -itum. drive, I, ex-T},'o, -lyCre, -OkI, -actum; pello, iifllrre, pCpftlT, pulsum. drops, it, rorut (-fire). drowned, was, say could iwt be heard for (prac, with abl.). dry (vb.), aresco. during, exiiressed cither by ace. of time how hmjr or \>y Inter or intra with ace. (p. S.'), 1). duty, a, mumis ; it is my duty, p (iO, -2, note ; dcbCo, -ere, -fil, debltum ; me oportet, -ere, -flit (p. 33, 3). duty of, it is, use t'cnitive (p. 59, 2). •i m I" ;i. ll.'J, c). each ( -each and every), unus- quisijue. each other, they love, inter so aiiuiiii ; alius aliuiii aiiuit, or (of two) alter alteruia ainat. eager for, cupid-us, -a, -um (witli gen, p. 04). eager to, I am, cuplo, -ere, cflpivi, cupituni (with int.); yestio, -ire, -ivi. early, mat fir us, -a, -um; in early spring, i»nm.) veru. early, mruur-e, -Uis, -nme or -issime. ear, aur-is, -is, F. earn, mOr-Co, -ore, -ni, -itiuii. earth, tell-us, -uris, 1'".; terra. ease, with, facile. easily, faoU-e, -lus, -lime (adv.) easy, fficil-is, -Inr, -llmua. eat, I, ed-o, -ere, edT, esum; vescor. effect, perlieio. either -or, ant aut ; vel vel (p. 2()-i, b). elect, I, erC-o, -are, -uvl, -atum ; faelo, filcere, fOei, faotunx ; I am elected consul, eonsid tio. eloquent, elCKpien-s, -tis ; the elo- quent Denaosthones, DemostlieneS; vir eloiiuentissimus. else, alius elude, frustror (r, 1). empire, impon um, -i, N. employ thought, in guessiug, coj^ito (r. 1). encamp, I, uousido, -sldere, -sOdi, -sessuni; castra lOco (-arc, -avl, -atum); eastra pOno (t re, posfil, pOsItuni.) encounter, I (meet), oc-enrro, -our- ri ru, -eurri, -uursum (witli dat.); oliviam ire (dat.). encourage, I, ad-hortor, -hortari, -horta'.us sum, encroach on, •Hf., say take away /riiiii cadi Iti.s own. end, fin-is, -is, >r. ; at the end of winter, exlrem.l lueme ; (vb.), finio. endeavor, I, cGn-or, -ari, -atus sum. endeavor, an, eonat-us, -us, M. endowed, inaediLus. endure, I, tOlOro, -arc, -avI, -atum ; suslinOo, -t;nere, -tinfii, -lentimi ; per- pctior, -peti, -pessus sum. enemy (public), host-is, -is, M. ; (private), inimicus, i, M. engagement, an, proolium, -i, N. ; puyn-a, -ac, F. English, the, Angl-I, -Orum, M. (pi.). enjoy, I, frCi-or, -I, -ctus sum (with ahl., p. SO, 1). enough, satis (iwlv.) ; enough money, satis i)ecuniae. enquiry, use quaere (p. 48, ti). enter, I, in-y:rOdTor, -s^rOdl, -gressus sum ; I enter the house, domuu: ingredior. entrust, raando(r. 1); trado. enumerate, I, cnumer-o, -are, -avi, -alum. envied, I am, mihi invidetur (p. 72, 10). envoy, legat-us, I, M. ; nuntl-us, -I, M. envy, I, in-video, -vidore, -vidi, -vIsutu. envy, invldl-a, -ae, F. Ephesus, Ephesus, -i, F. err, I, err-o, -are, avi, atum. error, err-or, -oris. M. ; or use vb. escape, I, ef-fngio, -fagcre, -fugi, fQgitum; (uouu), fuga; effugium. VOCABLLARY. 21' i, -avi, (p. 72. 3, -I, M. -visum. vb. -fugl. estate, fund-us; iiraediinn. esteem, I, inayrni iifstiin()(r. 1). estimate, I, :vl-;Uiii o, -rn-c, -avi, -fituiu ; sui; value, estranged, aliCn-us, -a, -um. eternal, .sciuiiUuni-us, -a, -um. even.eliam; ln'forcaM adj., vel; not even, ne. . . .(iui. ',i, 8. even (level), ao(in-us, -a, -um. even (number), par, paris; odd or even, par vul impar. evening, vespor ; jjen. vesperis or vespt-rl ; ace, vosperum ; aid., vusperu, M. ; in the evening, .ispcri. events, at all, oerti-' (adv.). ever (always), semper ; (at. any time), uii(iuam(adv.). every (all; pi.), onmes; every- thing, omnia : every day; see daily; every one, onmes (pi.). everybody, onmes. evident, it is, mruilfestinn est; ajjparet, -Ore, -uit. i?>v.', mfd-um, -i, N. <---..7,o'cly, ipse (p. 5)0, i;?); exactly uOn days ago, abliino uecem ipsis diobus. examine (ground), T, exT)l«')r-o, -are, -avi, -alum. exasperate, I, in-cendo, -ce:.dere, -cei'di, -censum. exasperation, tise saevio ; say in pnqMrtion as (}>. 1 IS, .'>) (/(.;,■ piocecd (ago) now , \'l). exclaim, I, ex-clam-o, -are, -avi, -ra um. excogitate, I, comment-or, -arl.-atus sum. exempt from taxes, ' unuln-is, -<• (adj.); exempt from care, srcur-us. exempt, soho, -ore, sohi, sOlfilum (abl.). exhort, I, bort-or, -ari, -atus sum. exhortation, adbortati-o, -unis, r. ; or use vb. exile, an, exul, -is, M. exile, state of, exili-um, -I, N. ; I am driven into exile, in exilium pellor ; I am in exile, exfd-o (r. 1). exist, I, sum, fui, esse. existence of God, I believe in the, deum esse credo. expect, I, exspect-o (r. 1); credo. expedient, it is, exi»od-it, -ire, -ivit or sa}' uxt'ful. expedition, exjieditio ; bellum. expel, I, ex-lj,'o, -i;rere, -Ol;I, -'actum; after the expulsion of the kings. post I'cges exactos. experience, experieiitia rerum or usus rerum; a man of experience, homo per.tus rerum, (p. (M) ; exi)erience of life, rerum i)erltia. experienced, (rerum) peritus. experiment, experimentum. exploit, res. expulsion. See expel. exteJlt, often translated by dependent . 71, l>); I am favored, inilii favotur (p. 7'2, 10). favorable (suitable), idonc-us. fear, timor, oris ; for fear that, ne (p. 1-i, li). fear, I, tlm-eo, -ore, -rti ; mrttt-o, -ere, -m ; vCrCor, -Orl, vrrltiis sum; I fear that, vereorne; I fear that.o. not, vereor lit (p. 17, 1). fearful, tiin'duj. fee, iiHTc-es, -odis; I teach at a small fee, parvi doceo (p. (i;{, 4). feed on, I, vescior, ves'-I (witVi abl., p. 80, 1). feel, sent-To, -Tre, scnsT, seiisuin ; I feel sorrow, doleo, -ore; me poejiitet; I feel p;*-V ;"e miseret (p. 6G, 3); I feel t'pxue, v,iepjdet. feelings, aiii' ins. fever, fcbr-is, -is, F. few, pauc'-T, -ae, -a (pi.) ; very few, l)erpaucT, -ae, -a ; how few there are, p. 110, 6. fickleness, levis animus; or\iselevis. fiction, use flngo ; res ficta, F. fidelity, fid-es, -ei, F. field, a, ftg-er, -rT, M. field of battle, acT-cs, e-, ^- field of battle, in acie. fifteen, quindecim. fight, I, pugn-o, ar^v - V flgnt a battle, proelium (-niittere, -nilsi. -missum). figure (shape), fonn-a, -ae, F. ; he sells at a high figure, magni vendit (p. 0:3, 4). fill with, I, com-plOo, -plere, -plevi, -jiletmn. find, I (by search), reper-lo, -ire, -i, -turn ; (by chance), in-von?o, -venire, -veni.-ventuni ; find C't, -rnosco. fi"a, iiinlta, ae. finish. I, con-fTclo, -flriOre, -feci, -feptuui. lire, ignis; aet on fire, iiK^endo. firmness, use constans. on the -atum ; niitto VOCABULARY 219 -plevi, -ire, -i, -venire, SCO. -feci, ido. first, prim-US, -a, -um ; I xvas the first to do it, in-inuis ho(! fi'ci ; at first, priiiK) ; in the first place, i>ri- mum ; the first of January, Kalendae laiiiiariae (p. 147, 2). fit, a])t-us, -a, -unv : IdrmC us, -a, -uni (witli dat. or with ad and ace, p. GO, 9). fitted, apt-US, -a, -um ; Iduiu'us, -a, -um ; fitted for, aptus ad ; idoneus ad. five, (luiiufue. five hundred, quingent-i, -ae, -a. flag', sign-um, -T, N. fianls, lat-us, -Cris, M. flat, plan -us, -a, -um. flatter, assentor (r. 1). flee, I, fu;,'-Io, -urc, ffigi, fugltum ; I flee from him, eum fut,do. fleet, a, class-is, -is, I'\ flesh, caro, carnis. flight, fti>,'-a, -ae, F. fling, iacio, -ore, iecl, iactum ; impingo (dat.). flock together, convCl-o, -are, -avi, -atum. flourish, I, flor-co, -Cre, -fii. flow, I, flfi-o, -Cre, fluxi, fluxum. flower, flos, floris, M. fly. I, vOl-o, -are, -ilvi, -atum. foe (public), hostis, -is, M.; (pri- vate), Inlmlcus, -T, M. follow, I, sCquor, sequl, stcutus sum ; following, p. 80, 8. folly, stultltl-a, ae, F. ; or use adj. fond, be, amo. food, vict-us, -us, M. fool, stult-us, -a, -um ; it is the characteristic of a fool, stulti est (p. r.9, 2). foolish, stult-us, -a, um. foot, pes, iK'dis, -M. ; foot of a mountain, mons imus (p. 61, c). foot, set, pedem ponere (in). foot-soldier, pod-es, -itis, M. footstep, \ t'stlj^'ium, -I, N. for (of time), ace; (enough) for, (satis) ad. for (on behalf of), pro (prep, with abi.); I fight for my country, pro patriii pu^'no. for my own part, ef,'o, equidem. for some time, iamdudum (p. 34, 2) ; iampridem. forbid, I, vCt-o, -are, -fli, -Itum ; I forbid him to go, veto eum ire (\t. IG, note). force, vis (ace, vim ; abl., vi ; pi., vires), F. forces (troops), cOpI-ae, -arum, F. forefathers, maiOres, -um, M. foreign, ad exteras nationes. foremost, pnmus, -a, -um. foresee, I, i)ro-spIcIo, -spIcCre, -spexi, •spectum ; pro-vIdCo, -vidOre, -vidi, -visum (1>- 72, 7). forest, silv-a, ae, F. foretell, I, prae-dico, -dicere, -dixi, -dictum. foi'get, I, obllviscor, -I, oblltus sum (p. G4, 2, note). forgive, I, ig-nosco, -Cre, -novi, -notum (with dat., p. 71, 6); I am forgiven, mihi ignoscitur ; I forgive you this deed, t.ibi huius facti veniam do or hoc factum tibi condone (-5re, -avI, -atum). form (shape), forma, -ne, F. form a line of battle, 1, aciem instru-o, -Ore, -xi, -ctum. form a plan, I, consilium ciplo, -ere, cepi, cai>tuin ; consilium in-eo, -Ire, -ivi, (li), -Itum. form a partnership with him, I, societatem cum oo ineo. former (of time), prisHnus, -a, -um ; the former— the latter ; ille— hie (p. 88, 6). >-t 14 M Is m ;^1 VOOABULAUY. fort, castellum. fortify, I, mun-Io, -Ire, -ivi, -itum. fortress, ar-x, ar, -cis, F. ; castell-uin. fortunate, felix, folicis (adj.); it was very fortunate that, perop- portune accidit ut (p. 15, 5). fortune, fortim-a, ae, F. fortune (good), felicit-as, -atis, F. found, condo, -ere, -Idi, -Itum. foundation, use vb. four, qyattilor, v^ I -oe, use Gallia or Galli. tr-i' Iter, -Cra, -urum ; (from), vaciuis, a, -uin (with abl., p. 74, 4); free from care, socur-us, -a, -um. fi-ee (give freedom to), I, liher-o, •are, -avi, -fituin (p. 74, 3). fi-eed from, I am, liboror, -an, -atua Bum (p. 74, 3). freedom, llbert-as, atis, F.; oruseaartuin) ; gain victory, vmco or victoriam consccpii. gallant Crassus, the, Crassus, vir ortissinms. games, lud-I, -onun, M. (pi.). garden, hort-us, -i, M. gate, port-a, -ae, F, gather together, I, convac-o, -are, -fivl, -atum ; cojjo, -Cre, cOegi, coactum ; (intr.), con-V(';nio, -vCnlre, -vCnl, -ventuni. Gaul, Galll-a, -ae, F. Gatlls, Galli, -Onun, M. (pi.). general, impurat-or, -oris, M. ; dux. general, as a g. thing, vulyo. generation, aet-as, -atis, F. generous, bCnign-us, -a, -um ; nm- nlflc-us, -a, -um. genius, ingenium ; or use ingeniosus. gentle, mit-is, -e(adj.). gentlemen of the jury, iudlc-es, -um, M. (pi ). gift, dun-um, -I, M. give, I, dOn-o, -are, -avI, -atum ; do, dare, dOdi, datum. give (back or up), I, red-do, -dcre, -didf , -ditum ; dcdo, -Ore, dodldi, dedltum. glad, I am, gaud-eo, -ere, gavlsus sum. gladly, libenter (adv.); often rendered l»y the adj. : he came gladly, laetus vcnit (p. 165, 2, a). glorious, clar-us, -a, -um; insignis, -e ; ogrcgius, -a, -um, ; he WOn a glorious victory, egregie vicit. glory, glorl-a, ae, F. ; lau-s, -dis, F. glow, exardesco. go, I, (:o, ire, IvI (-li), Itum. go away, I, ab-Co, -ire, -l vl (li), -itum; I go forward or forth, pro-gredior, -gredi, -gressus sum ; I go down tO meet, obviam (with dat.) descend-o, -Ore, -I, descensum ; I go on, pergo, -ere, porrexl, perrectum ; I go out, ex-cOdo, -codOre, -cessi, -cessum ; ex-oo, -Ire, -ivi, -Itum. goad, stimulo (r. 1). goal, have a g. in view, use aiiquid VOCABULARY. 2-21 iiyere Oi* spectare (he drivintj at or looking (It aotncthini/). God, tlC-us, del, M. g-oddess, dea. g'Old, aur-um, -I, N. gold, of, = golden. golden, aurC'U8 ; or use tantus. good, b(5ii-us, -a, -um. good-bye, say to, saint-o (r. i). goodness, prot>it-a9, atis. goodness of character, say good- ticsti and character. good-will, feeling of, benevolentia. govern, I, rCpo, -Ore, rC'xi, rectum ; I govern the state, rempublicain guberno ; govern one's feelings, animo niMer-or,-arI,-ritU9 sum (with dat., p. 72, 7) or tempCro, -are, -avi, -atum. government, the, qui reipublicae praesuiit ; rusimblica. gradually, (step by step), gradatim ; (little hij little), paulfitim (adv.). grant, I, do, dare, dudi, datum ; coiicedo. grateful, grat-us, -a, -um. gratitude, gratia, -oe; I show gratitude, gratiam rcfero ; I feel gratitude, gratiam ha])(;o ; express gratitude, gratias agere. great, magn-us, -a, -um; comp.,maior; 8up., maximus, -a, -um. greatly, magntipure (adv.); comp., magis; sup., niaxlmo. Greece, Graecl-a, ae. Greek, know, Oraece scire. Greeks, Graec-I, -Grum, M. (pi.). green, virldis, -e. grieve, am grieved, dolCo, -ere, -fli ; mo piget. groan, I, in-g6mo, -gemCre, -gCmQT, -gomltum. ground, (soil), 85lum, -I, N. ; (plea- sure grounds), hort-i, -Gruiu, M. (pi.). guard, I,cu8tod-io, -irc,-ivl, -itum; I am on my guard against you, te caveo (p. 72, 7) ; Stand guard, in vigilia nianeo. guard, cust-os, -odis, M. ; vb., ous- todio (r. 4). guest, a, hosp-es, -Itis, M. guide, dux, dilcis, M. guile, dolus, -I, M. H. hair, c.1pill-ug, -i, M. half, diniidium, -i, N. hand, a, mrin-us, -us, F. hand, I am at, ad-sum, -esse, -fQI. (with dat.) hand, hand over, I, tra-do, -dCre, -didi.-dltuin; man-do, -dare, -davl, -datum, handful, i>auci. handiwork, say by hand and work (p. ion, b). Hannibal, Ilannib-al, -alls. happen, use forte. happens that, it, accidit (-fire, acfldit) ut ; evCnit (-Ire, -venit) ut ; con- tiiigit (-Ore, contlgit) ut ; (p. 15, 5); it happened so fin this tcay), ita accidit. happily, btate. happiness, brata vita. happy, boat-US, -a, -um ; (lucky), felix. harbor, port-us, -us, M. hard, diffioil-is, -e ; hard to say, ditfi(;ile dictu (p. 42, 4) ; durns, a, um. hardly, vix. hardship, labor, oris, M . ; res tu\ versae. harm, do harm, noceo, -ere, nOcQl, nocikun. harmless, innOcuus. harry, I, vex-o, -are, -avi, -atum. harvest, messis, -is, F. haste, there is need of, opus esc properato (p. 81, 4). '§ iJ ' -^i r ( Jfl w M 1 ' 1 If ''! it VOCABULARY. i - hasten, I, uropt-r-o, -are, -avi, -atum ; contendo, -Ore, coiitendi, conteritutii. hate, I, odi, odiHse ; I am hated, epo odio (dat.) sum (j). C9, 8). hated, invlsus, -a, -um ; see above. hatred, odium, -i, N. have (possess), I, h&b6o, -ere, -fli, -Ituin ; o/tcji rendered by esse with dat. : as, I have a book, est mihi liber (see p. 40, 6). he, is, ille, hie (p. 88, 3, 5, 6). heal, mCdeor, -Crl (dat.) health, be in good, valeo. heap, vis, F. ; vb., infero, inferre, int'^", illatuni, hear, I, aud-Io, -ire, -ivi, -Itum. hearing, by, audiendo (p. 43) ; without hearing, use iuauditus. heart (literal), cor, cordis, N. ; (spirit), animus, I, M. ; I take it to heart, id graviter (or aegre) fero. hearth, foc-us, -i, M. heaven (sky), coelum, -i, N. ; often rendered by, di iminortales. height, altitud-o, -Inis, F. ; or use altus. height of folly, to such a, eo stultitiae (p. 60, 3). heir, her-es, -edis, M. help, I, iilvo, -are, iiivl, iutum (ace); Bub-venio, -venire, -voni, -ventuni (with dat.) ; I help you, tibi auxilio sum (p. 69, 8); tibi opem fero ; I can not help sending, fieri non possum quia niittam (p. 23). hence, inde (adv.). herb, herba, -ae, F. here, hie (adv.). hero (mythical), hCrO-s, -is, M. ; usually expressed by ille or vir fortissimus. hesitate, I| dablt-o, -are, -avi, -atum. hide, I, cel-o, -are, -avi, -atum ; ab-do', -dOrc, -didi, -dltum. high, alt-US, a, um; the highest offices, houores aMipIissiuii. high-spirited, anlmOsus, ferox. hill, coll-is, -is, M. himself, (reflexive), sui ; (em- phatic), ipse. hinder, I, prOhlb-do, -Cre, -Oi, -Itum ; iniped-io, -ire, -ivI (-ii), -ittun. hindrance, impOdiment-um, N, ; it is a great hindrance to me, mihi imi)ediniento (dat.) magno est (p. 69, 8). hire, I, con-duco, -dueOre, -duxi, -duc- tum. his, su-us, -a, -um ; cius, ililus (p. 7, 1, note) ; his own book, suus ipaius liber (p. 90, 13). historian, rerum scriptor. history, matter of, say it is handed dotni to mcuiory. hitherto, adhuc (adv.). hold (possess) I, hilb-Go, -ere, -fti, -Hum ; ob-tinC'o, -tlnere, -tlnfa, -tentum. hold (think), I, duco, -ere, duxi, due turn ; habeo, -ere, -fii, -Itum ; I hold him an enemy, eum pro hoste habeo. homage, etc., say I i)romised that I would help him with my authority (p. 1 73,3). home, at, d6un ; from home donio ; home, after words expressing motion, domum (p. 83, 5). Homer, Homerus. homicide, guilty of, use hominem interticio. honest, prOb-us, -a, -um. honesty, pr6blt-as, -atis, F. ; with honesty, probe or sununfi probitate. honor (good faith), fides, -ei ; (dig- tinction), hon-or, -oris, M. honorable, honest-us, -a, -um. inem ith |e. (diB- VOCABULAKY. 2'13 hope, I, spiir-o, -are, -fivl, -atuin (p. 7, 3); (noun), sjjes. horse, C'lpi-us, -i, M. horseman, t', -nrc, -avi. -fituin ; in- turro;,'o, -are, -fivi, -utuiii. Inquiry, quaestl-o, -Onis ; or use \h. Instead of, pro ; instead of doing" this he did that, quum hoc facere (ieheret, illiul fecit (p. 108, note). instigation, at my, me auctore. instrumentality, through the instrumentality of. per (ace). insult, corilfmiella, -ae, F. insuperable, insuperahilis, -e. intelligently, use pnulentia. intend, I, in anlmo mihi est ; often expressed by fut. part. (p. 53, ]). intensity, of such, tantus. intercept, I, inter-clpio, -cIpCre, -cCpI, -ceptum. interest. How expressed, p. 153. interest of the state, it is, rei- publlcae interest (j). 47) ; I consult your interests, tibi consulo (p. 72, 7). interfere, ob-sto, -stare, -stltl, •statum. interference, nse vb. intervene, I, inter-venlo, -venire, -voni, -ventuni. interview with one, I have, aliqnem con-venio (-vCiiire, -vCnl, -ven- tum). into, in (with a.-^c.) introduction, use introduce, invading host, use hostes. invent, invenio; (fabricate) I, fingo, -6rc, finxi, fictuni. inventor, invent-or, oris, M. invest (money), I, coll6co, -are, •avi, -atum. investigation, use quaero cur. iota, add, say malce you more, etc, island, insQl-a, -ae, F. issue, event-us, -us, F. ; or use happen it. Sei- he. Italy, Italia, -ae, F. itself, ipse, -a, -uni. J. January, lanQarl-us, -a, -um (juij.). javelin, pil-um, -i, N. ; i.lcfil-uni, -i, N. join, I, iuiiifo, -ore, iuiixi, iunctum ; I join you, me tibi adiungo. join batttle, proelium committere. journey, iter, Itinuris, N. joy, laetltl-a, -ao, F.; shoutsof joy, c'lamores laetantiuni (p. 48, G), joyful, laet-us, -a, -um. joyfully, laote (adv.); often rendered by the adj. (p. 105, 2, a). judge, iud-cx, -Tcis. iudgment, iudlcliun ; consilium ; use iiulico; in my judgment, me iudice (p. 51, 1) ; pronounce j., iudico (r. 1). Julian, inilan-us, -a, um ; the Julian law, lex luliaiia. jump, I, salio, -ire, -ui, saltum. June, lriii:-us, -a, -um. Jupiter, luplter, lovis. M. jury, iudtc-es, -um, M. (pi.). just, acqu-us, -a, -um ; iust-us, -a, -um. just as if, velutsi, with subj.(p.ll7, 3). justice, iustitla, -ae, F. justify, I, prOb-o, -are, -avi, -atum. justly, ii'ire (abl. of ills, right). K. Kalends, Kalend-ae, -arum, F. (pi.), (see p. 147). Karthage. See Carthage. keep, servo (r. 1). keep my promises, I, fidem prae- sto, promissis (abl.) sto ; I keep the soldiers in the camp, milites in cas- tris contineo; I keep my word, fidem praesto ; I keep oft, depcllo (-ere . (pi-). !M prae- the I in cas- rord, llo (-ere VorARlILAItY. 225 ■jn'ili, inilsmii); keep out, cxcUuln ; in keeping" with, p. '>!>, u. key, c'lfiv-is, -is, F. kill, I, ititer-ficio, -ficCre, -fCcT, -feet inn; oc-('i. .'iO, 2; fall to lot, continK'o. loud, maf,'nus ; loudly-expressed, use shtiul. (p. lOf), h). love, am-or, oris, M. love, I, am-o, -are, -avI, -atum, lovely (applied to a place), amoen-us, -a, -um : the lox'el}' city of Athens; Athenae, urbs amoenissima ; (applied to a person), i>uleh-er, -ra, -rum ; formos-us, -a, -um, lover, use amo. lowest (office), inms (honor). low price, at a, parvi (p. G3, 4). loyal, fid-u.s, -a, -um ; fldcl-is, -o; ))omis. lucky, felix ; or use ojiportunc. M. mad, I am, fftr-o, -ere. madman, use furo. made, I am, fio, fieri, factiis sum. madness, furor ; domentl-a -ao, F. magistrate, ma(,'istrat-us, -us, M. magnitude, niaj,'nltrid-o, -Inis ; often expressed by an indireet question : I know the magnitude of the danger, scio quantum ]>eri(!ulum sit (p. 32, 1). maiden, virg-o, -inis, F. maintain, I, sus-tlnCo, -tlnore, -tInOi, -tentum ; dico. majority, use plerique. make, I, facto, facCrc, foci, factum ; I make war, bellum gero, jjrCrC're, gessi H'esttnn or l)ellum infero, -ferre, -tfdi, illa- tum ; I make a march, iter facio ; he makes it shine, efficit ut splendeat (p. 12). man, hCm-o, -inis, M. ; vir, viri, M. ; a young man, ridr)leseen-s, -tis; an old man, sGnex, sCnis, M. manage, rem gerere. manner of life, use quemadmo- chun and vivo. manumit, manumitto. many, multi, -ae, -a(i>l.); very many, l)ennulti, -ae, -a ; how many? quot ? as many as, tot quot. Marcellus, Marcellus, -T, M. march. Iter; I march, make a march, iter facio ; (trans.), duco. Marcus, Marcus, -T, M. mariner, naut-a, -ae, M. mark of a wise man, it is the Bapientis est (p. 59, 2). market-place, forum, i, N. marsh, pil-us, -udls, F. I'M VOCAnUt.ARY. 227 many, quot ? tke a lis thd marvellous, it is, minnn »st. mass (of the people), miI},'iis, -i, N.; (huKo size), iMolcs, -is, 1'', master (of slaves), dumiims, honiH; (a tcarliir), iiirii,'ist-t'r, -ri, M, matter, res, rCl, V.; it matters little, jtarvi iiitort'st; it matters not to me, nihil mefi Inter'jst. may, I, p. 2r> ; 33 ; (=^can), possum. May, Mains (adj.). mean, sonlul-us, -a, -um ; ahieot-us. mean-minded, say i he eomrnitted 0>. 32); from a motive, use oh (with ace.), or t^awsa (with j,'L'n.). mount (a hoi'se), T, c(nuim con- scetxlo (i'ri!, -seendi, -srensum). mountain, mons, -tis, M. move, I, mov-oo, -Cre, mo\i, motum. much, mult-us, -a, -nm. multitude, multitfid-o, -hiis, F. murder, eacfl-es, -is, l'. (^ften ex- pressed l)y perf. jiart. pa.ss. : after Cae- sar's murder, imst Ciiesarcm inter- f('(!tum. murmur, (vl).), queror, (luori, ([uestus sum. music, nn"isTc-a, -ae, F. musical, say niusioonmi, from neut. pi. nnisica. must, p. 33 my, mt-us, -a, -um (voo. sinp. masc, mens or mi). myself, use ego or ego ipse (p. 90, 13). Vi ! II 1% r f' 1 i 22ft vocAnni.Anv. N. name, iiDin-eii, -inia, N.; of the name of, umit. namely, omit. narrate, I, narr-o, -ftrc, -avl, -fitum. nation, poijuIuh ; (foreij^ii), niltl-o, •OniiJ F.; K'-'"^! -^'^t '*'• native city, one's native land, patria, fto, F. natural shame, say nature ami ahainc. (p. Kir), b), naturally, use iiatura. nature, nfitnr-a, -ae, F. Often ox- pressi'd hy a (lopoiidi'iit. iiuestion intro- duced by (iuali» (p. ;{'2): I don't know the nature of the man, mscio qualis sit homo; of this nature, tails. near, prftpe,(adv. and prep, withiicc); propior, proxlnnis (p. 09,9); propiiupms (with dat.; p. «9, 9). nearly, propf, paene, ferc", see about. necessaries, say what is necessary. necessary, neoessarlua. necessity, necessitas ; p. 84, 1. need, there is need, p. si, 4 ; p. 81, 3, note. neglect, I, neglujjo, neglegi-re, neglexi, neglectum. neither- nor, neque-neque ; nec-neo ; neve-neve (p. 15). neither of the two, neut-er, -ra, -mm (gen., neutrlus). nest, nid-us, I. never, nunquam ; and never, neo unipiam. new, n6v-us, -a, -um. news is brought, nuntiatur. next, proximus, -a, -uni ; on the next day, die proximo, or die postero. night, no-x, no-ctis, F. nine, n6vem. no, I answer no, p. 28, 2, note. no, imIJ., null UH, -n, -iini(ucn., niilliim). no one, ni'Mii)(gcii., jnillins). noble, i»nifcliiruH, a, -iiin ; Inslgn-ls, -e; e>,'rc^'iiis, -a, -uni ; his noble father, pater huus, vir itratt^larlHsinms. none, nemo (not used in jjfen. and alil.); null'Us, p (gen. nulllus). Nones, N<... ..o, -arum, F. (pi.), noon, nif'r!df-es, -01, M. nor, iieo or Mcque; in final clauses, neve (neii, p. 10, 4). not, non. not yet, nondnui. nothing, miill. notice, give notice, (uniorem fiu'cre. novelty, use novus. now, lam (by this time); nunc (at present) ; hmlie (to-day). * number, ■ itr-us, -T, .M. often ex- pressed liy 'udoiit (juestloM intro- duced by quo ^ don't know the number of the enemy, nescio quot iKWtus siiit (p. 32, 1). numerous, multl, -ae, -a ; permult-l. nurse, nutr-ix, -lois, F. O that, titlnam (p. 25). obedience, yield. Use obey. obey, I, par-eo, -Ore, -Qi, -Itiun (with dat., p. 71, 0) ; I am obeyed, mihi paretnr. object, I, rCcus-o, -are, -avi, -atum (p. 22). object, this is my, id ago ; ac- complish an object, say finish the work. obscure, obscur-us, -a, -um. observe, I, cognosco ; servo, -Sre, -iivi, -fituin. obstinacy, pertlnilcl-a,-ae, F.; or use adj. pertinax. VO,'it (-• ro, -tljfit); j). ir>, f) ; (to tho iiiiii(l), owurro. odd or even, i>ar \cl impar. off (at a distance), I am, uh-smu, •CHHc, -dii; (lisio, .Ht.irc ; the town la ten miles oft", oppiiluiu (leoem luilliii ptiHHiiinn (listat or iiltoHt. offend (annoy) I, of-fendo, -fenduro, •feiidi, -fciisuin (ace); I ofTt-rid avraiiistthe law, k'ljem \iol-(( (-aru, -avi, -aiiini). oflBce, iiiat,'istiU-us, -us, M. ; I hold office, iiiajjisl rai luu ohtliieo, -tliiLTt', •tliu'ii, -toiitiuu ; (liusk), uiuiiuh. officer, triliumis; leijatiis; officers (military), trihuni C(.'ntuii(jiiL'S(|Ui'. often, sacitt;; so often, totius. old, (in olden times), autTipms, -a, -uiii ; (of persons), sOiiex, sOiiis ; coiiii)., senior ; sup., luaxlnius natu ; when old, senex. omit, I, o-niitto, -niittore, -inTsi, -nils- sum. once (for), semel ; (formerly), once upon a time, (luoudam ; at once, statim. one (numeral), iin-us, -a, -um(fjen., unius); one of the soldiers, unus ex inilitihus. one, no, nemo ; (emphatic), ne umis. . . .((uidem. one, the, the other, hie ille (p. 89, G). one and all, cunct-I, -ae, -a ; omnes, omnia. one by one, sinj^ul-i, -ae, -a. one day (in the future), alicpiando. only, solus, solum, mOdo, tantum (plaei'd aritr the word niodiUfd); not only — but also, nun mo«lo (or non Holiini) . -Hed utiain (or vertun uliam); only ones, wo p. ii, •». open (thruw open), I, (tninn.), patC-faclo, -filcere, -fOcI, -factum ; tO be open, p.lteo, •ere -Oi. opinion, use Henlio(have lui opinion): his political opinion. ntrarlus(<|uani). opposition, in spite of your, te r('pii;;iianle (p. .')-, C>), or, aut, -ve, vel, sivo (p. 202, />); neve (after ne). Ol'ator, orat-or, -oris, .M. oratory, say orator. orchard, iiomarium. ordain, I, decern-o, -Cre, decrevi, ) ; iiiheo, -ere, iussi, iussum (with ace); in order that (or to), p. 12, 1. origin, often exjtressed by unde, intro- diiciii!; a (lei)endent question: as, I don't know the origin of evil, nescio Miide malum oriatur (p. H2, 1). otherwise than, aliter ao or (before vowels) at(pie (p. llC, 1). ought, 11. 33. our, nos-ter, -tra, -trmn. out-do, supero (r. 1). outside of, e or ex (abl.). over, it is, actum est de. overpowering, say could not be borne, or, even, very great. overthrow, I, e-verto, -vertCre, -verti, -versum. overwhelm, I, ob-rtio, -rtiCre, -rfli, -rCitum, i ;4i '1 m •f. .;&;, 'f 1 .M ¥W 230 VOCABULARY. l! ii^i owe, I, dobuo, -ore, -fii, -itum; itwas owing to, p. '22, 2. own, my own fault, mea ipsius culpa (p. !)(), 13). ox, bos, l)0\is. P. pain, I am in, doico, -c-re, dftlni. pain, dol-or, -oris, M. painter, use piniiro. panic, i)c1v-or, -oris, M. pardon, 1, is^'-nosco, -noscCre, -iinvi, -notuin (with dat., p. 71, (>) ; vonia, a.v. parent, paren-s, -lis, >I. or F. parliament, s>''iiat-us, -us, M. part, i)ar-s, -tis, F. ; it is the part of a wise man to do this, sai)itntis est hoi! fauero (p. 59, 2) ; I for my part, ejij'o or equidciu ; take part, iiitersuin. party, partes. party policy, say party andjmlicy. pass, let, oniitto, -Ore, oniisi, omissuin ; pass a decree, say decrer. pass (a law^), fero. passion (ang-er), ira, -ao, F. passionate (angry), irfit-us, -a, -um (of one ail); (of a lialiit), iracuiid-us. past, is, use ])raetereo. patriot, vir bonus ; homo pat.-iai' aniaiitissinnis (j). 04, note 1). patriotism, amor i)atriae. pay, I, i)eu(lo, -Crc, ])ependi, jiensum ; soho, -f're, solxi, solfitiuu. payment, soU'itlo (Onis), F. ; or use vl). peace, pa-x, -cis, F. peace, I hold my, taceo, -ore, tiicfli. peculiar, prOprhis, -a, -mn (with yen., p. (i4, note 'J). pell-mell, temr-ro. pen, cJllain-us, -1, M. penalty, pocu a, -ae, F.; (pvuiinh- ment), suppllel-um, -I, N. penny, use as, assis, M. people ( = men), h(5mln-es, -un-, M. (pi); (a nation), p6pfil-us, -i, M. perceive, I, (by senses), sent-io, -Tre, sensi, sensum ; (by the mind), in- telltj^o, -ere, intellexi, intellectum. perfect, sumnuig. perfectly, use supcrl. perform, I, con-flcio ; funf,'or. perhaps, fortasse; p. 31, 4, note 1 ; p. 33, 2. perish, I, pCr-co, -!re, -ivl (-li), -Itum. permission, with your, tua venia ; t (la hoMfi i)ace. person, hom-o, -Inis, M. ; is (qui). persuade, I, per-suadCo, -suadCre, -suasi, -suasum (with dat., p. 71, ; I am persuaded, mihi persuasum est (p. 7-2, 10). persist, I, perse vCr-o, -are, -avT, -atuin. pestilence, pestis ; pestllentl-a. phenomenon, use neut. pron. philosopher, philosOph-us, -t, M. philosophical, use gen. of philos- ophy. philosophizing, philosopha ri (inf.) philosophy, philOsoi)h:a, -ae, F. Phocion, Phool-on, -onis, M. pick out, eli<,'o. pig, sus, sfiis, M. pirate, praed-o, -onis, M. pitch a camp, I, castra loco (are, -fivi, -fitum); castra pono (-Cre, pOsCii, posltum). pitch of insolence, to such, eo insolcntiae (p. (50, 3). pity, I, misereor, -CrI, niiserltus sum ; iniseresco, -6re (p. 66, note 2) ; nie n)iseret (p. 6C, 3). pity, nilsCrlcordia, -ae, F. place, loc-Tis, -I, ; pi. loc-i, -orum or, more conunoiily, iCic-a, -orum. place, I, pGn-o, -Cre, pOsfll, pOsItum. plain, planities; campus. VOCABULARY. 231 fire, Jrtui, CO 5un» ; ^ me plain, it is, manifestnm p?t ; apparet (-ere, -flit ; p. 4). plan, consilium. pleasanu, iucundus; or use iuciin- ditas. please, I, plac-eo, -ere, -fli, -Ituni (with a dat., p. 71, 6). pleasing, grat-us, -a, -um. pleasure, vdlupt-as, -atis, F. plebeian, plcboi-us, -a, -um. plough, arfitr-um; (vl).), ilro(r. 1). pluck, carpo ; vello, ere, velli or vul«i, vuisum. poet, pbot-a, -ae, M. point, use neut. pron. pointed (sharp), ftcut-us, -a, -um. point out, ostendo. policy, consilium, -I, N. politics, res publica, F. (never pi. in this sense). Pompey, Pompcius, i, M. poor, pauper, -is, adj.; sup. pauperri- mua, -a, -um. populace, vulg-us, -I, N. ; pleb-s. popular, gratiosus. populous, freciuen-s, -tis (adj.); often in superlative : as, a populous city, urhs frequentissima. position, ICcus, -T, M.; pi. WcI, -onun (M.), l(5ca, -uruni, N.; (of a city), situs, -us. often expressed by a dependent, question introduced by ubi: I don't know the position of the enemy, nescio ubi hostessint or oastra jiosnerint (p. 32, 1) ; maintain position, se sustento (r. 1). positively, p. 177, note. possession, res, rci, F.; get pos- session of, potior (abl. or gen.). possessor, use habeo. possibility, range of possi- bUity, use fieri potest. possible, it is, potest (only with an inf. ptiss.) ; it is possible to do this, hoc fieri jx)test. possible, as many as, quamplur- inii. possible speed, with all, ciuam ceh'rrlnie. po.st, desert, praesidium desero. pour round, circumfuiKlere (se), poverty, paupert-as, -atis, F. power, (civil), pwtest-as, -atis, I". ; (military), iniporl-um, -i ; such is the power, tantum potest. powerful, pCten-s, -tis (adj.). practicable, use facio. practise, I, exercOo, -ore, -ili, -itum. praise, lau-s, -dis, F. praise, I, laud-o, -fire, -avl, -atum. pray, oro (r. l); tandem (with inter- rog. words). precaution, take, i»-ovideo, p. 38, ."i. predecessor, say who reigned before him. prefer, I, malo, malle, mah"ii (modal verb, p. 18, 3). prefer him to you, I, cum tibi ante-pGno (-Ore, -posui, -pOsItum), or ei te posth.lbeo (-hilbere, -habfii, -habTtuni). prepare (make preparation), I, pflr-o, -are, -avl, -atum presence, use adsum ; in my pre- sence, me iirat'si'iite (]). Cfl, 5), or coram me (abl.); presence of mind, animus. present, I am, ad-sum, -esse, -ffii (with a dat., p. 71, 5) ; I am present at the battle, pugnae intersum (p. 71, C) ; at present, nunc. present, donum, -I, N. presently, mox, brCvl. preservation, use vb. preserve, I, conserv-o (r. 1.) pretend, I, slmnl-o, -are, -avi, -atum; (claim), dictito (r. 1). }-f fc It I! f :A ri 1 |r^ r'(' mi •■li |J *^''" 11 i; 1 » ^' ^ 'A H ■'■' .« ■^ ' g \' xli S'"- ' 11 232 Vocabulary. m^' IJH'i 111 '■ .ills :ii|! )f '! prevent, I, prohib-<5o, -ere, -01, -Ttuni; I prevent, him from doing: this, emu prohiheo quoniiuu.s hoc facial (p. 22, 2). prevent, to (in order that. . . . not), III; (p. ]-2, 'J, lloLu). price, iirctiiiiii, -i, N. ; at a high price, iiiiimii; at a low price, imivi (p. {J3, 4J; at what pric^, use (luantus. prince, rex, rt'^^is, yi. principal, say In'st ; priiioep-s, priii- c'lpis, ^I.; ]irmiU'<, -a, -uiii. prison, career, -is, M. ; vincfila, -oruni, N. (pi.) ; I throw into prison, in viiic»ila coii-icio (-Ore, -ioci, -iectiun). prisoner, cai)tiv-n8, -t, M. private person, pnvat-us. prize, ))racml-ii!y, -1, X. proceeding, n,s, rti, V. procrastination, usl- roHcio. profit, qiuu'st-us, -us, M.; emOliliueiit- Ulll, -1, il. profound, use suporl. of adj. prolong, perfori) (ud.), promise, I, promitt-o, -Cre, -misl, -niis.suin ; pol-llcuor, -liuOri, -liciLus sum (p. 7, li). promise, promissum, -I, N. proof, indicium, -i, \.; it is a proof of wisdom to do this, .vipicutis i.st hoo faccre (p. 5'.), \i). proper, idoncus, p. ill, b. property, res. proportion to (as), in, p. lis, 5. proposal, use propono. prosecution, iise accuso. prosperity, res prospurae, res seoun- dae. protection, pracsidium (p. 69, 8); or use tueor. protx'acted, diutinu.s. proud, sQperb-us, -a, -um (adj.). provide, I, prO-video, -vldore, -vIdT, visum ; I provide for your inter- est, tibi prosijicio ; I provide ag'ainst you, te caveo (p. 72, 7). provided, p. io4. c. providentially, divinitus. province, pruvincia, -ae, F. prevision, I make, provideo. See provide. provisions, commOat-us, -us, M. ; frument-um, -I, N. public, publicus. public meeting, conci-o, -onis. punish, I, pun-io, -Ire, -ivi(-li), -itum; I am punished, poeuas do (dare, dcdl, datum). punishment, poen-a, -ae, F. ; auppll- ci-uni, -I, N. purpose, use cur ; or p. 44. purpose, I, stat-tlo, flCre, -fti, -uoum; de-cerno, -cernere, -crovi, -crotum. pursue, I, sequor, seipii, sPcutus sum; some pursue one thing, others another, alius aliud sequitur. pursuit, studium. pursuit, in, etc,, say that they may accoinpll>ili what they desire very much. pub (=place), I, pono, -Grc, pOsfll, pus; turn; put at head of, praeflcio (lat.); put up with, patior; put to death, say kill. quantity, vis (ace. \im ; abl. vi); often expressed by a dependent ((uestion in- troduced by qunntun ; I do not know the quantity of corn there, aescio (quantum frumenti ibi sit (p. 32, 1). VOCABULARY. 233 c) quarter, from one, etc., perioulum ad aliuiii uIhuuIl' venit. quarter was given, no, nulli parcituiii est (p. 72, lO). qvieen, roj,'in-a, -ac, F. question, I, interr(5<,'o, -are, -fivi, -atuin ; it is a question (or ques- tioned), dubitatur ; to my question he gave no reply, niihi (luacicnti nihil respondit (p. 48, 5) ; ask a ques- tion, rogo. quick, celer, -is, -e. quickly, culC-riter, prdpiSre (a1 ' i 'h remain, I, mineo, -6re, mansi, man- suin ; I remain behind, remaneo ; I remain firm, permaneo; it re- mains, restat (ut). remarks, use neut. pron. and dico. remember, I, mCmlnT, meminisse (p. 65, 2). remind, I, com-mfinCo, -mCnere, inOnfil, -inOnltuni ; commone-fiicio, -fftf Ore, -fOcI, -factum (with ace. of pers. and gen. of thing ; p. ef), 2). remorse, use poenitet (p. 66, 3). remote, remotus. removal, use vb. remove, I, depello, -ere, depftli, de- pulsuni ; tollo. repel, I, propuls-o, -are, -avi, -atuni. repent, I, me poenitet (-ere, -uit); I repent of my folly, stultitiae meae me poenitet. repetition, use say often. reply, I, respondeo, -ere, respond!, responsum. report, nuntio (r. 1). reputation, aestimatio ; (good), fam-a, -ae ; (bad), infamla, -ae. request, obtain, impetro (r. i). requested, without being, say not asked. require, I, opus est mihi ; egeo, -Crci -ui. requite, repen-do, -dCre, -di, -sum. resignation, with, aequo animo. resist, resisto, -ere, -sLiti, -stitum (tZ). resistance, use resisto ; the resist- ance ceased, resisti desitum est. resistance, meet no, say no one opposing (obsto). resolve, I, statuo, -ere, -tti, -utum ; constltuo, -Cre, -I'li, -utum ; decerno, -ore, -crfivV, -cretum. respect, observo (r. 1). PQSt, quies, qulCtis, F. rest, I, quiesco, -Cre, quICvI, rest of, the, cctor-i, -ae, -a; the rest of the citizens, ceteri cives; the rest of his life, reliqua aetas. restore, I, reddo; (strength), re- paro (r. 1) ; redintegr-o, -are, -avi, -atum. result, res, rGT, F.; event-us, -us, M. ; the result was that he went away, evenit ut abiret ; he came back without any result, re in- fectfi rediit. retire, I, cCdo, -ere, cessi, cessum. retreat, I, me reripio (-cliiCre, -ci5pl, -coptuni) ; pOdem rOfCro (-ferre, -ttlli, -Ifitum.) return, I (intr.), redCo, -Ire, rddlvl (rC'dii), redituni ; (trans.), reddo, -6re, red- Idl, redditum. return, r6dit-us, -iis, M. revile, I, vitfipCr-o, -are, -avT, -atum ; niale-dico, -dicere, -dixi, -dictum (with dat., p. 71, 3). reviler, use rel. clause, revolt, defectl-o, -Onis, F. revolution, res novae, revolve, moveor circa (ace), reward, praemlum, -!, N, Rhodes, Rhod-us, -i, F. rich, dives, divitis; 6pfilent-us, -a, -um. riches, divltlae, -arum, F. (pi.). ride, I, Cqulto, -are, -fu 1, -atum ; I ride past, praetervChor, -i, -vectus sum. ridge, ingum, -i. ridicule, I, ir-rldeo, -ere, -rlsi, -risum. right, ills, iuris, N. right, rectus, -a, -um. right hand, dextra, F. (properly an adj. with manus omitted). ring, orbis, M. ; (vb.), persOno (r. 1). rise (of persons), con-surgo, -6re -surrexi, -surrectum ; (of things), orlor, -Irl, orrus sum. river, flluqi-en, -Inis, N.; flOvlus, -i, M, r>,^ -urn. VOCABULARY. 235 road, via, -ae, F. roam, va},'or (r, 1). rock, sax-iim, -I, N. ; rup-us, -is, F. role, partes (dare=asriij;ii ; sustinere = sustain). roll, I, volvo, -fire, volvi, vOlutura. Roman, Komanus. Rome, Roma, -ae, F.; or say people of Rome (Roinaiii). Romulus, RoniQl-us, -i, M. room, left no room for doubt, hand dubiuni fecit. l*oot, say cause. rose, r6s-a, -ae, F. rout, use vinoo or fugo(r. 1); strag-es. -is, F, ; clful-es, -is, F. royal, re;,'iiis. rude, rudis, -e (adj.). ruin, pernTcTes, -ei, F. ; exltluni, -I, N. ; (vl).), delf'o, jiordo, everto. rule, rC'Sfila, -ae, F. rule, I, rf'go, rCgCre, rCxI, rectum. rumor, nmior, oris. rush, rao, -6re, rfti, rQtum. S. sack, diripio, -ere,-rlpili, -reptum. sacrifice, postha])ere (p, 72, 9). sacrilege, sacrllegl-um, -I, N. sad, maestus, -a, -um. safe, tutus, -a, -um ; inc61iim-is, -e. safety, srd-us, -utis, F. sail, vcl-um, -I, N. oail, I, nfivlg-o, -are, -fivl, -atum. sailor, naut-a, -ae, M. sake of, for the, causa (with genitive), usually placed after the word or words governed (p. 43, 9); for its OWn sake, propter se. sally, oruptl-o, -on is, F. ; I make a sally, eruptionem facio ; I sally out erumpo, -fire, erupi, eruptuni. salute, I, saluto, -are, avl, -atum. salvation, sahis, -utis, F. same, idem, f-fidem, Ideni ; the Same . . . as, idem qui (p. 10, 1). satisfied with, contentus (with abL, p. 81,6). satisfy, I, satisfacio, -facore, -feci (with dative, p. 71, 3). save, I, servo (or conservo), -are, -avi, -.atum. say, I, dTco, -6re, dixi, dictum, saying-, p. 89, 8. scarcely, vix. scare, terreo. sceptre, regnum. scientific inquiry, say science and tn^y^iVi/ (cognitio; p, 165, b). scourge, virgis caedcre. scout, ex))ir)rat-or, -oris, M. scruple, scrui)ulus. Scylla, Hcylla, ae, F. sea, mare, marls, N. season, temp-us, -Oris, N. second, sCcund-us, -a, -um ; altCr, -a -lun. secret, the secret of, use idcirco (piod (on this arcimnt because). secure, tutus; safety is secured, use adj. safe. see, video, -ere, vidl, visum; specto(r. 1). seed, semen, inis, N. seek, I, l>eto, -ere, pCtlvi, pCtltum. seem, I, vukor, -eri, visus sum ; it seems tliat lie is good, ille bonus esse vide- tur(p. 38, 1) seize, I, occfip-o, -are, -avI, -atum ; oomprehcndo, -ere, -|)reliendi, -prehen- sum ; ar-riplo, -ripere, -rIpQi, -reptun. seldom, rare, self-interest, use utilis. sell, I, vendo, -Cre, vendldi, vendltum; I am sold, vOnCo, -ire, -Ivi (-li), -Ituiji. senate, sCnat-us, -us, M, m fe:'f Iff' v\ f., -Ill m ■ill r n ■ ai : ^^' 5': I. it ' If n .'■ t'f \ i ,1 III ■1 ■? nS Am '-'1 Mm 1 jpll 23G VOCABULARY, ( I! send, I, niitt-o, -Cre, inlsi, missuni ; send away, diniitto ; releyo (r. 1) ; send for, anosso. sense, good sense, prudentia. sense of shame, pudor. sentry, cust-os, -odis, M. serpent, serpen-s, -tis, M. serve, use utor. service, meritum (in), -i, N. sesterce, i>. 150. set out, I, ))rof iciscor, -i, i)r0fe(lu3 sum ; I set at liberty, libcr-o, -aiv, -avi, -atuni ; set at head, see put. several, coiiii)lure8. severity, use severus, -a, -uin. shadow, umbra, -ae, F. shake, I, CAblJLAft\. 230 I veiiio. bellum ; le ; put ,F.(pl.). Syracuse, of, .S5'rftoCi8{iii-us, -a, -um. system, ratio. systematic study, say system oiwi study. T. take, I cSpTo, -8re, -cOpi, -captum; (take a town), expuKno, -are, -avi, -atinn; take away, erlpio; take from, abstraho. take care that, cura nt, fac ut; take deeply to heart, graviter ftrre. take place, flo, fIC>ri, factua sum. take up arms, I, arma capio (c&pCre, cCpi, captum) or anna sumo (sumCre, suinpsi, sumptum). talent, (ability), ingCnlum, -i, N.; (money), talentmn, -I, N. talk, I, lOquor, 16qul, 16cutus svim. talkative, lOqua-x, -cia (adj.). Tarentum, Tarentum, -i, N. Tarquin, TarquliUus, -i, M. task, take to, reprehendo. taste for, stfldium, i, N. ; a taste for literature, studium litteranmi. taxation, exemption from, im- munlt-as, -atia, F. ; exempt from taxation, immun-is, -e. teach, I, dOcCo, -ere, dOcGi, doctuni (p. 39, 6). teaching, by, docendo ; by teach- ing we learn, docendo discimus. teacher, magist-er, -ri, M. teaching* of philosophers, prae- cepta(-6rum, N. pi.) philosophorum. tear, lacrlma, -ae, F. tedious, long-US, -a, -um (adj.). tell, (bid), I, iftbeo, -ere.iussi, lussum (with a(C.); (narrate), uarr-o, -are, -avi, -atuni ; dice. temper, Animus, T, M. temple, templ-um, I, N. ; aed-es, -is. ten, di'cem. ternri, condici-6, -dnis, F.; on what terms, (juanti. terrible threats, say terrors and threats (i>. 165, b). terrify, terreo, -ere -ni, -Ituni. territory, fines, -lum, M. (pi.); itgur. terror, terror, -oris M. than, quani ; abl. (p. 76, 1). thanks, I return, gratias iigo (-Cre, -egi, actum); receive (th.), use ago (pass.) thanksgiving, suppllcati-o, -onis, F. that (pronoun), illo (p. 87); p. 4 ; 12. the, usually not expressed ; the city which ea urbs quae ; the the, p. 78, 6. Thebes, ThCb-ae, -arum, F. (pi.) theft, furtum, -I, N. their, p. 7, note ; omitted, when poss- essor is evident. themselves (reflexive), se ; (em- phatic) se ipaos (p. 90, 13). then, tum, tunc ; then and there, illlco. thence, inde. theory, say thing. there, ibi, illio ; (after verbs of motion), illuo. therefore, igitur, ergo ; itaque (in narrative). thereupon, turn. thief, fur, furis, M. thing, res, rCl, F. think, arbitror ; (reflect on), c6gIt-o, -are, -avi, -atuin ; (fancy), puto, -are, -avi, -atum ; (believe), credo ; I almost th., p. 31, 4, note 1. third, tertlus, -a, -um. thirst, sitis, -IS, F. thirteen, tredecim. thirty, triginta. this, these, those, hie, ille(p. 88,6). m t 11 I ill ■s.t ii' i I 31 1 240 VOCABULARY. thorougfi knowledgre of, use per- spectum hiiherc. thougrh, quiiiiKiuiiiii, quuinviH, L-tsi (p. 114, 7 ; 47, ;{). thotiaand, inillo ; pi., millia. threaten, I, imniint'O, Oru ; minor, -an, ut us Huia ; I threaten him with punishment, supplicimu oi minor. threats, min-ae, -firuin, V. (pi.); or use minor. three, trCs, tria. thrice, tor. throne, rej^num, i. throng, miiltit ful-o, -Inis, F. throughout, per (jirep., with ace;.); throughout the whole city, tot a urbe. throw, I, con-lcio, -IcCre, -ioul, -iectum; impinffo, -ere, iinpogi, inipactum. Tiber, Tiber-is, -is, M. Tibur, Tibur, -is, N. till, donoo (p. 103, 6). till, I, cClo, -fire, cOlili, t-nltum. time, temp-US, -Oris, N. ; at that time, tum ; eo tempore. timid, tlmld-us, -a, -um. timidity, uae adj. tired be, use taedrt (p. 66, 3). to, ad (prep, with ace.) ; in (with aw%; after verbs of motion). to-day, h<5dTe (lulv.) ; hie dies. together, simul. toil, liibor, -is, M. ; vb., laboro (r. 1). tomb, sCpulchr-um, -I, N, to-morrow, eras (adv.). too, (also), qufique ; with arn(lrsse, lirnfni (with dat.; p. 7o, 1); what la the use? lurimnm (p. 00, 4). utmost speed, to the, quam ccler- rlme (p. 78, 9, note). V. vain, vanus ; in vain, fr\istr.a (of the person); ne(|uid(iuam (of the attempt). valley, valles (or is), -is, F. value, I, aestlm-o, -are, -avl, -atum ; I value (i.e., hi},'hly), maj,'ni aestimo (p. 70, 12). vanquish, I, sni)f'r-o, -are, -avi, -atum ; vinco, -ere, vici, victum. variety, varietas. various, nmltus; varius. Varius, Varius. vast, maxim-US, -a, -um (superl. of magnus); vastus. vehemence, use vehemens. Veil, Veli, orum, M. (pi.). venture, I, audio, -ore, ausus sum. very, often expressed by superlative ot adj. or adv. very glad, I am, vehementer lae- tor. f' L: I •V m p : i^ :i f S 'f.- '.!■ i A ii 242 VOCABULARY. versed in, poriius, u, -uin ; he was versed in law, iiirin iMTituH (or jht- itissiimiM) friit. (p. ♦U). veteran, vOU'r-juiu.s (iwlj. iunl mmti). victorious, vict-or, -oris, M. victory, victoria, lie, F. view, he had this object in, id egit (from a^o, -tTe, C-yi, actum) ; hold a view, 81'iitio. vigor, vi^'or, -Oris, M. villa, villa, ae, F. village, vicus, -1, M. violence, vis (ace, vim; abl., vl), F. violent, violentus. virtual, omit. virtue, virt-us, -utis, F. virtuously, hrtneste. visit, I, vla-o, -Cre, vlsl, visum. vogue, in, us(> sum. voice, vox. vote, suffrajfl-uin, -1, N. vote, I, st'iitcMtiam fero. voyage, cursns, us; iiavlgatl-o, -onis, F. ; make a voyage, navigo (r. i.). W. wage war, I, lu'llum irCro, -fre, pessi, !,'t'stuni ; helium infero, -ferre, -tQli, illatum (p. 71,4). wait, or wait for, I, exspect-o, -are -avT, -atum. walk (take a walk), I, amhrtl-o, -ar«, -avi, -alum. wall, (generally), mfir-ug, -I, M. ; (for defensive purposes), moeni-a, -ium, N. (pi.); (garden wall), ma- ceria, -ac, F. ; (wall of house), paries, -ietis, M. want, say wish ; be wanting, deesse. war, bcll-um, -i, N. ; I wage war, see wage. ward oft, defcudo, Cro, -fcndi, -f«'n- H. 115, 11. ■'■'he' (rel. oiiv.), quum ; (interrog.), p. 2, 6. . nence, unde < hene - er, quum (p. 107,5); quando- cumque. where, ubi (interrog. an' rel.); where in the world are we ? ubi terrarum (or gentium) sumus? "Where from, unde. whether/-, .or, utrum. . .an (p. 29, 6). I VOCABULARY. 243 indo- Whlch, (>'■!. ),<|iii, qim«', r. white, ftlbiis. whither, qua. who rrf/J, qui, quae, (\\\nA', (i titer- roij.), (juis, <|uat', (juld or (|UO(l (ft us, -Oris, N. world, terra ; or))is terrarum ; onmes jjcntes; liomims ; (universe), muri(hi8 ; all the world believes this, tu'mio est (piiu hf)(' cri'dat; the older world, ilia prisca gvuH hominum. worse, pt'i-or, nris (comp. of mains). worth. Ste worthy worthy, diyti us, -a, -um (with abl., p. 81, (i). would that, iltinain (p. 25,2). wound, vulu-ua, -Cris, N. wound, I, vuluCro, -are, avl, -atum. wrest, I, cx-torquL'O, -torqucre, -torsi, -tortum. wretch, use scClCr.atus or miser. wretched, miser, -a, -tim (adj.). write, scribe. writer, s'Tiptor. writing, in writing letters, in epistnlis scriljendis. wrong, iniuria, ae, F. ; I do wrong, pecoo, -are, -uvl, -atum ; am wrong, erro (r. 1). Y. year, annus, -I, M. yes, p. 28, 2, note. yesterday, hcri , of yesterday, hesternus, -a, -um. 6.: ' 1 11 il ,' J ;m1 i 244 VOCABULARY. ^' yet (nevertheless), tiimnn ; vero, emphatic), yet, not, nonduin. yield to, I, cOdo, -6re, ccssi, cessuni. yoke, iri<,'uin, -i, N. you, tu(sing); vo8(pl.). young, (young man,) ittvGnis' (iunlor, miniimis nutu); adolesoeiis. yours, tfius, -a, -uni(siny.); vest-er, -ra, rum pi.). youth, iuvent-us, -uti.s, F. (collective iiuun) ; (time of), adolestcnti-a, -ac, F. z. zeal, sttidlum, -I, N. zealous, stfldiosus, -a, -um (with yen.). zealously, use noun. Zeno, Zen-o, -onis, M. ; 5. ,r ' if-' ' ive INDEX. ith The iiuinl)t'r.s refer to j)age3 and sections. < abeo, construction of, 74, 3. abhinc, constr. and position of, Sfi, 3. ablative, derivation of the term, To, 1 ; syntax of, T.'J-SO ; abl. of ajcnt, 38, 2 ; 74, 5, note 1 ; of quality, 02, 1 ; price, (53, 4, note ; 79, 12 ; absolute, 48, 7 ; relations expressed by al)l. ahsohito, 51, 2; position of the al)l. absokito, !'>■!, note ; examples of al)l. ahs., r)2, 4 ; f)2, fj ; eqiiivalentsof al)l. abs. in Eii;^'Iish, 52, *! ; uiistitutes for altl. ahs., 49, fool-note; motion from, 73, 2 ; 74, top of page ; catita, manner, instrtiingnt, 74, 5 ; 7o, note 2 ; after cmnjiarativcs, 7(i, 2; re- uprct, 79, 11 ; with adjectives, 74, 4; 81, 6 ; with verbs, 74, 3 ; 8(i, 1-3 and 81, 4-5 ; place (of towns), 82, 1, 2 ; (not name of town), 83, 3 ; of distance, 84, 8, 'J ; with abhinc, 8fl, 3 ; of tixie, 8.5, 1 ; of difference, 77, 6. abound in, verbs meaninfj to, with abl., 80, 2. abstineo, constr. of, 74, 3. abstract nouns, expressed by pres. part, act, 48, G ; 1.57, 4, («)-(<•); 158, 15!>, 160-1C3; abstract adjs. and adveri)s, 1G4, 165, 166. iccusative, with infinitive, 4-7 ; 5t), C, 7 ; 127, 1, 2, note ; with verbs hope, promise, undertake, swear, 7, 3; coj,'- n.-vtc, 38, 4; vbs. with two ace, 39, (5; 40, 0; 40, 8; of cxchimatioii, 58, note; 114, 5 ; ace. and pen. with \ erlis of accusing, condenininj, acquittiixj, 05, 1; motion towards, 83, 4; extetit of • space, 84, 9 ; duration of time, 86, 2 ; with verl)S compounded with jirep., 71, 4 ; ai'c. and dat., 71, 4 ; 72, 7'J. active periphrastic conj ligation, p. 5.S, 1. ad Romam, meanin-f of, 83, 4, note. adjectival clauses, 98, 3 ; loo, 9. adjectives, not conwnon with i>rop(r no(ms, 3, 8; used advciliially, 11, 2; joined to esse after licet, 3:>, ; with necesse est in dat. or ace, 33, (i ; with g-enitive, 03, G; 04; dat., 09, 9; abl., 74, 4 ; 81, 0. admoneo. constr. of, 65, 2. adverbial clauses, 98, 3; loo, lo; local, 102, 1. aeque ac, lio, i. aflarmative answer, 28, 2, note. ag'e, how expressed, 80, 4. agent, case of, 38, 2; 50, 12; 74, 5, note 1 ; secondary a^'ent, 75, note 1. ago, how expressed, SO, 3. agreement, 1-3 ; 9, note. aliquis, 90, 5 ; CO, 3. aliter ac, 116, 1. amount. See Indirect question, 32. amplius, plus, minus, witli inunwral.s, 77,4. an, constnu^tion of, 29, ; 29, 7 ; 31,4. and no one, nee ((uisfiuam, 05, 3, note. antepono, constr. of, 72, 9. antequam, constr. of, 104, 7. any, how translated, 94, 1 ; 95, 2 ; 00, 5. apposition, 2, d ; 9, b. t I i • ;. ,i'l '. ..'•■ill i' 'i'lrl it4 III f 1J .■■■ 5«l iu 1 r J I 245 m 24G LVriN' PROSE COMPOSITION. as, (livisioTiH of, ji. 153. as, idioinatio uses of, 1 IS, (i. asyndeton, p. 170, lo ; 18S, 3, h. at (but), at enlm, p. '203. at a plaof (name of a town), 82, 1 , 2 ; (not the name of a town), 83, 3. at tamen, joined to sin^'le words, l-T), 5, note. attendant circumstance, in abl. aba., 51, 2. aut, p. 202, b. m. ■ beginning of spring, how expressed, 61, (e). bene, verbs compounded with bene, satis, male, jjfov. dat., 71, 3. bottom, how translated, 01, (c). but, after neg. verbs of doubtin;,', see f|uin. but if, see sin. Calendar, Roman, 147. can, 33, 2. cardinals, declined, 143, 1. careo, conslr. of, 81 (top). causal clause, lOO, 10, 5; 113. cavise, ablative of, 74, 5. Cedo, constr. of, 74, 3. certe, certo, 89, 7, note 2. characteristic of, it is the, 59, 2 chiasmus, p. 179, j. circumdo, constr. of, 72, 8, classification of clauses, 98, 3* classification of sentences, 98, i, classification of tenses, 19, i. clauses, subordinate, 98, 3 ; oonseou- tive, 14; causal, 113; concessive, 114, 7; comparative, 101,7; lUi, 117 ; con- ditional, 101, 8; 110-125; final, 12; 109 ; local, 102, 1,2; temporal, 102, 8» i. coepi, 142, G. cognate accusative, 38, 4. coins, Roman, I'.o. collective noun, with i)lural verb, 2, 3. command, constr. of verbs signifying, 24, 1, 0'). comparative degree, 70, 1. complex sentences, OS, 2. compound sentences, 98, i. compound numbers, how express- ed, 144, 3. concession, clauses of, Kt, lO, 6; 114, 115. concord, of subject and verb, 1. condemn, constr. of verbs si;^'nifying to, (15, 1. conditional sentences, 101,8; 119- 124. confldo, constr. of, 81, 5. connection, p. 181. consecutive clauses, 14; loo, lo, 4. COnstitUO, when followed by an ut- clause, 17, 5, note. consulo, 72, 7. contentus, constr. of, 81, 6. contra quam, 117, 1. correlatives, lo, i. cum, when used with abl. of manner, 75, note 3. currency, Roman, 150. D. danger, there is, constr. of, 18, 2. dative, why so called, 08, 1 ; translated by to and fur, 68, 2 ; dative of possession with Kum, 68, 3; used for EngUsh from, 68, 4* of person tnterested(,ethi(! dative), 68, 5; used for gen., 68, 6 , for abl. with prep, a or ab, 69, 7 ; of purpose, 69, 8 ; with adjectives, 69, 9, note 13; with verbs, 70, 1, 2 ; 71, 3-6 ; 72, 7-(0; dative and ace , 72, 7-3 , dative after compound verbs, 71, 3 , 71, 4, note ; 71,5 2. lated ssion lom, live), with 30, 8 ; with 7-10; after lote; TNDF.X. 247 day, before, 86, 4 ; after, 80, 4 ; for the following' day, 86, 4. decerno, followed by an «<-clause, 17, ."i. definition, g-enitive of, 63, 5. demonstrative pronouns, 88 ; fol- lowed by correlatives, 10, 1 ; cannot l)e joined with a part., 49, 11 ; agree with pred., 89, 10. denarius, 150, i. deponent verbs, perf. part, with an act. meaning, 49, 8. desisto, construction of, 74, 3. destination, how expressed, 32, 1. detached style, when used, p. 188, 3. dicor, use of, 38, 1 ; 55, note. dictionaries, use of, p. 156. dignor, 80, l. dignus, 81, 6. dissimilis, with gen. or dat., 04, note 2. distributive numerals, 144, o. divisions of the as, 153, l ; pound, 153, 2 ; month, 147 ; iugerum, 153, 2. domum, 8s, 5 ; domi, 82, 1 , domo, 83, 5. donee, 103, 5, 6 ; 104. dono, constr. of, 72, 8. doubting, verbs of, 22, 1. dum, 103, 5, 6 ; 104. dummodo, 104. 6, note. duration of time, 86, 2. duty, how expressed, 33, 3 ; 45, 2 ; 59, 2. E. ecquis, 97, d. efQcio ut, 16, 5. egeo, coiistr. of, 81, 3, note. emphasis, p. 17C. end of the book, how expressed, 61, (e). English inf., often expresses a pur- pose, 110, 3, English noun, often »'xi>rcs:si'ur])ose ex- pre.ssed by, 43, 9; when Tiot used, 45, 1. governing "word, often omitted in Indirect Narration, 129, 8. H. habeo, with ))erf. i)art., 50, 13. he, she, it, expressed by is, lUe, hie, 87, 2, he came from his home in Italy how expressed, 83, 6. hendiadys, p. 1()5, h. hie, dem. pro., 88, 3, G. hlc, often used for pers.pron. of 3rd j)ers., 87, 2. hindering, constr. of verbs of, 22, 2. historical inf., 55, 4; ]ircs. indie., 34. historical tenses, 19, l. hiuni, 82, 1. I iamdudum, with pres., 34, 3. iampridem, 34, 3. idem, use of, 90, 12. idiomatic, translation, 15G, 3 ; uses of ut, an, 118, 0. idioms, in the usi! of words, 15(1; in Latin syntax, 139; in uses of xi, 141, 5. Idua (flics), derivation of, 147, 2. if, introducing an indirect ipieslion, 30,2. ille, uses of, 87, 2 ; 88, 5, fi ; 89, 7. imperative future, 27, 8. imperfect indie, u-es of, :',:>, 4, note. impersonal verbs, 38, 2, 3; 66, 3; 70, 2 ; 72, 10. in, prep., appendix (p. 19G); in my house, 84, 7 ; in the city of Home, 83, 6. indigeo, construction of, 81, 3, note. indignus, construction of, 81, 6. indirect narration, 127, 1 ; 131 ; main verb in inf., 127, 2; i)ronouns, 128, 3, note and 131, 1, (3); adj. and adv. clau.ses, 12S, 4; 131, 1, (2); tenses of dep. clauses, 128, 4, note 1; imperative of direct -subj. of in- direct, 128, 5; 131, 1, (5); rlietorical (piestions in direct in indie, are in inf. in indirect, 128, 6; 131, 1,(()); other (piestions are in subj. in indirect, 128, 6. indirect question, 30; 32. infinitive, 55, 1 ; 55, 2 ; historical, 55, 4 ; suliject of inf., •55, 5 ; tenses of, 5G ; of exclamation, 58, 15 ; in Lat. does not exi)ress a purpose, 110, 3; fut. inf. i>ass., how formed, 41, 3. inquit, 7, 4. in spite of, 115, 11. instead of, 108, note. instrument, ablative of, 74, 5. in suspicionem venio, used as the l>assive of suspicor, 114, 8. interest, computation of, 154, 5. interest and refert, constr. of, 06, 4. interrogative sentences, intro- duced by -ne, nonne, nmn, 28 ; interrog. pronouns and adverbs, 28, 5. intransitive verbs, how used in pas. sive, 38, 2 J 46, 5 ; 72, 10. i INDEX. 249 .05, the pas-> intransitive verbs, compounded with cortain preps., heeoine transitive, 39, 7, 8. ipse, f)0, 13 ; 92, 6. is, 87, 2. iste, 88, 4. it, expressed by is, ea, id, 87, "2. It is said that I, dicor, 3«, i. It is thought that ] , putor, 38, 1. itur, impersonal, 38, 2. iubeo, constr. of, 16, 1, note. iuxta, adverbial in comparative clause, constr. of, 110, 1. K. kalendae, 147, 2. I* latter, how expressed, 88, 6. law of sequence of tenses, 19 ; 2u. leap year, 148, 8. less than ten years old, how ex- pressed, so, 4. levo, constr. of, 74, 3. libero, constr. of, 74, 3. licet (conjunction), constr. of, 114, 9. licet (verb), construction of, 33 ; 7n, 2. literal translation, a test of Latin, p. 190, 4. local clauses, lOO, 10, 1 ; 102, 1. locative case, 82, 1. M. means, abl. of, 74, 5. measures and weights, ir)3. memini, with i>res. inf., 58, 12; with gen., 05, 2. metaphor, p. 173. middle, how transl. in Latin, CO, («;). mihi in mentem venit, constr, of, 65, 2, note 1, mille, often used for an indif. number, 145, 7. minor, constr. of, 72, 9. minus, i tided, willi lunnerals, 77, 4. misereor, constr. of, 0(i, 2, note 2. miseret, constr. of, oo, 3. miseror, constr. of, 05, 2. modal verbs, 18, 3 ; is, 4. months, names of, 147, 3. more than ten years old, how ex- pressed, 80, 4. motion along-, 84, 8. motion from, s3, 4. motion to, 83, 4. must, how expressed, 33, 4, note 1 and note 2 ; 45, 4. N. names of months, 14V, 3. nature, how expre.ssed, 32, 1. -ne, use of, 28, 2. . ne, 12, 2 and note. nedum, p. 203, g. neither. . . .nor ; nw;. . . .ncc, or necpie . . . ne(iue; butinanut-clau.se, neve . . . neve (neu neu), 10, 4. nescio quis, 90, o, (h). neu, or neve, 13, O; lo, 4. nihil, wilh gen., CO, 3. nimis, with gen., 00, 3. .■ nisi forte, 121, 7. Nones, 147, 2. non naodo — sed ne quidem, p. 202, d. nonne, 28, 3. non quo, 114, 6. non quod, 114, 6. nostrum and nostri, difTeronce, co, 3, note. not, in a final clause, how ex]>rcsse(l, 12, 2; 10,3; in aclauseof conse(|ueiice, 1 i, 1. noteg on tenses, 34. I ■; ' 1 t 4 ' ill 1 3 m I J r 'Iff , ,,) t^ t< \ It 250 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. notwithstanding, lis, ii. noun or a>dj., with UHxlal inf., 18, 4. noun-Clauses, 98, 3 ; 99, 4-7 ; loo, s. num, use of, 28, 4. number, how expressed, 32, 1. ob (on account of), prep, with ace, 193, 4. objective gen., 62, 3. oblique narration, 4, note 3 ; virtual, 137. See Indirect Narration. Odio esse, passive of odi, 115, 9, note. of, not sign of gen., 60, 4. old, how expressed, 86, 4. one, the, — the other, 89, 6, (?>). opus est, constr. of, 81, 4 and note. or, 29, 6 ; 16, 4. oratio obliqua, 4, note 3. order, rules of, p. 176. ordinals, 144, 5. ought, how expressed, 33, 3 ; 45, 4. own, 90, 13. participle, defined and derived, 47, 1, 2. participle, expresses various relations, 47, 3 ; 48, note. participle, often stands for a co-ordi- nate verb, 48, 4, participle, present active, 47, 2; gov. gen., 64, note 1 ; gov. ace, 6t, note 1 ; pres. pass., trans, by rel. clause, 142, 8. participle, future pass., 142, 9; fut. act., 53. partitive gen., 60, 3. parum, with gen., 60, 3. past part, act., 49, 9. pello, constr, of, 74, 3. per, with expression of time, 86, 2, note. perfect indie, constr. of, 20, note ; 35, 5,6. perf. inf., after might, could, ought, 33, 5. perf. part, act., substitutes for, 49, 9 ; 107, 4. perfect part, pass., 47, 2, c; 50, 14. perf. part, pass., with hahco, 50, 13. perinde, lie, i. period, the Latin, p. 186. periphrastic conjugation, 45, 2; 53, 1. personification, p. 169, 2. personal pronouns, 87, i, 2 , when exiuTssed, 87, 1. peto, constr. of, 39, 7, note. phrases, followed by quin, 22, 4. piget, constr. of, 66, 3. pity, constr. of verbs of, 65, 2. plenus, constr. of, 81, 6. pluperfect indie, 35, 7. plus, with words of number, 77, 4 ; dis- tinguished from magia and amplius, 78, 7, note. poenitet, constr. of, 66, 3. posthabeo, constr. of, 72, 9. postquam, constr. of, 102, 4 ; supplies place of perf. part, act., 103, 4, note; usually takes perf. indie, 102, 4. postulo, constr. of, 39, 7, note. potential subjunctive, 24, l, c. potior, constr. of, 80, 1. praeditus, constr. of, 81. 6. prepositions, p. 193 ; with words of tinie, 85, 1 ; with noun in-ing, p. 193. pros. part, act., 47, 2; meaning of, 48, 5 ; equivalent to an abstract noun, 48, 6. present in Eng. = fut. in Latin, 103, 5, note 2 ; pres. in Latin = past, in Eng. , 103, 5, note 1. prevent, verbs signifying to, constr. of, 22, 2. price, how expressed, 63, 4 ; 63, 4, note; 79, 12. INDEX. 261 primary tenses, 19, i ; 20. priusquam, 104, 7, 8 ; often separated, 105, note. probare, constr. of, 72, 9. pronouns, personal, 87, l ; of third pers., 87, 2. pronouns, demonstrative, 88, 3; 89; reflexive, 91, 1, proper names, how rendered, p. 188, 2. provided that, 125, 4. provideo, constr. of, 72, 7. pudet, constr. of, 66, 3. purpose, with gerund, 43, 9. purpose, various ways of expressing, 41,2; 43,9; 44; 110, 3. putor, 38, 1. Q. qua, difference in (jua, quo, ubi, 102, 1. quaero, constr. of, .{!), 7, note. quality, gen. of, 62, 1 ; abL of, 62, 1. quam, 76, l ; 78, 9. quam pro, 78, 8. quamquam, 114, 9 ; 115, 12. quamvis, 114, 9. quantity (or amount), gen. of, 60, 3, quantum, with gen., 60, 3. quasi, 118, 4. question, direct, 28 ; indirect, 30 ; 32, 1; in oblique narration, 128, 6. qui, rel. pronoun, 8, 1 ; correlative, 10,1 ; restrictive, 112, 8 ; causal, 113, 4, 5 ; final, 109,2; consecutive, 110,5; con- cessive, 115, 10. quia, 113, 2. quidam, 96, 6, note 1. quidem, 96, 6, note 2. quilibet, 95, 2. quin. 111, 7 ; 22, 1, 3, 4 ; 23. quippe qui, 113, 4, note. quis (any), 94, 1 ; 28, 5 (interrog.). quisnam, 97, (c). quisquami 95, 3 ; distingf. from ullus, 96,3. quisque, 96, «, c ; 93, 7, note, quivis, 95, 2. quo, for ut, 12, 3. quo....eo, 118, 5. quoad, 103, 5, 6. quod, 99, 6; 113, 2. qitominus, 22, 2. quoniam, 113, 2. quum, concessive, 108, 6 ; causal, 106, 1 ; 113, 3 ; temporal, 106, 1 ; -instead of, 108, note ; =although, 108, 6 ; = ()Uoties, 107, 5 ; = whenever, 35, 7, and 107, 5. quum primum, 102, 4. B. rather, how transl., 78, 9. reason, how expressed, 32, 1. reciprocal pronoun, 93, 9. refert, constr. of, 66, 4. reflexive pronoun, 91, l. relation, of place, 82 ; of time, 86. relative pronoun, use of, 8, l ; not omitted in Lat., 8, 2 ; agreement with pred., 8, 3; referring to nouns of diff. gender, 8, 4 ; with verbs of sajing, 11, 3 ; in final clauses, 109, 2 ; in causal clauses, 113, 4, 5 ; in concessive clauses, 115, 10. remember, verbs signifying to, with gen., (i5, 2, remind, verbs signifying to, with gen., 65, 2. respect, abl. of, 79, 11. rest, of the troops, how expressed, 61, e. re-translation, p. 156, 3. rhetorical character, of Latin, p. 190, 4, c. rhythm, p. 184, 9. Roman Calendar, 147 ; money, 150 ; weights and measuresi 153. rure, 73, 2. ruri, 82, 1. rus, 83, 6. L.4 !' ' m i -A nil 252 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. S. satis, with yen., 60, 3. se, 02, 2; subject of inf., 92, 3; may refer to obj., 92, 4. second, first, third, 144, 4. secondary, tenses, in, l; sequence, 20, 2. sentences, classes of, 98. sescenti, often indef., 145, 7,8. sestertia, 150, 3. sestertius, 150, 1. she, 87, 2. should. 45, 4 ; 33, 3. si clause, 119 ; 122 ; idiomatlu uses of 141, 5. sicut, 117, 3. Similis, with gen. or dat., 64, note 2. simple sentences, 98, l. Simul, simul ac. , 102, 4. sin, p. 121, 6. si non, 120, 3. sive .... Sive (seu .... seu), 121, 5 ; 202, b. SO, iised with verb, adeo ; with an adj. or adv., tarn, 15, note. SOlvo, constr. of, 74, 3, space, expressed by ace, 84, 9 ; abl., 84, 9, note. special idioms of Latin syntax, 139. spring from, const., 74, 4. Statuo, when followed by an iit-clause, 1(), 5. Strive, verbs signifying to, constr. of, 10,5. subject of verb, agreement of, 1. subjective gen., (52, 3. subjunctive, in sinii)le sentences, 24, 1 ; of wish, 24, 1 (a) ; command, 24, 1 (b) ; to soften an assertion, 24, 1 (c) ; de- liberation, 24, 1, (il)', expressing duty or possibility, 24, 1, (e) ; in final clauses, X2, X4; 13, 5, 6 ; consecutive clauses, 14, 1-4; 15, 5; with ut-clauso after verbs of asking, 10 ; after verba of fearing, 17 ; with verbs of doubting and hindering, 22; with utinam, 25; indirect ((uoHtion, 30; temporal clauses, 102, 3; causal and concessive, 113; comparative, 117, b ; conditional, 120; in obli(|ue narration, 128, 4 128, 5; 128, 0; 129, 7 ; of virtual oblique narra- tion and assimilation, 137. substitute, for perf . part, act., 49, 9 ; 107. superlative, in relative clauses, 9, 7. supine, in -turn, 41, 1 ; ex]>ressing a purpose, 41, 2; with -iri, forms fut. inf. pass. ; in -tu, 42, 4. suus, uses of, 93, 7. T. taedet, constr. of, 66, 3. tametsi, 114, 9. tanquam, tanquam si, 118, 4. tantum abest ut, 15, 5. tantum, with gen., 60, 3. temporal clauses, 102, 6. ten years before, 86, 4. tenses, classified, 19, 1; notes on, 34; of infinitive, 56; of inf. in indirect narration, 127, 3. that too, 90, 11. the. . . .the, 78, 6, note ; 118, 5. time, expressed by abl. abs., 51, 2; when, 85, 1 ; within, 85, 1 ; duration of, 80, 2. to his father at Rhodes, 83, 6. top of the hill, sumnms collis, 61, (e). towns, constr. of the names of, 82, 2 ; 83, 84. tu quidem, 89, 7. tTvo accusatives in act., 39, 6; 40,9. two nominatives in pass., 40, 9, tNDEX. 253 U. ubi, quo, qua, (liffcniice, 102, l. Ubl, constr. of, 102, 2; in (irial clauses, 109, 2, note. uUus, after negative, 9r>, 3, 4 ; diflf. be- tween f|uis(iuani and ullus, 95, 3. unde, final, 109, 2, note, unless, nisi, 120, 3. until, 103, 5, 6. USUS est, constr. of, 81, 4. Ut, in noun-clauses, 99. 4 ; in tenii)oral, 102, 4 ; final, 12 ; consecutive, 14 ; con- cessive, 114, 9 ; with verbs of askinfc, 16, 1 ; idiomatic uses of, 118, 6. utinam, 2.5. utpote qui, 113, 4, note. ut primum, 102, 4. ut quisque, lis, 5, b. Utor, constr. of, 80, 1. utut, 114, 9. Utrum. . . .an, 121, 5, note ; 29, f> ; so ; 121, 5. V. vel, p. 202, b. velut, velutsi, lis, 4. ventum est, 38,2. verbal nouns, 157, 4. verba, j,'ov. gen., Oi; dat., 70 and 71; rt, r), note. Virtual oblique narration, 137. W. want, adjs. of, 74, 4 ; verbs of, 80, 3. weights and measures (lloman), 153. what, 10, 10; relating to a whole sentence, quae res, id quod, 9, 9. Whatever, 115, ii. whether, in indirect question, 30, 2. whether. . . .or, 29, o ; 121, 6. while, 103, 5. without, how translated, 139. who .... not = but, 11, 4. Y. Yes, how expressed, 28, 2. : n ( v> 111 i : W" '•' I ■ : I'll B'S/S , 'il PART II. EXERCISES ON CAESAR, LIVY, AND CICERO. i^l'' ,, m ^ i Jm ■i rOfl -*;. nl ''[ 11 '' - ^Ta ^'lll ir 1 I.AT1N PROSE COMPOSITION. PART II. KXERCISKS ON CAESAR. EXKKCISE I. (Based on Cacs.^ Dc Bell. Gall.^ B. /., cc. I and 2). This nation (lit) surpasses all its ncij^libors in couraj^^c and love of tigluin;.; ; and, considering dicir population and military strength (copiac) they carry on veiy many wars. They are hrave because they have ne\tr imported those luxin-ies' which tend to effeminate (170, 6) ; and hence they are able not only to rej)el an enemy'' but as aggressors'' to invade others. They are of the opinion (7'/^) that, considering their courage and military reputation, their terri- tory is too confmed (78, 9) ; and this is an abundant source of dissatisfaction to them. ^eaercs; p. 161, 2. Viostes suis JInilms {\i.'ji^^'^ proJubere. Vellum prius Jlnibus (dat. ; p. 71, 4) tilioruiH inferre, « Exercise II. (Based on Caes., De Bell. GalL^ B. /., cc. j and ,^). Urged by these considerations (161, 2), he rtsohcd to seize upon the supreme power. He had already held the highest political office for many years in his own country ; he was extremely popular {superl.) with the lower orders; and there is no doubt that^ he had very considerable influence among neigiTooring states. If he had been able to win the army to his support (use sr), he would liave accomplished his object^; but notice of his design was laid before the magistrates, and the guilty wretch' was condemned* to be l)urned to death. *p. 22, I. p. 120, 2 ; 32, I. 'use pron. ; p. 187, i, end. *say "to condemn a person to the punishment that," aliquem in poenas condemnare zii..., 256 I 4' i i' i 11 ,4 .' I II! ■:. I'll s ■ ■li] ■"Pi 2r.G LATIN PROSU C0MP0SITiO5f. Exercise III. (Inised on Qii's., De Ih'll. ddl., U. /., cc. 1-4; rc^ne^v fxcrcisc, io be done r ithoiit the IxH'k). These people are very far removed from the cuUure and civiliza- tion of oth(,'r lands ; hut they are little rjsortcd to by merciiants, who would lia\e imported amonj^ them many luxuries' which miyht make them effeminate. As it is (/iinn), they are pre-eminent for couraj^e and are incessantly engaj^ed in wars, either offensive or defensive. 'I heir territory, as judged by their population,"' is small, and they have resolved^ to abandon it with all their forces and to attempt to get possession of the coimtry which lies to the north- west. 'I'his design (they declare) will be easily accomplisiied, because they are superior to their neighbors in courage and military strength.* '/v.v(i6i, 2). '\pyo iun>iLroJio))ii))!i)n. "p. 17, 5, note. *p. 7, 4. li Exercise IV. (Based o)} Caes.^ De Bell. Gall.., />'. /., cc. j and 6). They had formed the resolve' of (piitting their country, and they now proceeded to ])rosecute their design. The neighboring towns were induced" to co-operate in the plan and join them^ These were persuaded to set fire to their private buildings, in order that all hoj^e of returning might be banished for ever and their minds steeled (173,3) ^'^ face* every danger that .night confront^ them. A general ** rendezvous was appointed on the banks of the Rhone, and there, on March 20th,' the gathering took place. 'p. 157, (6-) and 17, s, note. '^p. 38,3. ^p. 16, i. ^Oil. ^170,8. "say all iverc ordered to co)nc togctJicr to., ^c. 'p. 14^,5. Exercise V. ( Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall... B. /. , cc. 7 and S). His answer to the embassy was as follows (use hie)'. "You ask' me for permission'^ to jiass Ihrough oiu" province, and you assure^ me that, while upon your march, you will abstain from acts xl they towns These ler that minds tliem. khone, 170, 8. " You hid you Urn acts KXKRCISES ON CAKSAH. 257 of hostility against our people.' That i)ennission I cannot ;^iant in acc(irdan(H> with the estabhshed Di.utiic of tliis countiv (say Rouir^) ; nor cm I think that (x-oplc as ill -afkcti'd louaicis us as you arc (p. 3, 8, notc^, will abstain from outrages upon us v. lum Ojiportunity offers.^ You will ne\'er attem|)t a passai^e with my consent ; and if you do, I will i)rc\eiit \()U, if 1 can. Desist, therefore, from your imdertaking," and return to your (nvn i)eoplc.'' 'p. 16, T. -use //a'/(p. 33, 1 ; 70, 2). ^p. 6, i. *p. 62, 3. -^j). 162, 4. «abl. :.i\s. "p. 74, 3- Exercise VL (Based 0)1 Cues., Dc /icl/. Cid/L, />. /., cc. .y-A'; riricij exercise^ This resolution once taken,' theie were two routes b}' which' they could leave their coimtry. The lirst (170, 8) lay across the river ; the second, between the river and the mountain. The first was the easier, because'' the river is fordable ; the second rather f!ifficult,* because the mountain overhangs the river so close that a mere handful of men {pcrpaiici) could hold the pass aj^ainst them. lUit the first led them through our province and they were obliged to obtain permission from us before they atli'mjUed to march through our territory (104, 7). Accordingly they sent an embassy to us to represent (use say) that they intended to cpiit (53, i) tlieir iiome and country, and that, with our leave, they would cross the river and march through our province. \Ve must now decide (they said-"*) whether this jjermission could be granted or not. ip. 157, c and 48, 7. %j. 74, 5. •■'p. 113, 2. *p. 78, 9. ^p. 138,4. EXKRCKSE VH. (Based on Caes., l)c IklL L'lall., B. /., cc. Q-12). Thanks (173, 3) to the huish expenditure' of money, he had great influence among many of the neigliborin- stairs, and he had bouml them to his interest by many fa\-ors. in this he was led on by lust of supreme power, iind w.is aimmg at efifecting a poli- tical revolution among them. But word of his intention (32, i) was brought to us by the natives (use barbari or a proper noim) who represented that it would be attended with no small peril to 11 "^ 'm IJ 258 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. i ; i'Ji If 1 r: our province if we allowed (i3r, i, 2) their towns to be sacked and their children to be enslaved before our e)es. Moved by these remonstrances (iCi, 2), we saw and decided that action should not be deferred'' until (104, 6) so signal a calamity shouJd be in- flicted upon us; but that we ou<;ht to lead out'^ our army and avenjjfe the wrongs done to allies^ who had always deserved well at our hands (173, 3). »p. 157, exercise^ to he done ivitlioul the book). Urged by these considerations, they sent ambassadors to us with a request' for aid."'^ 71ieir towns had been taken by storm ; their Jands had been ravaged with the sword ; and there was no possi- bility"' of their escaping death themselves, unless w ( :irne to their assistance. * They had always (they said^) been well-aiiecied towards us, and had rendered us important service ; and they should not on that account, before the eyes of our army, suffer punishment at the hands of our enemies. They begged us to undertake- the business, lead forth our army, and avenge their wrongs. ^p. 157, c and 109, 2. '^p. 16, I. ^say nee fieri boterat lit. ^dcj, 8. 6p. 138, 4. Exercise IX. (Based 071 Caes.., De Bell. Gall., B. /., cc. ij-16). Heaven (173, 3) occasionally concedes impunity and prosperity to men, even when it is meditating vengeance.' When the vengeance falls, the suffering inflicted is all the greater.^ This, people often forget and they boast that they can inflict injury-' with impunity. Such is the case now. Our enemies wonder that Heaven is not more indignant at the wrongs they have committed, and they promise themselves that they have no cause for fear (45, 4). They are annoying us and oppressing our allies, who are unable to pre- vent them from plundering and wasting their territories (22, 2). But do not forget that Heaven will exact vengeance" proportionate to their crimes, and that they will learn, by a sad^ reversal of their fortunes, that God is not to be mocked {deeiplo). ^p. 54, 2 and 157, c. ^157, c. -'omit, as being implied; 187, r. iiy to ;mce often |uaiiy. lis not they Tbey |o pre- r '"^' lionate their , I. EXERCISES ON CAESAH. Exercise X. 251) (Based on Caes.^ Dc BcU. Cuill., Ik I., cc. ij-16; reviciv exercise to be done ivitJiout the book). He saw that we would have to come up' with the enemy at once (staiim). So, throwing (p. 49, 10) a bridge across the ri\er — a work' of the grcatesi dit^lculty^— he led all the forces over. Next day he sent out a body of cavalry to discover* the direction^ the enemy had taken ; and it was soon ascertained that, m dismay at our sudden approach, they had suddenly, upon (use quian) our crossing the river, decamped. After a pursuit'' of about fifteen days, we came up with them at last {cieniiini)^ and delivered an attack upon their rear. But tlie ground was unfavorable, and boldly facing us, they repulsed our attack without difficulty.'' ip. 45, 2. ^p. 9, 9. ''p. 62, I. ''p. 109, 2. ^p. 32, I ; 157, 4,(6^). ♦'p. 102, 4, note, ''say easily. Exercise XI. (liased on Caes.^ De Bell. Gall.., B. /., cc. 16-18). There is no doubt that,' if Rome- triumphs, she will rob us also of our liberty. Wc shall not be able to restrain her. Our commons, therefore, hate those who favor her and favor those who hate her. They complain bitterly that their own chiefs have played them false in this inatter (173, 3) ; they complain that they should be col- lecting corn and maintaining cavalry for men who will soon have power of life and death over them. Many among us have a revo- lutionary tendency, and these have more influence with the lower orders than the magistrates themselves. With a view to maintain- ing this influence, they have amassed a large amount of property to spend in bribeiy ; and, (nving to their generosity, they enjoy great popularity with the people. 'p. 2: ■p. 162, 4. Exercise XII. (Based on Caes., De Bell. (Jail., />'. /., cc. id-iSj review exercise ^ io he done -l. I H 1 m .!/l!l 'ftr m : lit ■ "i ^i! 2G0 LATIN PHOSK (COMPOSITION. m ' 'M al>s.) — I will declare boldly in your car alone what I have so long Ijiiried in silence. All thai- ^oes on (173, 3; in this camp is be- trayed to the enemy ; the common peojjlc accuse their magistrates of diminishin;.;'' the power of the state and of favoring Rome ; and none of our chiefs dare to supply you with the corn which they promised. They arc putting us off day after day, pretending* that the corn is being collected, nay {niqiic; 201, a), that it is just'' at hand. Meanwhile, the day when you engaged to distribute provisions to the tr()o])s is drawing on apace, and what to do (24, L ; 30, 1) we know not. Ikit if you make inquiry, you will find that this story {res) is literally'' true. 'use qina/i J 106, 2. -p. 30, i ; 32, i ; 'p. 99, 6. *use dictitoj 173) 3- ^P- 177, 4, note. Exercise XIII. {Based on Cacs.^ I)c Bell. Gall., B. /., cc. ig-22). If any misfortune happens^ my brother,'^ every one will feel that I have been a consenting party, and we shall estrange all his friends in consequence. Mis influence is very great indeed, while mine is very small. Avoid, the refore, I beseech you^, taking severe measures against him ; pardon him^ what is past, out of consideration for me ; warn him that you disapprove of his conduct, and set a watch upon him to ascertain^ what measures he takes.'' To this advice I am determined not only by (propter) my friendship for you but also by my regard for public opinion.^ Do not^ shock men's minds by ordering a brother to punish a brother ; do not order a friend, whose zeal and honor you have long tried, to put less confidence in you than he has been in the habit of doing. 'p. 120,2. '^p. 70,2. ^p. 138,4; 16, I. ■^p. 71, 6. 12, I. *p. 30, I, and 32, I. ^p. 62, 3. ^p. 24, I (/;), note, and p. 26, 3. Exercise XIY. (Based 0)1 Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. /., cc. ig-22; review exercise., to be (lone loithout the I'ook). Learning these facts,' we sent forward the horse to reconnoitre^ the mountain, and word was brought that the enemy had taken up their position r t^iit under it. From iiujuiiies made from some pri- soners,"' too, this report (161,2) vvab iound to be correct. The general, EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 2G1 therefore, summoned into his presence a member of staff {legd/us) in whom"' he reposed perfect contidence and who was reputed to have an extensive ;ict|uaintance {ndj.) with the art of war. To him he explained that it was his intention to seize^ tlie top of the hill with two legions and with these legions and his own army to make a simultaneous attack (157,^) from ;ill sides upon the enemy. At daybreak, however, word was brought that the enemy had been seized with a panic and had decamped. p. 48, 7. 2p. 109, 2, 3. 3p. 137^^. laat. '^p. 53, I. Exercise XV. {Based on Ores., Pc Hell. Liu//., />'. /. , a: 2J-26). After collecting the baggage into a single jjlace and fortifying it (53, 6), he drew up his forces in three lines and then delivered his attack. The battle raged (157, />) from noon until far into the night, and no one^ saw the back of an enemy. The horse, which had been thrown forward to bear'' the brunt of the attack, after suffering severely, were driven in. But the infantry at once ad- vanced, and, after hurling their pikes from aboxe,""* drew their svvords and cut their way through the enemy's line. The enemy in their turn now began \o give ground and retreated, some of them to their baggage, others to the nearest hill. At each of these points the battle was renewed, but, after a long struggle, the enemy's camp was carried and they changed their line of march and withdrew from the scene.* *P' 95) 3> I'lote. ^p. no, 3. ^p. ^^^ 7. ^say place; 173, 3. M'li ; : iii '1^ S is •rzi^, Exercise XVI. {Based on Cacs.^ Dc Bell. Gall.., B. /., cc. 13-26 ; revicro exercise., to be done witliout the book). Observing' that we had changed our line of march, the enemy ascribed our action to fear and started in pursuit. When they came uj), they began to harass our rear, tlattering tliemselves (say because tJiey tliou^/it) that the)- could cut off- our supplies. We faced about and received their attack and they immediate ly began to give ground, and at last (postremo) withdrew to a neighboring if :ri 1 1 ■'■i I ■ s ii i I :J I •I 2G2 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. hill, taking up a position ' upon the top of a ridge. There we surrounded and attacked tlieni.* A lonj,'' and fierce cnj^agement took place ;'^ but, in spite of** the shower of pikes which they poured upon us from the higher ground, we carried the hill and captured their camp. 'p. 49, lo. '^p. 74,3. ^use finite vb. *p. 48, 4. ^p. 157 (top). 6p. 52, 5 ; 115, II. Exercise XVII. {Based 0)1 Caes.^ De Bell. Gall., B. /., cc. 2j-jo). To these, at our request,^ they gave lands and equal liberty and equal rights with the natives; but all the rest were ordered'' to give hostages and return to their homes. The burnt towns and villages they soon after restored ; the corn which, under the pres- sure of extreme necessity, they had begged from us in such suppliant terms, was sent them. So the war ended ; the aggressors^ were severely punished ; those who were aiming at sovereignty had to give^ up their arms ; those who thought to make other states tributary, had themselves to give hostages ; and satisfaction was obtained for wrongs of long standing which had been heaped upon this nation. The submission of those was accepted who complied with the Older to surrender their arms ; all the rest were treated as^ belligerents. *p. 48,7. -p. i68, I. ^p. 159, (/^')- *P- 45> 4- ''use prep. j)ro. Exercise XVIII. {Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., />'. /., ec. 2y-jos rc^ncw exercise, to be done loitJiout tJie hook). Having ascertained these facts,' our leader sent ambassadors to them to treat" for peace. These represented to the enemy that he had taken this step because' he saw that it was for the good* of the country to end the war. That he would rehire, if they would give hostages and return to the homes and lands they had left (135, 2, 2). That he wished to congratulate them upon the conspicuous valor they had shown in the war. and to sa\ ♦^hat he had no desire to punish their states. Such were the rep'-esentations made by the ambassadors, who then immediately cjuitted the enemy's camp. EXERCISES OX CAKSAR. 263 as' A day was afterwards fixed for a general meeting. The siiomission of the enemy was accepted ; they returned to tluir burnt towns and villages and we immediately witljdrew from the country which they had invaded. ip. 48, 7. '^p. 44, note. •''p. 113, 2. *p. 69, 8. Exercise XIX. {Based on Ceres., Dc Ihil. Gall., B. /. , cc. ji and J3). The reign of this monarch was stained' by the grossest cruelty. He took the children of all the noblest in the land as- hostages. Tears could not protect them from outrage ; in his presence (52, 4) they sat silent, in the deepest melancholy, with bowed heads and eyes fixed upon the ground. At times {/n/c?-du/fi) he actually went so far as t« put them to the torture, and his t) ranny seemed to be almost intolerable. Everything must be done'' at his nod and l)eck. Many sought aid in flight and emigrated to other lands ; but from this relief he attemi)ted to deter them by the severest punishments ; and, if their intention (53,1) to c|uit the countiy was Ijetrayed to him, their condition was more terrible than before. They would have gone and asked assistance from our parliament ; but he had bound all the nobles by oath not to ask' assistance from ariv one ; and his own influence with us at that time was very considerable. *P. «73, 3- 'P- 2, 6. 2p. 45, 2. *p. 12, 2. %' >U!ii give ,135, luous lesire le by tmip. Exercise XX. {Based Ofi Caes., De B^B. GaU., B. /., cc. ji and j2; review exercise^ to be done loitltoiit ihe hooJS). -i, . /■,!. ^ (U At this assembly he made the following' remarks ('57,6): "We have lost by our defeat all our nobility ; we have given hostages ; we have bound ourselves by oath to su])ply the victors with lands for settlement. They can not possibly be induced' not to ask more. Those who have settled here will become enamored of our mode of living and of the resources of our country — and these'-' are not to !)e mentioned in comparison with their ovn^and they will sumnidi. Others to cross the river and settle by their side. Shall" we, wiio i^ % 2G4 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. have already been vanquished two or three times in the field, whose spirits are broken by misfortune, be able to deter them from cross- inj^* or refuse perpetual submission to their dominion ? We must do— I doubt not^ — what others ha\e done; we must leave the country, while the opportunity (offers {abl. abs.)P ^SAy 7wr can it be persuaded io tJiem. ^use relative, ^p. 24, I (d). *p. 22, 2. ^p. 138, 4, and 22, i. EXKRCISK XXI. {IJased on Caes.^ De Hell. Gall., B. I., cc. jj-jy). It would have been a menace to the safety' of the Roman Empire if large bands of (iermans had crossed the Rhine and settled in Gaul. They were almost invincible in the field, hiyhly trained in the exercise of arms, and so uncivilized that they had not slept under a roof for fourteen years together ; thiy would soon have taken possession of the whole country and made it tributary. An invasion (use vb.) of the Roman province would soon have followed and a hasty march into Italy itself. The Roman Senate had previously passed a decree'^ ordering the (iovernor of Gaul, for the time being, to defend the allies of Rome in (jaul from outrage. It was felt to be a dishonor to the empiie, and not very advan- tageous cither, to wink at their wrongs. It was the universal^ opinion that the Germans would reach an intolerable pitch of presumption. 'say If ivould have been dangerous to. "■^p. 16, 5. ^use omftes^ and a verb. Exercise XXII. {Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. /., ec. 33-37 j re^new exercise, to be done ivitJiout the book). The answer given to this request' was as follows : " If I had wanted you, I would have come to you (120,2) ; if you want me, you must come to me (24, 2, 3). I would not venture to come to you with- out an army ; and I can not collect an army without great difficulty." To this we sent the following answer : " Vou have received consid- erable kindness at the hands of the Roman peojile ; is this the requital you make.'' We invite you to a conference to discuss EXKIICISKS ONT CAEsAR. 265 Vse^ to I had (e, you vvith- :ulty." lonsid- iis the liscuss matters of the highest moiiu-nt to the country ; you dechnc and think that you have nothing; to learn Tliesc, then, are the par- ticulars (p. i6i, 1) we require of jou (p. 8, 2) : In the first place, not^ to harass our allies with your bands; in the second })lace, not to occupy any more land ; in the third ])lace {/u/u\ to restore all your hostages ; and in the last i)lace {/tos/rcf/io), not to hamper us in the exercise of our just rights. If you refuse these demands, you must try the fortune of war. *p. 48, 6. ^p. 16, I. EXKRCISK XX I II. (Based on Qws., Dc Jn'/l. Gall.^ />. /., cc. j6\/^/). Here a sudden panic completely demoralized the army. It originated ' in the following manner : Certain parties who had fol- lowed us from the capital out of friendshij) for some of the officers, and with no great exjierience of camj)aigning, begged permission to leave'^ the camp. Different reasons were alleged. They were afraid, they said ( 1 38, 4), of the enemy whom we were soon to engage ; we had never made trial of them in battle before. 'I'hey had ascer- tained from our merchants that they were men of giant stature, and of inconceivable eagerness for war. Their scowling faces and fierce glances were enough to daunt^ any foe. They confined them- selves to their camp in the swanijjs fv)r a long time without giving any one a chance at them (139, i) ; and then, making a sudden on- slaught (49, 10), they routed their adversaries not more by courage than by admirably-devised strategy.* I between us and them inter- vened narrow defiles and far-stretching forests through which provisions could not conveniently be carried ; and the men would mutiny and refuse to advance. ^use orior. ^p. 16, i. 'omit the adjs., as implied (187, i). ^by reason and policy (165, ^). Exercise XXIV. {Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., J). /., ce. 3S-41 ; revieiu exercise, to be done 7i>it/ioiit the book). On receiving this intt^lligen^ e,' our veteran-^ conuuander was a good deal disturbed. He saw that immediate action must be taken ■■\M '■I I w SI it* 266 LATIN I'UOSK COMPOSITION. and at once summoned a council of his officers, admitting to it both captains of foot and captains of horse. When all had entered his tent, he nilniked them sharply in these words : " I am afraid that some of you have wandered from the line of your duty'' and are K^-'i'ly of gross j^resumption (use ( inu > i^d // /lT /( urn') when you dictate to your general. I will take charge of those concerns which cause you so much doubt. Every preparation has been made. A supply of corn has been obtained. To-morrow night I will break up camp and begin the march. I wish to see, as quickly as possible, if* cowardice or a sense of duty will weigh with you most." Tiic delivery of this speech was followed by a remark- able change in the hearers. They thanked the general for the confidence he reposed^ in them ; they declared that they had never felt any doubt as to his doing his duty ; and they begged him to accept their apologies for the cowardice they had shown. ^p. 48, 7. ^p. 169, 4. ^omit /I'/ie. '*p. 30, 2. ^use (/uod Exercise XXV. (Based on Cacs.^ Dc Bell. Gall.^ B. 7., cc. 42-4'j). At about equal distances from the two^ camps there was a level plain of considerable length, in the midst of which stood a rising knoll of ground. This was the scene of the meeting between the Roman and (merman leaders. A body of ten'' picked horsemen was in attendance upon each general and two larger bodies of horse were stationed at a distance of two hunclred yarc|s. The intendew was held on horseback and the matters in d^bate^ between the two nations were discussed at length.' But while the conference was in progress, word was brought that the German horse were approach- ing the knoll and using their lancoe upon the Romans. The Roman leader had perfect confidence in his men, because, in fear of treachery, he had mounted certain private soldiers of the tenth legion on horseback and knew that an engngement might be hazarded without risk. Still, he gave the order to retreat, for fear that — in case of the enemy's defeat— he might be charged with having betrayed them. So the conference ended. ip. 145, (^). '-^ p. 144, 6, (.;:)• ^p. 169, 3. .s feXERCISES ON CAESAR. 267 EXKRCISK XXVI. {lidsiu/ i>n C(irs.^ Dr lull. (',.'IL, /»'. /., cc. 42-4"/; rei'ieiv exercise^ to be done -.uithout the hook). Learning; of our arrival, he sent envoys to make' the following representations on his behalf: " I hav^- crossed the river (he said)'^ not of my own motion but at the rec|uest of (his nation. They have assigned me a settlement and gi\en hostages of their own free will. If I ha\e demanded tribute, it is only what the victor usually demands of the vantiuished.'' Your friendship should be an honor and j^rotection to me instead of an injury. If I bring over a large following, it is in self-defence (157, r) and not with the inten- tion of acting on the offensive. I am not invading ; I am defending. I was the first-comer ; why, then, are you cnrroaching on my terri- tory? I shall not desist from this enterprise. I have defeated these men ; and, if you wish to bring the matter to an issue, I can defeat you." ^p. 109, 2. 'p. 7, 4, note. 'p. 166, d. *use non. Exercise XXVII. {Bused on Ccies.y Dc Bell. Gall.^ B. /., cc. 47-34). At a given signal (52, 6), therefore, our whole front line advanced at a run to attack the enemy's left ; this was the point at which' he showed the least strength. Ikit such was the suddenness and rapidity of his advance (t^^.) that there was no possibility of our using our pikes. It was simply (177, 4, note) a hand to hand engagement and contested with the utmost desperation on both sides. The enemy's left was beaten and completely routed ; but his right — owing to"'' their numerical superiority — pressed us hard, and it was not till the third line was advanced to our relief^ that he gave way. I he rout then became general and the flight was un- interrupted until the river was reached. Over this a small number swam ; a few more crossed in boats ; the remainder were cut down by the swords of our cavalry. *usc tcbi. ^use quodj 113, 2. 'p. 105, 8, note ; 69, 8. lil I > i i IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 If I I.I M 12.5 2.2 ^ m ^ :: ti^ 12.0 1.8 1.25 1.4 1 1.6 ^ 6" ► V] <^ /} C^^ , °^f ^el VI r> /a V /A Photographic Sciences Corporation 33 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, NY. MS80 (716) 873-4503 I I 268 Latin prOse composition. EXERCISK XXVIII. {Based on Cues., De lull. fJalL, B. /., cc. 42-J4). On the same day at sunset some of our cavalry, in pursuit {vb.) of the German horse, fell in accidentally* with the general's friend, who had been taken prisoner by the enemy— a rescue (161, 2) which caused us as much satisfaction as did the victory itself. In the presence of all (52, 4), he told the story of his escape from death (32, i). When the paity in charge of him observed that their army was in full flight, they dragged him away— ironed as he was — from the field ; and they did not pause in their flight until intercepted by our cavalry (105, 8, note). His life had been spared'* in the first instance by the kindness of fortune. Three times had his captors (159, k) cast lots to determine whether' he should be burned at the stake or granted a reprieve ; and three times had he found deliverance (157, c) by the favor of the lot. ^ S2iy it haj>pencd that ; p. 166, d. *p. 72, 10. 'p. 30, 2, Exercise XXIX. {Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall,^ B. /., cc. 47-34). For five successive days (86, 2, note) the German leader kept his army in the camp under the hill, and refused to fight. The reason was this : The Germans, in accordance with their custom, had consulted their women as to whether^ it was to their advantage to engage the enemy or not. The answer came (157, f) that it was not the divine will that their army should win, if it engaged before the new moon (135, 2, note i). On the sixth day, however, our general drew up his troops in three lines in the face of the enemy, and then, and not till then — when there was no escape — the re- luctant chief* moved out his army from the camp. *p. 30, 2. 'p. 187, I, end. Exercise XXX. {Based on Caes.^ De Bell. Gall.^ B. /., cc. 47-34 j review exercise^ to be dotie without the book). He commissioned the envoy to take the following message to the King : " You have received from our government the most munifi- cent gifts and the style and title of king ; but your coming here EXERCISES 6N CAfiSAR. 269 isg, to with such a large following must lead us' to suspect that your pur- pose is to invade (54, 2) our territory and crush us. Retire, therefore, from this country. Withdraw your army and do not allow it here- after to cross the river. Restore these people their hostages and, in return for our many good offices to you, treat them as' friends and not as enemies. What do you mean ? It is not our way to abandon our allies, and I do not think that we shall allow them to pay tribute to you. They have lent assistance to us in times gone by and they may now avail themselves of our assistance, if they will." * use quod ( r 58,/). 'use pro. Exercise XXXI. (Based on Caes.^ De Bell. Gall.^ B. 11.^ cc. 1-5). After an earnest exhortation,' he dismissed the envoys. He had learned the following'' particulars from them : That their neighbors, who possessed' great influence and great military strength, were forming a confederacy (157, ^) against Rome,* partly because they were' of a fickle and changeable disposition, partly because they were indignant' at the sight of a Roman army wintering within their borders ; that they were hiring troops, mustering their bands and drawing their forces to a general rendezvous ; and that even their own kinsmen had joined the league. He saw therefore that it was no time for hesitation ; and that, unless he could divide the enemies' forces,' he would nave to engage them in overwhelmmg numbers (173, 3).^ The necessary supplies were soon collected, the camp was struck, and in fifteen days he was in their territory. Summer had just commenced and there was an abundant supply of forage in the fields— a fact of the utmost importance to the general safety.® 'usevb. ; p. 49, 8. 2p. 88, 3. 'p. 128, 4. *p. 16 ,4. "p. 5, 2; 124, b ; 131, 2. *p. 66, 4. Exercise XXXII. {Based on Caes.^ De Bell.^ Gall,, B. II., cc. i-j ; review exercise^ to be done without the book). They conferred upon the King himself the supreme command and promised' to raise him a levy of one hundred thousand men. This could easily be effected if all the states supplied the quota each 270 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. had engaged to send (8, 2). Scarcely was ' the muster complete, whert the King made all haste to lead his army over the river ; and he pitched his camp upon the extreme confines of his kingdom. He said that it was of the utmost consequence* to all that the forces of the enemy should be kept apart* and that he himself should not be reduced to the necessity {^b.) of engaging at one time such a powerful force. He therefore ordered one of his kinsmen — a man who by reason of his courage enjoyed great influence with him — to lay^ waste the enemies' land, drive out the inhabitants and prevent them from fortifying a camp — a thing® which the uniform tenor' of the rumors showed they intended to do (53, i). *P« 7> 3- '^P- ^02, 4. '66, 4. *inf ; p. 4 (examples), ^p. 16, i. •p. 9,9. 'say a/// 173, 3. Exercise XXXIII. {Based on Caes., De Bell, Gall.^ B. 11.^ cc. 6-10). Upon this town they immediately began' a furious assault,' with the intention of carrying it' by storm — if they possibly could — and putting all the inhabitants to the sword.' They had already devastated the surrounding country ; supplies had begun to fail the defenders,* and the enemy had some hope,^ by a short delay, of winning" the place. Their numbers were very great and, when they had surrounded the town, their encampment — as indicated by the smoke of their camp-fires, — was eight miles' broad. They began the assault (157, c) with a shower of stones and spears^ directed against the wall, which was soon stripped of defenders ; then, locking their bucklers, they advanced to the rampart and endea- vored to undermine it. Night at last put an end to the assault, but it was with the greatest difficulty that the town held out against it. Next day the enemy departed and hastened with all their forces to the river. »p. 142, 6. "p. 157, 4(4 »p. 53, I- *7o, I. '^68,3. •p. 7, 3, note. 'p. 84,9. «p. 50, 14; 173, 3. Exercise XXXIV. {Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. II., cc. 6-Jo ; review exercisBf to be done without the book). Our lines were drawn up on a hill where there was just room enough for the army to take up its position (157, c). On each side of whert d he He :es of iotbe jch a 1 man h him s and liform , i6, I. fiXERClSRS OS CAESAR. 272 the hill was a ditch, and a fort was built at the end of each ditch. The intention of these last was to giiard^ against our being surrounded. Between our camp and the enemy lay a marsh of inconsiderable extent and we waited under arms to see if ^ they would attempt to pass it, intending, if they did so, to attack^ them on j; round so unfavorable for forming* an order of battle. Meanwhile the king resolved to test at once the military efficiency of the enemy and the confidence of his own troops. Accordingly, he led all his horse across the marsh and drew them up before the enemy's camp. Seeing this,'' the enemy also drew out his forces and a sharp engage- ment ensued." IJut they soon found that they were inferior to us and led their forces back to camp. *p. 12, 2, note. 'p. 141, 5. 'p. 53, I. *p. 69, 9, note 2. 5p. 49, 10. «p. 1.57, 4, (d). t,» with d — and already I to fail delay, when ed by began irected then, endea- assault, Id out with all p. 7> 3» rxeraset Exercise XXXV. {Based on Caes.y De Bell. Gall.^ B. J]., cc. 11-13). Word of their departure was brought* the King by'^ scouts, but he refused to stir that day from his trenches. Next day, at the first streak of dawn, he sent out the cavalry to ascertain'' the motive* of the enemy's departure and to harass^ the rear of the fugitives. This was done and a considerable slaughter was made as long as daylight lasted. At sunset, in accordance with their instructions, they returned to the camp. Meantime siege-engines were being collected and we were determined to take some of their towns by storm. But these, thoroughly alarmed by the speed of our move- ments, next night sent envoys to us to state ^ that they were willing to surrender their arms and give hostages. They inveighed bitterly against the ring-leaders of the conspiracy who, seeing (j 10) what utter ruin they had brought upon themselves and their friends,* had fled the country. They begged the King to show^ his usual (use soleo) humanity and not reduce them to servitude. *p. 157, c. 'p. 74, 5, note I. "109, 2. *p. 32, I. ^p. 16, I. st room side of 272 Latin prose coMPOdiTiOK. EXKRCISE XXXVI. {Based on Caes.y De Bell. Gall., B. 11.^ cc. 11-15; review exercise^ to be done without the book). Next night, in order to prevent* them from recovering their presence of mind, we followed them up^ and fell upon them as they were pitching' their camp. They stood their ground and bravely received our attack. Thereupon it was resolved to carry* their camp by storm. So a mound was raised, towers planted, and all the engines useful for a siege were prepared. When all was ready,* the enemy, now in the greatest alarm, sent forth from the camp all their old men and all their women and children, to beg that they might be spared* and theif submission accepted. Issuing from the camp (49, 10), they spread out their hands and begged for peace. One of their number acted as spokesman, speaking as follows : " We cannot contend with the armies of Rome ;'' our hearts are weak before them and our courage is unstrung. We have heard of your honor and humanity ; do not put to the edge of the sword those who plead for quarter." *p. I", 2, note. 2p. 48,4. »47, 3. . //., cc. 21-23 J ^^I'iciu exerci.'iey to he done "u'itliout the book). After making the necessary disjjositions,' our leader proceeded to {omit) encourage his troops, speaking"^ as follows : "The proximity (159,77 of the enemy, soldiers, will prevent me from'' using manv words. Show* the courage you have shown in the past and you will soon be pursuing them across the river. Their battle is drawn up on disadvantageous ground ; hold out against their first attack and they will be unable to withstand you ; keep cool ; all exigencies have been provided against ; remember that each man will fight under his general's eye." After this exhortation, he gave the signal to engage. Seeing (49, 10) us in motion, the enemy advanced upon us at full speed and in such close order that they could not use their swords. When they came to close quarters, they were out of breath and did not long maintain their ground, but began to retire upon their camp. To this we followed them only (use ita ut; 142, 7, a), upon our arrival, to see them fly from it with the utmost precipi- tation.* 'p. 157, ^ ; 48, 7. 2 yse co-ord. vb. ; the pres. part, is often used in Eng., where a co-ord. vb. is required in Lat. ; p. 48, 5. ^p. 22,2. *p. 24, (/'), note, ''use adv. ; p. 78, 9, note. Exercise XLI. {Basea on Cues., De Bell. Gall.^ B. III.^ cc. i-j). On receipt (52, 5) of this news, he determined to winter^ in the village which he began^ now to fortify. The village was situated in a small valley, surrounded by hills, and was divided into two parts EXKKCISKS ON CAK&AR. *i75 used 22,2. by the river. The higher levels of the hills,' which overhung the valley, were still held by the natives. Several reasons had induced them to renew the war.* in the first place, they were of the opinion that the village could not hold out against their attack ; in the second place, they had been infornieil thai no sufficient provision'" had been made by us with rej^^ard to supplies ; and there was the additional reason* that we wished to deprive them of the ta.xes which the mer- chants paid (pendo) who were in the henil reasons ivere to them of renciuhii:; the ivar. '•p. 38, 2, note ; 157, 4, (^). * p. 100, 7. "^ w^Q consucsco. Exercise XLIl. {Based on Caes.^ Do Bell. Gall.^ B. III., cc. 4-6). The battle had now raged (38, 2) for si.\ hours without intermission. More than one-third' of our number had fallen ; several of the officers were disabled by their wounds ; and amnumition^ was begin- ning to run short. Our only hope of safety depended on a sudden sally from the camp. During a brief space, we stood upon the defensive to allow us time to recover from our e.xertions ; then, at a given signal (51, 2), we sallied forth, surrounded the enemy, and cut them dowii on every side.* The rout was complete ; fortune had suddenly changed ; and now there was nothing for us to do but to strip the dead and to return to our camp. Soon after, we fired our camp' and marched without interference* into our province. * p. 'J'], 4. 2 use tela. ' p. 48, 4. *p. 52, 5. Exercise XLIII. {Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall.., //. ///., cc. 1-6; review exercise, to be done ^oitliout the book). We were firmly convinced that the enemy had occupied the heights in the hope of getting possession' of our camp. We knew that, owing to the weakness of our force, they regarded us with contempt," and that they were of the opinion that, as far as fighting wtnt, they had' no reason for* apprehension. Still, they were un- willing to tempt the caprice of Fortune, as, after frequent engage- ments, they had always come off the losers. Accordingly, we called J ^1 » 276 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. a council of war, in which the majority decided* to abandon the camp and the ba^'gage, and, making (49, 10) a sally, to attempt to march to our winter c|uartcis. The soldiers were nuickly informed of the resolution of the council and they carried out their instruc- tions with the utmost dispatch." ' use potior ; p. 45, i, {a) ; 80, i. ' p. 69, 8. ' p. 1 1 1, «. * p. 32, 1. '^ use /f/iur/ ; p. 70, 2. *adv. ; p. 78, 9, note. Exercise XLiy. {liused on Caes.y Dc Hell. Gall.^ li. II I. ^ cc. 7- 16). Mankind arc naturally anxious for liberty and detest slavery, preferring' to endure any wrong whatever^ rather than submit to the yoke of servitude. These people als» felt that they had'' consider- able naval strength, naval science and naval experience, and that we would be unable to march against them with our army by reason of the difficulties of the land route on the one hand* and of our ignorance of navigation and our lack of ships on the other.* It was well known also that we had neither sailors nor pilots, and they did not know that we, who were accustomed to sailing only in a land- locked sea, would be able'' to sail in the vast and open sweep of the ocean. Accordingly they suddenly formed the design (their resolu- tions are always precipitate) of stirring up the other states along the coast to build" ships and prepare for war against Rome.'' *p. 106, 2; 113,3. '^ use guiv/s. ^p. 68, 3. *el-cl. *pres. inf.; the pres. inf of possum does duty also for the fut. * p. no, 3. 'p. 162, 4. Exercise XLV. {Based on Caes,^ De Bell. Gall.^ B. III.,cc. 710J review exercise, to be done without the book). To prevent' the maritime states from joining'* the league, we sent an army with all speed to the sea-coast. The sea-faring people of these parts have a revolutionary tendency, and are easily stirred up to conspiracy or defection. They knew what a serious crime they had committed in flinging* our envoys into prison— the name of en- voy has always been respected — and they were prepared to face any issue of fortune. They accordingly summoned auxiliary forces from Britain, admitted their neighbors into alliance, mustered every I. EXERCISES OS CAESAR. 277 available ship, built others, collected rowers and pilots, conveyed all their corn from the fields and fortified their towns, 'i'hey hcltl many states in subjection by reason of their command of the sea, and they easily managed to stir them all up to a renewal* of hostilities against Rome.* > p. 12, 2, note. »p. 22, 1. » p. 78, 9, note. *p. 99, 6. *p. 16, 1. •p. 162, 4. Exercise XLVI. (Based on Caes.^ Dc Hell. Gall.y B. III.j cc. 11-14), There was great difficulty in' capturing their towns. They were situated, as a general thing, upon head-lands, inaccessible by land at high-water — a phenomenon which (9, 9) occurs twice in every twenty- four hours — and inaccessible by ships at ebb tide. The tides there are very high, and, when they ebb, a ship is often left high and dry. Our ships 'were almost constantly being dashed upon the rocks or stranded upon a shoal. Harbors there are practically (/^i^//t'^ none, and when the wind blows fiercely,'' it has a tremendous sweep from the open sea ; there is no safety in running before it or in coming to anchor in shallow water. /^ The ships of the natives have' flatter keels than ours and are not hurt so much if they strike a rock. They are better adapted too for standing wind and sea, being built of oak* throughout* and high at the bow and stern. iMoreover, their anchors are secured by iron chains instead of ropes. Owing ( f>rcp.)^ therefore, to the favorable position of their towns, they d^ fended themselves without difficulty, and, owing to the number of their ships, our admiral despaired* of being able' to sustain their attack. * p. 43, 7. '48, 7 ; 5 1, 2. 'p. 68, 3. ♦ ex robore. * use totus. •p. 6, I. 'pres. inf. Exercise XLVI I. {Based on Caes.y De Bell. Gall.., />. ///., cc. 11-14; review exercise^ to be done without the book). At this point,' therefore, all the troops received orders to assemble.* Reinforcements were summoned from the Rhine and ordered to start' with all possible dispatch.' The land force reached its 278 LATIN rUOSK (!()MI'OSITION. destination without (lifticully ; but the fleet found giciit difficulty in saihn^f throuj,di the open sea, owinj,' to* the roughness of the water. There are no harbors, the tides are hij^di, and tin; sweep of the wind is irresistible. Our ships are not well aihiptid to C(»pe wiih^ the viol(n< e of either sea or wind. I'lie natives nianai^c belter. They build their ships throuj^houl" of oak ; and the tin»bers arc a foot thick and put toj,'ether with iron spikes an inc h broad ; but, owing to their ignorance of linen, they ha\ c to u-.e skins for sails. Their shii)S are large and of great bulk, easily steered, and, when running before the wind, outstrip ours in |)oint of speed. We were detained also by stress of weather, but at last reached the jK)int at which we had been ordered^ to muster. 'use ^^. '•'p. 16, I, note; 99,4. ' p. 78, 9, note. *p. 113, 2. 'p. 69, 9, note 2. "^use totus. Exercise XLVIII. {Based on Caes., Do Jiell. Gall.^ />'. ///., cc. JS-iS). The battle had now raged' from six in the morning,- and the enemy had already lost several ships and jierceived that they would soon lose all they had. .So they turned their ships down the wind and sought safety in flight. Very few ever reached land. This battle closeil the war; every available ship had been mustered in the fight, and all their young men were on board the fleet ; and, when the battle was lost, they had no longer any refuge or means of defence left. ;' In such straits and urged by these considerations, many exclaimed that such .an excellent^ opportunity of closing the campaign should not be thrown away ; that they had ne\er recommended the war ; that they had only revolted in the hope of defending them- selves ; and that they ought* to march to the camp of the com- mander-in-chief and offer their submission. Lack of supplies (very inadequate provision in this respect had been made) induced* their senate to adopt" this resolution — and they n arched accordingly to our camp and submitted. *p. 38, 2, note; 157, 4, (^). '^144,5- "use tanius, *p. 33, 3, note ; 45, 2. ^change to passive. *p. 16, i. EXEHCISES ON CAKSAR. 279 EXKRCISE XLIX. {Based OH Cacs.^ De Ilcll, dalL^ />'. ///., u, 15-18 \ revieiv exercise^ to be done "u'it/iout the boo/:). The Ic^^ale now inarchi'cl with all his forces into the enemy's territory and encamped at the distance of two miles from the hostile army. For several days, he conlined his men to the lines' and refused to flight, though the enemy led out his f()ri es every day and offered him hatile. 'Ihe reason lor this proceeding ( 161, 2) was as follows :'* As" the enemy's numbers were so considerable, he was of the opinion that an engai^^^'^KMit shouUl not be ri^^ked (157, c) unless when a favorable chanc< ffered. Men are alwa> s ready to believe what they wish to brlit\eand the enemy accordinj^ly be- lieved that our general ha ' .loseil the ..ues of his cainj) tlirougli cowardice. Every da) they h;' \ Uie audacity (v/>.) to approach the rampart aid to call out t' u-^ that we should not let slip so ex- cellent a chance of fmishin^, the camj)aign. *' Take up your arms," they exclaimed,* "and meet us in the tield." Our general, accord- ingly, was not only despisf d by the enemy, bui iie was carped al by the tongues of his own troops. ' use castn's (abl.). ''p. 88, 3. ^ p. 106, i ; 1 13, 2, 3. 'p. 7, 4 ; use hortor. 33»3i Exercise L. {Based on Caes.^ De BcU. Gall.y B. I 11.^ cc. If-^J), The governor saw that he would have to exercise great care.^ He had introduced his army into a country which had a large population ; the people of which — if somewhat cfleminate— were always ready to go to war. A few years before,^ they had defeated one of our armies, and killed the general at its head. They had already attacked a Koman column on the march, and put it to flight with the loss of its baggage \^ and he saw that their resistance now would be long and fierce./When the natives heard of our arrival, they were somewhat disturbed ; but they at once began to muster their forces. They sent ambassadors in every direction to summon reinforcements to their side, and all their cavalry, in which they have great strength, they placed in ambush, intending to attack us on the march. News / 280 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. I of these preparations was brought us, and we pushed forward with all dispatch to the point at which the cavalry were posted. Here a spirited engagement took place,* and the enemy were driven back into the town. 1 p. 45, 2. '' p. 86, 4. 3 p. 48, 7 ; 5i» 2. *p. 38, 2 ; 157, 4 (d). Exercise LI. (Based on Cues., De Bell. Gall.., B. III., cc. ^9-^3 S review exercise^ to be done ivitJiout the book). The matter was then referred to a council of war, and it was the general^ opinion that there should be no delay'^ in engaging the enemy. The enemy's numbers were increasing every day^ ; they were mustering their troops and summoning rcinforcenients to their aid ; they were sending ambassadors to neighboring states with requests for men and leaders ; they had appointed as commander- in-chief one who was generally supposed to possess a thorough acquaintance with the art of war, one who knew how to fortify a camp, run a mine, or storm a town. It was felt also that the enemy would soon be in a position to beset the roads and intercept our supplies. We had ascertained that their cavalry had already been ambushed in a valley through which we had intended* to march. It was decided, therefore, that, on the following day, the matter must be brought to an issue. ^ omnium. ^ p. 46, 5. ^ use in dies with words of increase and diminution, quotidie^ with words of repetition. *p. 53, i. Exercise LIT. {Based on Caes.^ De Bell. Gall.^ B. III.., cc. 24-20). These people make war very differently^ from other states. They have in their territory long stretches of swamp and forest and when an enemy advances against them they retreat and confine them- selves to these. ■•' Notwithstanding the fact that' powerful nations had proved inferior in their conflict with us, these were of the opinion that they could engage us with safety. They fancied that, owing to a short supply of provisions, we would soon have to withdraw* from the country and that they would be able to attack us upon the -""'— ^-"''-^--r EXERCISES OS CAESAR. 281 march with our knapsacks on our backs.* They accordingly laid waste their land in every direction, fired all their villages (this in the hope of cutting off our supplies) and then led their forces into the thickest part of the forest and waited to see what course we would pursue.'' For many days in succession^ our army was led out of camp and drawn up in front of the wood ; but, in accordance with the instructions they had received from their leader, they made no attack. ^nsQ ionge alia rationc \ ii6, i. 'use adv. £•<>. 'use quamquavt. *p. 46, 5. ^sub sarcinis. ^p. 32, i ; 31, 3, note i. 'use deinccps. and Exercise LI II. {Based on Cues., Dc Bell. Gall., B. III.., cc. 24-2g; review exercise., to be done 7vithoiit the book). Summer was now almost past and winter was approaching ; so the enemy confined his troops to his lines/ trusting that we would soon have to retreat. Every day'^ at dawn our forces were led out in front of his rampart, but no enemy could be seen. His intention' was not to attack until* wc began to retire, and then to beset the roards, cut off our supplies, and try to win the victory without loss. Perceiving^ this intention, our leader proceeded^ to attack the enemy's camp. The horse, after making a long detour,' were stationed on the flanks; and then all the cohorts advanced upon the works, some to fill up*^ the trench, others to dislodge the defenders from the walls with their darts. The rampart was soon levelled, and the enemy, completely surrounded, sought safety in flight. It is well known that scarcely one-fourth'^ of their number escaped. *use casiris. ''■ quotidie. ^ei in anitno erat. *p. 105, 8, note, ^p. 102, 4; 103, 4, note; 5r, 2 ; 52, 2, note. '^ p. 142,6. 'use 8 1 : \ ' i 'I I circuitusj p. 48, 7 ; 51, 2. p. no, 3. »I45, 8; 2,3. Exercise LIV. (Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall.., B. /F., cc. 1-4). These people are of gigantic stature' and more warlike than' any of the others who live on either' bank of the river. Daily exercise keeps* up their strength and makes them capable of great exertion. h ^ 282 LATIN PROSK COMPOSITION. They have no j)!easure in wine and do not import into the country any luxuries which they thiniv tend to effeminacy (157, cy 170, 6). Many large and flourishing states on the other side of the river they have rt^kiced and made tributary, and they often sell the spoils of battle to the French iiadcrs who resort to them. They prefer a milk or flesh diet and are greatly addicted to hunting. Private property is unknown among tliem. No one ever remains at home to till the soil more than one year ;'' next year he is drafted off to serve in the army. Those that are at home support those that are in the field. ^ p. 62, I. ^ p. 95, 3, 4. ^ use iitcrquc. * say they keep up. . . .and ?nakc themselves. ^ plus iino anno. Exercise LV. {Basea on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. IV., cc. 1-4; revieiv exercise., to be done without the book). These people, in spite of their warlike character, had been driven from their own country, and, after roaming about for three years, had at last reached the Rhine. Ikit, after trying every expedient,'^ they failed to effect the passage of the river, because they had no^ ships. So,* seizing all the dwellings aMd supplies of those who lived on the other side, they maintained themselves there the rest of the winter. They use horses in battle, thougii they often dismount and fight on foot.'^ They take the greatest pride in their horses which they buy up at a high figure from the merchants who visit them. In order to make trial of their strength in war, we ventured to cross the river and attack them with all our cavalry. Many of them were killed and, in thorough alarm, they returned with all speed to their own homes where a year afterwards** they were made tributary by the Germans whose attacks proved irresistible. ^ p. II 5, I I . '^ onuna. *'usc anno postero. p. 68, 3. *p. 48, 7; 51, 2. °p. 74,5. Exercise LVI. {Based on Caes., Be Bell. Gall., /)'.,/F. , ce. j-/o). These envoys made the following^ representations : " We have not come here to pillage ;-' we have come on invitation. If you march into the districts' we have taken possession of, you will be the EXKRCISRS ON CAESAIl. 283 country 170,6). ivcr they spoils of er a milk property o till the vQ in the the field. >. . . .and ■erctsc^ to en driven ears, had :nt,'^ they 10^ ships, id on the le winter. 1 fight on they buy In order the river re killed their own iry by the 'p. 74, 5. ; have not 'ou march W be the aggressors* and there can be no fricndshii) hciwcen us and you.^ If you allow us to retain our lands, we can be very useful to you ; but, if you attack us, we will resist you ; and most countries regret when they resolve to make war upon us. " To this we answered that we had heard that they were unable to defend their own country, but had been evicted from their homes by others ; that we would not allow them to approach our lands or remain in them. Let them ask the barbarians, who lived beyond the river, for lands to settle in ; that we would give orders that such a demand should be granted. When they received this answer, they carried it back to their camp, promising to return the next day liut one.^ ' say said these things. ^ p. 44, 6, note. ^ use regiones. * to be an aggressor = to at /aci' first. ^ say to us luith you. *say rw the third day; 147, 2. Exercise LVII. {Based Oft Caes.^ De Bell. Gall., B. //'., cc. j-/o : review exercise^ to be done luithoiit the book). The river here makes several large islands which are inhabited by barbarous tribes whose diet consists^ offish. They are, however, very fierce and consider themselves equal in battle even to the gods, claiming (co-ord. vb.) that no one on earth can vanquish them. It is said'"* that they are a match for the picked cavalry of Germany, all the states of which are anxious to have them as friends. Many, accordingly, seek their aid in making war and they have no objec- tion to having recourse to arms. For they not only protect their own territory but, if invited, will invade others. They extend their incursions all over the country. They are, however, rather fickle^ and unreliable and, when concerting important measures, they are often the mere slaves of rumor. Hise vescor. ^ p. ^8, i ; 55, 5, note. ''p. 78, 9. Exercise LVIII. {Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall^ IV., cc. 11-15). All the cavalry had pushed ahead. Their orders wcre^ not^ to act on die offensive, but, if attacked, to hold their ground until our column arrived. As soon as'' they came in sight, the enemy led out lii ;: I if i\ 2S4 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. if his forces against them. Their cavalry charged at full gallop and caused some confusion in our ranks; then they dismounted and, stabbing our horses in the belly, spread such terror among the rest that they began to fly in every direction. The enemy followed slowly and did not desist from the pursuit* until'' they came in sight of our camp. Then they retired again to their own camp. The following morning, they sent an embassy to apologise^ for taking the offensive, contrary to the arrangement made the day before. They would accept peace, they said (138, 4) and the terms we had offered ; they earnestly begged us not to advance further into their territory or lay waste their lands. We had nothing to fear ; the prestige we had gained in the country would prevent any one from making war upon us again. Such were the representations they made in apology for their attack. *p. 72, 10. 'p. 12, 2, note; 16, i, note. 'p. 102,4. *say nor did they make an end 0/ pursuing. *p. 104,8. *p. 109,2. Exercise LIX. {Based on Caes.^ De Bell. Gall., B. IV., cc. 11-13; review exercise, to be done without the book). Thinking that it would be the height of madness* to wait till' the cavalry, which had gone across the river to forage, should return, and delighted that at last he had the enemy in his power, he gave the order to engage. For a short time they offered a stout resistance (157, c) ; but, owing to the absence'^ of their cavalry, they were quickly surrounded and thrown into confusion and soon retired in panic* from the field. Our horse were sent in pursuit, but it would have been better if they had not been. For, the enemy, facing about once more, charged our cavalry which, coming on without any apprehension, was quickly thrown iiito confusion^ and driven back to the main body with considerable loss.^ This was a lucky accident for them ; for by the interposition of this delay, the enemy were enabled to cross the river in safety. »p. 59, 2. '■' subjunctive ; p. 104, 6, note. ®p. 48, 7; 51,2. *p. 50,14. ^ p. 48,4- ^49,9. £X£RCISSS ON CAESAR. 285 Exercise LX. {Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall.^ B. /F., cc. i6-ig). And so the war was over^ and the enemy had withdrawn from their territory and hidden themselves in the depths of their forests. All their villages had been burned and all their corn cut down. After this battle, the Rhine became the boundary of the Roman Empire. Most of the neighboring states now submitted, seeing that'^ they could not carry on the struggle against us. Those which sought an alliance, received a generous' response.* A council of war was then called^ at which it was resolved that a bridge would have to be built and the army led over the river in order that all Germany might understand that we had both the courage and ability to cross their river when® we wished. Many urged that the army could be ferried across by means of boats ; but it was decided that it was more in keeping with the dignity' of Rome** to lead it over by means of a bridge. The work was completed within ten days. *p. 48, 7 ; 48. 4. 2 106, I ; 113, 3. 'use liberaliier respondere. * p. 72, 10. 6 p. 48, 7; 51, 2 ; 48, 4. « p. 107. 5. 'p. 59, 2; 158, {h). 8 p. 162, 4. .e\ *P. Exercise LXI. {Based on Caes.y De Bell. Gall., B. /V., cc. i6-ig; review exercise^ to be done without the book). So great, after the rout of the Germans, was the reputation of our army that the remotest nations sent envoys to us with an earnest prayer^ for aid. They said that many tribes who had retired into the wilderness were now gathering'' to a general rendezvous^ and had decided to fight it out* with Rome^ to the end ; that these declared they would never surrender or give hostages, and that unless we crossed the river and chastised them, they would spread universal* terror among those who had entered into alliance with us. Many (they said) had already migrated from their towns and deposited their wives and children in the woods. They begged us to deliver' them from this dread, to carry over an army, and leave several strong garrisons on their side of the river. They averred that we had no 11 I 286 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. reason^ to fear for our own safety and that we had both the strength and daring needed to render them all the aid they asked. ^p. 1 66, 2 (c). ^p. 131, I (i). ^ say a/ a place where all were asscmbliuii ; p. 131, i (2). ^ depui^nare. ^ p. 162,4. ^say passim or inter omnes. 'p. 16, i. ^usetwry 32, i. Exercise LXII. {Based on Caes.^ De Bell. Gall.^ B. /K, cc. 20- 2 j). This island lies in a northern latitude, but if* you had visited it you would have found there, upon the sea coast, a nation of traders who own^ both men-of-war and fleets of merchant-men. They are not barbarians or unaccjuainted with the art of war and navigation. They use their ships for sailing' to ports that lie opposite the island and for making war upon neighboring states. /TLey have harbors, also, adapted for the largest ships. If any one had a thorough knowledge of the institutions undei; which they live,* it would stand him in good stead. I have heard that both their courage and their good judgment are held in the very highest esteem^ by their neighbors. It would be a lucky accident^ if such a nation would submit to our rule. *p. 123, III., {!)). "-p. 68, 3. ^p. 42,6 ; 43,9. *say qiiibus tiiiintur Sp. 63, 4. •'use contingit. Exercise LXIII. {Based on Caes., De Bell. Gait., B. IF., cc. 20-2J ; revieiv exercise, to be done without the book). s- On the iifth day the member of staffs who had been sent ahead in a galley to ascertain the size'^ of the island and the character'^ of the tribes that inhabited it, returned to us. He had not dared to leave his ship or to entrust himself to men who^ were strangers to him and unacquainted with our ways ; but he had found a suit- able place for disembarkation. ^^\Ve waited, accordingly, till* the rest of the ships assembled at the rendezvous and then at a given signaP all the regfiments embarked. Wind and tide were both EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 287 :rase, sent kcter* I dared mgers suit- ll* the given both favorable, so we weighed anchor at once and set sail. The first ships of the fleet touched the shore of the island about ten o'clock and were brought to upon a smooth shore where the hills come down to the sea. ^STiy unus ex legatis. '^p. 32, i. ''p. 113, 4, and note, 'subjunc- tive ; p. 104, 6, (top), ^p. 48, 7 ; 51, I, 2. Exercise LXIV. {Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall.^ B. IV., cc. 24-2']). When^ the natives saw our ships approaching, they showed some excitement '^ but when our troops began to disembark, they were thoroughly alarmed. The sight, indeed, was an unusual one ;'' ships of war of great size coming to anchor on an unknown coast ; soldiers 4 in heavy armor leaping into the waves from the ships with alacrity and advancing towards the enemy. They would have retreated at once without*attacking us, but their chiefs, flinging themselves among them, exhorted them not'* to incur such a disgrace, saying jf '' Stand your ground, boldly comrades ; do your duty to us and your country." With this exhortation, they encouraged them to stand^ their ground and they began to discharge their spears upon our men, advancing through the waves and endeavoring to prevent the disembarkation. As soon, however, as^ we reached the land, they were put to flight and moved up the country. ^p. 107, 3. ^p. 60, 3. ^use compar. of imisitatus. *p. 139, i. ''p. 16, 3, note. ^p. 16, 1. ^p. 102, 4. Exercise LXV. {Based on Caes., Dc Bell. Gall., B. IV., cc. 24-2^; review exercise, to be done ivithout the book). The engagement was well contested^ by both the contending parties,'^ the enemy's cavalry coming-' up to the attack at full gallop* and standing their ground boldly. This was the one disadvantage we had :^ Our cavalry had not been able* to reach the island. Our artillery, however, stood us in good stead.' This arm the natives were quite unfamiliar with, and its strange appearance filled them with dismay. When orders were given^ to dislodge the enemy by a % 288 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. i discharge from the engines, they at once began to give ground ; and, wlien a general charge followed, they were put to flight, 'ihey laid the responsibility for this misfortune upon their lack of foresight. They begged that we would condone their attack upon us and grant them peace. 'p. 38, 2; 157, 4, {b). ''say ab uirisquc. 'use co-ord. vb. *use ad missis cquis^ p. 48, 7. *say this one thing was to us for a disadi'antagc ; p. 69, 8. ^change to a ///«/ clause ; p. 100, 8 'say "for a great assistance to us" ; 69, 8. ^p. 72, 10. Exercise LXVI. {Based on Cars., Dc Bell. Gall., B. JV.,cc. 24-27 j review exercise^ to be done wit /i out t/ie book). After this battle, the enemy sent an embassy to us to say* that they would give hostages and commit themselves and their states to our mercy. They acknowledged that they had arrested and thrown into prison the envoy whom we had sent ahead in a ship, charging'* them not' to go to war with us or attack us without good reason. They begged pardon for this act, the responsibility for which they laid at the door of the mob who are always inspired by over-zeal against those whom they fancy are the public enemies. They asked us to grant them* peace, promising that they would never make war^ upon us again. Our general ordered them to give* hostages, to summon all their chiefs from the remoter parts of the island, and to assemble within six days in our camp. He said that he would grant them peace, and he added a prayer to Heaven' that the arrangement might redound (173, 3) to the prosperity of all. 'p. 109, 2. '^co-ord. vb. 'p. 16, 3. *p. 16, i. ^p. 6, I. «p. 16, I, and note, 'use deos itnmortales contestari. Exercise LXVII. {Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. /F., cc. 28-J2). Up to this time there was 'no suspicion. Many of the native population were still in the fields and many were passing to and fro every day to the camp. It is well known that these people are always concerting new measures, but no one as yet suspected that they had actually formed a conspiracy to renew hostilities* and fiXBRCISES ON CAESAU. 289 )und ; flight. ick of upon i. vb. us for \ 'say vercisey iyi that tates to thrown larging* reason, ch they ver-zeal They d never :o give* jarts of -le said Heaven' y of all. 6p. i6, native and fro ople are :ted that ies^ and prevent us from' returning aj^ain to the island They were confident that, if they could intercept our supplies and i)rol()ng the struggle to the winter, not a single'' man of us would e\ er leave the camp. We ascertained that there had been a conference between their chiefs, as soon as they had heard of the wreck of our ships ; and we saw that the best thing to do* was to prepare to meet'' any contin- gency. Men were sent every day into the fields to collect'' corn ; the ships that had been knocked about by the high tides were refitted, the timber and iron of those that were of no use being applied to the purpose ; and all our men were gradually withdrawn from the fields into the camp. 'p. 12, 1 ; 44, 9, noic {a\ {c\ {(i). 'p. 22, 2. ^nc iinus quidem. *p. 42, 4. ^use ad. Exercise LXVIII. {Based on Caes.j De Bell. Gall., B. IV., cc. 2S-32 ; review exercise^ to be done ivithoiit the book). And now it was full moon and the eighteen ships, which were carrying the cavalry, weighed anchor and put to sea. When they left the harbor, the wind was light ; but they no sooner approached Britain than^ a storm arose which carried some of them back to the continent and the rest to the lower end of the island to the westward. These latter''^ came to anchor, but could not hold their ground. They would have been swamped, if they had not put out again to sea and made for the continent (123, iii, b). The same night, owing to the height of the tide — it is always highest at full moon — the galleys, which had been drawn up on the shore, and the merchant- men, which were riding at anchor, were so damaged by the waves that' they were quite unseaworthy. *say "as soon as they approached;" use qimm primum (p. 102, 4). 'use hie. 'p. 14, I. Exercise LXIX. {Based on Caes.y De Bell. Gall.., B. /F., cc. 28-^2; review exercise^ to be done without the book). The consternation^ of the army —the inevitable result'* — was universal. When we came to the island, we had no intention of \ . nil .:.Vll m 290 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. I wintcrin^^ there. No provision of corn had been made and n6 ba},f^f;i};o had been brought across by us. All the soldiers knew that several of the ships, which had carried over the army, were wrecked and that the rest were disabled, having lost their cables, anchors, and rigging The native chiefs observed our alarm. They had heard of the wreck of our ships. They fancied that, if they could prevent us from returning' to the continent, no one would ever invade them again. Accordingly, they began to collect cavalry and chariots to use* in war against us. There was one field in which the corn had not yet been cut ; and, thinking that we would come there soon to collect it, they hid themselves in a wood, which was near the field, intending to attack us, as soon as* we began to reap. *p. 38, 2 ; 157, 4, (fi). "say " which thing, or a thing which, inevi- tably happened," p. 9, g. "p. 22, 2. ♦p. 109, 2. ^p^ J02, 4. \ Exercise LXX. {Based on Cacs.^ De Bell. Gall.^ B. IV. ^ cc. 33-38). Meanwhile their envoys rode in every direction, proclaiming our numerical inferiority* and showing what a glorious opportunity of deliverance was now presented. They stated that our army would be easily overpowered by the multitude of the enemy ; that we had in camp only two legions and about thirty horse ; that we could not any longer sustain their attack in the field, and that if we were once defeated,'^ we had no place of refuge to which to retreat.' ^By these representations, they quickly collected a large number of horse and foot and chariots, and these took up their position before our camp. At first they sent a messenger to say that if we wished to escape with our lives, we must lay down our arms ; but, when we disregarded this order, they formed a circle round our camp* and discharged a shower of spears upon us. *say "the fewness of our soldiers"; co-ord. vb. ^p, 1^5, 2, note I. ^p. 109, 2, note. *p. 48, 4 ; 51, 2. EXERCISES ON CAKSAR. 291 Exercise LXXI. {Based on Cacs.^ I)c Bell, iiall.y li. /I'.j cc. JJ-jS ; m'iciij cxcnist\ to be done without the book). The Romans had formed a circle' and were defending- themselves to the best of their ability. I he unusual nature of the enemy's plan of attack caused us some confusion.' I heir infantry had com- pletely surrounded us,* and were pouring their darts upon us. Their cavaliy were dashing about in every direction, causing alarm by the mere speed of their movements. Hut what caused most apprehension was their chariots.^ With these, on a held of battle, they perform wonders, possessing, as they do,*' the activity of horse and the stability of foot. Our men for more than six hours offered a brave resistance ;^ but they would not have esciiped the danger, if our cavalry had not most oj)portunely come up to their assistance.^ As soon as they came in sight, the enemy began slowly to retreat ; our men left the tield with all speed" and were led back to camp. Their loss had been considerable (157, c). 'p. 48, 4 ; 51, 2. V8, 9, note. ''p. 60, 3. *p. 48, 4. ^emphatic position ; p. 177, 4, note. ^p. 106, 2 ; 177, 4, note. ^p. 38, 2 ; 157, 4, [b) ; 72, 10. 8p. 69, 8. 9p. 78, 9, note. i35» 2, Exercise LXXXI. {Based on Caes.^ De Bell. Gall., B. /F., cc. 33-38; review exercise.^ to be done without the book). The equinox was now near and our ships (as has been stated) were rather unseaworthy and unfit to be exposed to wintry weather. We were all therefore of the opinion that we ought to set sail^ at once, if we wished^ to reach the continent again in safety.^ On the following day, therefore, at midnight we set out, after burning our camp. The same misfortune overtook us as before. Some of our ships were unable to make the same port as the rest, but were carried down the coast. The troops on these ships landed safely ; but they would have fallen into the enemy's power, if we had not marched to their aid* with all speed. A public thanksgiving in honor of our achievements was voted by parliament. But of all the states which had been lecjuired to send hostages, only two va, 292 LATIN IMIOSE COMPOSITION. i all complied with the demand. The rest were of the opinion that our withdrawal was (inai. 'p. 45» 2. ■''p. 1.35. 2, (i). 'p. 165, 2, (a). *p. 69, 8. Exercise LXXIII. {flased on Cacs.^ De Hell. Gall.^ /?. F., cc. J-j). That winter we had* a lar^e number of new ships built. They were all broader than the kind we use (8, 2) on our own seas, and lower in the gunwale, because the waves in those parts are not so high as in other seas. The material needed' for rigging them was brought from Spain. All the states, which had been ordered' to furnish ships showed great zeal ; and, by the day appointed, they all reached the rendezvous.* Those who were in charge of their con- struction,^ received high praise* from our chief. He said that as soon as the ships were loaded (128, 4) we would start from the continent, and that in a few days all preparations would be made. *p. 46, 6. "p. 161, I. 'p. 16, I and note ; 72, 10. *usc adv. eo (to that place) quo. . . ; 32. I. * 157, c. Exercise LXXIV. . {Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall.^ B. F., cc. ijj review exercise., to be done without the book). Some of the chiefs were filled with alarni (157, c) at our arrival and hid themselves in' a neighboring wood, from which they wasted the province by their forays. When word of this was brought us,' we sent an envoy to them to ascertain^ the motive* (use cur) of their revolt and to tell them that unless"* they continued in their allegiance, we would harass them with war. They declared that they were ready to make amends in every possible (use possum) way ; that their error (use vb.) had been due to lack of foresight, and that they would entrust themselves — if we wished* — to our honor and come into camp. */«withacc. ''p. 48, 7; 51, 2. ^p, 109, 2. *p. 32, i. *p. 131, 1,(2) ; 135, 2, note 1. Exercise LXXV. (Based on Cacs., De Bell. Gall.^ B. V., cc. 4-7). These chiefs are very fond of power and always eager for political change. We decided therefore to take* them with us. Many of »n thrvt They IS, and not so im was :rcd' to they all jir con- as soon itinent, adv. eo arrival wasted ; us,'^ we of their ;giance, ey were y ; that nd that nor and 1,1,(2); )olitical [any of EXKIUM8KS ON CAKSAR. 293 th'j.ii were indignant ; but none of them ventured to utter a protest (157, c) thou),'h someof thcin had 110 friendly disposition towards us. Some said that they were unused'' to sailin^^ and afraid' of the sea ; others that they were citizens of a free coun'ry and onj^ht^not to be compelled to go on board ships unless they wished.* Kntreaties,* however, were of no avail ; we decided that" all must embark, and embark they did. \Vc were afraid to leavi-^ them behind, thinking that," in our absence (ubl. afiy.), their infatuation could not be kept within bounds. >p. 17, 5, note. "p. 4S, 4. ^P- ^3^ 3, i»>te. ♦p. 131, 1,(2). ^preces *p. 17, 5. ^p. 18, 3, note 2. ''p. 49, 10 ; 113, 2, 3. Exercise LXXV'I. (Based on Cacs.^ De Bell. Call., B. K, cc. 4-/ ; review exercise ^ to be done witliout the book). And now our preparations' were complete and the ships were all ready for sailing. Our chief, though he saw the good-will of the soldiers towards himself, thinking (49, 10) that they ought to receive some exportation,'' called both horse and foot together and addressed them as follows (use haec): " \'ou will find, soldiers, that I have taken precautions to prevent' any harm coming to you. You are embarking in summer and in most favorable weather. All the states have sent us the ships* they were ordered to send us ; all the chiefs of an unfriendly turn^ I have decided to take along vvith me. So I have no fear of any disturbance* during our absence.* Let no one fear"' the sea ; I will take care that all your ships reach the harbor and that you are taken across in safety (use adj).'''' »p. 157, 4 (4 ''p. 33, 3, note. 3p. J 2, 2, note; 13, 5- *P- 8, 2. ^p. 62, I. «p. 52, 4- 'P- 26, 3. Exercise LXXVII. {Based on Caes.., De Bell. Gall.., B. V., cc. S-ii). The enemy then fled from the place and hid themselves in' a wood which they at once proceeded (say bei^any to fortify that night, cutting down {co-ord. vb.) a number of trees' and with them closing ^11 avenues of approach to the wood. These preparations (161, i) our ^.^ 294 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. h f general heard of from the prisoners of war and ascertaining* the enemy's position,^ he made all haste (vh.) to dislodge them from their works. He landed his army in front of their fortifications (4S, 4) and raised a mound against it. This they endeavored to prevent" and they defended themselves with admirable courage, fighting from their works and seeking to repulse the legions. We spent a great ):)art of the day in fighting, but at sunset we carried the position and the enemy once more fled and dispersed to their homes.'' Hise in with ace. ^p^ 1^2, 6. ^p. 48, 7 ; 51, 2. *p. 49, lo. ^p. 32, I. «p. 18, 3. ^p. 83, 5. Exercise LXXVIII. (Based on Oh's., Dc Bell. Gall.; B. J\, cc S-ii; rcvie'iv exercise, to he done lu if ho 11/ ihc book). There he learned to his alarm' that about forty ships had been stranded by a violent storm during the previous night (85, i)and he saw that he must desist from his advance (45, 4) and return to the shore. On his return (vb.), he ascertained that many of the ships could be repaired, but that, though it would be an undertaking^ of enormous labor, many new ones would have to be built.^ He made his preparations (157, c) at once. All the ships that were lying at their moorings he ordered' to be beached and strongly fortified, and all the forces, foot and horse, to be recalled to camp. Bands of mechanics were summoned from the maritime states to cut down^ trees and to begin operations. A member of staff was put in charge of the whole work. *use perterrifus. ^p. 59, 2 ; 158, (//). ^p. 45, 4. *p. 16, 1 and note. ^p. 1 10, 3. Exercise LXXIX. {Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. F., cc. 12-1^). Most of the people in this island are dressed in skins and stain their bodies with woad which gives them a more terrific appearance in battle. They sow corn, but their diet is' mainly flesh and milk. There is fine timber on the island ; and tin and iron occur in small quantities. They export large numbers of cattle. The climate is milder and the cold less intense than in Gaul. Several smaller % EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 295 ig* the 1 from cations )red to Durage, 3. We carried o their [O. 5p 'xerasCy ad been ) and he n to the le ships king^ of lo made lying at "ortified, Bands dovvn^ charge 3, 1 and id stain earance d milk, n small imate is smaller islands lie near, both towards the south and towards the north. In these latter, as some writers assort (13S, 4), it is dark in midwinter for thirty days at a time ;'" but whether this is true or not (30, i). I have not been able to ascertain. Of all the people in the island — and the population is very large — those that inhabit Kent are said to be the most civilised. The ships of all nations touch here. ^p. 157, 4, {c). ^use cent inn us. Exercise LXXX. {Based on Cues., De Bell. GalL.B. V.^cc. 12- 1§; rcvieiv exercise,, to be done witJiout tJie hook). In battle they show great spirit and daring ( 1 57, c) and often broke through the middle of our line. They used to station themselves on hills or in the wood and then, suddenly dashing out' and charging us, they often inflicted considerable loss upon our men who were a good deal intimidated by the novelty of their attack. When we retired, they followed us with great eagerness, and though we always repulsed them, in the end we were not superior in every particular.^ Those that inhabit the inland parts show more boldness in action than those who live upon the sea coast. ^p, 4.9, 10. "^ s-A.^ in omnibus parti bus. Exercise LXXX I. {Based on Cues., De Bell. Gall., B F., cc. 16-21). Not far from this was a spot which had already been fortified by them with a rampart and ditch and lay (use sum ; 170, 8) in the middle of a wood. This was then- rendezvous' and to it they drove a large number of cattle. Such a place is what they call a "town '' in those parts. Here, after a short delay (157, c), we slowly followed them, plundering'^ and devastating the country as much as possible on our march and inflicting great injury upon the people, many of whom were put to the sword. They did not venture to engage us, for they would not have been able lo sustain the attack of the legions (120, 2). They betook themselves to flight and with so much alarm that they (Hd not halt till" they reached the river. This they at once croi)3ed. ^^(iy all assembled io ih'it plaee (eo). ^co-ord. verb. ^ 105, 8, note. M v \ 296 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. Exercisf: LXXXII. {Based on Caes.^ De BeU. Gall., B. V.^ cc. 16-21 ; review exercise^ to be done without the book). (a) To them we sent an envoy who made the following represen- tations (use dico and pron.) ; " Unless you surrender, nothing will prevent us from laying (22, 2) your country waste. You will not be able to sustain our attack: and you : will not escape death by flight. If you lay aside all hope of carrying on the struggle, if you surren- der and give hostages, we will not storm your towns or injure your lands ; and, as far as possible, we engage to protect you from the violence of the soldiery. If you refuse (nolo), we can ford your streams and march through your most impassable woods and nothing shall prevent you all from being put to the sword." (b) Put in oblique narration from 'Unless" ; p. 127-134. EXERCISK LXXXIII. {Based on Cacs.^ De Bell. Gall.., B. K, cc. 22-26). Word was brought to the King, who had now been three years upon the throne,^ that his enemies had resolved to take his life. He had been compelled to pay tribute and give hostages to Rome^ ; he had seen his territory devastated, ships sailing from the continent and landing troops before his towns, and an enemy wintering on his borders. And now he was informed that the states considered him the author^ of all these evils and they had resolved to heal them by taking his life. P'caring (49, 10), therefore, that the insurrection was wide-spread, and that the troops he commanded (8, 2) would revolt, he despaired of success ; and ordering a galley to be launched, he sailed the same night for the continent. The ship was cast away in a storm and never came to land. *say who was no%v reigning the third year. 'p. 162,4. ^use causa. Exercise LXXXIV. {Based on Caes,, De B?ll. Gall., B. F., cc. 22-26; review exercise, to be done without the book). That year, owing to the drought^ of the summer, the corn crop was short, and how to find a remedy against the scarcity of supplies EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 297 'use (45> 4 ; 3o> was not very easy to see. He sent out envoys with orders 2 to the states to collect as much corn for him as they possibly could ; and, at the same time, he made ready to transport some of the legions back to the continent. The equinox was approaching and very little of the summer remained. But it so happened that some of the ships had been lost in a storm and he had to wait until twenty-five new ones were built (45, 4 ; 104, 6). When they saw that we intended to go into winter quarters, the enemy made a sudden attack upon our camp ; but we made a sally upon them, and, after^ the loss of their King, they withdrew their forces. *use pi. siccitates; 163, 6. -p. 109, 2. 'p. 52, 6. Exercise LXXXV. {Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. V., cc. 27 -jo). The matter was laid before a council of war at which he made the following address : " I am under the deepest obligation ^ to Rome'' and I wish to show my gratitude. She has freed me from the tribute I was in the practice of paying my neighbors. I am not so destitute of experience as^ to trust that I can overthrow her armies. That is scarcely credible. She has made war upon all Gaul and upon all Germany and no one is able to resist her or sustain the attack of her legions. I satisfied my love for my country when I attacked your camp ; I now wish to consult for the safety of your soldiers. I promise that they shall have a safe conduct through my territory. The time for consultation is brief. What can be more frivolous than, by neglecting this danger,* to perish in the end either by the sword or by hunger.?" ^use piiirimumdchcre. '^ p. 162, 4. ^p. 14, i ; 15. *p. 48, 7 ; 51,2. Exercise LXXXVI. {Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. V., cc. 27 -jo; review exercise^ to be done ivithoiit the book). Turn into obli((ue narration the address given in Exercise LXXXV. 11 T 298 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. Exercise LXXXVII. (Based Of I Cues., Dc Bell. Gall.^ B. V., cr. j/-jj). At midnight the council of war broke up and orders were sent through the whole camp^ to march at dawn. No precautions were taken, but rather every device employed to increase the danger- The natives'^ showed no such lack of judgment. When, from the din borne upon the night air, they observed that we were on the point of evacuating our camp, they placed an ambush in a suitable position and awaited our arrival. No sooner'' had our column disappeared in the valley through which the route lay, than^ the enemy showed themselves on every side and attacked us both in front and rear. The order was given to abandon the baggage — an order* which was attended with unfortunate results.^ It made the enemy more eager for the fray and caused our men to leave their standards that they might secure their valuables. ^P- ^'3> 3- ^use dardnrl. ^qiiuin primiim; p. 102,4. ^ id quod or quae res; p. 9, 9. ^ say happened unluckily Exercise LXXXVIII. {Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall.,B. V.,cc. 31-33; review exercise ., to be done without the book). When the enemy appeared, our general showed a good deal of perturbation,^ hurrying^ hither and thither and making^ what seemed to be the necessary dispositions. f^e gave orders that no one should leave his post ; he said that we were a match for the enemy whether^ in courage or'' numerical strength ; Fortune (he averred)^ had not deserted us ; that there was still a field left for valor to display itself. He exhorted the men merely to hurl their spears and not come to close cjuarters with the enemy and to attend to all orders with care. The battle raged* from early dawn till night. Every soldier did his duty ; but we were compelled at last to abandon our camp and baggage 'use historical infinitive ; p. 55, 4. '^ct....et. "''p. 138,4. *p. iS7,b. EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 29D Exercise LXXXIX. {Based on Cucs.^ Do Bell. Call., B. I'., a: 36-46). After gaining this victory, the insurgents (use hostes) were confident that they would be able to cflect their own freedom and take vengeance upon Rome for all the wrongs they had received at her hands.' Envoys were sent to all their bands who had taken refuge in the forest, with the announcement- that the Roman army which was wintering among them could be surprised and cut off without difficulty, and to exhort all to collect'' and take vengeance upon Rome.' 1 he bands were easily persuaded* and a great force was assembled in front of our camp. They made an instant attack upon us, calling out, as they approached, that, if we laid down our arms, quarter (157, ^) would be given to all.* Some, in despair, rushed from the camp and were cut down by the enemy. The rest offered a brave resistance and maintained their position till night- fall. 'say "done by the Romans": subjective genitive, p. 62, 3. 2p. 109, 2. *p. 16, I. *p. 72, 10. Exercise XC. {Based on Caes.^ De Bell. Gall.., B. F., cc. 41-44), One of these chiefs addressed our general in the following words: "You have made a brave fight and it is impossible to decide (in, b, note) which of our armies is to be preferred to the other as far as courage goes {abl.; 177, 4 note). But many of your men have fallen ; nearly all are wounded ; you are surrounded and no one can possibly' bring you aid. Why wait (pn^s. ind.) till all have fallen.? We will allow you to leave your camp unharmed and to march where you will." To this our general made the following brief reply (157, c) : "It is not our custom"-^ to accept terms of peace from an enemy with arms in his hands ; if you will desist from hostilities and depart to your homes, I promise that all your demands shall be complied with. But you must give up (reddo) all your prisoners of war, as a guarantee of good faith." 'use nee fieri potest ut quisqiiam. ^p. 59, 2 ; 158, (//). ■sfL I 306 LATIN PllOSR COMPOSITTOJJ. ! : ExEkciSK XCI. {Based on Cacs.^De Bell. G(i?l.,B. V., cc. 41-44', review exercise^ to he done loithout the boolc). Turn into indirect narration the speeches of Exercise XC. ; see p. 131 and 134. Exercise XCII. {Based 071 Caes.^ J)e Bell. Gall., B. F., cc. 43-49). Matters had now reached such a pitch that there were not men enough to man the walls. The enemy's attack was becoming more and more dangerous every day, and we began to be afraid that we should not be able to get a letter to the general in his winter quar- ters (83, 6) to inform him of our danger. There was in the camp a Gallic slave who had often before proved his fidelity to us and was known to be possessed of great courage. This slave was induced by the promise of freedom, to carry a letter through the hostile lines, although the envoys, who had already been sent out, had without exception,^ been taken and tortured to death. The letter was written in Greek characters, with the idea of preventing'^ the enemy from learning our plans in case he intercepted the envoy. The messenger passed through the besiegers'^ camp without exciting suspicion ; and, within five days, we saw from our camp by the smoke of the conflagrations they spread,* that our army was marching towards us. ^rel.; 159, k. *omit ; ^otnnes ad tminn. p. 187, I, end. ^p. 12, 2, and note. Exercise XCIII. {Based on Caes.., De Bell. Gall., B. V., cc. 43-49 j review exercise^ to be done without the book). About five o'clock in the afternoon, word was brought him of the massacre of our army (157, c). On the following day at dawn, he set out from his camp and advanced by forced marches into the enemy's territory, marching at the rate of twenty miles every day.^ He sent an envoy to the besieged with the news that he was on his way and would soon come up to their aid.^ When the enemy ascertained infor- mation of his advance, they at once raised the siege and turned exercise^ KC. ; see not men ing more I that we ter quar- B camp a and was induced s hostile out, had he letter ting2 the le envoy. without camp by rmy was *omit ; exercise^ jht him allowing ivanced ling at ivoy to would d infor- l turned EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 301 all their forces upon him, thinking that they ought not to delay till' all the legions should collect. They were descried in the morning from our camp. They were not less than sixty thousand strong and had taken up their position on the other side of a valley, where it would have been a somewhat hazardous proceeding for us, con- sidering the unfavorable character of the ground, to make an attack upon them. Our men, when they saw them, at once withdrew behind the rampart with great affectation of alarm. Inside the camp all might be seen hurrying to and fro. Some were advancing (55, 4) to fortify the rampart, others hastening to deliberate what plan* of defence (use defend©) they should adopt. The enemy accordingly were filled with contempt for us, and allured by these artifices, they crossed the stream at dawn and drew up their forces before the gates of our camp. But, before they hurled a spear, they sent a crier round the camp to proclaim that, if any one wished to come over to them, he was free to come till nine o'clock. When this hour had passed, they began their attack. We held out till midnight and then they beat a retreat. But the courage with which they managed the affair may be in- ferred from the fact that cvery^ tenth man was left dead upon the field. ^say "a journey of twenty miles eveiy day being completed" (conficio). 2 p. 69, 8. •''p. 104, (top). *p. 32, i. ^p. 96, 6, {c). Exercise XCIV. {Based on Caes.^ De Bell. Gall., B. V., cc. 4S-4Q; review exercise^ to be done without the book). When he reached the camp, he was filled with admiration and praised all — both commander and soldiers — as their gallant conduct had deserved. Thereupon, he called a meeting of the whole army at which he told them that their valor had been most conspicuous and that, through the kindness of Heaven, both their own sorrow and the rejoicing of the enemy had not been ol long duration. All the Roman forces (he said)^ would at once be led back into winter quarters ; the uprising had been so serious that he himself would have to winter with them without'^ returning as usual that year to Italy. No day passed without some message of an uprising being brought to him. On the following day (he 11 302 LAtiN fROSE COMPOSITIOI^. i ^ I . said) ho would pursue the enemy, as he had just learned from the prisoners of war that they were now twenty miles away. ^p. 138,4. 'p. 140, I. EXERCISK XCV. {leased on Cues., Dc Bell. Gall.^ />. F., cc.34.-3S). After the completion of this business, they sent ambassadors to the nations across the Rhine. These proclaimed everywhere that we had lost the friendship of all tiieir states ; that a great part of our army had been cut to pieces ; that the reinforcements we had sent for had not arrived and that without them we would not tempt Fortune again in the field. At the same time, they promised large rewards of money to all who should cross the river and join them. Not a single state yielded to their persuasions (157, c) and the am- bassadors returned to their states. These states, though baulked in their expectations, resolved nevertheless to prepare for war with Rome (162, 4). They had been the first to make war^ upon her before, and they enjoyed great influence with their countrymen in consequence,'^ being considered superior in courage to all the rest of the states that lie beyond the Rhine. *p. II, 2. "^ws.^ ifaquc ox quamobnm. Exercise XCVI. {Based on Cacs., Dc Bell. Gall., B. VI., cc. 16). That winter a levy of troops was held in the city and four new legions were organized.' It was of the utmost importance to the country (64,4) that the loss we had sustained should be repaired ; and we felt that, in order to teach the barbarians what wonders (169, 2) the resources of Rome could achieve, the number of cohorts should be doubled or at least increased. We knew that they would not soon desist from their preparations and we were determined to march against them before'-^ they could muster their forces. We hoped in this way to be able to fire their villages and, getting possession of their cattle, to force them to surrender, or at any rate,^ despairing of safety, to take refuge in their swamps and woods. Accordingly, our army entered their territory by forced marches in three divisions and EXERCISES ON CAESAR. 303 >ur new ) to the d ; and 169, 2) should ot soon march )ped in sion of ring of ly, our ns and before they could send word to their troops to assemble at the rendezvous (use co quo)^ we began to lay waste their lauds, tiling {co-ortL v/>.) their houses and slaughtering their cattle. The enemy sent an embassy to pray* for pardon* and were ordered to furnish hostages. The soldiers made an enormous amount of booty. *use active : p. 168, i. 2p_ 104,8. ^ccr/e. *p. 109,2. * p. 72, 10. EXERCISK XCVII. {Based on Cacs.^ J)c Bell. Gall.^ B. T/., cc. 1-6; rci'ieiv exercise, to be done ivithouf the book). Word was brought us that all these states were making preparations foi war and plotting with their neighbors. It was ascertained that they intended (53, i)to meet us in l)attle and that they had promised money and booty to all who would join them. But, before^ their arrangements were completed, we suddenly marched into their territory. Some of their forces took refuge (157, c) in the towns ; others sought the protection of the forest. The rest asked for and obtained peace. No state ventured to meet us in the field. The whole business was pushed through with such speed that our army was led back into winter quarters before some of the insurgent^ states had received word that we had reached the point at which they had been ordered to assemble. *p. 104, 8 ; 157, c. *say "the states which had renewed the war," Exercise XCVIII. {Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. VL, cc. y-io). The enemy's strength was such that our general did not wish to fight, unless he could catch them on disadvantageous ground. But he hoped that their rashness would soon give him an opportunity of engaging them in such a position. iJctween the two armies lay a river with steep banks ;' here he pitched his camp and waited, in the hope that the enemy would cross. At the same time, in order to inspire them with the suspicion that we were afraid, he resorted to the following stratagem : He announced in camp that he would not expose himself to risk by attacking such a large force with such a small one. Word of this was at once \ it i rrr ii^ 304 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. carried to the enemy's chieftains and, next morning at dawn, raisin^'' a loud sliout, they drew ip tiieir line in front of our camp, intend- ing to attack us with all their forces.' ^usead/.; p. 62, i. ^p^ ^j^ 2. ^p. 53, i. Exercise XCIX. (Based on Caes.^ De Bell. Gall.^ B. ]'/., cc. 7-10; review exercise y to he done without the book). Our general had suspected that such would be the result,* and, after a brief exhortation' to the army, he led all his forces out of the encampment. Twb squadrons of horse were detached to guard the baggage-' ; the rest of the cavalry was posted on the wings. Though the ground was so unfavorable to the enemy, they did not hesitate to engage us ; but calling out (clamo) to each other that we were on the point of retreating and that all preparations had been already made for decamping, they attacked us, foot and horse. We calmly advanced, hurling our spears.^ They were at once put to flight, and, retreating, sought the shelter of the adjacent* forest. The innocent and guilty alike were punished. We gave no quarter. Their loss was enormous. *use verb. '^p. 69, 8. ^ p. 51, 2. * p. 169, 4. Exercise C. {Based on Cues., De Bell. Gall.., B. F/., cc. 11-14). Held in high honor by all, these clergy' see large numbers of young men flocking to them from all parts for education — some voluntarily, others sent by their parents or guardians — and they often remain under instruction for twenty^ years. The young men obey the decrees of the priest while they remain under his instruction. He teaches a good deal about the world and the stars, and the universe, thinking that from this subject the young men will learn much of the power of God. They are persuaded,^ too, to give some attention to literature and to learn by heart verses of poetry in their youth. They must learn the verses by heart on the ground that if you trust too much to the written letter, you will weaken your memory. It is supposed that their system of education was invented EXEKCISRS OV CAKSAR. 305 in Britain and transplanted to tlic continent. Those who seek a tnorough actiiiaintance witii it, resort to the former country. ^\XSG druidcs. 'use distributive numeral, "'p. 72, 10. FIXEKCISF, CI. {Based on Cues., Dt: Bell. G,d/.^ B. 17., cc. 11-14; review exercise ^ to be done loitliout the book). The rights of the commons in this country are not highly regarded. The common people are foiuid in the army anil are not excused' from military service ; but they are not admitted to the council of the nation. They pay taxes and are almost crushed by them ; but if they venture on any enterprise on their own resijonsibilily, they are considered to have committed^ a crime. A noble has nearly the same power over them that a master has over his slaves. They have therefore been in the habit, from time immemorial, of joining themselves to some of the greatest of the nobles that they nuiy not be altogether without assistance. When they are loaded with debt, they are often made over to him like slaves. When a dispute arises between the commons and the nobility, it is decided by the nobility ; and, if the commons do not submit, they are excluded^ from the religious functions of the nation. *say, "nor do they have e.xemption." '^use admitio. ^use in- terdico. Exercise CIl. {Based on Caes.yDe Bell. Gall., B. VI. ^ cc. 13-20). Every knight, In proportion to his rank, surrounds himself with a large number of retainers. '^ These all take part^-as is well known — in war, which is an event of almost yearly occurrence. But they have instituted the monstrgus practice of human sacrifices and the knights often offer up their retainers^ alive as victims to the gods. When a man is very ilP or when he is about to be exposed to serious danger,' he vows to offer life for life, it being thought that such a gift is pleasing to Heaven — though how they can imagine such a thing, I do rfot know. The victims are placed in images of wicker-work and burned to death. At the decease of any personage of dis- rpr- ?06 LATIN PROSK COMPOSITION. tfnj^iiishcd rank, they usually pile upon the llaines not only other hviii^' thiii^^s which tlic dead man loved in Ufc, hut also certain of his slaves and retainers. ^cHcntcs. 'use ntor/x) (ij/ixiiiv ('. /'/., cc. /S-2o; review exercise, to he done loii/ioitt the hook). One good custom that they have established by law, is this : No one IS allowed to speak on politics unlcs-; in the national assembly. The reason they gi\c is, that (as they say)' men are often driven to crime when they hear others discussing j)olitical subjects ; and they consider it a scandal (adj.) that this should be a matter of constant occurrence. If any one lays'^ before a magistrate any information he has received from hearsay, that magistrate may either conceal it, if it seems good to him, or bring it before the assembly. These people do not neglect commerce ; they believe that it brings in large returns to a nation, and tends (est with Kcn.; 59, 2) to the acquisition of wealth,' making* it possible to bear the burdens of war. Accord- ingly they hold that Mercury, the god of trade, is supi'eine among the gods. 'p. 138, 4. "^referre. ^ 157, c ; 43, 7. "'co-ord. vb. Exercise CTV. {Eased on Caes.^ l)j .'ie/f. Gall., B. VI.,cc. 2i-2g). These people differ considerably from others. They have no clergy to preside at religious functions ; and they do not believe in any gods they cannot see. War is the only thing they give any attention to. They do not care for agriculture. No man has land of his own ; every year the chiefs assign a definite allotment to each individual ; but, a year after, he must go elsewhere. The rich have no thought of acquiring large estates or of evicting the humble from their holdings ; and the humble are kept in contentment^ because they cannot see wealth greater than their own. These men do not build cities, though they use small houses as a protection^ against cold. They train their young men for war from EXKU(;iSKS ON CAKSAll. 30i' ;e no ;ve in any land nt to rich mble nent^ 'hese as a from childhoocP by the hunt and the foray, excellence (157, f) in which iu a great source of credit. ^animi acquitas. "^ws^ causa \\\\.\\ i^truHt/hu'. *a putris. KXKKCisi: CV. {Based on Caes.y Do IhiL (hiU.^ Ji. I'l., a: 21 •2(); revic7v exercise^ to be done without the book). This fertile track (he said) extends' a nine days' journey parallel with the stream ; then it runs for the same distance to the left, .'n it dwells a nation well known to fame and enjoying a high re[)utation for justice and rugged endurance. These men think that it is th^ chief part of virtue to live in poverty and contentment ; they have no wealth and no desire for it. They have no knowledge of the luxuries^ that come from over sea, and are the occasion of so much dissension among other nations. They are never the aggres- sors in war, though they can defend themselves when war is made upon them. But from the fact that a vast wilderness surrounds (say is round) their territory, they enjoy considerable immunity from war. "^w^ft ;p(riere, "^res; 161, 2. Exercise CVI. {Based on Caes., Dc Bell. Gall.^ B. VI. j cc. 21-2Q). From childhood' they are inured to toil, it being thought (say think- ing) that toil increases the strength and stature and steels the sinews. They dress in skins and live mostly on flesh and milk. Once th^y used to send out colonies beyond the Rhine, but now they see the colonies of other races settling among them. Their chief delight is hunting and they have a wood there which surpasses in size all woods we know. It is the haunt of many species of wild beasts, many of which differ in form and habits from those known to us. The stag seen in this wood has taller antlers than our stag. It can not lie down ; if it is knocked- dcnvn by any accident, it cannot rise. There, too, dwells the wild ox, which is as large as an elephant and has the strength of the bull and the speed of the stag. ^apueris. ''use ajjligo. ;3> ¥J. 308 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. ;, 1 i I ;! ! Exercise CVII. {Based on Cues., Dc Bell. Gall., B. VI., cc. 2g-j4). And now the enemy were dispersed in every direction and were imal)le to defend themselves. Most of them had sought refuge (i 57,0) in the forest, retreated into impassable mora:^ ses, or concealed them- selves in islands formed by the tide. They no longer had any thought^ of settling the issue in the field ;'' all their hopes of inflict- ing injury on us were now centred in laying secret ambuscades and in preventing us from entering their woods in a solid body and surrounding their scattered bands. This was the only plan they could form for escaping death and extirpation. The minds of all our soldiers (especially the recent levies) were burning for revenge, and precaution had to be exercised to prevent'* their eagerness for slaughter from luring them too far into the woods. The hope of booty called out many of the natives themselves from the adjacent states. These surrounded the woods in large numbers and plundered all of their countrymen who were killed. ^use cogitarc. '-^say to fight it out in battle, ^p. 12, 2, note. Exercise CVIII. {Based on Caes., De Bell. Gall., B. VI., cc. 35-44). Fortune has a wonderful influence' in war. 'I he enemy — as already shown— had dispersed in every direction, and our legions were marching through the land, laying waste their fields. Word of this was carried to the Germans beyond the Rhine, and, lured by the hope of booty, one of their band crossed the river, some thirty miles below the bridge. There they secured a large number of cattle which they hid in a wood.'^ Thence they at once advanced upon the Roman camp before which they suddenly appeared at a time when most of the men were three miles away coilectmg corn. The camp was defended with the greatest difficulty, and it was not till after many of them hiid fallen that they abandoned the attack. Thus these Germans, who had crossed the river to invade Gaul, really conferred a kindness upon the Gauls by almost destrovin^ a Roman camp. ^mtdtum valere. ^'usc in with acg. EXERCISES ON LIVY. 309 EXERCISES ON LIVY. Exercise I. {Based on Ln>y, II XXI, cc. i and 2). When the African war was over,^ Carthage (p, 162,4) transferred her army to Spain, where, under the generalship of the high- spirited^ Hamilcar, she extended her dominions, not by arms, but by policy. She did not attack the Spanish nations but won them over through the friendship of their chiefs. Thus new tribes joined her empire and increased her power and resources. It was clear, however, that all those years she was meditating war with Rome. The loss-' of Sicily and the cession of Sardinia galled her rulers who knew (scio) that she had been subjected to rapacious and tyrannical exactions (use imperito^ order; p. 38, 3) by Rome. The imposition of the tribute and the seizure ot Sardinia were especially galling to Hamilcar who would have,* at the earliest opportunity, invaded Italy himself, if his death had not postponed the war, »p. 52, 6. «p. 3, 8 ; 62, I. 8p. 50, 14. *p. 123, III. \ Exercise II. (Based on Lh>y, B. XXI^ cc. J-j). The iicn3,e; appointed Hannibal to the command of the army in 5p7- 'p. i6, 5. »p. 16, I. Exercise VI. {Based on Livy^ B. 21, c. 7 ; rc^'iciv exercise^ to be do7ic without the book). In the midst of these preparations and deliberations' at the capi- tal (say ciiy)^ the enemy Ijegan his operations, attacking (use co-ord. vb.) the place in three divisions and planting his batteries opposite an angle of the wall where the ground sloped down into the open valley. His first attempts met with poor success. The point attacked was defended by a large fort, a great height of wall, and a picked body of troops. The besieged'^ were even encouraged to make a sally upon the enemy's pickets and siege-works ; and in the skirmish that ensued, their loss {I'b.) was not numerically greater (use plures) than that of the enemy. The general, himself, in- cautiously approaching (use diivi) too near the wall, received a spear wound in the thigh^ — a disaster which (161, 2) almost led to a general* abandonment^ of the works. * p. 161, I. ^p. 142, 8. ^acc. ; this is a poetical construction used by Livy with adjs., but not by Caes. or Cic. It is called the ace. of spccijiaition. ^^^y all. ^ p. 50, 14, ill !i nthoi'* >, who It was Lome. Exercise VII. {Based on Livy^ B. 2t^*cc. 8-10; review exercise^ to be done without the book). From Spain the embassy went straight to Carthage, to plead' the Roman cause in the Carthaginian senate. ihey represented''' that Hannibal had already broken the treaty by capturing the towns of \Wv 312 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. the allies of Rome, and tampering with peaceful states. They warned the senate that it was the walls of Carthage that he was battering with his engines. It was clear that, if the senate wished to please R j.Tie,' they must* surrender Hannibal. Some were of the opinion that an embassy should be sent to apologise to the Roman senate ; but it was thought by the majority that such an embassy would be unsuccessful. *p. 44, note, '^use say. ^p. 135 ; p. 162, 4. *p. 45, 4. Exercise VIII. {Based 0/ j;. _;•, B. 21, cc. 8-10 ; revieiu exercise^ to be done without the book). Meantime the people of the town had ofifered a brave and unex- pected resistance,^ and their spirits rose accordingly. But there was no cessation' of hostilities (arma). One side (hi) was fired with hope ; the other with despair. The one party believed that if they put forth some effort, they would take the town ; the other would not give ground, because it was seen'^ tliat, if they allowed them to enter the place,^ the Carthaginians would take vengeance upon the town for its brave resistance (use quia ; 113, 2). The defenders,* however, were unable to defend their whole wall because of the superiority of the enemy in numbers (use pliires) ; and it was soon battered down at many points by the ram. *p. 157, c. '■^use nppCireo for pass, of video. ^ p. 135, 2, 2, («) ; get the direct narration first. * use townsmen ; p. 187, 2. f!i ;i Exercise IX. {Based oji Livy, B. 21^ cc. ti-ij). The ramparts resounded with confused cries, but no one knew in what direction to carry assistance.' The engines stripped the walls of their defenders, and, on the side where they had not been cemented with mortar, the pick-axe was slowly undermining them from below. Seizing'^ an elevated position inside the city, the enemy had surrounded it with a wall ; and thus they had a fort in the heart of the town, Scarcity of supplies was growing greater EXERCISES ON Livy. 313 y warned battering please J opinion 1 senate ; vould be ' without nd unex- here was red with it if they IX would them to ipon the fenders,* e of the ^as soon J, 2, {a) ; le knew •ped the lot been ig them ity, the I fort in greater every day, and the prospect of help from abroad' was growing every day less. Their only hope was far away. Thinking that there should be no longer delay, Hannibal gave the signal for a general attack, and in a moment carried the city. No quarter* was given. All the booty fell to the soldiers. ^ p. 24, d; p. 30, 3. The subjunctive here must do double duty : it expresses (a)\\\Q indir. ciues,, ib) the delib. ques. '^p. 49, 10. 'adj.; Eng. phrases of place and time are often expressed by adjs. * use parcoj y2, 10. Exercise X. {Based on Livy^ B. 21, cc. ii-ij ; review exercise^ to be done without the book). There was one man among Hannibal's soldiers who thought that he ought (45, 4) to try and realise (tempto, make trial of) this hope of peace. He knew that tears would have no influence' with the cruel Carthaginian ; but he hoped that the .Saguntines, seeing"'' their town almost in the hands of the enemy, would accept even the severe conditions of peace offered them. He accordingly approached the town before the eyes of all, gave up his sword to the sentry, and crossed the lines. He told the senate, before which he was conducted, that resistance' was no longer possible (11 r, 6, f, note), and he stated the demands' the enemy made. " He asks you," he said, " to make restitution to the Turdetani ; to give up all your gold and silver, and to leave your city and build another where he shall bid you " {fut. per-/') »p. 157, c. 2 p. 49, 10. Exercise XI. {Based o?t Livy., B, 21, cc. 16-20). When word was brought to Rome of the sack of Saguntum, there was universal (use omnes) excitement and confusion.' Rome had never met a more warlike enemy than the Carthaginians. They had been trained by military service of more than twenty years duration ; they had an active leader of the most spirited temper ; and all the nations of Spain were paying them fibute. The Romans were filled with shame,2 too, at the destruction of their allies. The ruins of Saguntum were a mournful object-lesson to Spain not to 314 LATIN rUOSE COMPOSITION. put any further faith in Rome (use ne). When she had once taken that city under her protection,^ she should have assisted it and not betrayed it to the enemy. All the allies were tired'^ of such friend- ship. »p. 157, c. 2 p. 66, 3. «p. 107, 3. Exercise XII. {Based on IJvy, B. 21^ cc. 16-20 ; review exercise, to be done without the book). Receiving these instructions,^ the venerable ambassadors departed for Carthage.^ No sooner^ had they reached that city than a hearing was .! .in them by the senate, from which they inquired whether* or not Hannibal's attack upon Saguntum had been made with the autho«-ity of the state. " If it was made upon your authority," they said, we must demand satisfaction." To this the following answer was given : "it is our business to punish our own citizens ; the question for you to settle is, whether, in accordance with the treaties between us, the attack was justifiable." The ambassadors returned to Rome, where they found that all preparations^ had been completed for making war with both land and naval forces. ip. 49, lo; 157, c. 2p. 83,4 3p. 102, 4. ^p. 30, 2. Sp. T57, c. Exercise XIII. (Based on Livy, B. 21^ cc 21-2^). At the beginning of spring, therefore, the forces assembled. The rest had been very grateful ; almost all the soldiers had gone to see (44) their friends. It was generally known that the army was likely^ to invade Italy ; but precautions had also to be taken for keeping the enemy from /'\frica and Spain, A fleet was given to Hannibal's brother for the protection of the sea-coast, under the conviction'* that the war would be carried on by both sea and land. Envoys were sent to the Gallic chiefs to ask them to allow* the army to march through their territories, and to say that the Carthaginian was not coming as an enemy, but as a friend ; that he did not wish to draw the sword until* he reached Italy. *p. 54, 3. ^p. 157, c. *p. 16, I. *p. to5, notQ, [Based 1 One me, chic lands (3] not yam is of lon| our towi distributl slavery 1 to attacl you to ti We do r arrive in 'p. 54 {Based It is h youth of by Heav youth, " followed, (deinde). looked b of trees youth wl Italy." luse V On i\ Rome h; EXERCISES ON LIVY. Exercise XIV. 315 [Based en Livy^ B. 21^ cc. 21-23 ; review exercise ^ to he done without the book). One of these ambassadors spoke as follows : — " You have asked me, chieftain, why we wish to lead this large army through your lands (30, I ). I will tell you. We are going to invade Mtaly. We are noX. your enemies ; we are the enemies of Rome.^ Our resentment is of long standing. Rome has tampered with our allies, conquered our towns, placed garrisons and planted colonies in our midst, and distributed our lands among her citizens. We are more afraid of slavery than of war ; and, therefore, we have crossed the mountains to attack our enemy and besiege her cities. We have come to you to treat of peace, and to ask a passage through your territory. We do not wish to begin the war until, with Heaven's good help, we arrive in Italy." ^p. 54, 2. *p. 162, 4. Exercise XV. {Based on Livy^ B. 21^ c. 22; review exercise^ to be done without the book). It is here, according to the tradition,* that he saw in his sleep a youth of angelic beauty (62, 1 ), who announced that he had been sent by Heaven to guide him to Italy. " Fix your eyes on me," said the youth, " and follow." At first (so the story says) he was afraid, and followed, looking neither behind nor aiound. But, after a while (deinde)y when he began to wonder what the marvel could be,'' he looked back and saw a huge serpent moving along amid the crash of trees. A storm-cloud and thunder followed. He asked the youth what it meant (30, 1), and he said, '* It is the devastation of Italy." He was much cheered, the story says, by the vision. *use vb.j p. 138, 4. ^see Ex. IX., i. Exercise XVI. {Based on Livy^ B. 21^ cc. 26-36). On this occasion his words were as follows : — " The senate of Rome has heard, soldiers, that you have crossed the Pyrenees, and t M^- Sl ^ T I 316 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. that you are now about to cross the Alps (53, i). They are filled with wonder and fear, and all is excitement (use trepido) in that city. But, for my part,' I wonder that the same fear should have assailed you. You have conquered all the tribes of Spain ; you have crossed mountains ; you have subdued the might of rivers ; and you have marched here to deliver (44) the world from slavery, and to blot out the name of Rome. Why do you halt before her very gates ? No obstacle'^ is insurmountable to the human race. Men have crossed these mountains before ; why cannot we cross them now .'' We must not yield in valor to the tribes^ we have so often conquered. We have come here to attack the capital of the world j let not fear delay our enterprise (26, 3)." ^ego; p. 87, I. 2p^ 161^ 2. 3p. 8, 2. Exercise XVII. . Turn into indirect narration the speech of Exercise XVI. N.B. — Turn the vocative into the accusative before inf. Exercise XVIII. {Based on Livy, B. 21, cc. JI-J4). Their march often lay through deep valleys or under ridges upon which the brave mountaineers had taken up their position.' These attacked the column in front and rear, both hand to hand and with missiles; they even rolled down rocks upon it from the hills. Again it often lay'^ along defiles with precipices on both sides, from which men and horses and beasts of burden continually fell. The woods, echoing with the discordant shouts of the natives,' increased the confusion and alarm. They had some experience, too, of treachery. One day at dawn some venerable chieftains met them and offered them guides. These were accepted at once. But a number of armed men had been posted on a height that over- hung the road, and there is no doubt that, if the army had not ad- vanced in fighting order, it would have been brought to destruction.* *p. 157, c. 'p. 170, 8. 'use barbari. *p. 22, i ; 140, 3. teXEucisEs ON Livy. 317 filled with that city, 'e assailed ve crossed you have to blot out itcs ? No ve crossed low ? We ronquered. 2t not fear I. [Iges upon These land and the hills. )th sides, lually fell, natives,' perience, tains met at once, hat over- d not ad- truction.* Exercise XIX. [Based on Livy^ B. 21^ cc. Ji-Jf^ ; review exercise^ to be done without the book). Next day at dawn, they decamped and retired further from the sea, advancing in a straight line {recta regione) along the river bank. Though it carries a large volume of water, this river is not navigable; nor does it offer any safety for crossing.^ After a three days' advance,^ they arri\'cd at the mountains. The mountaineers are uncivilized but kind, and they assisted the army with clothes and food. They also offered hostages, and stated that they would guide the column through the defiles. Blind credence'-' was not put in their word, but the general availed himself of the services' of the guides. Rumor usually exaggerates ; but the ice and snow of the mountains were frightful to see. The army was ordered to halt ;* and the camp was pitched in a deep valley. ^p. 48, 6. 2p^ 157^ ^, ^tttor. *p. 16, I. Exercise XX. {Based on Livy^ B. 21 y cc. JSSg). And now the time for the setting* of the Pleiades was near and snow was beginning to fall. Soon the whole route was blocked with it and the advance of the column was extremely slow. Despair appeared on every face. But just'^ here Hannibal showed what an admirable general he was.^ The whole army was exhausted with fighting and the toil of road making (use munio), but they had at last reached the summit, and now Italy was almost in sight. A rest of two days was allowed to recruit, and the camp was pitched upon the top of the ridge. During these two days, he drew up the lines on a height, which commanded a distant view, and pointed out the level plains of Italy, stretching beneath the mountains. "These mountains," he said, "are the ramparts of Italy; when they are once* scaled, the Roman citadel will soon be in our power." In this way he encouraged the soldiers before they left their camp. */.^., their settmg at sunrise ; Oct. 26. *p. 177, 4, note. 'p. 30, I. *p. 106, I, note. 318 LATIN I'UOSE COMPOSITION. Exercise XXI. {Based on Livy, B. 21^ cc. 35-39; rci'icju exercise^ to be done without the book). It is generally agreed that he lost many men in crossing the mountains. There is no doubt' that some were carried off by starvation, some by cold, and many by the sword of the mountaineer. Some writers state that, after he crossed the Rhone and before he arrived in Italy, he lost thirty-six thousand men. There is no agreement, however, among the authorities (157, c) as to what his numerical strength was (use quot; 32), M'hen he descended from the Alps. Some say he had one hundred thousand foot and thirty thousand horse ; and the statement of these writers is more prob- able than that of those who say that he had only twenty thousand foot and six thousand horse. The route, also, by which he crossed the mountains is uncertain. Authorities, who usually have much weight with me, are not worthy to be believed' with regard to this matter. »p. 22, I. 2p. iii,<$y 38, 3. Exercise XXII. {Based 071 Lii'y., B. 21., cc. 40-43). When Rome (162, 4) saw the Carthaginians taking up arms once more against her, she well knew that they were not to be despised. They had conquered Spain and Gaul ; they had made the high- spirited tribes of these lands tributary ; they had crossed lofty mountains and rapid streams ; they had an army which had been huntittg cattle and campaigning for twenty years among the hills of Lusitania ; and they had an illustrious general who was the foster- child, as it were,^ of the camp, to whom not a single soldier in the army was unknown. This dreaded enemy had to be met with an army of recruits, which had been beaten in the field the previous summer. The Roman general was unknown to the army, and the army was unknown to its general. He was, however, a man of high spirit,^ and he advanced with all possible speed ^ to meet the enemy, encouraging his men to fight (16, i) as if they were fighting against their own slaves.* ^P- 173, 5- ^P- 62, I ; p. 190, 4, c. '78, 9, note. *ii7, 3» ^« EXERCISES ON LIVV. 319 ? without ssing the ;d off by intaineer. before he 2re is no what his ded from ind thirty are prob- thousand e crossed ive much rd to this rms once despised, he high- jcd lofty lad been hills of e foster- er in the with an Drevious and the of high enemy, against Exercise XXIII. {Based on Lh>y^ B. 21^ cc, 40-4J ; review exercise^ to be done ivitJwut the book). When the army was in this state of mind, he addressed them as follows : — " You are going to engage (53, i ) an enemy, soldiers, whom you have frequently conc[uered both by sea and land. They are in- deed (quidem) our slaves, and have paid us tribute for twenty years. Fight, therefore, with the feeling that ^ you arc lighting against your slaves. You will say- that we might, ^ had we wished,' have destroyed them by starvation ; by merely taking our fleet to Africa, we might have blotted out both their city and their name. We might, indeed. And would to Heaven^ that we had taken this course, instead of*^ making peace with them and granting them pardon ! Let each of you remember that he is fighting not merely for himself, his wife and his children, but also for his country. You are going to fight before the ramparts of Rome ; and, remember that the ejes of the country will be upon you." ip. 117, %b. 'use quum. 2p. 203,/ 3p, 33^ 5, 4p^ j23j III. ^. Sp. 25. 2. Exercise XXTV. Turn into indirect narration the speech of Exercise XXIV. Exercise XXV. (Based on Livy^ B. 21^ cc. 44-48). With a view to^ encouraging the soldiers, he spoke on this occasion as follows : — " '1 he day of battle, soldie -■, i. approaching, and I see that the enemy will give us an opportunity of meeting them in the field. We shall soon be in sight of their camp. Their allies have been stirred up to revolt, and will fly to arms and desert to us, that their lands may escape devastation.- Spare them in the fight ; we will show no cruelty^ towards those of them* we take prisoners. All the needed (142, 8) supplies have been secured ; we have captured the granary where the Roman general had stored his corn. The general himself has taken up his position beside the stream, where we will soon attack and vanquish him. I now wish to pro- 320 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. claim the rewards in expectation of which you will fight. I will give land, exempt from taxation, to any who wish land ; money, to those who prefer money. To those of our allies who wish to be- come citizens, I will afford the opportunity of becoming citizens." 'p. 12, I. ^p. 12, 2, note. ''p. 157, c. '•p. 8, 2. Exercise XXVI. Turn into indirect narration the speech of Exercise XXV. Exercise XXVII. {Based on Livy^ B. 21^ cc. 44-4S ; review exercise^ to be done without the book). At first neither army saw the other ; but, after a little, a dust arose from the advance of such a large number of men and it was clear to us that the enemy were approaching. Orders were at once given to halt and prepare for battle. Great eagerness for the T was shown in our army. The infantry raised a shout,* as they ad' d in close order upon the enemy. The cavalry had been ordered to make a short detour and show themselves on the enemy's rear ; and no sooner^ had they appeared than the enemy were thrown into con- fusion^ and began to fly. The reserves had fled almost before our shout was raised. These latter retired, in broken order, to their camp, where they told the story^ that the whole army had been cut off. There were some, however, who showed more courage than the reserves* ; and these preferred to find death on the field rather than in flight. Many retired without disorder, and, advancing to the river, loosed the raft with which they had spanned the stream, and crossed in safety. »p. 38, 2. 2p, 102, 4. 3p. 157, c. *p. no, 6. Exercise XXVIIL {Based on Livy, B. 21 ^ cc. 4g-33\ No sooner* was word of Hannibal's arrival'' carried to Rome (use nuntio) than despatches were sent to the other consul in Sicily ordering him to reinforce his colleague at his earliest opportunity. RXKRCMSKS ON LIVY. 321 I will mey, to 11 to be- cns." ucccssful operations • without list arose 5 dear to given to as shown d in close p make a ; and no into con- efore our I, to their n cut oflf. than the ther than ig to the learn, and lome (use lin Sicily }ortunity. had ])ccn earned on in that island even before the consul's arrival. The Carthaj^inians had sent a fleet to ravage the coast of Sicily and the adjacent islands and to stir up their old allies. Hut the fleet was scattered by a storm, and some of the vessels were captured, without opposition,'^ by Kin^ Hiero and towed into port. A second fleet had been i)Ut to flight, with the loss of seven ships, by the praetor iVenilHus, the Roman governor of the province. As the consul sailed into the strait, Kin^ Hiero met him and promised him his su[)port '^ He s.iitl that tlie maritime states were in great danger ; that there were certain i)arties in them who hoped that there would be a j)olitical change. A few days after, they received word of the rout^ of the Carthaginian fleet. There- upon the consul took his departure'^ and joined his colleague. »p. 102,4. =*?. 157, c. 3p. 52, 5. EXERCISK XXIX. {Based on Lh>y, B. 21. cc. 49-53 ; review exercise, to be done without the hook). The admiral (Imperator) had intentionally delayed the advance of the fleet so as to approach the town before daylight. Hut the moon shone all through the night and the fleet, as it approached, was at once seen from the watch-towers. A call to arms was raised' and seamen and marines embarked without delay. The enemy, seeing-' that we were not unprepared, did not hold on his course, but began to clear his ships for action. No sooner^ had day dawned, than we put out against him. The battle did not last long. Seven of his ships were surrounded and taken ; and, perceiving this, the rest turned to flight. Our fleet returned in safety to the harbor. All the marines and seamen taken in the battle were sold as slaves, *p. 38, 2. '^p. 49, 10. ^p. 102, 4. Exercise XXX. {Based on Livy, B. 21^ cc. 49-33). In this battle they had been successful with the very arm (use pars^ with which they had been beaten before. The general was elated accordingly and thought that there should be no further post- 11' i III isii 322 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. ponement or delay/ The day of the elections was approaching and he was afraid that,''^ by postjioning the engagement {ahl. abs.)^ the glory of victory might be turned over to others. "Why are \vc wasting time?" he said; " why must we delay longer? The empire must either be defended with the troops we have^ or there is no hope of defending it at all. We have come here to liberate our country. Why, then, are we standing in inactivity within our lines? The* longer the battle is postponed, the more inactive we shall become. The enemy's camp is pitched on our native soil ; t)ie time for action has come ; let us drive him before us, as our fathers were wont to do." By such short-sighted importunity (use ago),^ he compelled his colleague to order the army to prepare for battle. »p. 45, 4; p. 157, ^. 2p. 17, I. 3p_ 8^ o. 4p_i,8^3^ ^157, <^. ii I Exercise XXXI. {Based on Livy^ />. 22^ cc. i and 2). That spring, he moved his army earlier than usuaP from its winter quarters. The Gaul:^ began to assail him with secret plots,'^ and he had constantly to protect himself against them. They saw that their country had become the seat of the war, and it was not pleasing to them. However, after forming a conspiracy against him,'^ they usually betrayed it ; they are characterized by great fickleness.* These attacks (insidiae), at any rate (certe), were one reason for his moving early. A second reason was the rumor of the arrival (use vb. ; 157, c.) of the consul ixi Arretium.^ ip. 77, 5. ^p. 74, 5- "p. 49, 9; 157, ^. ''p. 62, I. •'^p. 83, 4. Exercise XXXII. {Based on Livy^ B. 22^ cc. i and 2; review exercise^to be done witJiout the book). The march lay (use sum ; 1 70, 8) across a swamp, which the water had completely covered. The guides went first ; then followed the veterans ; then, in the centre, came the (Jauls ; the Numidians marched last and closed the column. No hardship was wanting. 1 .ley could not halt, because tiie mud was so deep. There was no EXERCISES ON LIVY. 323 they J, 4. e water ed the lidians ani.ing. was no dry land on which (i 10, 6) tliey could stretch their weary bodies when seeking r, little repose ; they had to pile (45, 4) the baggage in the water and lie on that ; or else* they had to find a bed on a heap of cattle, many of which had fallen all along the route. Lack of sleep killed many ; this they had to endure for four days j^nd three nights.'^ The chief himself could hardly stand the inclemency of the weather and even lost the r.se of one of his eyes. * omit. ' p. 86, 2. Exercise XXXIII. {Based on Livy^ B. 22^ cc. j and 4). No sooner^ had he cleared the swamp and pitched his camp than he ascertained, through the instrumentality of^ his scouts, all that it was for his advantage to ascertain. It was quite clear that the enemy would not remain inactive, and that they felt it a personal (use suits) dishonor that' the Carthaginians should be roving through Italy, besieging their towns, and wasting their land with fire and sword and all the horrors of war. The enemy's general, he ascertained* was a man of the most spirited temper, and rather prone to precipi- tate action ; and good fortune had fed his natural recklessness with success in war. All this showed cjuite clearly that he would not wait for his colleague, but would order the army to attack^ immediately. 1 p. 102, 4. 2 p. 75, 5, note I. ^ inf. ; p. 4 and 55, i. *p, 138, 4. ^p. 16, I, note. Exercise XXXIV. {Based on Livy^ B. 22^ cc. j and 4; rcvieiv cxcrcise^to be done luitJiout the hook). Reaching^ the lake at sundown, they pitched their camp at the very mouth of the pass, and next day entered the defile. They saw some of the enemy in front of them, but they did not know that others had taken up their position in the rear and over-head ; and that, in fact (use atque ; 201, a) they were completely surrounded. A thick mist from the lake now settled down upon the pass. Between the hills and the lake is a narrow plain, and on this th<»" i line was drawn up ; but before a shout'' arose or a sword was drawn. 324 LATI.V PROSE COMPOSITION. Ui the enemy began to advance in even order upon them. At the same time, figliting began''' on both flanks, where the enemy's horse had taken up their position, ip. 49, lo. 2 p. 38, 2. Exercise XXXV. {Based on Livy^ B. 22^ cc. j and 6). The general, in view of the alarm,^ showed considerable resolu- tion,^ and encouraged the troops to stand their jnd ; but the word of command was drowned by the shouts of j.anic (173, 3 ; 48, 6) ; and so thick was the mist that the eye could not see which way they ought to turn (Ex. IX., note i). Some writers state that an earthquake occurred at the same time as the battle ; but, if it did (use flo), none of the combatants observed it ; such was the din and confusion that the use of both eye and ear were snatched from them. And now the battle had raged fiercely' for three hours, and it was clear that there was no hope of safety. Then their courage failed them, and all turned to flight. Some rushed into the lake and were drowned ; others, swimming back to land, were cut down by the cavalry ; a few made a sally, and cut a path through the enemy with the sword. *p. 118, 6,/. ''use adv. 'p. 38, 2, note. Exercise XXXVI. {Based on Livy^ B. 22., cc. j and 6; review exercise^ to be done wiiJiout iJie book\ His words on this occasion were as follows (use hie) : — " You are shut in, soldiers, on all sides ; on your flank are the lake and the mountain ; in front and rear are the enem)'s lines. But the less fear you have, the less danger there will be (ii**, 5) ; you must win your way out, not by prayers to 1 i eaven, but by strength and courage." After this exhortation, ho put spurs lo his horse, and dashed into the thick of the enemy, wherever'^ he saw his men hard pressed. But it was soon clear that there was no hope of escape. The tide of battle^ turned against him ; and when the sun had dispelled the mist and cleared the sky, it revealed to nuuntain and lake utter ruin and a Roman army cut to pieces upon the plain. *p. 157, c ; p. 49, 8. '^p. 107, 5. ^p. i73i 3 ; use inclino^ EXKRCISICS ON LIVY. 325 Exercise XXXVII. {Based oil Livy, />. 22^ cc. 7-g). Such was the celebrated defeat of Rome' beside Lake Trasumcn- nus. The loss on both sides was enormous, and many died of their wounds after the battle. The Roman prisoners of war were thrown into chains. The Carthaginian dead were buried ; the body of the consul, who had fallen on the field, was carefully sought for by the victors, but it could not be found. Although successful in point of issue, the battle had not been an easy one to win for the enemy. A rest of several days had to be given the soldiers to recruit. They were still exhausted from their march across the swamp. After their rest, they marched straight into Umbria ; and, after laying waste the land, attacked some of its towns. A successful resist- ance^ was offered by them to the victorious Carthaginian, who was thus able to form a guess as to what he had to hope for' from attacking the towns of Italy. ^p. 162, 4. '-^p. 157, c; p. 38, 3. 'see Livy, Exercise IX., i. Exercise XXXVIII. {Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. y-g; review exercise, to be done without the book). When word of the disaster reached Rome, a multitude of men and women rushed tumultuously into the market-place, inqui»'ing of all they met the meaning* of the rumors which had been brought to the city. At first they could get no definite information'^ ; but at last, when they had waited all day long for the news, it was announced that the consul had been killed ; that few of the army survived and that these were either scattered in flight or prisoners of war. The terror was overwhelming ;' no one knew what to hope for or what to fear (24, d). The senate-house was thronged ; and the senate sat for several days from daylight to sunset, considering what was to be done.* After the loss of such an army, there were no forces with which resistance^ could be offered to the victors. ^STiy what were ; p. 30, i, '^ p. 161, i. ^ s-xy very great ; Livy, Ex. 3, 2. * p. 30, I ; p. 45, 4. 5 p. 157, c ; p. 38, 3. \ I i 32G LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. I Exercise XXXIX. {Rased 07i Livy^ B. 22, cc. 10-12). Then, and not till then [fitui demiuti) Rome was taught a lesson by her misfortunes, and she sought out a leader of courage^ firm- ness, and discretion. This was Fabius who was called (appello), because of his sober counsels, "Cunctator." Having brought'^ the political condition of the country before the House, they voted that Fabius was to take such action as seemed to him to be for the advantage of the nation. He said that he would enrol two new legions and that he would appoint a day for a general rendezvous. On the day appointed, the new legions assembled at Tibur.^ Some of these soldiers he sent to act as a garrison* for the city ; with the others he advanced against the enemy. Hannibal at once began to sound his temper and to test his firmness. He wasted the land of the allies^ and burned their dwellings ; then he would suddenly decamp*' and retire from sight or send an envoy to announce'' that he would meet the Romans in the field. ^p. 62, I and 2. ^p. 49,9; use rcspublica. ^ p. 82, 2. *p. 69,8. ^p. 48, 4. '^i))ipf. ind. '^p. 109, 2. Exercise XL. {Based on Livy^ B. 22, cc. 10-12; review exercise, to be done without the book). Meantime a desnatch was brought to Rome stating that certain merchantmen carrying corn to the army in Spain had been captured by the enemy. Without delay, orders were sent to^ the consul to man all the ships in Ostia with seamen and marines and to go at once in pursuit. The order was obeyed ; and a large num- ber of men were put on board the ships, which at once set out in pursuit of the enemy's fleet. They had also orders to protect the coast of Italy. The fleet afforded a fine spectacle as it sailed (navigo) from harbor ; it showed that the state had not yet forgotten to protect^ her armies and to afford complete safety to both citizen and ally. 'p. 157, r. 2 p. 18, 3. EXERCISES ON LIVY. 327 69,8. Exercise XL I. {Based on Livy^ B. 22, cc. ij-ij). He made the following representations (use dicii) to the officers: "The enemy has long^ been laying waste our lovely fields, storming our cities and colonies, and burning our villas. He is now by gifts and promises winning o\cr our allies, sending men to announce'" that they will be under a juster rule'' than ours. Wo can sec him, loefore our eyes, shut in by hills and streams on every si4c, and his cavalry are far off on a foray. Why do we hesitate? Let us engage him before the hor.ie can return (104,8) ; let us cut his army to pieces be- fore they can retreat. Ue must return* by the same pass by which he came ; he has therefore no hope of escape ; we can crush him as he leads the army back over the heights. Let us shake off this yoke from our necks. The war must be brought to an end by courage and action and not by timid prayers and cowardly counsels." ^P- 34, 3- 'P- 109, 2. •''p. -.57, c. \\ 45, 4- Exercise XLII. Turn into indirect narration, after dixit, the speech of Ex. XLL ertain been 1 the s and num- out in t the ivigo) otten itizen Exercise XLIII. {Based on Lh'V^ />'. ^-?, cc. 16-20). Next day at dawn, word was brought that the enemy's fleet was stationed off the mouth of the river, but that the seamen and marines were strolling upon the shore, without any expectation^ either of an enemy or of a battle. Orders were at once given to our fleet to weigh anchor and cruise along the shore towards the river-mouth. No sooner"'^ did the men in the look-outs (169, 3) — these are towers that they are said to use against pirates— see us approaching, than they despatched a horseman with orders that all their men should embark without delay and put to sea. But, whe« word came that our fleet was close at hand, great confusion arose,^ and the marines could hardly seize their arms, go on board and put to sea, before our ships were drawn up in line off the mouth of the river. At thq ! \i 328 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. first onset, two of the enemy's ships were captured and four were sunk. The rest immediately turned to flight, and were beached by their crews. Of these latter we dragj^ed several out to sea. By this battle we got command of the whole coast and secured much booty. »p. 157, cy p. 140, 1. 2p. 102, 4. 3p. 38, 2. Exercise XLIV. {Based on Livy, A 22^ cc. 16-20; review exercise, to be done ivithout the book). And now the road was blocked, and (48, 4 and 7) he saw that he would have to cross the mountains. Before setting out, however, he devised the following ruse. He had in camp a number of oxen, which he had taken from the country people ; these he decided to drive ahead of the column, after tying torches to their horns.^ In the dusk of the evening, he decamped ; and when^ he reached the foot of the hill, the torches fastened to the horns of the oxen were lighted, and the animals diiven up the hills. The whole forest seemed to be in a blaze. When the enemy, who had taken up their position on the top of the hill, saw what seemed to be fire-breathing animals rushing in every direction, at first they were rooted to the spot with astonishment ; then, leaving^ their post, they turned and* fled. And so the whole column was led across the ridge. ^p. 52, 6. 2p. 107, 3. 3p, 49^ 10. *p. 48, 4. Exercise XLV. {Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. 21-2^). In the absence of the dictator,' a battle had been fought, in which, though the loss had been nearly equal on both sides, the Romans had the credit of victory. Hannibal had sent out two-thirds of his forces to forage, under the idea that^ the enemy would not venture to meet him in the field. But the dictator had gone to Rome, and the Roman army was at once marched down by its general from the heights and their camp pitched in the plain. Hannibal threw forward a body of horse to take possession of^ a piece of rising ground that commanded the Roman camp, at the saine time EXKRCISES ON LIVY. 329 ere sunk. by their By this ch booty. e without w that he wever, he of oxen, lecided to )rns.^ In ached the ixen were ole forest n up their breathing ed to the rned and* in which, Romans ds of his venture , and the from the >al threw of rising ■tne time moving* his own camp two miles nearer the enemy. But next day the Romans dislodged the Carthaginian horse, and moved their own camp to the knoll. So Hannibal had to retire^ to his former position, and carry on the war, for a time, in accordance with the tactics of Fabius, with more caution than spirit.^ ^p. 52, 5. ^p. 157, ^. ^p 109,2. *makea co-ord. vb.; 48, 5. ^p. 45, 4. «p. '1% 7- Exercise XL VI. (Based on, Livy, B. 22, cc. 21-24; revkiv exercise, to be done 'without the hook). Two circumstances seemed to enhance the dictator's unpopularity. The first had its origin (use oriorj 32, 1) in the cunning of Hannibal and in the following manner. Word was brought to that illustrious general (187, i, end), when he was spreading devasta- tion in the neighborhood of the city with fire and sword, that the dictator had a farm there. The cunning chief ordered his soldiery to abstain from violence while on this estate. All other dwellings in the vicinity were either burned or levelled to the ground ; but the dictator's barns and other buildings were unharmed. It seemed as if some agreement^ had been arrived at between the two chiefs. The second circumstance was as follows : Money had long been owing by Fabius to Hannibal, for the ransom of some Roman captives. The business had been frequently canvassed in the senate, but the money had not been voted. Fabius had not consulted the House in the matter before the agreement as to the ransom had been made with the enemy ; the senate wanted to show him, accordingly, that he ought to wait for their sanction before taking action in so important an affair. »p. 157,^. Exercise XL VII. \Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. 25-29). All this Hannibal saw with delight. He saw that the bill was carried ; that the command of the dictator had been divided ; and that the command of the master of horse was now equal to that of the dictator's. He knew that, up to this point, reason had ruled in 330 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. I ii the enemy's camp ; and he saw that now recklessness had been set free from prison. At first he could hardly put credence in the report ; but when he saw that the rumor was true, and that there was no obstacle^ now to bar his way,^ he decided at once what steps had to be taken to entrap the rash Roman into an ambuscade. Nothing escaped him. The information^ which he did not get from deserters, he got from his own scouts. Pjctwccn the two hostile camps lay a valley, which, at first sight, seemed useless for laying an ambush : but it really contained rocks and recesses in which five thousand men could lie hid. This valley he selected to carry out (exsequor) the object he had in view. »p. 157, r. ^p. 173, 3. Exercise XLVIII. (Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. 25-29 ; review exercise, to be done without the hook). And now the day was drawing near for submitting the bill to the assembly of the people. The proposal was (it seemed) agreeable to the commons ; but it lacked the support of the better classes, none of whom had sufficient courage to come forward and recommend the measure.^ Of those who had attained to offices of state, one man alone was found who ventured to take such a step. This was a man, Terentius Varro by name, who had been born not merely in a humble station, but positively in a mean one. He had come into notice by declaiming in the forum, and by attacking the reputation of better men than himself. And he fancied that he would now gain favor with the people by advocating such a bold proposal as this. In this he showed no inconsiderable cunning.* ^p. 187, I, end. ^use adj. Exercise XLIX. (Based on Livy, B 22, cc. 29-33). Meanwhile the enemy had wrested a victory from the other consul. The latter had been cruising about the coast of Sardinia and Corsica with a fleet of one hundred and twenty sail, when he 1 been set ice in the that there kvhat steps mbuscade. •t get from wo hostile for laying which five ) carry out ne without bill to the >^reeable to sses, none ecommend e, one man his was a nerely in a come into reputation cl now gain al as this. EXERCISES ON LIVY. 331 the other )f Sardinia 1, when he suddenly formed the resolution (use videor) of making a descent upon Africa. He accordingly crossed over and, disembarking his troops on that continent, began to l)urn and plunder, just as if there were no people in the place.^ No enemy closed with us ; but, when we had scattered and were straggling in every direction, we suddenly fell into an ambuscade and were surrounded. Hearing the shouts of panic and seeing confusion reigning'^ eve ywherc, the admiral (consul) advanced with a few seamen to our relief.'' The enemy at first sounded a retreat; then, facing about,* they drove us back to our ships. The slaughter was considerable, and we lost about a thousand men. »p. 117, 3, ^'- 'P- 173, 3 ; 157, c\ ^p. 69, 8. '•p. 49, 10. Exercise L. {Based on Livy, B. 22, cc. 29-33 ; review exercise, to be doiie without the book). His language^ on that occasion was to the following effect {/fa) : — " We have come here to thank you, comrades, for the help you brought us yesterday; we should like you to know (24, t) that, if we have nothing else, we have grateful hearts. You appeared to us in our bewilderment, as if^ you had dropped from the sky. Consider us worthy to fight once more {riirsus) by your side. Let us learn obedi- ence ; the man who cannot command, should yield obedience to good advice.^ This is what we must school* our hearts to do. Let us join our camp to yours and fight once more under the auspices of your leader. I see that, though our commands are equal, he is my superior both in courage and good fortune. The whole army wishes to thank him for his care and assistance. We will carry on the war hereafter on his tactics." »p. 157, c. ^Y>' 117, 3> f^' ^P- 48, 6. *p. 173, 3. Exercise LI. TMrn into indirect narration the speech of Exercise L. 352 LATIN PROSE COMPOSlTIOlJ. ii EXEIICISE LII. (Based oii Livy, B. :i2, cc. ,1J^-,1S). Then came the elections for the appointing of consuls ; but only one was chosen, a man of plebeian origin, named Tcrcntius V'arro. He had never held the office before, and it was thought by many that such an important magistracy should not be conferred upon a new man.^ The commons, however, had carried the day and he was ap- pointed consul, at a crisis when a man of courage and vigor seemed to be called for. The senate induced Aemilius Paulus, after a long and vigorous opposition on his part, to become a candidate for the rerraining consulate. All the other candidates retired, and he was elected. Being (use qiium ; io6, 2) antagonistic to the com- mons, it seemed likely '^ that he would offer no small opposition * to Varro. 'p. 45, 4. »p. 53, I ; 55. 5, note. 'p. 157, c. EXEllCISE LIII. (Based on Idvy^ B. 22^ cc. 34-38 ; review exercise^ to he done without the houk). It was on this occasion that the king received a vote of thanks from the senate. He had felt bitterly the defeat of his allies, and wished to assist them by any means in his power. Accordingly, he sent his fleet to Ostia to carry wheat and barley to Rome. With it was an envoy who was to say to the senate that the king was still their firm and faithful ally, and to beg that they would accept his gifts. He said that, while his kingdom had anything at all, his allies should never want supplies. He added that he felt more admiration for them in adversity than in prosperity ; that, though an armed enemy had his home in the very vitals of the country, Rome had carried on the war with the greatest courage, and had fought, if not always with success, at least with spirit. The answer of the senate was as follows :— " Your conduct has afforded us the greatest pleasure.^ Your offer of support (use quod and polliceor), if in the public interest, we will accept ; we thank you in the name of both the senate and commons of this country." *use adj. EXEIICISES ON LIVY. ddd It only one 'ario. He many that pon a new le was ap- or seemed fter a long ite for the J, and he I the com- (sition* to ne without of thanks lilies, and iingly, he With it was still ccept his it all, his "elt more , though country, and had e answer d us the olliceor), he nanie Exercise LIV. {Baml on Livy, B. 23, cc. 30-42). When Hannibal saw what had happened,' he was filled (use officio) with joy. He saw that one of the consuls was mad. He knew that the plan used by Fabius was the only one for carrying on the war ; that, by sitting still, the Romans would conquer him, because he had no money and no supplies. But now he knew that Fortune would soon give the mad consul into his hands. In the first engagement between them, the Carthaginian loss was greater than that of the Romans. The latter were victorious and would have followed'^ the Carthaginians to their camp, if Paulus had not offered opposition^ to such a course.* Varro was indignant, exclaiming : — " Why are you letting them slip from your hands ? The war can be brought to a close if you do not hang back." *p. 30, I. '^p. 123, \\\., b. ^p. 157, <:. *omit, as implied ; words not strictly necessary to the sense are omitted in Latin ; 187, i,end. Exercise LV. (Based on Livyy B. 22^ cc. 39-42 ; review ed(x.rcise^ to he done without the hook). At break of day, word was brought* to the Roman host that the enemy had abandoned his camp, leaving {co-ord. vb. ) all the tents standing. The soldiery at once ordered an advance.' " Let us go in pursuit," they said ; " let us see what plunder there is to be got in this camp." Paulus kept exclaiming that they ought"^ to exercise caution and foresight ; and he threw forward a squadron of horse to reconnoitre. They saw the tents standing open, and gold and silver thrown carelessly aKing the streets of the camp. But they were certain that it was the enemy's intention to surprise and attack the Roman army while engaged in plundering the camp. They brought back word to this effect^ to the army. *p. 157,^. '^p 45» 4^ 'adv.; notice the frequent use of such nouns in Eng. : Cf. in spite of {tamen\ in consequence of {pb)^ in return for {pro\ in accordance with {ex^ secundum)^ &c. 334 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. EXERCISES ON CICERO. Exercise I. {Hased on Cicero, Pro Murcna^ §§ i-6). Gentlemen of the jury.'' Before I begin the defence* of my client," I will say a few words in my own. The prosecution have found fault with me for undertaking this case. They charge that it is inconsist- ent with''' strict morality, that it is inconsistent in one who was him- self the author of a measure deaHng witli bribery and corruption at elections (ambitus), to undertake the defence of any man charged with that very crime. This criticism — I do not deny it* — affects me deeply; and. at the request of my friends, I will try to justify to you the reasonalileness^ of my course and show that it is quite consistent with the claims of duty. In the first place, who ought most naturally to undertake the defence of the first magistrate of the country but the man who has just been first magistrate himself.'' In the second place, as to my h.iving passed a law dealing with bribery, why should that prevent me from undertaking this defence; If I defended bribery and corrujjtion," I should be guilty of wrong- doing ; but I deny that any offence has been committed in contravention of the law, and I pray that your judgment, gentlemen, may coincide with mine. »p. 157,^. «p. 88, 4. 3p. 59, 2. -tp. 138, 4. * 32, I. «p. 123, III. Exercise II. {Based on Cicero, Pro Miircna^ %^ 1-6; revirm e .:rciii^ io be done ivithoiit the book). Insight into events transpiring in the e and fores 1^ at with regard to the future, are two necessary qualuu tier ^ ' of the highest statesmanship.'' And I certainly do not think that any man without such qualifications'* should be invested with the highest office m the gift of the people. A statesman ought also to possess practised ability in public speaking, not only that he may defend himself against the attacks of his enemies, but also that he may recommend his policy to the country. Again it is of the utmost consequence to* r client," I II nd fault nconsist- was him- uption at charged ffects me fy to you :on si stent Ljht most te of the himself? ling with defence ; )f wrong- ittcd in ntlcmen, 123, III. ^'e done .at with highest without e m the ractised himself )mmend ence to* KXKUrtSKS ON CICKRO. 335 the peace, trancpiilHty, and safely of the state that he should j^uide his course in accordance with the |)rececK'nts e^tal)Hshctl by our fathers. On the other hand, he would he guilty of misconduct/' if he did not weigh carefully even the smallest claims of duty, and dis- charge the functions of his office in accordance w ith the strictest morality and the strongest religious sanctions. *p. 59, 2. 2p. 162, 3. 3p, 16,^ 2. *p. 66, 4. ^p. 157, c. EXKRCISK III. {lidscd on CiccrOf Pro Miircna^ §>5 7-J^)' This is the reason, gentlemen, why I am engaged in the defence of my client (use idcirco quod). In the first place, he is my friend ; and it would argue ^ the greatest lack of principle to be unfaithful to a friend. lUit I would defend him, even if he were a perfect stranger to me. I am not a free man in this matter. As a reward for my activity as an advocate, I have received the highest office in the state. I cannot therefore refuse to bestow my labor freely in defending anyone whose life is in peril. To refuse to do so would be the height of in- gratitude' The members of the prosecution are also my friends, and I shall not forget it; I will pay in full the debt due to their friendship for me. But I understand they feel annoyance- because I have undertaken this defence and they charge me with having for- gotten my relation to them. With regard to that matter, this is the view I hold : 3 No one is bound to refuse, at the request of one friend, to defend the life of an other. I cannot think that they could be so unjust as to demand it. But if they do, they ought not to ob- tain their request.* ip. 59, 2. 2p. 66, 3. 3p. 1 57^ c. .each the rendezvous (say the point lie is jnarcJnnirfor) in time. He engages the enemy and often fights hand to hand, lie repels hostile attacks and j)revcnts {cavco tie) the capture^ of our cities. It is he who extends our frontiers, compels universal obedience to our rule,' and w ins imper- ishable glory for the empire. All other arts nestle in safety imder the aegis of the art of war ; can anyone doubt then that this art will confer dignity and honor upon a commander who is engaged in carrying on ;in important war? Are you not laboring under a 338 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. PI f mistake when you assert that inihtary distinction will harm rather than assist a pohtical candidate? This nation, ;it all events, has always considered its great soldiers as every way worthy of the highest offices in its gift. 'P- 157, c. Exercise VIII. {Based on Cicero^ Pro Murenn, %% 19-23 ; retnciv exercise^ to be 'hne without tJie booJS). The lawyer's life, gentlemen, is a hard one. He sits up late; but he is wakened at cock-crow. His whole day is full of incessant labor. He gives advice to those who come to consult him ; he gives written opinions to others ; he is eternally laying actions, or in some other way serving the interest of his client. In short, he is at the beck and call of everybody, has to put up with their folly and in- solence, and pocket their ill-humor. If the professions and pur- suits that are calculated to gain popular favor are to be compared, then the law will be found to be superior to many others. A man, who is always ready to serve others, keeps his merits before the public eye. Surely that is a great advantage.^ If the lawyer were long away from the courts,'^ you have no idea how it would injure him ; he must, there- fore, make his home in them ; this is the only way that he can become known. »p. 157, <:. 2p. ,23, II. ' Exercise IX. {Based on Cicero^ Pro Afurena, cc. 11 -13). This is the reason, gentlemen, why the orn tor's faculty takes precedence^ of that of the lawyer, as regards the attainment of (ad) office. This is the reason why the orator is so much admired. Many in consequence wish to become oratois ; but, failing in their endeavors, come down to the legal profession. Many, after long practice, make but little proficiency in public speaking ; very few have reached eminence in it — so difficult is eloquence of attain- ment. What dignity and influence it carries with it ! It is directed to swaying the minds of juries, to confirming or overturning the decrees of senates and nations, to quelling the incendiarism (furor) of EXERCISES ON CICERO. 339 demagogues, to guiding angry mobs, to stemming the tide'' of cor- ruption, and to instituting salutary regulations by law. Is it to be wondered at that so many men of genius should consider the culti- vation of oratory a great achievement ? ip. 157, c, •''p. 173, 3. Exercise X. {Based on Cicero^ Pro iMurena, a: 11-13 ; review exercise^ to be done loitlunit the book). Law is a paltry science chiefly concerned with trifles like single letters and punctuation marks. It was admired in the past on this account, namely, because the days on which actions could be brought were a secret' known to very few. When that mystery was divulged, the science sank at once into contempt. It is full of prolix formulas and absurd forms of words, altogether devoid of common sf^nse and put together with this object by the lawyers, namely, that the science might not be accessible to all, but that they themselves might have a finger'^ in every lawsuit. It has abandoned the spirit of equity and clings to the letter, and it is based on fictions invented by the mind of man.' 'p. 32, I. 2p. ^-j.^ 3. 3p_ 165, i^b. Exercise XI. {Based on Cieero^ Pro Aliirena, cc. 14-16). Is my client to be condemned, gentlemen, because he is a soldier.-* You and I hold a very difl"crent opinion.' We maintain that the profession of arms is a most honorable and a most useful one, and not in any respect deserving of ridicule. To it, to say nothing else, this country owes its pre-eminence among the nations (use on account of wJiicJi and a vb.), and our cities their freedom from the dangers of storm and siege. In time of war all other professions and pursuits sink into insignificance in comparison (use prae). We send out our greatest men to conduct wars against other nations and the records of ancient history assure us that our generals have often been elected to the first offices in the state — so high is the estimate which the country sets upon its soldiers. But my client is not only a soldier, he is a good soldier ; "t 340 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. and on many a hard-fought field his courage, his activity, and his discretion have been a shining marl-:. He has defeated hostile fleets, crushed armies, defended your provinces and aihes, and extended the resources and military strength of the country. Con- sider the distinction and achievements of your great commanders, and do not forget tliat it is our present object to defend a man of the same character as they, ^p. 157, c. Exercise XII. {Based on Cicero ^ Pro Murcna^ cc. jy-20). But what considerations,* gentlemen, do weigh with the people at an election? Wiiat cjualilicaiions are of advantage to a seeker after ofifice in his candidature? Men of rank and men of ability have often been beaten in the competition when there was no possibility (use possum; 1 1 1, t:., note) of discovering the reason for such a result. lUit, in the first place, a candidate who is to head the poll must h-.ve people's good word and good will, and these he must secure by good nature, justice, and honesty. Let him, therefore, be at the ser\ice of his friends; let him con- ciliate kindness, and avoid shocking the feelings of anyone. In the second place, he must have influence. Many men prefer a candidate who has influence to one who has none ; and for one who affects (dice) to despise this, the enthusiasm of friends is very apt to be impaired. In the next place, generosity is a great aid towards gaining office. The populace take great delight^ in the display of munificence, and nothing is more pleasing to them and more in- fluential than credit for this kind of thing. ip. 161, 2. 2p. 1-7, c. EXERCISK XIII. {Based 0)1 Cicero, Pro Murena, cc. 11-20 j review exercise, to be done ivithont the boo/:). What a difference there is in the destinies of men ! One man Fortune permits (sino) to li\ e in the midst of pleasure ; on another she imposes the severest labors. One man owes to chance ability, wisdom, rank, good fortune ; his country gives him an EXERCISKS ON CICERO. 341 opportunity of showing his integrity, good nature, and generosity ; and he is raised by the enthusiasm of admiring friends to the high- est positions in the country. Another man owes nothing to chance, and Fortune always seems to be opposed to him. He has no hick, no abihty, no rank, no influence, nothing, in short, in which people take deUght and by which they are specially attracted. Can anyone wonder then that their countrymen should refuse to give such men a place of honor at an election ? done man lother ftiance 111 ar) Exercise XIV. {Based on Cicero, Pro Murena, cc. 2J-2^). To this is added the fact that my able friend does not know how to run an election ; this I have frequently remarked in his own hearing.^ It often indeed (enimvero) happens that a candidate shows both courage and magnanimity and yet shocks the kindly feelings of friends and supporters and gives an advantage' to his op- ponent. If men see a candidate down-hearted and dejected, if they see that he has lost hope of his own success, their ardor is damped' and they vote for some one else. And this was the mistake that my friend here made;* he simply met dissatisfaction and defeat half-way. Turning aside^ from his canvass, he began to collect evi- dence against his opponent, threatening (Caes. Ex. 40, 2) to prosecute him for bribery. He showed in this way that he had lost confidence in himself and in his friends. The consequence was that (quare) some of the latter transferred their aid and influence to his opponent, and others reserved themselves for the trial. I know myself by experience the difficulty of contesting an election and^ I have learned that to damp the enthusiasm of friends is simply to block the path of success. , *p. 52, 5. 2p. 157, c. 'p. 173, 3- "P- 161, I. ^p. 49, lo- *P- 48, 4. Exercise XV. {Based on Cicero, Pro Murena, cc. 21-24: review exercise, to be done ivitJiout tJie book). What we ought to ask for is a law against bribery ; and there is po possibility^ of the House refusing' our demand, unlg^s'^ they wish 342 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. to pill u weapon against ihcniselvcs into the hands of their enemies. All loyal men' slioukl feel indignant to think that this evil is a standing (use semper) menace to the country, and should lend us their zealous offices in driving it forth from amongst us. I have shown that no one man is equal to the work of carrying any law ; let all then unite in repelling this common danger, and give us a (is) law v/hich* will check arrogance and crime. Let its provisions be of the strictest and the penalty nothing less than banishment. You say that it will cause commotion^ among the poor. No matter (use (if). My conclusion is^ that bribery is jiaving the way to calamity and that, unless we apply the axe to the root of {omif) the evil, madness and discord and secret hatred will soon be stalking (versoi') in our midst. ^P- ^5» 5' '^P' ^20,3. ^optitmis guisqiie. *p. no, 5, ^p. 157, ut time lo be not Exercise XXI. {liascd on Cicero^ Pro Miircna^ <^<^- 35-37\ Gentlemen of the jur)% — It is of the utmost consequence' to the country that public offices should be awarded upon the ground of merit alone. I loudly protest-' that it is not right, that it is most immoral, that men's minds should be influenced or cajoled in this matter by money, pleasure, or any other consideration. Why, in short, should a candidate canvass anyone for his support? Should he not rathei' wait until he receives an invitation from the people to take the helm of state and to place liimself in authority over them } It is no slight task that he is undertaking. Me is engaging to do work and encounter peril for the public good ; his thoughts will have to be on the administration of the government night and day ; and he will luive to face strong opposition, countermine the plots of the disloyal, and keep the country safe from danger. 'p. 66, 4. '^p. 166, c. Exercise XXII. {Based on Cicero, Pro Alurcna, cc. jS-41). Exalted political station' is exposed to almost universal envy,^ though why it should be so I fail to see ; it ought rather to excite universal- commiseration.^ Dangers threaten it on every side It is at tlic mercy of the cabals of treason, the secret machinations of conspiracy, and the fire and sword of the public enemy. The madness of the demago, ue stalks in the senate-house and the market-place, seeking to shake the government to its foundations. Those, therefore, who hold the helm of state, though seemingly* the favorites of Fortune, have no light task to perform. In the interests of peace and domestic tranquility, they must make war upon the public enemy abroad and upon the enemy of order at home ; they jnuvSt defend the country from the evils that are continually breaking 346 LATIN IMIOSE COMPOSITION. forth, and they must safcj^uarcl the H\es and property of the citi/cns. (lod j^ranl thai'' our worthy niaj^istrates niuy be no less fortunate both \h arms ;ind in a civil capacity ! *p. 162, 3. "^use a//, 'p. 66, 3. *p. 166, fl. ^25, 2. Exercise XXIII. (Based on Cicrro, l^hilippic /, cc. i and 2). And I am surprised, that his subsequent conduct should have shown such strange' inconsistency with so noble a beginning. From that day to this, he has admitted to his councils none but blackguards and traitors. Not a single act of public administration (use respublica) has been submitted to this House — and that, too, though he published a notice demanding our attendance.'' After giving the country, by the abolition'-' of despotism, a solemn pledge that he desired its freedom,'^ he has, by means of the popular assembly, usurped absolute power for himself. He is now offering incentives'" to runaway slaves to menace the safety of this city and declaring that he will bring to nothing the authority of this House. ^omit adj. as implied ; 187, i, end. '^p. 157, c. Exercise XXIV. {Based on Cicero^ Philippic /, cc. i and 2 j review exercise., to be done ivitlumt the book). To the other chief of the executive I intend to move a vote of thanks in the most complimentary terms at my command, and I ask the House to support the motion and pass it without discussion. I will explain briefly the secret of my enthusiasm (use cur and an adj.). He has always consulted the good of the country and the interests of this House. Like a sentry at his post (173, 5) he has stood with his eye fixed upon the public administration. How noble has been his language, how elevated his sentiments ! (use voluntas) Thanks to him (say tJiroiigJi hii/i) we have been delivered from the dangers that menaced us. The disloyal have been punished ; civil strife has been appeased — an evil which was beginning to creep in among us and was spreading further and further every day ; the foundations of future peace, in short, have been well laid, and the yoke of slavery has been dashed from our necks. EXERCISES ON ClfEllO. 347 ;y of the )e no less ould have Dcginning. none but inistration that, too, icc.'^ After mn pledge e popular w ofifcring is city and his House. %isc^ to be a vote of nd, and I iscussion. ur and an and the has stood noble has voluntas) from the led ; civil o creep in day ; the i, and the EXKIUISK X.W. i^Bascd on Cicero^ /'/ii///>pic 7, cc. j and 4). Those gentlemen, sir,' added certain inventions^ of their own to lend an agreeable flavor' to their news; but it was from them that I first learned the tenor of the magistrate's public address, the read- ing of which* gave me great satisfaction, as it showed everyindication of moderation. There were many dangers threatening, he explained (dice; n"^, 4) ; but he was not much alarmed. An untlerstanding would be arrived at ; he would guarantee that. He was buoyed up by a consciousness of his own devotion to the country and hoped to gain credit for himself and to reconmiend his course of action^ to all. With regard to the political situation, he said little, 'i'here would be a meeting of the House on the tst and he hoped that there would be a full attendance. His intention was to repudiate all his evil coun- sellors and submit himself once more to your authority. He hoped to receive a general" support. ^\.\s& patfrs conscript i. -p. iCi, i, re I. *5use all. 'P- ^IZ^ 3. ^P- 5o» 14- *use Exercise XXVI. (Based on Cicero^ Philippic /, cc. P> and 4; revie7o exercise^ to be done 'id/ /tout ihe book). On the 1st of August he arrived at Ihundisium and from there crossed over to Syracuse in Sicily, to which city he made a very rapid passage.^ Will it be matter for surprise if his stay there lasted longer than one night.'' What possible motive- could he have had for immediate (use statini) departure t I he city was bound to him by the closest possible ties, and the townsmen would have protested had he dreamt'- of leaving; lie was staying at the house of an intimate friend who esteemed him highly on i)ublic grounds ; he was waiting for a fair wind and, in any case, had he set out, he would have been driven back to the point of embarkation.* Was he afraid that his remaining there might have given rise to suspicion .'* Or that he would not be able to return to Rome in time to offer his congratulations* to the country ? »p. 157,^:. 'p. 173, 3. 348 LATfN PRO«»E COM POSIT f ON. ?:XKkCISK XWII. {lidscii on Cicero^ riulippic /, cc. j and 6). If I had been in this IIousc wlicn the question of peace was inidcr consideration, I should have endcavoreil (conor) to maintain the dignity of the country and to show myself woiiliy of the many honorable cUstinctions I have received at the liands of the people. " Do you wish, gentlemen" I sh<)uld have said),'' " to be suspected of cowardice and to he untrue to your high position.-* What j)ossible motive can the magistrate liave for brini^ing t'lis matter before so thin a House .-^ This peat e is not necessar\ ; it simply means voluntary servitude. Would to Heaven' we had men here like the famous Appius who -history tells us''— in spite of blindneis and old age was carried down to the debate on the peace with Pyrrhus {nsc quum ; io8, 6). He could not have been induced to support a motion which would have brought upon the country not only war but pestilence and famine as well. Such a motion I, for my part (use c,i^o)^ will never support, not even if it were introduced by the man who first delivered this country from the despotism of kings." ip. 25, 2. 2p. 138, 4. Sp ,,^^ I, ■ Exercise XXVIII. {Based on Cicero^ Philippic /, cc. j and 6 ; reincw exercise, to be done 7vithout the hook). I knew, sir, that the question of appointing a solemn thanks- giving would be brought before you ; but, as I was tired after my journey and in ill-humor besides, I did not attend the meeting of senate. Attendance, indeed, on such occasions is almost optional, as the House is usually full. Further, I had no intention of speak- ing on the subject ; I would, not unwillingly, have supported the mover of so excellent a motion. In any case {certc), I was not the only member absent. Why, then, was I summoned in such in- temperate language by the first magistrate to attend yesterday's meeting? Why had he the audacity' to say in your hearing^ that he would send public employees to tear down my residence, a residence erected at the expense of the state .-* No misdemeanor cace w.is luaintain [he many e people. ,pccti'(l of t possible before so y means e like the s and old I Pyrrhus ) support not only I , for my Kluced by potism of EXEUCI8KS ON CICERO. ,M9 :ise, to be thanks- after my leeting of optional, of speak- »rtcd the s not the such in- sterday's |ng"^ that Idence, a lemeanor can possibly merit treatment like this, and I regret very much that such severity could have received the sanction of your approval {wAii ptoi)o). It was not to enable him to trample upon'' the con- stitution that the people raised this man to the summit of greatness. May Heaven forgive him ! »p. 157, f. 2 p. 52^4. 3p ,^3^ 3 EXFiRCISK XXIX. (liaxcd on Cicero^ Philippic /, cc. 7 and S). At a mistake, sir, of this kind \ can connive ; but I will not submit to the abrogation of the most salutary law of the ablest statesman we ever had. The law limiting our colonial governor- ships to two years, was an excellent one ; his judicature act is even more useful and necessary, and must not be interfered with or changed. It was submitted to the people in the popular assembly and — as the expression of the people's will — was engraved on brass. A property qualification was required, you say (use at cnim). No doubt {at ; 203,/). Hut it met with universal' approbation,'^ not- withstanding. And, surely, in such an important matter, account should be taken not only of a man's position, but also of his property. To whom by the new law is the bench thrown open ? To common soldiers. And why? I wish the first magistrate were here himself to inform us. Is he not calling such persons to the bench in the hope that they will not dare to give an impartial verdict T^ What an insulting distinction ! But I think he will find that he has made a mistake, and that, in proportion to a man's apparent meanness, will be his strict impartiality in pronouncing judgment.' ^use all. M 57, r. ^118, 5. Exercise XXX. {Based on Cicero^ Philippic /, cc. 7 and 8 ; review exercise^ to be done without the book). He made many promises^ in his life-time and conferred even more favors than he made promises. However^ un- just or useless a promise seemed, he always kept it, entering it in his note-book in order to rcmeinbo' it (Caes., ex. 40, 2). 350 LATIN PROSK COMPOSITION. m 111 The more iinporiiniato n suppliant was, the more kindly and i^ladly lie listrned to him. Money he never nade account of ; and would to Heaven all he spent were still in the treasury ! It was no doubt'' the price of blood ; but. now that he is dead, it nii.i(ht be restored to its rightful owners,* or, in a crisis like this, it would have been useful to tiie country. In a civil capacity, he enacted many useful measures, and proposed many salutary laws, the abrogation'' of which now would endanger the constitution. The express wishes of the people, he never treated with contempt, and he always endeavored to obtain for his measures the general" sanction. For my own part, I think, and am free to affirm, that even in the palmy days of the country's history, none of our states- men ever earned greater distinction (use adj.) ^p. i6i, I. '^p. 1(5, II. ■''p. 89, 7. *ri'/. 5p. 50, I.;, ^nso. all. 1« *Ji EXEI<'OISK XXXI. {Based cm Ciccn^ PJdlippic /, cc. g and 10). It is the duty,' sir, of eveiy true friend of his country to point out rocks ahead^ that may be avoided. Wcare not as yet committed in the matter ; but the passing of this law will be tantamount to the rescinding of all laws, for it abrogates ihe laws on which the very constitution is built''' — laws which are the glory of this country. In whose interest,'^ therefore, is it that such a law should remain upon the statute-book.^ The interest of the factionist and the dis- loyal. Under it, prosecution for high treason will be simply an impossibility.* Allowing, as it does,'' an appeal to *he people, it renders nugatory the statute which niakes banishment the penalty of conviction for treason. Allowing an appeal to the people, it holds out to persons already convicted in a court of law of using violence, an inducement to have recourse to the same \iolence which they ha\c already been found guilty of using. No jury will ever venture, by hnding a verdict of guilty, to expose itself to fury of a hired mob. This law then is intended as a machine for making" our young men bad and factious citizens. 'p. 59, 2. '^p. 173, 3- •■'P- 66, 4. *p. 15, 5. -'p. 177, 4, note. ** 173, 3 ; use id a'^itur ut. EXKRCISES OV CrOKUO. 351 kiiuily account in the lat be is •isis like apacity, .ly laws, r>n. The apt, and ^^eneraF' rm, that r states- se <«//. to point mniittcd lount to ch the country, remain the dis- nply an cople, it penalty 'oplc, it f using iolence Vo jury itself to luie for 4, note. Exercise XXXII. (Based on Cicero, Philippic /, cc. g and lo; revic:;) exercise, to be done without the book). There is perfect unanimity' in the public mind as to what the public safety recjuires. No one approves of these measures; still, the opinion' is universal that in the interest of peace and concord they ought to be maintained. We have, however, at least the right to remonstrate, and I do seriously deprecate such abuses, (jood laws have been abrogateu ''r invalidated ; the privilege of citizenship has been conferred without the authority of the senate ; state revenue has been lost by the granting of endless exi'm|)tions ; the veto has been disregarded ; the religious safeguards of the constitution set aside. N ou will say that these institutions are the follies of a by-gone age. Not so {iit) The very existence of the country is bound up with them. If our magistrates are honest ; if they will shield the country by the veto and the religious safe- guards that we have received from our ancestors, we may rest in trancjuility. 'p. 157,6-. Exercise XXXIII. {Based on Cicero, Philifpir /, cc. ii-/j.) Would to Heaven' that you had taken for )our model'' in this iiKiitf your worthy grandfather I Do you think that he would have ured arms within the city limits, e\ en in self-defence? A man of ?he loftiest aims,'' his chief desire was -not unlawUd authority, not lucre, not intluence achieved by violent means it was the respect and affection of his countrymen. >.'() day dawnetl that did not liiul him conferring some gift upon his country ; and he rea[)ed the reward of right action when all classes high and low, rich and poor -crowded to congratulate and thank him for his distinguished public services. Do you think that he would have resigned su( h an honorable jiosition for money or unlawful authority? Tlureforel can not pass unnoticed the mistake you are making. \'ou know by experience what the love and respect of your fellow-citizens means, but you seem to be tired of* this distinction. No one can say, how- ever, that he has ever seen any meanness or baseness'' in your .3;)2 LATIN T'ROSE COMPOSITIOKt. \^ :il character, and the country declares itself ready to forget the acts which have given offence and to lay aside all feeling of indignation (dolor.) She asks you to cease from hostilities against her , and, using <.i.ich language,'^ ought she not to obtain her request ? *p. 25, 2. '^p. 157, tr. •''p. 161, I. * p. 66, 3. ^p. 160, I, . Exercise XXXIV. {Based on Cicero^ Philippic /, cc. ti-tj ; ^rview exercise^ to be done without the book). You know by experience^ how great the satisfaction of right action is. You have received the thanks of parliament for distinguished public service. Are you already tired of such distinction? Can you lay it down with equanimity .'' Would to Heaven you would recall that day on which, by giving your son as a hostage for peace, you cleared your country from an overwhelming dread {wa^ gr ::'*^\ Can you have forgotten it .'' Can you prefer all these latter montus, to that one day? If anyone were to f;uicy that you were now happy, his opinion would differ very much from mine. No one can be happy without the affection of his countrymen. Some say that you have an eye for money, which great men have always despised in proportion to their greatness. But I know that this is an error. Show, then, that, though you have not been able to avoid the suspicion of this crime, you can at all events keep clear of the guilt of it. '157,^. Exercise XXXV. {Based on Cicero^ Philippic /, cc. 14 and if). What I am afraid of, is this. I am afraid that you may fancy abso- lute power to be a great and glorious thing, even if combined* with universal detestation (use ita...ut \\\i.^ 7, a). But what an odious thing to be the object of universal hatred ! Would to Heaven, then, you would change your course and administer the government in sucn a way as to commend yourself to your countrymen ! They would not, then, grieve to think that you had ever been bom. You can not be happy. No one can be happy who does not advance his country'-s interests. You have had a unanimous verdict from th^ EXRRCISKS OV CICERO. 353 people. Can you not divine its meaning? But if you believe tliat this is of small weight —though it is of the greatest, — lend an atten- tive ear to my testimony : 1 would not accept immortality itself on condition of being an object of apprehension- to my country. If you think that the solicitude of the loyal with regard to your course of life has some significance, listen to my words. If not, then no words can accomplish anything or weigh with you one jot. * say on this conditioti to be hated by all, that you alone .nay hwoe power, ^p. 157, i^. Exercise XXXVI. (Based on Cicero^ Philippic I, cc. 14 and /j,- review exercise^ to be done ivithout the book). Though he despised the applause so often bestowed upon dema- gogues, he was not ignorant of the path that leads to true distinc- tion. True glory and happiness, in his opinion, while implying precedence in point of honour, implied also equality in point of liberty. His life consisted of disinterested public service, and he reaped his reward in the respect and affection of his country. On this point the testimony of his countrymen is unanimous. Other statesmen have been esteemed, other statesmen have been honored, but he is enshrined in the nation's heart. Statues and popular ballrds will long keep his memory green, M^ut we shall not easily find consolation^ for our grief at the death of our great liberator, ' f73» 3 ; use vie mini '157, c. abso- ■^ with tdious I then, vsW. in I They You :e his In tb3 Exercise XXXVII. (Based on Cicero, Philippic IT, cc. i-j). With public issues' to discuss, sir, it required no great self-con.rol on that occasion to refrain from personality and abuse. Had I in- deed chosen to take the opposite course,'^ what theme could have been more fruitful ? My controversy was with a traitor who had won credit among Capud^ men of his own rank for overturning the constitution ; who had passed laws for his own advantage ; who in his private life had declared war upon modesty and good name ; I' i; tt 364 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. I who, in short (denique), had treated with contempt^ the exalted station in which he had been placed ])y iiis country and this honor- able House. I preferred, however, to take a different course. I preferred to recollect and acknowled^^e that he had once been under my instruction ; that he had once called himself my friend, and that I had once accepted kindness at his hands. ^ use rcspudh'ca. ^p. 157, ^. Exercise XXXVIII. (Based on Cicero^ rJiilippic IT, cc. 1-4; review exercise^ to be done without the book). Has distinguished public service^ ever received anything but abuse from treason and disloyalty {use ecquis). What is the end and object {idcircfl) of all these attacks of our enemies but to make in- terest with men of their own stamp and obtain a passport" to the hearts of the mob ? Nothing else, certainly. During the last score of years it has been my fortune to encounter many of the enemies of the country. Such a result^ — in view of the high position in which I have been placed by this House — was inevitable. Could I refrain from attacking those whom I s.^w attempting the subxersion* of the constitution? If I had, I should never have reaped such an abun- dant harvest of glory as I have. Whenever'* I saw a traitor, I attacked him without hesitation {ul/ro). 'p. 162, 3. ^ p. 173, 3. ^ p. 161, I. * p. 157, 3' ''•'i^y <-('l I things ivcrc held by fear. ^ i6i, i. ^vb. all ite to t the nder Exercise XLIX. {Based on Cieero, Philippie II, ee. 2j-2g). He claims, sir, that he has now become a virtuous and respectable citizen. He pretends {dicttfo)i\yA\. this is a just claim ; that' he has ceased owing money, that he has given up revelling and heapin:^ up losses at the gambling-table. What assurance I How men will laugh ! Is it consistent with strict morality to make presents of money to actors .^ to pass pernicious laws .'' to take up arms against one's country.-* What position in the party or in the country can he exi)ect to have for achievements like these? As I live, I pity the party, I pity the country to which he belongs. As (quod) to his having ceased to owe money, you know that by the destruction'^ of many nobles of distinction, he has become suddenly rich Ikit > ou also know that " ill got is ill spent," and that Charybdis itself could not engulf the sea with as much speed {adv.) as he will run through and devour this ill-acquired property. ip. 129, 8. 2p_ 1^7^ ^_ Exercise L. (Based on Cicero, Philippic II, cc. J0-J2). This policy, sir— desirous as I was (177, 4, note) of being of service to the country — I criticised at length. I said that no state official with any sense of honor would ever ha\e surrendered one of oui" colonies to the public enemy. If^ our first magistrate 3G0 LATIN IMIOSK COMPOSITION. had endorsed such a proposal, lie had no knowledge of the duty of a I'lrsi magistrate ; if he had made any such surrender, he had gone much further than he was justified in going. As to his solemn assertion''* that the people were prepared to make the sur- render, we should at any rate have been consulted before^ any action had been taken by the government in the matter. In claim- ing the ability to forecast our policy,* they have usurped one of our most sacred prerogatives. The country no doubt {at cniui \ 203, _/) was poor and loaded with debt. Does that justify her in surrend- ering her colonies and selling her honor (honor) ? No nation would show so base a spirit. " Seek, then," I said, " re- conciliation with us ; order the colony to be recovered ; and do not let our children's children weep to hear that our country has received such a wound at the hands of one of her citizens." ^P- i35» 3> ^- ■'P- 99) ^^- ^P' '05, note. *say what we would have done; p. 140, 3. , EXERCISK LI. {Based on Cicero, Philippic II, cc. JJ-JS- ) Mark now, sir, the extent' of his presumption. He approached the platform with a crown, which he had brought from home, in his hand; and, holding it out to the people, he began a harangue. He said that that was a golden^ day for our country which would see a dia- dem placed upon the brows of her most distinguished and loyal citizen. He hoped that his enemies would not attempt to disturb the peace ; but if they did, he would know what course to take. He was not planning a crime or an impiety ; he knew what the people would submit to and what they would not. What he was proposing was a monarchy, not an absolute despotism ; this was the mandate he had received from his countrymen . Let them not fancy that he wished to do away with the law ; he wished rather to strengthen it. If kings had been banished because they had aimed at the enslave- ment^ of the country, kings might be reinstated in order to prove its deliverance.' Jp. 32, 1. "-^p. 173, 3- '"^<^- EXEllCISKS ON CIC'EUO. 301 duty of he had ; to his the sur- )re^ any n chiim- le of our 1 203,/) surrend- i nation d, "re- d do not received e would ched the lis hand; He said e a dia- nd loyal disturb :e. He people oposing idate he that he then it. ^nslave- irove its Exercise LH. {Based on Ciccyo, riiilippic IT^ cc. 36-38). Sir — Provided that the House does not icf|uiro a defence of the member's acts at our hands, I feel tiiat this matter is no particular concern of mine. We have been asked lately to defend a good many things which a scrupulous man would peihaps decline to de- fend ; but no one can successfully urge such a retiuest as this which is now made, without' the destruction'^ of government. Laws have been passed without our consent ; taxes, direct and indirect, have been remitted both to individuals and to whole nations ; citizenship has been sold for money ; exemptions have been granted to disloyal provinces, and exiles have been restored by force of arms. I do not wish to bear hardly upon any man's misfortune ; but, if such acts are to stand, nothing can save the country from shipwreck. Again. Where is the million of moncy^that was lying in the treasury? Has it been restored to its rightful owners .''* By no means. It has been given to abandoned and disloyal men." This House, sir, in my opinion, must soon (brevi) consider what it is going to do in the premises (say as to Hie matter). With wisdom'' at the helm of state, unjust favors may be withdrawn, our losses may be recouped, and our empire once more firmly established. *use qiiini^^, 22, 4.) "^vb. ^p. 151, c. *rel. cl.; p. 159, k. ^p. 162, 3. Exercise LIH. {Based 071 Cicero., PJiilippic II., cc. jg-41). In the interest of peace, an investigation^ into the whole matter was ordered to be made by the magistrate with the help of a parlia- mentary committee. Many members were cited to appear before them, and many others were consulted by letter. No language can adequately describe the vehemence (use vehementer) with which all attacked the dead senator. Not one of his measures, they said,'' ought to be ratified by parliament. He had sullied the glory of his high office. On his ciuthority, lands producing a revenue to the state htid been sold ; he had settled in our colonies his own in- famous boon companions ; he had seized the estates and holdings of his neighbors. Was it not within the knowledge of all, that he 9u e>. .v', ^,"^^ >- „o. \>.f IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) LJ ! 1.0 I.I 1.25 >^|M 12.5 |5o '■^" lllllHi »i° ISii III 2.2 :^ li£ IIIIIM 1.8 1.4 1.6 V] <^ /2 01 em 9. ■*,»-' ^;; »>/ ■> V /A Photograpnic Sdences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 873-4S03 # 3()2 LATIN I'ROSK COMPOSITION. had hatassed the free towns, profaned our holy religion, and in- flicted the deepest wounds upon the country ? If they declared that the acts of such a man were valid, no one would be safe. Let them (they begged) restore the country its rights (iiuUrcct ; \ 21). »p. 157, c. «p. 13S, 4. Exercise LIV. {Based 071 Cicero^ Philippic II, cc. 42-44). It is within the knowledge of all, sir, that during the absence of his colleague* — an absence which he did not feel in the least — he rescinded some of that colleague's most important acts, and that too with the intention either of putting money in his own pocket, or else of violently disturbing the public peace. He passed laws ; he rendered laws null and void. Statues and paintings, left as a legacy to the nation, be carried off before our very eyes to his own house. He is convinced that, through force of habit, we have grown callous to such enormities, and that the fear of violence is universally felt. Would to Heaven that the country would at last avenge her own cau«?e ! Let her recall her defenders who, in the interest of peace, have thought it their duty to withdraw from among us ; and let her remember that there is a wide gulf^ fixed between peace and slavery. 'p. 52, 4- 'P- 173, 3- Exercise LV. {Based on Cicero, Philippic II; rcvic^u exercise^ to be done without the boolc). He imagined, sir, that in this way he would best recommend himself to men of his own stamp.' lie thought that, by declaring war upon me, he would show himself not only my enemy but his country's ; that by attacking me, he would secure a passport' for him- self to the hearts of the disloyal. But what charge did he bring against me.^ In the first place, that I was guilty of ingratitude.* This, I consider a most grave accusation and I will answer it first. In what was I ungrateful.'' After accepting kmdness at his hands, I opposed his candidature. What was the kmdness? His giving me my life when he might have taken it away. But if that EXERCISES ON CICERO. 305 ntliout imend :laring ^iit his \x him- bring litude.* Ivver it at Ills His If that had been a kindness, our glorious liberators would not have earned the distinction they have earned. For did they not take away his life from a tyrant who had given them their own ? Exercise LVI. {Based on Cicero^ Pro Milone^ cc. i and 2). Therefore, gentlemen, I solemnly beseech you,^ lay aside your fears. You have often declared by word and look that you are devoted to the public interest, that you sympathize with the loyal party; to-day, by your* acts and ballots, make your sentiments clearer than the light. From the day that the prisoner at the bar was first induced to enter the political arena, he has always been distinguished for noble public service. In comparison with your safety, he regards the loudest clamors of your enemies as dust in the balance ;'^ he has therefore earned consideration at your hands. Decide, then, whether he shall still suffer under the oppression' of villainy,* or whether he shall to-day, through your instrumentality,^ awaken to a new life.- Do not be disturbed, I pray you, by the unwonted appearance of the forum ; the troops stationed there are not intended to intimidate, they arc intended simply to protect. 1 38, 4. 2p. ,73, 3. 3^,^, 4p, ,62, 3. 5p, 75^ •p. 1 65, c; p. note I, Exercise LVI I. {Based on Cicero^ Pro Milofic, cc. i and 2; review exercise^ to be done untliotit the book). You have been selected, gentlemen, from the three honorable orders of the state, to sit in judgment upon a worthy and loyal citizen, and there are some who wish to terrorize jou, and to dictate to you what your finding shall be.^ Hut I want to give you this warning :^ Of all those who sympathize with the party of order' there is not one but feels that the question at issue* to-day in this court concerns, not himself and his children alone, but the safety of the country as well. Do not think that it is consistent with^ wisdom or justice to arm an angry mob officially with power to decide with regard to the disfranchisement (salits) of anyone — not to say, of one who has 364 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. already been distinguished for ])atriotism and devotion to the loyal cause. I urge you, then, \o sit in judgment uj)on the case your- selves, and to bring in a verdict (vb.) that will be a credit to you and not a disgrace. ^use t'udico. ^vb.\ i6i, I. ^boni. *vb.\ 161,2. ^59,2. Exercise LVIII. (Based on Cicero^ Pro Mil one ^ cc. 3-3). The employment* of force, gentlemen, by citizens of the same country against each -other is impossible^ without serious conse- quences resulting to the state ; and the endorsation' of such a pro- ceeding by any of you will be a most perilous step. Everybody knows that — simply* in order to prevent people from avenging their own wrongs instead'' of seeking legal redress — our laws refuse to sanction the carrying of concealed weapons. But further : any one who takes the life of a fellow-citizen, even in self-defence, is, with us at least, almost universally" regarded as guilty of crime. I do not doubt there are some countries — call them free, if you will (sane) — which hold out the sword to their citizens to use against each other. But such states, if there are such, pay no light penalty, and are never wholly exempt from danger. Do not forget' that the voice of the law is not heard amid the din of arms ; that if men are accorded permission to repel force with force, force will often be employed; and, lastly, that your own lives will be exposed to treachery and violence which you will be powerless to suppress. *p. 50, 14. '^p. 22, 4. 'use probo. *p. 177, 4, note. *p. 108,6, note. *use all, 'p. 26, 3. Exercise LIX. {Based on Cicero j Pro Milone, cc. 3-5 ; review exercise^ to be done ivithout the book). Remember, too, gentlemen, how often your enemies have found fault with me. Owing to my services to the country, I have some slight personal influence, I believe,* in the House and in the courts of law ; and I have always employed it — and always shall employ it — in the defence of members of the loyal party. This the dis- EXRRCISES ON CICERO. 365 loyal can never forget, and they would have crushed me long ago by force of arms (165, /y), if they could have put mo out of the way' with impunity. They assert that no one should be allowed to live who has such a preponderating influence in the country that the government in its decrees simply registers his views.' Such are tlie treasonable and invidious utterances* made by these men every day. »p. 138, 4. 'p. I73> 3- 'P- 32» I- *P- 161, I. Exercise LX. (Based on Cicero^ Pro Milone^ cc. 6-8). He was always one who afforded convincing proofs of patriotism, honor, and a sense of justice. As a juror in the courts of law, he showed great moral courage ; and, when moving motions before the people, he showed utter fearlessness in the expression of his sentiments.' He held strongly to the conviction' that it was the duty of the leading men of the country to set themselves in opposition' to the rashness and fickleness of the mob ; and, therefore, his political career associated him closely* with the loyal party, with wiiich he always posse sed the greatest influence. It was his belief that, unless the mad extravagances of radical politicians (use tribunus) could be checked, the country would be ruined ; and certainly no words can express the measure of his contempt (use quam and vb^'^ for a demagogue. Still he was never known to take any step' in the interest of his supporters,* as against the general advantage. *p. 32, I. '^say illitd enim sibi persuasum habuit ; p. 89, 8. 'p. Exercise LXI. {Based on Cicero., Pro Mi I one., cc. 6-S ; rei'ieiv exerase^ to be done without the book). High and low, parliament and people, deplore his death, and amid the general regret, all are incensed with indignation to think that he should have perished by treachery and violence without reaching the natural limit of his life. His name will often be upon men's lips. Posterity will mention him as a man of profound, nay 36(5 LATIV IMIOSK COMPOSITION. almost prophetic insight, of striking; (say ///^//y p. 173,3) >noral earnestness and the finest culture. In these respects, indeed, he will challenge' conijiarison'* with our greatest men. They will recall the roads and other public nionunu-nts he built for the service (use tttor) of the people and they will wish -if it were only possible — that he had becMi immortal. The distinguished and the obscure are alike liable to death ;' but what i difference there is in the worthiness of their lives ! 'P* •73» 3; iJse digniis qui ; p. 1 1 1, ^. "^t'erb. ^p. 45, 4. Exercise LXII. {Hascd on Cicero^ Pro Milone^ cc. g-12). Human nature is so constituted' that niankind are never drawn to the commission of crime without some expectation of gain (139, i). Lend me your attention, therefore, gentlemen, and I will indicate briefly the advantages'' which this unprincipled villain would have derived from my client's death. If you have a clear conception (use plane)^ of these, you will acjjuit the defendant of the criminal charge and not bring in a different verdict' from what all loyal men would wish. There is really no other question than this before the court, no other matter demanding from you (p 45, 4) investigation and settlement* The thought occurred to him, then, that he would have -if my client were put out of the way— the power to hold office for a full year, that he would have a free hand to develop the mad schemes' which he had already in his mind, and thiit he would be able to submit to the people and impose upon the country, with y">ur connivance if not with your support,* those wonderful laws of his, every one of which, he boasted, was of hie own invent'on.^ *p. 170, 8. ''161, I. 'p. 157, c. *]). 52, 5. 'use vb. Exercise LXII I. {Based on Cicero, Pro Milone, cc. 13-16). You will ask, gentlemen of the jury, the reasons' for his banishment. In the first place, his enemies were exasperated against him, and, wishing to punish him, they wreaked their cruelty'^ upon him in that ) moral leed, he liey will for the ere only and the there is EXERCISES ON CICERO. 367 irawn to (139, I). indicate uld have ition (use il charge zn would 10 court, tion and e would to hold develop I th;;t he pon the * those IS of hii6 ishment. im, and, in that way. It would have been in the interest' of the countr>', if our intercession had prevailed and if they had allowed him to remain ; but, wholly unmoved by our prayers and his own distinguished public service, they thrust him forth from his home and country. In the second place, the day of the election was at hand, the day of competition for the highest office in the gift of the people. And there were those who had the audacity^ to assert that, if my friend here were elected, a revolution was impending ; ond that he would be elected, in spite of this opposition, unless he was expelled from the country. "Free your country from danger" (they said to the mob); " avenge your wrongs ; as long as this wretch lives in the place, you will be crushed to the earth by his mad schemes." {t'mft'r.) >p. 32, I. 2p. 157,^. »p. 66, 4. Exercise LXIV. {Based on Cicero^ Pro Milone^ cc. 17-20). You must now consider, gentlemen, if the story hangs together which you have heard from the witnesses who have given evidence upon this point. After doing this, you will be able the better to determine which of the two parties really was the aggressor (use prius). The facts always speak for themselves and usually carry more weight than anything else. But, fi> st, what was this state- ment?* My client (they said) had originally no intention of returning' to the city within a week. In spite of this, he suddenly changed his plans and returned immediate y. Why (they asked) did he take this step ? Why did he set odt for the city by night and in so much haste? Why? Because he had ascertained, in the interval, that his enemy was coming back ; because he wished to skulk in the neighborhood of the city until the unfortunate man approached and then cut him down. In short, the accused, if he had not had malicious thoughts in his heart,' would never have returned that night to the city at all.* Such was their statement ; let us now examine its consistency.* *p. 157, <^. 'p. 54, 2. » p. 177, 4, note. *u5e consto.